Download ZyXEL Communications Food Warmer vantage access User's Manual

Vantage Access
Auto Configuration Server
User’s Guide
Version 3.0
12/2008
Edition 1
www.zyxel.com
About This User's Guide
About This User's Guide
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for people who want to remotely manage multiple ZyXEL compatible
devices using Vantage Access. You should have at least a basic knowledge of TCP/IP
networking concepts and topology, network administration and ZyXEL compatible device
features.
Related Documentation
• Quick Start Guide
The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away. It contains
information on installing Vantage Access, initial setup and ZyXEL compatible device
registration.
• Web Configurator Online Help
Embedded web help for descriptions of individual screens and supplementary
information.
• Supporting Disc
Refer to the included CD for support documents.
• ZyXEL Web Site
Please refer to www.zyxel.com for additional support documentation and product
certifications.
User Guide Feedback
Help us help you. Send all User Guide-related comments, questions or suggestions for
improvement to the following address, or use e-mail instead. Thank you!
The Technical Writing Team,
ZyXEL Communications Corp.,
6 Innovation Road II,
Science-Based Industrial Park,
Hsinchu, 300, Taiwan.
E-mail: [email protected]
Vantage Access User’s Guide
3
Document Conventions
Document Conventions
Warnings and Notes
These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User’s Guide.
1
"
Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device.
Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may
need to configure or helpful tips) or recommendations.
Syntax Conventions
• The Vantage Access Central Network Management may be referred to as the “Vantage
Access”, the “Vantage Access server” or the “system” in this User’s Guide.
• A managed TR-069/TR-104 compliant device may be referred to as the “managed device”
or, simply, as the “device” in this User’s Guide.
• Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font.
• A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text, for example, [ENTER]
means the “enter” or “return” key on your keyboard.
• “Enter” means for you to type one or more characters and then press the [ENTER] key.
“Select” or “choose” means for you to use one of the predefined choices.
• A right angle bracket ( > ) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For example,
Maintenance > Log > Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation
panel, then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen.
• Units of measurement may denote the “metric” value or the “scientific” value. For
example, “k” for kilo may denote “1000” or “1024”, “M” for mega may denote “1000000”
or “1048576” and so on.
• “e.g.,” is a shorthand for “for instance”, and “i.e.,” means “that is” or “in other words”.
4
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Document Conventions
Icons Used in Figures
Figures in this User’s Guide may use the following generic icons. The Vantage Access icon is
not an exact representation of your device.
Computer
Notebook computer
Server
DSLAM
Firewall
Telephone
Switch
Router
Vantage Access User’s Guide
5
Document Conventions
6
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Contents Overview
Contents Overview
Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 49
Introducing Vantage Access ...................................................................................................... 51
Installation ................................................................................................................................. 53
The Web Configurator ............................................................................................................... 75
Initial Setup ................................................................................................................................ 93
Provision Manager ................................................................................................................. 99
Device Status ........................................................................................................................... 101
Task Monitor ............................................................................................................................ 107
Device History Logs ................................................................................................................ 109
Device Manipulation .................................................................................................................113
Template Management .............................................................................................................119
Data Model Management ........................................................................................................ 127
Device Provisioning ................................................................................................................. 129
Short Cut ................................................................................................................................. 137
Internet Gateway Device 1.0 (TR-069) ................................................................................ 139
General Device Setup ............................................................................................................. 141
LAN Device .............................................................................................................................. 153
WAN Device ............................................................................................................................ 171
Internet Gateway Device 1.1 (TR-098) ................................................................................ 197
General Device Setup ............................................................................................................. 199
LAN Device .............................................................................................................................. 229
WAN Device ............................................................................................................................ 247
Internet Gateway Device 1.2 (TR-098 Amendment 1) ....................................................... 275
General Device Setup ............................................................................................................. 277
LAN Device .............................................................................................................................. 309
WAN Device ............................................................................................................................ 327
Voice Service 1.0 (TR-104) .................................................................................................. 355
Voice Service ........................................................................................................................... 357
STB 1.0 (TR-135) .................................................................................................................. 403
STB Service ............................................................................................................................. 405
Vantage Access User’s Guide
7
Contents Overview
Device 1.0 (TR-106) .............................................................................................................. 471
General Device Setup ............................................................................................................. 473
LAN .......................................................................................................................................... 481
Device 1.1 (TR-106 Amendment 1) ..................................................................................... 487
General Device Setup ............................................................................................................. 489
LAN .......................................................................................................................................... 497
File Manager ......................................................................................................................... 505
Device Firmware Maintenance ................................................................................................ 507
Vendor Configuration File ........................................................................................................ 513
System Manager .................................................................................................................. 523
Account Management .............................................................................................................. 525
Download Server ..................................................................................................................... 533
System Maintenance ............................................................................................................... 535
License .................................................................................................................................... 539
System Setting ........................................................................................................................ 543
Monitor Manager .................................................................................................................. 545
Log Management ..................................................................................................................... 547
Alert Setting ............................................................................................................................. 555
Diagnostics and Call Center ............................................................................................... 561
Diagnostic Manager ................................................................................................................. 563
Call Center ............................................................................................................................... 571
Troubleshooting, Appendices and Index ........................................................................... 575
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................... 577
8
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
About This User's Guide .......................................................................................................... 3
Document Conventions............................................................................................................ 4
Contents Overview ................................................................................................................... 7
Table of Contents...................................................................................................................... 9
List of Figures ......................................................................................................................... 27
List of Tables........................................................................................................................... 41
Part I: Introduction................................................................................. 49
Chapter 1
Introducing Vantage Access.................................................................................................. 51
1.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 51
1.2 Key Features ....................................................................................................................... 52
Chapter 2
Installation ............................................................................................................................... 53
2.1 Installation Overview ........................................................................................................... 53
2.1.1 Installation Method ..................................................................................................... 53
2.1.2 Minimum System Requirements ................................................................................ 53
2.2 Preparing to Install ............................................................................................................... 54
2.3 Installation Using the Wizard Screens ................................................................................. 54
2.3.1 Installing Vantage Access DB ................................................................................... 54
2.3.2 Installing Vantage Access BED ................................................................................. 56
2.3.3 Installing Vantage Access HTTPD ............................................................................ 57
2.4 Installation Using Text-based Line Commands .................................................................... 59
2.4.1 Installing Vantage Access DB ................................................................................... 59
2.4.2 Installing Vantage Access BED .................................................................................. 62
2.4.3 Installing Vantage Access HTTPD ............................................................................. 65
2.5 Starting Vantage Access ...................................................................................................... 69
2.6 Stopping Vantage Access .................................................................................................... 70
2.7 Uninstalling Vantage Access ............................................................................................... 71
2.7.1 Using Commands ....................................................................................................... 71
2.7.2 Using the Wizard Screens .......................................................................................... 72
Vantage Access User’s Guide
9
Table of Contents
Chapter 3
The Web Configurator ............................................................................................................ 75
3.1 Web Browser Requirements ................................................................................................ 75
3.2 Login Accounts .................................................................................................................... 75
3.3 Accessing the Web Configurator ......................................................................................... 75
3.4 Reinstall Existing License on Vantage Access .................................................................... 77
3.5 The Dashboard Screen ....................................................................................................... 79
3.6 Vantage Access Web Configurator Overview ..................................................................... 80
3.7 Control Panel ....................................................................................................................... 81
3.8 Device Window .................................................................................................................... 82
3.8.1 Topology ..................................................................................................................... 82
3.8.2 Device Search ............................................................................................................ 85
3.8.3 Device List ................................................................................................................. 86
3.8.4 Right-click Menu ......................................................................................................... 89
3.9 Navigation Panel ................................................................................................................. 90
3.10 About Vantage Access ....................................................................................................... 91
Chapter 4
Initial Setup.............................................................................................................................. 93
4.1 Specifying a Download Server ............................................................................................ 93
4.2 Registering a Device ........................................................................................................... 94
4.2.1 Editing an XML File .................................................................................................... 94
4.2.2 Editing a CSV File ...................................................................................................... 95
4.2.3 Importing Devices ...................................................................................................... 95
4.2.4 Device Setup for Registration .................................................................................... 96
Part II: Provision Manager..................................................................... 99
Chapter 5
Device Status ........................................................................................................................ 101
5.1 Viewing Device Status ....................................................................................................... 101
5.1.1 The Device Status > Subscriber Screen .................................................................. 104
Chapter 6
Task Monitor.......................................................................................................................... 107
6.1 Task Monitor Overview ..................................................................................................... 107
Chapter 7
Device History Logs ............................................................................................................ 109
7.1 History Device Log Overview ............................................................................................ 109
7.1.1 Exporting Logs ......................................................................................................... 109
10
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Table of Contents
7.2 Viewing Device Logs ..........................................................................................................110
7.2.1 The Change Columns Screen ...................................................................................111
Chapter 8
Device Manipulation ............................................................................................................. 113
8.1 The Import Device Screen ..................................................................................................113
8.1.1 Import Device Overview ............................................................................................113
8.1.2 Importing One Device ...............................................................................................113
8.1.3 Importing Devices Using XML or CSV File ...............................................................114
8.1.4 Importing Devices with Consecutive Serial Numbers ...............................................114
8.1.5 Verifying Device Import/Registration .........................................................................115
8.1.6 Device Setup for Registration ...................................................................................115
8.2 Renaming Devices .............................................................................................................116
8.2.1 Renaming a Single Device ........................................................................................116
8.2.2 Renaming Multiple Devices .......................................................................................116
Chapter 9
Template Management ......................................................................................................... 119
9.1 Device Template Management Overview ..........................................................................119
9.2 Managing a Template .........................................................................................................119
9.2.1 Importing a Template ................................................................................................ 120
9.3 Editing a Template ............................................................................................................ 121
9.3.1 Adding a New Parameter ........................................................................................ 122
9.3.2 Modifying a Parameter Value .................................................................................. 123
9.4 Template Creation ............................................................................................................. 123
9.4.1 Selecting Parameters and Creating a Template ....................................................... 123
9.5 Loading a Template ........................................................................................................... 125
Chapter 10
Data Model Management...................................................................................................... 127
10.1 Managing a Data Model (Root) ........................................................................................ 127
10.1.1 The Import Data Model Screen .............................................................................. 128
Chapter 11
Device Provisioning.............................................................................................................. 129
11.1 Device Provision Overview .............................................................................................. 129
11.2 Device Provision .............................................................................................................. 129
11.2.1 Provisioning Unregistered Devices ........................................................................ 129
11.2.2 Provisioning Registered Devices ............................................................................ 130
11.2.3 Data Model ............................................................................................................. 130
11.2.4 Configuring CPE Methods ...................................................................................... 132
11.2.5 Profile ..................................................................................................................... 134
11.3 Device Configuration Update Request ............................................................................. 135
Vantage Access User’s Guide
11
Table of Contents
Chapter 12
Short Cut................................................................................................................................ 137
12.1 Short Cut Overview ......................................................................................................... 137
12.1.1 Managing Short Cuts ............................................................................................. 137
12.1.2 Add a Short Cut ...................................................................................................... 138
Part III: Internet Gateway Device 1.0 (TR-069)................................... 139
Chapter 13
General Device Setup ...........................................................................................................141
13.1 Internet Gateway Device ................................................................................................ 141
13.2 Device Information .......................................................................................................... 141
13.3 Device Configuration ....................................................................................................... 143
13.4 Vendor Configuration File ............................................................................................... 143
13.4.1 Vendor Configuration File Details .......................................................................... 144
13.5 Management Server ....................................................................................................... 144
13.6 Time ................................................................................................................................. 146
13.7 User Interface .................................................................................................................. 147
13.8 Layer3 Forwarding ........................................................................................................... 149
13.8.1 Forwarding Table ................................................................................................... 149
13.8.2 Forwarding Table Details ....................................................................................... 149
13.9 LAN Configuration Security ............................................................................................ 151
13.10 IP Ping Diagnostics ....................................................................................................... 151
Chapter 14
LAN Device ............................................................................................................................ 153
14.1 LAN Device Screen ........................................................................................................ 153
14.1.1 Detailed LAN Device Information .......................................................................... 153
14.2 LAN Host Configuration Management ............................................................................. 154
14.2.1 IP Interface ............................................................................................................ 156
14.2.2 IP Interface Details ................................................................................................ 156
14.3 LAN Ethernet Interface ................................................................................................... 157
14.3.1 LAN Ethernet Interface Details .............................................................................. 157
14.3.2 Ethernet Interface Stats .......................................................................................... 158
14.4 LAN USB Interface ......................................................................................................... 159
14.4.1 LAN USB Interface Details .................................................................................... 159
14.4.2 USB Interface Stats ................................................................................................ 160
14.5 WLAN Configuration ....................................................................................................... 161
14.5.1 WLAN Configuration Details .................................................................................. 161
14.6 WLAN Association List ................................................................................................... 165
14.6.1 WLAN Association List Details .............................................................................. 165
12
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Table of Contents
14.7 WEP Key ........................................................................................................................ 166
14.7.1 WEP Key Details ................................................................................................... 166
14.8 Pre-shared Key ............................................................................................................... 167
14.8.1 Pre-shared Key Details ......................................................................................... 167
14.9 LAN Hosts ....................................................................................................................... 168
14.9.1 LAN Host Table ..................................................................................................... 168
14.9.2 LAN Host Table Details ......................................................................................... 169
Chapter 15
WAN Device ........................................................................................................................... 171
15.1 WAN Device Screen Overview ........................................................................................ 171
15.1.1 WAN Device Details .............................................................................................. 171
15.2 WAN Common Interface Configuration .......................................................................... 172
15.2.1 Connection ............................................................................................................ 173
15.2.2 Connection Setup .................................................................................................. 173
15.3 WAN DSL Interface Configuration ................................................................................... 173
15.3.1 WAN DSL Line Stats ............................................................................................. 175
15.3.2 WAN DSL Line Statistics Details ........................................................................... 176
15.4 WAN Ethernet Interface Configuration ........................................................................... 177
15.4.1 WAN Ethernet Statistics ........................................................................................ 178
15.5 WAN DSL Connection Management ............................................................................... 178
15.6 WAN DSL Connection Service Information ..................................................................... 179
15.6.1 WAN DSL Connection Service Setup ................................................................... 179
15.7 WAN DSL Diagnostics ..................................................................................................... 180
15.8 WAN Connection Device ................................................................................................. 181
15.9 WAN Connection Device Details .................................................................................... 181
15.9.1 WAN DSL Link Configuration ................................................................................ 182
15.10 WAN ATM F5 Loopback Diagnostics ............................................................................. 184
15.11 WAN Ethernet Link Configuration ................................................................................. 185
15.12 WAN POTS Link Configuration ..................................................................................... 185
15.13 WAN IP Connection ...................................................................................................... 186
15.13.1 WAN IP Connection Details ................................................................................. 187
15.13.2 Port Mapping Table ............................................................................................. 188
15.13.3 Port Mapping Table Details .................................................................................. 189
15.13.4 WAN IP Connection Statistics .............................................................................. 190
15.14 WAN PPP Connection .................................................................................................. 191
15.14.1 WAN PPP Connection Details ............................................................................. 191
15.14.2 Port Mapping Table ............................................................................................. 194
15.14.3 Port Mapping Table Details .................................................................................. 194
15.14.4 WAN PPP Connection Statistics .......................................................................... 195
Part IV: Internet Gateway Device 1.1 (TR-098)................................... 197
Vantage Access User’s Guide
13
Table of Contents
Chapter 16
General Device Setup ...........................................................................................................199
16.1 Internet Gateway Device ................................................................................................ 199
16.2 Device Information .......................................................................................................... 199
16.3 Device Configuration ....................................................................................................... 201
16.4 Vendor Configuration File ............................................................................................... 201
16.4.1 Vendor Configuration File Details .......................................................................... 202
16.5 Management Server ....................................................................................................... 202
16.6 Time ................................................................................................................................. 204
16.7 User Interface .................................................................................................................. 205
16.8 Layer3 Forwarding ........................................................................................................... 206
16.8.1 Layer3 Forwarding Table ....................................................................................... 207
16.8.2 Layer3 Forwarding Table Details ........................................................................... 207
16.9 Layer2 Bridging ............................................................................................................... 209
16.9.1 Bridging Table ....................................................................................................... 209
16.9.2 Bridging Table Details ............................................................................................ 210
16.9.3 Filter Table .............................................................................................................. 210
16.9.4 Filter Table Details .................................................................................................. 210
16.9.5 Marking Table ......................................................................................................... 212
16.9.6 Marking Table Details ............................................................................................. 213
16.9.7 Available Interface Table ........................................................................................ 214
16.9.8 Available Interface Table Details ............................................................................ 214
16.10 Queue Management ...................................................................................................... 214
16.10.1 Queue Classification ............................................................................................ 216
16.10.2 Queue Classification Details ................................................................................ 216
16.10.3 Application Queue ................................................................................................ 220
16.10.4 Application Queue Details .................................................................................... 220
16.10.5 Queue Flow .......................................................................................................... 221
16.10.6 Queue Flow Details .............................................................................................. 222
16.10.7 Queue Policer ...................................................................................................... 223
16.10.8 Queue Policer Details .......................................................................................... 223
16.10.9 Queue .................................................................................................................. 224
16.10.10 Queue Details .................................................................................................... 224
16.11 LAN Configuration Security ........................................................................................... 225
16.12 IP Ping Diagnostics ....................................................................................................... 226
Chapter 17
LAN Device ............................................................................................................................ 229
17.1 LAN Device Screen ........................................................................................................ 229
17.1.1 Detailed LAN Device Information .......................................................................... 229
17.2 LAN Host Configuration Management ............................................................................. 230
17.2.1 IP Interface ............................................................................................................ 232
17.2.2 IP Interface Details ................................................................................................ 232
14
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Table of Contents
17.3 LAN Ethernet Interface ................................................................................................... 233
17.3.1 LAN Ethernet Interface Details .............................................................................. 233
17.3.2 Ethernet Interface Statistics ................................................................................... 234
17.4 LAN USB Interface ......................................................................................................... 235
17.4.1 LAN USB Interface Details .................................................................................... 235
17.4.2 USB Interface Statistics .......................................................................................... 236
17.5 WLAN Configuration ....................................................................................................... 237
17.5.1 WLAN Configuration Details .................................................................................. 237
17.6 WLAN Association List ................................................................................................... 241
17.6.1 WLAN Association List Details .............................................................................. 241
17.7 WEP Key ........................................................................................................................ 242
17.7.1 WEP Key Details ................................................................................................... 242
17.8 Pre-shared Key ............................................................................................................... 243
17.8.1 Pre-shared Key Details ......................................................................................... 243
17.9 LAN Hosts ....................................................................................................................... 244
17.9.1 LAN Host Table ..................................................................................................... 244
17.9.2 LAN Host Table Details ......................................................................................... 245
Chapter 18
WAN Device ........................................................................................................................... 247
18.1 WAN Device Screen Overview ........................................................................................ 247
18.1.1 WAN Device Details .............................................................................................. 247
18.2 WAN Common Interface Configuration .......................................................................... 248
18.2.1 Connection ............................................................................................................ 249
18.2.2 Connection Setup .................................................................................................. 249
18.3 WAN DSL Interface Configuration ................................................................................... 249
18.3.1 WAN DSL Line Statistics ....................................................................................... 251
18.3.2 WAN DSL Line Statistics Details ........................................................................... 252
18.4 WAN Ethernet Interface Configuration ........................................................................... 253
18.4.1 WAN Ethernet Statistics ........................................................................................ 253
18.5 WAN DSL Connection Management ............................................................................... 254
18.6 WAN DSL Connection Service Information ..................................................................... 255
18.6.1 WAN DSL Connection Service Setup ................................................................... 255
18.7 WAN DSL Diagnostics ..................................................................................................... 256
18.8 WAN Connection Device ................................................................................................. 257
18.9 WAN Connection Device Details .................................................................................... 257
18.9.1 WAN DSL Link Configuration ................................................................................ 258
18.10 WAN ATM F5 Loopback Diagnostics ............................................................................. 260
18.11 WAN Ethernet Link Configuration ................................................................................. 261
18.12 WAN POTS Link Configuration ..................................................................................... 261
18.13 WAN IP Connection ...................................................................................................... 262
18.13.1 WAN IP Connection Details ................................................................................. 263
18.13.2 Port Mapping Table ............................................................................................. 265
Vantage Access User’s Guide
15
Table of Contents
18.13.3 Port Mapping Table Details .................................................................................. 265
18.13.4 WAN IP Connection Statistics .............................................................................. 266
18.14 WAN PPP Connection .................................................................................................. 267
18.14.1 WAN PPP Connection Details ............................................................................. 267
18.14.2 Port Mapping Table ............................................................................................. 270
18.14.3 Port Mapping Table Details .................................................................................. 270
18.14.4 WAN PPP Connection Statistics .......................................................................... 271
Part V: Internet Gateway Device 1.2 (TR-098 Amendment 1)........... 275
Chapter 19
General Device Setup ...........................................................................................................277
19.1 Internet Gateway Device ................................................................................................ 277
19.2 Device Information .......................................................................................................... 277
19.3 Vendor Configuration File ............................................................................................... 279
19.3.1 Vendor Configuration File Details .......................................................................... 279
19.4 Device Configuration ....................................................................................................... 280
19.5 Management Server ....................................................................................................... 280
19.6 Manageable Device ......................................................................................................... 282
19.6.1 Manageable Device Details .................................................................................. 283
19.7 Time ................................................................................................................................. 283
19.8 User Interface .................................................................................................................. 284
19.9 Layer3 Forwarding ........................................................................................................... 286
19.9.1 Layer3 Forwarding Table ....................................................................................... 286
19.9.2 Layer3 Forwarding Table Details ........................................................................... 287
19.10 Layer2 Bridging ............................................................................................................. 288
19.10.1 Bridging Table ..................................................................................................... 289
19.10.2 Bridging Table Details .......................................................................................... 289
19.10.3 Filter Table ............................................................................................................ 290
19.10.4 Filter Table Details ................................................................................................ 290
19.10.5 Marking Table ....................................................................................................... 292
19.10.6 Marking Table Details ........................................................................................... 292
19.10.7 Available Interface Table ...................................................................................... 293
19.10.8 Available Interface Table Details .......................................................................... 293
19.11 Queue Management ...................................................................................................... 294
19.11.1 Queue Classification ............................................................................................ 295
19.11.2 Queue Classification Details ................................................................................ 296
19.11.3 Application Queue ................................................................................................ 300
19.11.4 Application Queue Details .................................................................................... 300
19.11.5 Queue Flow .......................................................................................................... 301
19.11.6 Queue Flow Details .............................................................................................. 302
16
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Table of Contents
19.11.7 Queue Policer ....................................................................................................... 303
19.11.8 Queue Policer Details ........................................................................................... 303
19.11.9 Queue ................................................................................................................... 304
19.11.10 Queue Details ..................................................................................................... 304
19.12 LAN Configuration Security .......................................................................................... 305
19.13 IP Ping Diagnostics ....................................................................................................... 306
Chapter 20
LAN Device ............................................................................................................................ 309
20.1 LAN Device Screen ........................................................................................................ 309
20.1.1 Detailed LAN Device Information .......................................................................... 309
20.2 LAN Host Configuration Management ............................................................................. 310
20.2.1 IP Interface ............................................................................................................ 312
20.2.2 IP Interface Details ................................................................................................ 312
20.3 LAN Ethernet Interface ................................................................................................... 313
20.3.1 LAN Ethernet Interface Details .............................................................................. 313
20.3.2 Ethernet Interface Statistics ................................................................................... 314
20.4 LAN USB Interface ......................................................................................................... 315
20.4.1 LAN USB Interface Details .................................................................................... 315
20.4.2 USB Interface Statistics .......................................................................................... 316
20.5 WLAN Configuration ....................................................................................................... 317
20.5.1 WLAN Configuration Details .................................................................................. 317
20.6 WLAN Association List ................................................................................................... 321
20.6.1 WLAN Association List Details .............................................................................. 321
20.7 WEP Key ........................................................................................................................ 322
20.7.1 WEP Key Details ................................................................................................... 322
20.8 Pre-shared Key ............................................................................................................... 323
20.8.1 Pre-shared Key Details ......................................................................................... 323
20.9 LAN Hosts ....................................................................................................................... 324
20.9.1 LAN Host Table ..................................................................................................... 324
20.9.2 LAN Host Table Details ......................................................................................... 325
Chapter 21
WAN Device ........................................................................................................................... 327
21.1 WAN Device Screen Overview ........................................................................................ 327
21.1.1 WAN Device Details .............................................................................................. 327
21.2 WAN Common Interface Configuration .......................................................................... 328
21.2.1 Connection ............................................................................................................ 329
21.2.2 Connection Setup .................................................................................................. 329
21.3 WAN DSL Interface Configuration ................................................................................... 330
21.3.1 WAN DSL Line Statistics ....................................................................................... 331
21.3.2 WAN DSL Line Statistics Details ........................................................................... 332
21.4 WAN Ethernet Interface Configuration ........................................................................... 333
Vantage Access User’s Guide
17
Table of Contents
21.4.1 WAN Ethernet Statistics ........................................................................................ 334
21.5 WAN DSL Connection Management ............................................................................... 334
21.6 WAN DSL Connection Service Information ..................................................................... 335
21.6.1 WAN DSL Connection Service Setup ................................................................... 335
21.7 WAN DSL Diagnostics ..................................................................................................... 336
21.8 WAN Connection Device ................................................................................................. 337
21.9 WAN Connection Device Details .................................................................................... 337
21.9.1 WAN DSL Link Configuration ................................................................................ 338
21.10 WAN ATM F5 Loopback Diagnostics ............................................................................. 340
21.11 WAN Ethernet Link Configuration ................................................................................. 341
21.12 WAN POTS Link Configuration ..................................................................................... 341
21.13 WAN IP Connection ...................................................................................................... 343
21.13.1 WAN IP Connection Details ................................................................................. 343
21.13.2 Port Mapping Table ............................................................................................. 345
21.13.3 Port Mapping Table Details .................................................................................. 346
21.13.4 WAN IP Connection Statistics .............................................................................. 347
21.14 WAN PPP Connection .................................................................................................. 348
21.14.1 WAN PPP Connection Details ............................................................................. 348
21.14.2 Port Mapping Table ............................................................................................. 351
21.14.3 Port Mapping Table Details .................................................................................. 351
21.14.4 WAN PPP Connection Statistics .......................................................................... 352
Part VI: Voice Service 1.0 (TR-104) ..................................................... 355
Chapter 22
Voice Service......................................................................................................................... 357
22.1 Services ........................................................................................................................... 357
22.2 Voice Service Screen ...................................................................................................... 357
22.2.1 Voice Service Details ............................................................................................. 357
22.3 VoIP Capabilities ............................................................................................................. 358
22.3.1 SIP Setup .............................................................................................................. 360
22.3.2 MGCP Setup ......................................................................................................... 361
22.3.3 H.323 Setup .......................................................................................................... 361
22.3.4 Codecs .................................................................................................................. 362
22.3.5 Codecs Details ..................................................................................................... 362
22.4 Voice Profile .................................................................................................................... 363
22.4.1 Voice Profile Details .............................................................................................. 363
22.5 Voice Service Provider Information ................................................................................ 365
22.6 SIP Profile ....................................................................................................................... 365
22.6.1 SIP Event Subscription .......................................................................................... 367
22.6.2 SIP Event Subscription Details .............................................................................. 368
18
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Table of Contents
22.6.3 SIP Response Mapping Table ................................................................................ 369
22.6.4 SIP Response Mapping Details ............................................................................. 369
22.7 MGCP .............................................................................................................................. 370
22.8 H323 ............................................................................................................................... 371
22.9 Voice Profile RTP Setup ................................................................................................. 372
22.9.1 Voice Profile RTCP Setup ...................................................................................... 372
22.9.2 Voice Profile SRTP Setup ..................................................................................... 373
22.9.3 Voice Profile RTP Redundancy Setup .................................................................. 374
22.10 Voice Profile Numbering Plan ....................................................................................... 374
22.10.1 Voice Profile Prefix Information ............................................................................ 375
22.10.2 Voice Profile Prefix Information Setup .................................................................. 376
22.11 Voice Profile Tone Setup ................................................................................................ 376
22.11.1 Voice Profile Tone Event ...................................................................................... 377
22.11.2 Voice Profile Tone Event Setup ............................................................................ 377
22.11.3 Voice Profile Tone Description .............................................................................. 378
22.11.4 Voice Profile Tone Description Setup .................................................................. 378
22.11.5 Voice Profile Tone Pattern .................................................................................... 379
22.11.6 Voice Profile Tone Pattern Setup ......................................................................... 379
22.12 Voice Profile Button Map .............................................................................................. 380
22.12.1 Voice Profile Button ............................................................................................. 381
22.12.2 Voice Profile Button Setup .................................................................................. 381
22.13 Voice Profile FaxT38 .................................................................................................... 382
22.14 Voice Profile Line .......................................................................................................... 383
22.14.1 Voice Profile Line Setup ...................................................................................... 383
22.14.2 Voice Profile Line SIP Setup ............................................................................... 384
22.14.3 Line SIP Event Subscription ................................................................................ 384
22.14.4 Line SIP Event Subscription Details .................................................................... 385
22.14.5 Voice Profile Line MGCP ..................................................................................... 385
22.14.6 Voice Profile Line H323 ....................................................................................... 386
22.14.7 Line Ringer Setup ............................................................................................... 386
22.14.8 Voice Profile Ringer Event .................................................................................. 387
22.14.9 Voice Profile Ringer Event Setup ........................................................................ 387
22.14.10 Voice Profile Ringer Description ........................................................................ 388
22.14.11 Voice Profile Ringer Description Setup ............................................................. 388
22.14.12 Voice Profile Ringer Pattern .............................................................................. 389
22.14.13 Voice Profile Ringer Pattern Setup .................................................................... 389
22.14.14 Voice Profile Line Call Features ........................................................................ 390
22.14.15 Voice Profile Line Voice Processing .................................................................. 392
22.14.16 Line Codec Information ..................................................................................... 393
22.14.17 Codec List
........................................................................................................ 394
22.14.18 Codec List Details ............................................................................................. 394
22.14.19 Line Session ..................................................................................................... 395
22.14.20 Line Session Details .......................................................................................... 395
Vantage Access User’s Guide
19
Table of Contents
22.14.21 Line Statistics
................................................................................................... 396
22.15 PhyInterface ................................................................................................................. 398
22.15.1 PhyInterface Details ........................................................................................... 399
22.15.2 PhyInterface Tests ............................................................................................... 399
Part VII: STB 1.0 (TR-135).................................................................... 403
Chapter 23
STB Service ........................................................................................................................... 405
23.1 Services ........................................................................................................................... 405
23.1.1 STB Service Details ............................................................................................... 405
23.2 STB Capabilities .............................................................................................................. 405
23.2.1 DVBT Setup .......................................................................................................... 406
23.2.2 IP Setup ................................................................................................................ 406
23.2.3 PVR Setup ............................................................................................................ 407
23.2.4 Audio Decoder Setup ............................................................................................ 408
23.2.5 Video Decoder Setup ............................................................................................ 409
23.2.6 MPEG2 Part 2 Setup ............................................................................................. 409
23.2.7 MPEG2 Part 2 Profile Levels ................................................................................. 410
23.2.8 MPEG2 Part 2 Profile Level Settings ..................................................................... 410
23.2.9 MPEG4 Part 2 Setup ..............................................................................................411
23.2.10 MPEG4 Part 2 Profile Levels ................................................................................411
23.2.11 MPEG4 Part 2 Profile Level Settings ....................................................................411
23.2.12 MPEG4 Part 10 Setup ......................................................................................... 412
23.2.13 MPEG4 Part 10 Profile Levels ............................................................................. 413
23.2.14 MPEG4 Part 10 Profile Level Settings ................................................................. 413
23.2.15 SMPTEVC1 Setup .............................................................................................. 414
23.2.16 SMPTE VC-1 Profile Levels ................................................................................. 414
23.2.17 SMPTE VC-1 Profile Level Settings ..................................................................... 415
23.2.18 Audio Output Setup ............................................................................................. 415
23.2.19 Video Output Setup ............................................................................................. 416
23.2.20 CA Setup ............................................................................................................. 417
23.2.21 DRM Setup .......................................................................................................... 417
23.2.22 Service Monitoring Setup .................................................................................... 417
23.2.23 Audience Statistics Setup .................................................................................... 418
23.3 STB Components ............................................................................................................ 419
23.3.1 Front End .............................................................................................................. 420
23.3.2 Front End Settings ................................................................................................ 420
23.3.3 DVBT Modulation Settings .................................................................................... 421
23.3.4 DVBT Installation Settings .................................................................................... 422
23.3.5 DVBT Service List Database Settings ................................................................... 422
20
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Table of Contents
23.3.6 DVBT Service List Database Logical Channels .................................................... 423
23.3.7 DVBT Service List Database Logical Channels Settings ....................................... 423
23.3.8 DVBT Service List Database Logical Channel Services ....................................... 424
23.3.9 DVBT Service List Database Logical Channel Settings Details ............................. 424
23.3.10 DVBT Logical Channel Connections .................................................................... 425
23.3.11 DVBT Service Connections ................................................................................. 426
23.3.12 Front End IP Setup .............................................................................................. 426
23.3.13 Front End RTCP Setup ....................................................................................... 427
23.3.14 Front End RTP AVPF Setup ................................................................................ 427
23.3.15 Front End IGMP Setup ........................................................................................ 428
23.3.16 Front End Client Groups ..................................................................................... 429
23.3.17 Front End Client Groups Settings ....................................................................... 430
23.3.18 Front End Client Group Statistics ........................................................................ 430
23.3.19 Front End Client Groups Statistics Details ........................................................... 431
23.3.20 Front End Client Groups Total Statistics ............................................................... 431
23.3.21 Front End Client Groups Current Day Statistics ................................................... 432
23.3.22 Front End Client Groups Quarter Hour Statistics ................................................. 433
23.3.23 Front End Dejittering ............................................................................................ 433
23.3.24 Front End Inbound Information ........................................................................... 434
23.3.25 Front End Inbound Information Statistics ............................................................ 434
23.3.26 Front End Outbound Information .......................................................................... 435
23.3.27 Front End Outbound Information Statistics ......................................................... 436
23.3.28 Front End Service Connections .......................................................................... 436
23.3.29 Personal Video Recorder Settings ...................................................................... 437
23.3.30 Personal Video Recorder Storage ....................................................................... 437
23.3.31 Personal Video Recorder Storage Details ........................................................... 438
23.3.32 Audio Decoder Status ......................................................................................... 438
23.3.33 Audio Decoder Details ........................................................................................ 439
23.3.34 Video Decoder Status ......................................................................................... 439
23.3.35 Video Decoder Details ........................................................................................ 440
23.3.36 Audio Output Status ............................................................................................ 440
23.3.37 Audio Output Details ........................................................................................... 441
23.3.38 Video Output Status ............................................................................................ 442
23.3.39 Video Output Details ........................................................................................... 442
23.3.40 SCART Status ..................................................................................................... 443
23.3.41 SCART Details .................................................................................................... 443
23.3.42 Conditional Access Status ................................................................................... 444
23.3.43 Conditional Access Details .................................................................................. 444
23.3.44 DRM Status ......................................................................................................... 445
23.3.45 DRM Details ........................................................................................................ 445
23.4 AV Streams .................................................................................................................... 446
23.4.1 AV Stream Setup ................................................................................................... 447
23.4.2 AV Stream Details ................................................................................................. 447
Vantage Access User’s Guide
21
Table of Contents
23.5 AV Players ...................................................................................................................... 448
23.5.1 AV Player Setup .................................................................................................... 449
23.5.2 AV Player Details .................................................................................................. 449
23.6 Service Monitoring ......................................................................................................... 450
23.6.1 Main Stream Setup ............................................................................................... 451
23.6.2 Main Stream Details .............................................................................................. 451
23.6.3 Main Stream Total Statistics .................................................................................. 452
23.6.4 Main Stream Dejittering Statistics .......................................................................... 453
23.6.5 Main Stream RTP Statistics ................................................................................... 454
23.6.6 Main Stream MPEG2-TS Statistics ....................................................................... 455
23.6.7 Main Stream Video Decoder Statistics .................................................................. 456
23.6.8 Main Stream Audio Decoder Statistics .................................................................. 457
23.6.9 Main Stream Video Response Statistics ............................................................... 458
23.6.10 Main Stream Sample Statistics ............................................................................ 458
23.6.11 Main Stream Dejittering Sample Statistics ........................................................... 459
23.6.12 Main Stream RTP Sample Statistics ................................................................... 460
23.6.13 Main Stream MPEG2-TS Sample Statistics ........................................................ 462
23.6.14 Main Stream Video Decoder Sample Statistics ................................................... 463
23.6.15 Main Stream Audio Decoder Sample Statistics ................................................... 465
23.6.16 Main Stream Video Response Sample Statistics ................................................ 466
23.6.17 Main Stream High Level Metric Sample Statistics ............................................... 466
23.6.18 Main Stream High Level Metric Sample Statistics Details .................................... 467
23.7 STB Audience Statistics .................................................................................................. 468
23.7.1 Channel Settings .................................................................................................... 468
23.7.2 Channel Statistics ................................................................................................... 469
Part VIII: Device 1.0 (TR-106) .............................................................. 471
Chapter 24
General Device Setup ...........................................................................................................473
24.1 Device ............................................................................................................................. 473
24.2 Device Configuration ....................................................................................................... 473
24.3 Gateway Information ...................................................................................................... 474
24.4 Device Information .......................................................................................................... 474
24.5 Management Server ....................................................................................................... 476
24.6 Time ................................................................................................................................. 477
24.7 User Interface .................................................................................................................. 478
Chapter 25
LAN......................................................................................................................................... 481
25.1 LAN ................................................................................................................................. 481
22
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Table of Contents
25.2 DHCP Options ................................................................................................................ 482
25.2.1 DHCP Options Details ........................................................................................... 482
25.3 LAN Statistics .................................................................................................................. 482
25.4 IP Ping Diagnostics ......................................................................................................... 484
25.5 Traceroute Diagnostics .................................................................................................... 485
25.5.1 Route Hops ........................................................................................................... 486
25.5.2 Route Hops Details ............................................................................................... 486
Part IX: Device 1.1 (TR-106 Amendment 1)........................................ 487
Chapter 26
General Device Setup ...........................................................................................................489
26.1 Device ............................................................................................................................. 489
26.2 Device Information .......................................................................................................... 489
26.3 Management Server ....................................................................................................... 491
26.4 Gateway Information ...................................................................................................... 493
26.5 Device Configuration ....................................................................................................... 493
26.6 Time ................................................................................................................................. 494
26.7 User Interface .................................................................................................................. 495
Chapter 27
LAN......................................................................................................................................... 497
27.1 LAN ................................................................................................................................. 497
27.2 DHCP Options ................................................................................................................ 498
27.2.1 DHCP Options Details ........................................................................................... 498
27.3 LAN Statistics .................................................................................................................. 499
27.4 IP Ping Diagnostics ......................................................................................................... 500
27.5 Traceroute Diagnostics .................................................................................................... 501
27.5.1 Route Hops ........................................................................................................... 502
27.5.2 Route Hops Details ............................................................................................... 502
Part X: File Manager ............................................................................ 505
Chapter 28
Device Firmware Maintenance............................................................................................. 507
28.1 Device Firmware Overview .............................................................................................. 507
28.2 Firmware Management ................................................................................................... 507
28.2.1 Adding a New Device Firmware ............................................................................ 508
28.2.2 Deleting a Device Firmware File ............................................................................ 509
28.3 Firmware Upgrade .......................................................................................................... 510
Vantage Access User’s Guide
23
Table of Contents
28.3.1 Manual Firmware Upgrade ..................................................................................... 510
28.3.2 Scheduled Firmware Upgrade ................................................................................511
28.4 Firmware Upgrade Request Lists .....................................................................................511
28.4.1 Upgrade List ............................................................................................................511
Chapter 29
Vendor Configuration File .................................................................................................... 513
29.1 Vendor Configuration File Overview ............................................................................... 513
29.2 Available Device Configuration File ................................................................................. 513
29.2.1 Adding a Vendor Configuration File ...................................................................... 514
29.2.2 Downloading a Configuration File .......................................................................... 515
29.2.3 Deleting a Configuration File .................................................................................. 515
29.3 Backing up Device Configuration Files ............................................................................ 516
29.4 Backup Configuration File List ........................................................................................ 517
29.5 Restoring Device Configuration ...................................................................................... 518
29.5.1 Verifying Configuration Restore ............................................................................. 520
29.6 Configuration Restore Request List ................................................................................ 520
Part XI: System Manager..................................................................... 523
Chapter 30
Account Management........................................................................................................... 525
30.1 Types of Accounts ........................................................................................................... 525
30.2 User Account Management ........................................................................................... 525
30.3 Adding a User Account .................................................................................................... 526
30.4 Editing Account Information ............................................................................................ 528
30.5 Deleting an Account ........................................................................................................ 528
30.6 User Groups .................................................................................................................... 529
30.6.1 Add or Edit User Group .......................................................................................... 530
30.7 Common Settings ............................................................................................................ 531
Chapter 31
Download Server................................................................................................................... 533
31.1 The Download Server Screen ......................................................................................... 533
Chapter 32
System Maintenance ............................................................................................................ 535
32.1 The System Maintenance Management Screen ............................................................. 535
32.2 The System Maintenance Backup Screen ...................................................................... 535
32.3 The System Maintenance Restore Screen ...................................................................... 536
24
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Chapter 33
License................................................................................................................................... 539
33.1 License Overview ............................................................................................................ 539
33.2 The License Screen ......................................................................................................... 539
33.3 The License Upgrade Screen ......................................................................................... 540
Chapter 34
System Setting ...................................................................................................................... 543
34.1 The System Setting Screen ............................................................................................. 543
Part XII: Monitor Manager ................................................................... 545
Chapter 35
Log Management .................................................................................................................. 547
35.1 The History Screen .......................................................................................................... 547
35.2 The Log Archive Screen .................................................................................................. 548
35.3 The Log Settings Screen ................................................................................................. 549
35.3.1 The Select Device Screen ...................................................................................... 550
35.4 The TR-069 Log Management Screen ............................................................................ 552
Chapter 36
Alert Setting........................................................................................................................... 555
36.1 Specifying an Email Server ............................................................................................. 555
36.2 Configuring Email Alert .................................................................................................... 556
36.3 The Disk Space Monitor Screen ...................................................................................... 558
36.4 The Disk Space View Screen .......................................................................................... 558
36.5 The Statistical Report Screen ......................................................................................... 559
Part XIII: Diagnostics and Call Center................................................ 561
Chapter 37
Diagnostic Manager.............................................................................................................. 563
37.1 Telnet File Management .................................................................................................. 563
37.1.1 Adding a Telnet File ................................................................................................ 564
37.2 Task Management ........................................................................................................... 564
37.2.1 Adding or Editing a Task ........................................................................................ 565
37.3 Diagnostic Tests .............................................................................................................. 567
37.3.1 Adding a Diagnostic Test ........................................................................................ 568
Vantage Access User’s Guide
25
Table of Contents
Chapter 38
Call Center ............................................................................................................................. 571
38.1 The Call Center Screen ................................................................................................... 571
38.1.1 Default Gateway Setting Example ......................................................................... 574
Part XIV: Troubleshooting, Appendices and Index........................... 575
Chapter 39
Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................... 577
39.1 Vantage Access Startup and Login .................................................................................. 577
39.2 Web Configurator Display ................................................................................................ 578
39.3 Device Registration ......................................................................................................... 578
Appendix A Product Specifications....................................................................................... 579
Appendix B Legal Information .............................................................................................. 581
Appendix C Customer Support............................................................................................. 609
Index....................................................................................................................................... 615
26
Vantage Access User’s Guide
List of Figures
List of Figures
Figure 1 Vantage Access Application Example ..................................................................................... 51
Figure 2 Uninstall: Vantage Access DB ................................................................................................. 72
Figure 3 Uninstall: Vantage Access BED ............................................................................................... 72
Figure 4 Uninstall: Vantage Access HTTPD .......................................................................................... 73
Figure 5 Web Configurator: License Setup Screen ............................................................................... 76
Figure 6 Web Configurator: License Screen ......................................................................................... 76
Figure 7 Web Configurator: Login Screen ............................................................................................. 77
Figure 8 Product Information Screen in MyZyXEL.com ......................................................................... 78
Figure 9 Reinstall Product Screen in MyZyXEL.com .............................................................................. 78
Figure 10 Web Configurator: License Details Screen ............................................................................. 78
Figure 11 Web Configurator: Dashboard ............................................................................................... 79
Figure 12 Web Configurator Screen Overview ...................................................................................... 80
Figure 13 Device Window: Topology ..................................................................................................... 82
Figure 14 Device Window: Topology: Add a Group ............................................................................... 83
Figure 15 Device Window: Topology: Add Group .................................................................................. 83
Figure 16 Device Window: Topology: Delete Group .............................................................................. 84
Figure 17 Device Window: Topology: Delete Group Prompt ................................................................. 84
Figure 18 Device Window: Topology: Remove a Group ........................................................................ 84
Figure 19 Device Window: Topology: Remove Group ........................................................................... 85
Figure 20 Device Window: Topology: Rename ...................................................................................... 85
Figure 21 Device Window: Topology: Change Name ............................................................................ 85
Figure 22 Device Window: Search ........................................................................................................ 86
Figure 23 Configuration Window: Device List ........................................................................................ 87
Figure 24 Device Window: Device List: Add Device to Group ............................................................... 88
Figure 25 Add User Group ..................................................................................................................... 89
Figure 26 Device Window: Right-click Menu ......................................................................................... 89
Figure 27 About ..................................................................................................................................... 91
Figure 28 About: Pop-up ....................................................................................................................... 92
Figure 29 System Manager: Download Server ...................................................................................... 93
Figure 30 Sample Device XML File ....................................................................................................... 94
Figure 31 Sample Device CSV File in Microsoft Excel ........................................................................... 95
Figure 32 Device Manipulation: Import Device ...................................................................................... 95
Figure 33 Check New Device ................................................................................................................ 96
Figure 34 Device List: Check Registered Device .................................................................................. 97
Figure 35 Provision Manager > Device Status .................................................................................... 102
Figure 36 Device Status > Subscriber .................................................................................................. 104
Figure 37 Provision Manager > Task Monitor ...................................................................................... 107
Figure 38 Provision Manager > History ................................................................................................110
Vantage Access User’s Guide
27
List of Figures
Figure 39 Provision Manager > History > Change Columns .................................................................111
Figure 40 Provision Manager > Device Manipulation > Import Device .................................................114
Figure 41 Device Import > Verify in Device List ....................................................................................115
Figure 42 Rename a Single Device .......................................................................................................116
Figure 43 Device Manipulation > Rename Devices ...............................................................................117
Figure 44 Provision Manager > Template > Management ....................................................................119
Figure 45 Provision Manager > Template > Management > Import ..................................................... 120
Figure 46 Provision Manager > Template > Management > Edit ........................................................ 121
Figure 47 Provision Manager > Template > Management > Edit > Add Parameter ............................ 122
Figure 48 Provision Manager > Template > Management > Edit > Modify Parameter ........................ 123
Figure 49 Template > Save as Template .............................................................................................. 124
Figure 50 Template > Load Template .................................................................................................. 125
Figure 51 Provision > Management (Root) ........................................................................................... 127
Figure 52 Provision > Management (Root) > Import Data Model ......................................................... 128
Figure 53 Provision Manager > Provision (Unregistered Device) ......................................................... 129
Figure 54 Provision Manager > Provision (Registered Device) ............................................................ 130
Figure 55 The Data Model Tree ............................................................................................................ 131
Figure 56 Provision > Example Data Model Parameter List ................................................................. 131
Figure 57 Table Pop-up Screen .......................................................................................................... 132
Figure 58 Provision > CPE Methods .................................................................................................... 132
Figure 59 Profile Configuration Example: Specifiy the Data Model ...................................................... 134
Figure 60 Profile Configuration Example: Addisional Profile List under a Data Model ......................... 134
Figure 61 Profile Configuration Example: Profile Submenus ............................................................... 135
Figure 62 Profile Configuration Example: Parameter List .................................................................... 135
Figure 63 Provision > Short cut > Operation ........................................................................................ 137
Figure 64 Provision > Short Cut > Add ................................................................................................. 138
Figure 65 Provision > Short Cut > Add > Object Name List ................................................................. 138
Figure 66 TR-069: InternetGatewayDevice ......................................................................................... 141
Figure 67 TR-069: DeviceInfo ............................................................................................................. 142
Figure 68 TR-069: DeviceConfig ......................................................................................................... 143
Figure 69 TR-069: VendorConfigFile ................................................................................................... 144
Figure 70 TR-069: VendorConfigFile: Details ...................................................................................... 144
Figure 71 TR-069: ManagementServer ............................................................................................... 145
Figure 72 TR-069: Time ....................................................................................................................... 146
Figure 73 TR-069: UserInterface ......................................................................................................... 147
Figure 74 TR-069: Layer3Forwarding
................................................................................................ 149
Figure 75 TR-069: Layer3 Forwarding Table ....................................................................................... 149
Figure 76 TR-069: Layer3 Forwarding Table: Details ......................................................................... 150
Figure 77 TR-069: LANConfigSecurity ................................................................................................ 151
Figure 78 TR-069: IPPingDiagnostics ................................................................................................. 151
Figure 79 TR-069: LANDevice ............................................................................................................ 153
Figure 80 TR-069: LANDevice: Details ............................................................................................... 153
Figure 81 TR-069: LAN Device: LANHostConfigManagement ............................................................ 154
28
Vantage Access User’s Guide
List of Figures
Figure 82 TR-069: LAN Device: IPInterface ........................................................................................ 156
Figure 83 TR-069: LAN Device: IPInterface: Details ........................................................................... 156
Figure 84 TR-069: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig ............................................................ 157
Figure 85 TR-069: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Details ............................................... 157
Figure 86 TR-069: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Stats ................................................... 158
Figure 87 TR-069: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig ................................................................... 159
Figure 88 TR-069: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig: Details ...................................................... 159
Figure 89 TR-069: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig: Stats ......................................................... 160
Figure 90 TR-069: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration .......................................................................... 161
Figure 91 TR-069: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: Details ............................................................. 162
Figure 92 TR-069: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: AssociatedDevice ........................................... 165
Figure 93 TR-069: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: AssociatedDevice: Details .............................. 165
Figure 94 TR-069: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: WEPKey ......................................................... 166
Figure 95 TR-069: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: WEPKey: Details ............................................ 167
Figure 96 TR-069: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: PreSharedKey ................................................ 167
Figure 97 TR-069: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: PreSharedKey: Details ................................... 168
Figure 98 TR-069: LAN Device: Hosts ................................................................................................ 168
Figure 99 TR-069: LAN Device: Hosts: Host ....................................................................................... 169
Figure 100 TR-069: LAN Device: Hosts: Host: Details ......................................................................... 169
Figure 101 TR-069: WANDevice ......................................................................................................... 171
Figure 102 TR-069: WANDevice: Details ............................................................................................ 171
Figure 103 TR-069: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig ....................................................... 172
Figure 104 TR-069: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig: Connection ................................... 173
Figure 105 TR-069: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig: Connection: Setup ....................... 173
Figure 106 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig ............................................................... 174
Figure 107 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig: Stats ..................................................... 176
Figure 108 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig: Stats (Total) .......................................... 176
Figure 109 TR-069: WAN Device: WANEthernetInterfaceConfig ........................................................ 177
Figure 110 TR-069: WAN Device: WANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Stats .............................................. 178
Figure 111 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLConnectionManagement ................................................ 178
Figure 112 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLConnectionManagement: ConnectionService ................. 179
Figure 113 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLConnectionManagement: ConnectionService: Setup .... 179
Figure 114 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLDiagnostics .................................................................... 180
Figure 115 TR-069: WAN Device: WANConnectionDevice ................................................................ 181
Figure 116 TR-069: WAN Device: WANConnectionDevice: Details ................................................... 181
Figure 117 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLLinkConfig
..................................................................... 182
Figure 118 TR-069: WAN Device: WANATMF5LoopbackDiagnostics
............................................... 184
Figure 119 TR-069: WAN Device: WANEthernetLinkConfig ............................................................... 185
Figure 120 TR-069: WAN Device: WANPOTSLinkConfig
Figure 121 TR-069: WAN Device: WANIPConnection
.................................................................. 185
....................................................................... 186
Figure 122 TR-069: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: Details
.......................................................... 187
Figure 123 TR-069: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: PortMapping ................................................. 189
Figure 124 TR-069: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: PortMapping: Details .................................... 189
Vantage Access User’s Guide
29
List of Figures
Figure 125 TR-069: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: Stats .............................................................. 190
Figure 126 TR-069: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection ..................................................................... 191
Figure 127 TR-069: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Details ....................................................... 192
Figure 128 TR-069: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: PortMapping
............................................. 194
Figure 129 TR-069: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: PortMapping: Details
................................ 195
Figure 130 TR-069: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Stats ........................................................... 196
Figure 131 TR-098: InternetGatewayDevice ....................................................................................... 199
Figure 132 TR-098: DeviceInfo ........................................................................................................... 200
Figure 133 TR-098: DeviceConfig ....................................................................................................... 201
Figure 134 TR-098: VendorConfigFile ................................................................................................. 202
Figure 135 TR-098: VendorConfigFile: Details .................................................................................... 202
Figure 136 TR-098: ManagementServer ............................................................................................. 203
Figure 137 TR-098: Time ..................................................................................................................... 204
Figure 138 TR-098: UserInterface ....................................................................................................... 205
Figure 139 TR-098: Layer3Forwarding
.............................................................................................. 207
Figure 140 TR-098: Layer3 Forwarding Table ..................................................................................... 207
Figure 141 TR-098: Layer3 Forwarding Table: Details ....................................................................... 208
Figure 142 TR-098: Layer2Bridging .................................................................................................... 209
Figure 143 TR-098: Layer2Bridging: Bridge ........................................................................................ 209
Figure 144 TR-098: Layer2Bridging: Bridge: Details ........................................................................... 210
Figure 145 TR-098: Layer2Bridging: Filter .......................................................................................... 210
Figure 146 TR-098: Layer2Bridging: Filter: Details ..............................................................................211
Figure 147 TR-098: Layer2Bridging: Marking ..................................................................................... 213
Figure 148 TR-098: Layer2Bridging: Marking: Details ........................................................................ 213
Figure 149 TR-098: Layer2Bridging: AvailableInterface ...................................................................... 214
Figure 150 TR-098: Layer2Bridging: AvailableInterface: Details ......................................................... 214
Figure 151 TR-098: QueueManagement ............................................................................................. 215
Figure 152 TR-098: QueueManagement: Classification ..................................................................... 216
Figure 153 TR-098: QueueManagement: Classification: Details ......................................................... 217
Figure 154 TR-098: QueueManagement: App .................................................................................... 220
Figure 155 TR-098: QueueManagement: App: Details ....................................................................... 221
Figure 156 TR-098: QueueManagement: Flow ................................................................................... 221
Figure 157 TR-098: QueueManagement: Flow: Details ...................................................................... 222
Figure 158 TR-098: QueueManagement: Policer ................................................................................ 223
Figure 159 TR-098: QueueManagement: Policer: Details ................................................................... 223
Figure 160 TR-098: QueueManagement: Queue ................................................................................ 224
Figure 161 TR-098: QueueManagement: Queue: Details ................................................................... 225
Figure 162 TR-098: LANConfigSecurity .............................................................................................. 226
Figure 163 TR-098: IPPingDiagnostics ............................................................................................... 226
Figure 164 TR-098: LANDevice .......................................................................................................... 229
Figure 165 TR-098: LANDevice: Details ............................................................................................. 229
Figure 166 TR-098: LAN Device: LANHostConfigManagement .......................................................... 230
Figure 167 TR-098: LAN Device: IPInterface ...................................................................................... 232
30
Vantage Access User’s Guide
List of Figures
Figure 168 TR-098: LAN Device: IPInterface: Details ......................................................................... 232
Figure 169 TR-098: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig .......................................................... 233
Figure 170 TR-098: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Details ............................................. 233
Figure 171 TR-098: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Stats ................................................. 234
Figure 172 TR-098: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig ................................................................. 235
Figure 173 TR-098: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig: Details .................................................... 235
Figure 174 TR-098: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig: Stats ....................................................... 236
Figure 175 TR-098: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration ........................................................................ 237
Figure 176 TR-098: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: Details ........................................................... 238
Figure 177 TR-098: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration:AssociatedDevice .......................................... 241
Figure 178 TR-098: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: AssociatedDevice: Details ............................ 241
Figure 179 TR-098: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: WEPKey ....................................................... 242
Figure 180 TR-098: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: WEPKey: Details .......................................... 243
Figure 181 TR-098: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: PreSharedKey .............................................. 243
Figure 182 TR-098: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: PreSharedKey: Details ................................. 244
Figure 183 TR-098: LAN Device: Hosts .............................................................................................. 244
Figure 184 TR-098: LAN Device: Hosts: Host ..................................................................................... 245
Figure 185 TR-098: LAN Device: Hosts: Host: Details ........................................................................ 245
Figure 186 TR-098: WANDevice ......................................................................................................... 247
Figure 187 TR-098: WANDevice: Details ............................................................................................ 247
Figure 188 TR-098: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig ....................................................... 248
Figure 189 TR-098: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig: Connection ................................... 249
Figure 190 TR-098: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig: Connection: Setup ....................... 249
Figure 191 TR-098: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig ............................................................... 250
Figure 192 TR-098: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig: Stats (Total) .......................................... 252
Figure 193 TR-098: WAN Device: WANEthernetInterfaceConfig ........................................................ 253
Figure 194 TR-098: WAN Device: WANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Stats .............................................. 254
Figure 195 TR-098: WAN Device: WANDSLConnectionManagement ................................................ 254
Figure 196 TR-098: WAN Device: ConnectionService ......................................................................... 255
Figure 197 TR-098: WAN Device: ConnectionService: Setup ............................................................. 255
Figure 198 TR-098: WAN Device: WANDSLDiagnostics
................................................................... 256
Figure 199 TR-098: WAN Device: WANConnectionDevice ................................................................ 257
Figure 200 TR-098: WAN Device: WANConnectionDevice: Details ................................................... 257
Figure 201 TR-098: WAN Device: WANDSLLinkConfig ..................................................................... 258
Figure 202 TR-098: WAN Device: WANATMF5LoopbackDiagnostics
Figure 203 TR-098: WAN Device: WANEthernetLinkConfig
Figure 204 TR-098: WAN Device: WANPOTSLinkConfig
Figure 205 TR-098: WAN Device: WANIPConnection
............................................... 260
.............................................................. 261
.................................................................. 261
....................................................................... 262
Figure 206 TR-098: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: Details
.......................................................... 263
Figure 207 TR-098: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: PortMapping ................................................. 265
Figure 208 TR-098: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: PortMapping: Details .................................... 265
Figure 209 TR-098: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: Stats .............................................................. 266
Figure 210 TR-098: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection ..................................................................... 267
Vantage Access User’s Guide
31
List of Figures
Figure 211 TR-098: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Details ....................................................... 268
Figure 212 TR-098: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: PortMapping
............................................. 270
Figure 213 TR-098: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: PortMapping: Details
................................ 271
Figure 214 TR-098: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Stats ........................................................... 272
Figure 215 TR-098 Amendment 1: InternetGatewayDevice ................................................................ 277
Figure 216 TR-098 Amendment 1: DeviceInfo .................................................................................... 278
Figure 217 TR-098 Amendment 1: VendorConfigFile ......................................................................... 279
Figure 218 TR-098 Amendment 1: VendorConfigFile: Details ............................................................ 279
Figure 219 TR-098 Amendment 1: DeviceConfig ................................................................................ 280
Figure 220 TR-098 Amendment 1: ManagementServer ..................................................................... 281
Figure 221 TR-098 Amendment 1: Manageable Devices ................................................................... 283
Figure 222 TR-098 Amendment 1: Manageable Devices: Details
..................................................... 283
Figure 223 TR-098 Amendment 1: Time ............................................................................................. 284
Figure 224 TR-098 Amendment 1: UserInterface ............................................................................... 285
Figure 225 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer3Forwarding ....................................................................... 286
Figure 226 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer3 Forwarding Table ............................................................. 287
Figure 227 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer3 Forwarding Table: Details
............................................... 287
Figure 228 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging ............................................................................. 288
Figure 229 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging: Bridge ................................................................ 289
Figure 230 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging: Bridge: Details ................................................... 289
Figure 231 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging: Filter ................................................................... 290
Figure 232 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging: Filter: Details ...................................................... 290
Figure 233 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging: Marking .............................................................. 292
Figure 234 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging: Marking: Details ................................................. 292
Figure 235 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging: AvailableInterface .............................................. 293
Figure 236 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging: AvailableInterface: Details ................................. 294
Figure 237 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement ..................................................................... 294
Figure 238 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: Classification .............................................. 296
Figure 239 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: Classification: Details .................................. 297
Figure 240 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: App ............................................................. 300
Figure 241 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: App: Details ................................................ 301
Figure 242 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: Flow ............................................................ 301
Figure 243 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: Flow: Details ............................................... 302
Figure 244 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: Policer ........................................................ 303
Figure 245 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: Policer: Details ........................................... 303
Figure 246 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: Queue ........................................................ 304
Figure 247 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: Queue: Details ........................................... 305
Figure 248 TR-098 Amendment 1: LANConfigSecurity ....................................................................... 306
Figure 249 TR-098 Amendment 1: IPPingDiagnostics ........................................................................ 306
Figure 250 TR-098 Amendment 1: LANDevice ................................................................................... 309
Figure 251 TR-098 Amendment 1: LANDevice: Details ...................................................................... 309
Figure 252 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: LANHostConfigManagement .................................. 310
Figure 253 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: IPInterface ............................................................... 312
32
Vantage Access User’s Guide
List of Figures
Figure 254 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: IPInterface: Details .................................................. 312
Figure 255 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig ................................... 313
Figure 256 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Details ...................... 313
Figure 257 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Stats ......................... 314
Figure 258 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig ......................................... 315
Figure 259 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig: Details ............................ 315
Figure 260 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig: Stats ............................... 316
Figure 261 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration ................................................ 317
Figure 262 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: Details ................................... 318
Figure 263 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration:AssociatedDevice ................... 321
Figure 264 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: AssociatedDevice .................. 321
Figure 265 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: WEPKey ................................ 322
Figure 266 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: WEPKey: Details ................... 323
Figure 267 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: PreSharedKey ....................... 323
Figure 268 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: PreSharedKey: Details .......... 324
Figure 269 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: Hosts ....................................................................... 324
Figure 270 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: Hosts: Host ............................................................. 325
Figure 271 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: Hosts: Host: Details ................................................. 325
Figure 272 TR-098 Amendment 1: WANDevice .................................................................................. 327
Figure 273 TR-098 Amendment 1: WANDevice: Details ..................................................................... 327
Figure 274 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig ................................ 328
Figure 275 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig: Connection ........... 329
Figure 276 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig: Connection: Setup 329
Figure 277 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig ....................................... 330
Figure 278 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig: Stats (Total) .................. 332
Figure 279 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANEthernetInterfaceConfig ................................. 333
Figure 280 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Stats ....................... 334
Figure 281 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANDSLConnectionManagement ........................ 335
Figure 282 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: ConnectionService .................................................. 335
Figure 283 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: ConnectionService: Setup ..................................... 335
Figure 284 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANDSLDiagnostics ............................................ 336
Figure 285 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANConnectionDevice
........................................ 337
Figure 286 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANConnectionDevice: Details
........................... 338
Figure 287 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANDSLLinkConfig .............................................. 338
Figure 288 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANATMF5LoopbackDiagnostics ........................ 340
Figure 289 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANEthernetLinkConfig ....................................... 341
Figure 290 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANPOTSLinkConfig ........................................... 342
Figure 291 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANIPConnection ................................................ 343
Figure 292 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: Details ................................... 344
Figure 293 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: PortMapping .......................... 346
Figure 294 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: PortMapping: Details ............. 346
Figure 295 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: Stats ....................................... 347
Figure 296 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection ............................................. 348
Vantage Access User’s Guide
33
List of Figures
Figure 297 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Details
............................... 349
Figure 298 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: PortMapping ...................... 351
Figure 299 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: PortMapping: Details ......... 352
Figure 300 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Stats ................................... 353
Figure 301 TR-104: Services ............................................................................................................... 357
Figure 302 TR-104: VoiceService ........................................................................................................ 357
Figure 303 TR-104: VoiceService: Details ........................................................................................... 358
Figure 304 TR-104: VoiceService: Capabilities ................................................................................... 358
Figure 305 TR-104: VoiceService: Capabilities: SIP ........................................................................... 360
Figure 306 TR-104: VoiceService: Capabilities: MGCP ...................................................................... 361
Figure 307 TR-104: VoiceService: Capabilities: H323 ........................................................................ 362
Figure 308 TR-104: VoiceService: Capabilities: Codecs ..................................................................... 362
Figure 309 TR-104: VoiceService: Capabilities: Codecs: Details ........................................................ 363
Figure 310 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile ................................................................................... 363
Figure 311 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Details ...................................................................... 364
Figure 312 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: ServiceProviderInfo ................................................. 365
Figure 313 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: SIP ........................................................................... 366
Figure 314 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: SIP: EventSubscribe ................................................ 368
Figure 315 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: SIP: EventSubscribe: Details ................................... 368
Figure 316 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: SIP: ResponseMap .................................................. 369
Figure 317 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: SIP: ResponseMap: Details ..................................... 369
Figure 318 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: MGCP ...................................................................... 370
Figure 319 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: H323 ........................................................................ 371
Figure 320 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: RTP ......................................................................... 372
Figure 321 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: RTP: RTCP .............................................................. 373
Figure 322 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: RTP: SRTP .............................................................. 373
Figure 323 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: RTP: Redundancy ................................................... 374
Figure 324 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: NumberingPlan ........................................................ 375
Figure 325 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: NumberingPlan: PrefixInfo ....................................... 375
Figure 326 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: PrefixInfo: Details .................................................... 376
Figure 327 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Tone ......................................................................... 377
Figure 328 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Tone: Event .............................................................. 377
Figure 329 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Tone: Event: Details ................................................. 378
Figure 330 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Tone: Description ..................................................... 378
Figure 331 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Tone: Description: Details ........................................ 379
Figure 332 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Tone: Pattern ........................................................... 379
Figure 333 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Tone: Pattern: Details .............................................. 380
Figure 334 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: ButtonMap ............................................................... 381
Figure 335 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: ButtonMap: Button ................................................... 381
Figure 336 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: ButtonMap: Button: Details ...................................... 381
Figure 337 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: FaxT38 .................................................................... 382
Figure 338 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line .......................................................................... 383
Figure 339 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Details ............................................................. 383
34
Vantage Access User’s Guide
List of Figures
Figure 340 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: SIP .................................................................. 384
Figure 341 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: SIP Event Subscription ................................... 385
Figure 342 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: SIP: EventSubscribe: Details .......................... 385
Figure 343 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: MGCP ............................................................. 386
Figure 344 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: H323 ............................................................... 386
Figure 345 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Ringer ............................................................. 386
Figure 346 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Ringer: Event ........................................................... 387
Figure 347 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Ringer: Event: Details .............................................. 387
Figure 348 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Ringer: Description .................................................. 388
Figure 349 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Ringer: Description: Details ..................................... 388
Figure 350 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Ringer: Pattern ........................................................ 389
Figure 351 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Ringer: Pattern: Details ........................................... 390
Figure 352 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: CallFeatures ............................................................ 391
Figure 353 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: VoiceProcessing ...................................................... 392
Figure 354 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Codec ............................................................. 393
Figure 355 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Codec: List ...................................................... 394
Figure 356 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Codec: List: Details ......................................... 394
Figure 357 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Session ........................................................... 395
Figure 358 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Session: Details .............................................. 396
Figure 359 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Stats ................................................................ 397
Figure 360 TR-104: VoiceService: PhyInterface ................................................................................. 398
Figure 361 TR-104: VoiceService: PhyInterface: Details .................................................................... 399
Figure 362 TR-104: VoiceService: PhyInterface: Tests ....................................................................... 399
Figure 363 TR-135: Services ............................................................................................................... 405
Figure 364 TR-135: STBService ......................................................................................................... 405
Figure 365 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities ..................................................................................... 406
Figure 366 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: DVBT ......................................................................... 406
Figure 367 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: IP ............................................................................... 407
Figure 368 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: PVR ........................................................................... 408
Figure 369 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Audio Decoder ........................................................... 408
Figure 370 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Video Decoder ........................................................... 409
Figure 371 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG2Part2 .............................................................. 409
Figure 372 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG2Part2 ProfileLevel ........................................... 410
Figure 373 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG2Part2 ProfileLevel Settings ............................. 410
Figure 374 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG4Part2 ...............................................................411
Figure 375 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG4Part2 ProfileLevel ............................................411
Figure 376 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG4Part2 ProfileLevel Settings ............................. 412
Figure 377 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG4Part10 ............................................................ 412
Figure 378 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG4Part10 ProfileLevel ......................................... 413
Figure 379 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG4Part10 ProfileLevel Settings ........................... 413
Figure 380 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: SMPTE VC-1 ............................................................. 414
Figure 381 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: SMPTE VC-1 ProfileLevel ........................................... 415
Figure 382 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: SMPTE VC-1 ProfileLevel Settings ............................. 415
Vantage Access User’s Guide
35
List of Figures
Figure 383 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Audio Output .............................................................. 416
Figure 384 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Video Output .............................................................. 416
Figure 385 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Conditional Access .................................................... 417
Figure 386 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Digital Rights Management ........................................ 417
Figure 387 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Service Monitoring ...................................................... 418
Figure 388 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Audience Statistics ...................................................... 418
Figure 389 TR-135: STBService: Components ................................................................................... 419
Figure 390 TR-135: STBService: Components: FrontEnd ................................................................... 420
Figure 391 TR-135: STBService: Components: Device FrontEnd ...................................................... 420
Figure 392 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Modulation ..................................................... 421
Figure 393 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Installation ...................................................... 422
Figure 394 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Service List Database ..................................... 423
Figure 395 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Service List Logical Channels ........................ 423
Figure 396 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Service List Channels: Entry .......................... 424
Figure 397 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Service List Channel: Services ....................... 424
Figure 398 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Service List Channel Services: Device ........... 425
Figure 399 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Logical Channel Connections ......................... 425
Figure 400 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Service Connections ...................................... 426
Figure 401 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP ............................................................................... 426
Figure 402 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: RTCP ................................................................... 427
Figure 403 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: RTPAPVF ............................................................ 428
Figure 404 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: IGMP ................................................................... 429
Figure 405 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Client Groups ....................................................... 430
Figure 406 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Client Group Entry ............................................... 430
Figure 407 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Client Group Statistics ......................................... 431
Figure 408 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Client Group Statistics Entry ................................ 431
Figure 409 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Client Group Statistics: Total ................................ 432
Figure 410 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Client Group Statistics: CurrentDay ..................... 432
Figure 411 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Client Group Statistics: QuarterHour .................... 433
Figure 412 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Dejittering ............................................................ 434
Figure 413 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Inbound ................................................................ 434
Figure 414 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Inbound: Details ................................................... 435
Figure 415 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Outbound ............................................................. 436
Figure 416 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Outbound: Details ................................................ 436
Figure 417 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: ServiceConnect ................................................... 437
Figure 418 TR-135: STBService: Components: PVR ........................................................................... 437
Figure 419 TR-135: STBService: Components: PVR Storage ............................................................. 438
Figure 420 TR-135: STBService: Components: PVR Storage Details ................................................. 438
Figure 421 TR-135: STBService: Components: AudioDecoder ........................................................... 438
Figure 422 TR-135: STBService: Components: AudioDecoder Details ............................................... 439
Figure 423 TR-135: STBService: Components: VideoDecoder ........................................................... 439
Figure 424 TR-135: STBService: Components: VideoDecoder Details ............................................... 440
Figure 425 TR-135: STBService: Components: AudioOutput .............................................................. 441
36
Vantage Access User’s Guide
List of Figures
Figure 426 TR-135: STBService: Components: AudioOutput Details .................................................. 441
Figure 427 TR-135: STBService: Components: VideoOutput .............................................................. 442
Figure 428 TR-135: STBService: Components: VideoOutput Details .................................................. 442
Figure 429 TR-135: STBService: Components: SCART ...................................................................... 443
Figure 430 TR-135: STBService: Components: SCART Details .......................................................... 444
Figure 431 TR-135: STBService: Components: CA ............................................................................. 444
Figure 432 TR-135: STBService: Components: CA Details ................................................................. 445
Figure 433 TR-135: STBService: Components: DRM .......................................................................... 445
Figure 434 TR-135: STBService: Components: DRM Details .............................................................. 446
Figure 435 TR-135: STBService: AVStreams ....................................................................................... 446
Figure 436 TR-135: STBService: AVStreams: AVStream ..................................................................... 447
Figure 437 TR-135: STBService: AVStreams: AVStream Details ......................................................... 447
Figure 438 TR-135: STBService: AVPlayers ........................................................................................ 448
Figure 439 TR-135: STBService: AVPlayers: AVPlayer ....................................................................... 449
Figure 440 TR-135: STBService: AVStreams: AVStream Details ......................................................... 449
Figure 441 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring ............................................................................ 450
Figure 442 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream ...................................................... 451
Figure 443 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream: Details ......................................... 452
Figure 444 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Total Statistics ............................... 453
Figure 445 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Dejittering Statistics ...................... 453
Figure 446 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream RTP Statistics ............................... 454
Figure 447 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream MPEG2TSStats ............................ 455
Figure 448 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream VideoDecoderStats ....................... 456
Figure 449 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream AudioDecoderStats ....................... 457
Figure 450 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream VideoResponseStats .................... 458
Figure 451 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Sample Statistics .......................... 459
Figure 452 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Dejittering Sample Stats ............... 459
Figure 453 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream RTP Sample Statistics .................. 461
Figure 454 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Sample MPEG2TSStats ............... 463
Figure 455 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Sample VideoDecoder ................. 464
Figure 456 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Sample AudioDecoder ................. 465
Figure 457 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Sample VideoResponse ............... 466
Figure 458 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream HighLevelMetricStats .................... 467
Figure 459 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream HighLevelMetric Details ................ 467
Figure 460 TR-135: STBService: Applications: Audience Statistics ..................................................... 468
Figure 461 TR-135: STBService: Applications: Audience Statistics: Channel Settings ....................... 469
Figure 462 TR-135: STBService: Applications: Audience Statistics: Channel Statistics ...................... 469
Figure 463 TR-106: Device ................................................................................................................. 473
Figure 464 TR-106: Device: Config ..................................................................................................... 473
Figure 465 TR-106: Device: GatewayInfo ........................................................................................... 474
Figure 466 TR-106: Device: Info ......................................................................................................... 475
Figure 467 TR-106: ManagementServer ............................................................................................. 476
Figure 468 TR-106: Time ..................................................................................................................... 477
Vantage Access User’s Guide
37
List of Figures
Figure 469 TR-106: UserInterface ....................................................................................................... 478
Figure 470 TR-106: LAN
.................................................................................................................... 481
Figure 471 TR-106: LAN: DHCPOption .............................................................................................. 482
Figure 472 TR-106: LAN: DHCPOption: Details ................................................................................. 482
Figure 473 TR-106: LAN: Stats
.......................................................................................................... 483
Figure 474 TR-106: LAN: DHCPOption: Details ................................................................................. 484
Figure 475 TR-106: LAN: TraceRouteDiagnostics
............................................................................. 485
Figure 476 TR-106: LAN: TraceRouteDiagnostics: RouteHops
......................................................... 486
Figure 477 TR-106: LAN: TraceRouteDiagnostics: RouteHops: Details
............................................ 486
Figure 478 TR-106 Amendment 1: Device .......................................................................................... 489
Figure 479 TR-106 Amendment 1: Device: Info .................................................................................. 490
Figure 480 TR-106 Amendment 1: ManagementServer ..................................................................... 491
Figure 481 TR-106 Amendment 1: Device: GatewayInfo .................................................................... 493
Figure 482 TR-106 Amendment 1: Device: Config .............................................................................. 494
Figure 483 TR-106 Amendment 1: Time ............................................................................................. 494
Figure 484 TR-106 Amendment 1: UserInterface ............................................................................... 495
Figure 485 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN ............................................................................................. 497
Figure 486 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN: DHCPOption
...................................................................... 498
Figure 487 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN: DHCPOption: Details
Figure 488 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN: Stats
......................................................... 498
................................................................................... 499
Figure 489 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN: IPPingDiagnostics .............................................................. 500
Figure 490 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN: TraceRouteDiagnostics ...................................................... 501
Figure 491 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN: TraceRouteDiagnostics: RouteHops .................................. 502
Figure 492 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN: TraceRouteDiagnostics: RouteHops: Details ..................... 503
Figure 493 File Manager: Device Firmware: Management ................................................................. 508
Figure 494 File Manager: Device Firmware: Management: Add ......................................................... 508
Figure 495 File Manager: Device Firmware: Firmware Management: Delete ..................................... 510
Figure 496 File Manager: Device Firmware: Firmware Upgrade ......................................................... 510
Figure 497 Device Firmware: Device Firmware: Scheduled Upgrade List .......................................... 512
Figure 498 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Management ............................................................... 513
Figure 499 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Management: Add ...................................................... 514
Figure 500 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Backup ....................................................................... 516
Figure 501 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Backup List
................................................................ 517
Figure 502 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Restore (for a device) .................................................. 519
Figure 503 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Restore (for a device pool) .......................................... 519
Figure 504 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Verify Restore Example
............................................. 520
Figure 505 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Restore List ................................................................ 521
Figure 506 System Manager: User Management ................................................................................ 526
Figure 507 System Manager: User Management: Add User ............................................................... 527
Figure 508 Administration: Management: Delete Account Prompt ...................................................... 528
Figure 509 System Manager: User Management: User Group ............................................................ 529
Figure 510 System Manager: User Management: User Group: Add .................................................... 530
Figure 511 System Manager: User Management: Common Setting .................................................... 531
38
Vantage Access User’s Guide
List of Figures
Figure 512 System Manager: Download Server ................................................................................... 533
Figure 513 System Manager: System Maintenance: Management ...................................................... 535
Figure 514 System Manager: System Maintenance: Backup ............................................................... 536
Figure 515 System Manager: System Maintenance: Restore .............................................................. 536
Figure 516 System Manager: System Maintenance: License (Trial) .................................................... 539
Figure 517 System Manager: System Maintenance: License (Standard) ............................................ 539
Figure 518 System Maintenance: License: Upgrade (Trial) ................................................................. 540
Figure 519 System Maintenance: License: Upgrade (Standard) .......................................................... 540
Figure 520 System Manager: System Setting ...................................................................................... 543
Figure 521 Monitor Manager: Log Management: History ..................................................................... 547
Figure 522 Log Manager: Log Archive ................................................................................................. 549
Figure 523 Monitor Manager: Log Management: Log Setting .............................................................. 550
Figure 524 Monitor Manager: Log Management: Log Setting: Add ...................................................... 551
Figure 525 Monitor Manager: TR-069 Log Management ..................................................................... 552
Figure 526 Monitor Manager: Alert Setting: Email Server ................................................................... 555
Figure 527 Monitor Manager: Alert Setting: Email Alert ...................................................................... 557
Figure 528 Monitor Manager: Disk Space Monitor: Monitor Setting ..................................................... 558
Figure 529 Monitor Manager: Disk Space Monitor: Disk Space View ................................................... 559
Figure 530 Monitor Manager: Statistical Report ................................................................................... 560
Figure 531 Diagnostics Manager: Telnet: File Management ................................................................ 563
Figure 532 Diagnostics Manager: Telnet: Add File ............................................................................... 564
Figure 533 Diagnostics Manager: Telnet: Task Management ............................................................... 564
Figure 534 Diagnostics Manager: Telnet: Add or Edit Task .................................................................. 566
Figure 535 Diagnostics Manager: Diagnostic Tests ............................................................................. 567
Figure 536 Diagnostics Manager: Diagnostic Tests: Add ..................................................................... 568
Figure 537 The Call Center Interface ................................................................................................... 571
Vantage Access User’s Guide
39
List of Figures
40
Vantage Access User’s Guide
List of Tables
List of Tables
Table 1 Default Login Accounts ............................................................................................................. 75
Table 2 Dashboard ................................................................................................................................ 79
Table 3 Title Bar Icon Description .......................................................................................................... 81
Table 4 Device Window: Topology ......................................................................................................... 83
Table 5 Configuration Screen: Device List ............................................................................................. 87
Table 6 Navigation Panel: Menu Summary ........................................................................................... 90
Table 7 Provision Manager > Device Status ........................................................................................ 102
Table 8 Device Status > Subscriber ..................................................................................................... 105
Table 9 Provision Manager > Task Monitor .......................................................................................... 107
Table 10 Provision Manager > History ..................................................................................................110
Table 11 Provision Manager > History > Change Columns ..................................................................111
Table 12 Provision Manager > Template > Management .................................................................... 120
Table 13 Provision Manager > Template > Management > Import ...................................................... 121
Table 14 Provision Manager > Template > Management > Edit .......................................................... 121
Table 15 Provision Manager > Template > Management > Edit > Add Parameter .............................. 122
Table 16 Provision Manager > Template > Management > Edit > Modify Parameter ......................... 123
Table 17 Provision Manager > Pre-Provision > Template > Save ....................................................... 124
Table 18 Template > Load Template .................................................................................................... 125
Table 19 Provision > Management (Root) ........................................................................................... 127
Table 20 Provision > Management (Root) > Import Data Model ......................................................... 128
Table 21 Provision Manager > Provision > Unregistered Device ........................................................ 130
Table 22 Provision > Example Parameter List ..................................................................................... 131
Table 23 Provision > CPE Methods ..................................................................................................... 133
Table 24 Provision > Short cut > Operation ......................................................................................... 137
Table 25 Provision > Short Cut > Add ................................................................................................. 138
Table 26 TR-069: InternetGatewayDevice ........................................................................................... 141
Table 27 TR-069: DeviceInfo ............................................................................................................... 142
Table 28 TR-069: DeviceConfig ........................................................................................................... 143
Table 29 TR-069: VendorConfigFile: Details ....................................................................................... 144
Table 30 TR-069: ManagementServer ................................................................................................ 145
Table 31 TR-069: Time ........................................................................................................................ 146
Table 32 TR-069: UserInterface .......................................................................................................... 148
Table 33 TR-069: Layer3Forwarding ................................................................................................... 149
Table 34 TR-069: Layer3 Forwarding: Forwarding .............................................................................. 150
Table 35 TR-069: IPPingDiagnostics ................................................................................................... 151
Table 36 TR-069: LANDevice: Details ................................................................................................. 154
Table 37 TR-069: LAN Device: LANHostConfigManagement ............................................................. 155
Table 38 TR-069: LAN Device: IPInterface: Details ............................................................................. 156
Vantage Access User’s Guide
41
List of Tables
Table 39 TR-069: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Details ................................................. 158
Table 40 TR-069: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Stats .................................................... 158
Table 41 TR-069: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig: Details ....................................................... 160
Table 42 TR-069: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig: Stats .......................................................... 160
Table 43 TR-069: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration ........................................................................... 162
Table 44 TR-069: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: AssociatedDevice ............................................. 166
Table 45 TR-069: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: PreSharedKey: Details ..................................... 168
Table 46 TR-069: LAN Device: Hosts: Host: Details ............................................................................ 169
Table 47 TR-069: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig ........................................................... 172
Table 48 TR-069: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig: Connection: Setup ........................... 173
Table 49 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig .................................................................. 174
Table 50 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig: Stats (Total) ............................................. 176
Table 51 TR-069: WAN Device: WANEthernetInterfaceConfig ........................................................... 177
Table 52 TR-069: WAN Device: WANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Stats .................................................. 178
Table 53 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLConnectionManagement: ConnectionService: Setup ........ 179
Table 54 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLDiagnostics ........................................................................ 180
Table 55 TR-069: WAN Device: WANConnectionDevice: Details ....................................................... 182
Table 56 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLLinkConfig ......................................................................... 182
Table 57 TR-069: WAN Device: WANATMF5LoopbackDiagnostics .................................................... 184
Table 58 TR-069: WAN Device: WANPOTSLinkConfig ....................................................................... 186
Table 59 TR-069: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: Details ............................................................... 187
Table 60 TR-069: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: PortMapping: Details ......................................... 189
Table 61 TR-069: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: Stats .................................................................. 190
Table 62 TR-069: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Details ........................................................... 192
Table 63 TR-069: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: PortMapping: Details ..................................... 195
Table 64 TR-069: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Stats .............................................................. 196
Table 65 TR-098: InternetGatewayDevice ........................................................................................... 199
Table 66 TR-098: DeviceInfo ............................................................................................................... 200
Table 67 TR-098: DeviceConfig ........................................................................................................... 201
Table 68 TR-098: VendorConfigFile: Details ....................................................................................... 202
Table 69 TR-098: ManagementServer ................................................................................................ 203
Table 70 TR-098: Time ........................................................................................................................ 204
Table 71 TR-098: UserInterface .......................................................................................................... 205
Table 72 TR-098: Layer3Forwarding ................................................................................................... 207
Table 73 TR-098: Layer3 Forwarding: Forwarding .............................................................................. 208
Table 74 TR-098: Layer2Bridging ........................................................................................................ 209
Table 75 TR-098: Layer2Bridging: Bridge: Details .............................................................................. 210
Table 76 TR-098: Layer2Bridging: Filter: Details ..................................................................................211
Table 77 TR-098: Layer2Bridging: Marking: Details ............................................................................ 213
Table 78 TR-098: Layer2Bridging: AvailableInterface: Details ............................................................ 214
Table 79 TR-098: QueueManagement ................................................................................................ 215
Table 80 TR-098: QueueManagement: Classification: Details ............................................................ 218
Table 81 TR-098: QueueManagement: App: Details ........................................................................... 221
42
Vantage Access User’s Guide
List of Tables
Table 82 TR-098: QueueManagement: Flow: Details .......................................................................... 222
Table 83 TR-098: QueueManagement: Policer: Details ...................................................................... 223
Table 84 TR-098: QueueManagement: Queue: Details ...................................................................... 225
Table 85 TR-098: IPPingDiagnostics ................................................................................................... 226
Table 86 TR-098: LANDevice: Details ................................................................................................. 230
Table 87 TR-098: LAN Device: LANHostConfigManagement ............................................................. 231
Table 88 TR-098: LAN Device: IPInterface: Details ............................................................................. 232
Table 89 TR-098: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Details ................................................. 234
Table 90 TR-098: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Stats .................................................... 234
Table 91 TR-098: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig: Details ....................................................... 236
Table 92 TR-098: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig: Stats .......................................................... 236
Table 93 TR-098: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration ........................................................................... 238
Table 94 TR-098: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: AssociatedDevice: Details ................................ 242
Table 95 TR-098: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: PreSharedKey: Details ..................................... 244
Table 96 TR-098: LAN Device: Hosts: Host: Details ............................................................................ 245
Table 97 TR-098: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig ........................................................... 248
Table 98 TR-098: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig: Connection: Setup ........................... 249
Table 99 TR-098: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig .................................................................. 250
Table 100 TR-098: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig: Stats (Total) ........................................... 252
Table 101 TR-098: WAN Device: WANEthernetInterfaceConfig ......................................................... 253
Table 102 TR-098: WAN Device: WANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Stats ................................................ 254
Table 103 TR-098: WAN Device: ConnectionService: Setup .............................................................. 255
Table 104 TR-098: WAN Device: WANDSLDiagnostics ...................................................................... 256
Table 105 TR-098: WAN Device: WANConnectionDevice: Details ..................................................... 258
Table 106 TR-098: WAN Device: WANDSLLinkConfig ....................................................................... 258
Table 107 TR-098: WAN Device: WANATMF5LoopbackDiagnostics .................................................. 260
Table 108 TR-098: WAN Device: WANPOTSLinkConfig ..................................................................... 262
Table 109 TR-098: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: Details ............................................................. 263
Table 110 TR-098: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: PortMapping: Details ....................................... 266
Table 111 TR-098: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: Stats ................................................................. 267
Table 112 TR-098: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Details ......................................................... 268
Table 113 TR-098: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: PortMapping: Details ................................... 271
Table 114 TR-098: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Stats ............................................................ 272
Table 115 TR-098 Amendment 1: InternetGatewayDevice ................................................................. 277
Table 116 TR-098 Amendment 1: DeviceInfo ...................................................................................... 278
Table 117 TR-098 Amendment 1: VendorConfigFile: Details .............................................................. 280
Table 118 TR-098 Amendment 1: DeviceConfig ................................................................................. 280
Table 119 TR-098 Amendment 1: ManagementServer ....................................................................... 281
Table 120 TR-098 Amendment 1: Manageable Devices: Details ........................................................ 283
Table 121 TR-098 Amendment 1: Time ............................................................................................... 284
Table 122 TR-098 Amendment 1: UserInterface ................................................................................. 285
Table 123 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer3Forwarding .......................................................................... 286
Table 124 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer3 Forwarding: Forwarding ..................................................... 287
Vantage Access User’s Guide
43
List of Tables
Table 125 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging .............................................................................. 288
Table 126 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging: Bridge: Details ..................................................... 289
Table 127 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging: Filter: Details ....................................................... 291
Table 128 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging: Marking: Details ................................................... 293
Table 129 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging: AvailableInterface: Details ................................... 294
Table 130 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement ....................................................................... 295
Table 131 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: Classification: Details ................................... 298
Table 132 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: App: Details ................................................. 301
Table 133 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: Flow: Details ................................................ 302
Table 134 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: Policer: Details ............................................. 303
Table 135 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: Queue: Details ............................................. 305
Table 136 TR-098 Amendment 1: IPPingDiagnostics ......................................................................... 306
Table 137 TR-098 Amendment 1: LANDevice: Details ........................................................................ 310
Table 138 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: LANHostConfigManagement .....................................311
Table 139 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: IPInterface: Details ................................................... 312
Table 140 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Details ........................ 314
Table 141 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Stats ........................... 314
Table 142 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig: Details .............................. 316
Table 143 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig: Stats ................................. 316
Table 144 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration .................................................. 318
Table 145 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: AssociatedDevice ................... 322
Table 146 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: PreSharedKey: Details ........... 324
Table 147 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: Hosts: Host: Details .................................................. 325
Table 148 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig ................................. 328
Table 149 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig: Connection: Setup .. 329
Table 150 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig ......................................... 330
Table 151 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig: Stats (Total) .................... 332
Table 152 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANEthernetInterfaceConfig .................................. 333
Table 153 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Stats ........................ 334
Table 154 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: ConnectionService: Setup ....................................... 336
Table 155 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANDSLDiagnostics ............................................... 337
Table 156 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANConnectionDevice: Details .............................. 338
Table 157 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANDSLLinkConfig ................................................ 339
Table 158 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANATMF5LoopbackDiagnostics .......................... 340
Table 159 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANPOTSLinkConfig ............................................. 342
Table 160 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: Details ...................................... 344
Table 161 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: PortMapping: Details ............... 346
Table 162 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: Stats ......................................... 347
Table 163 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Details .................................. 349
Table 164 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: PortMapping: Details ........... 352
Table 165 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Stats ..................................... 353
Table 166 TR-104: VoiceService: Capabilities ..................................................................................... 359
Table 167 TR-104: VoiceService: Capabilities: SIP ............................................................................. 360
44
Vantage Access User’s Guide
List of Tables
Table 168 TR-104: VoiceService: Capabilities: H323 .......................................................................... 362
Table 169 TR-104: VoiceService: Capabilities: Codecs: Details .......................................................... 363
Table 170 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Details ....................................................................... 364
Table 171 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: ServiceProviderInfo ................................................... 365
Table 172 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: SIP: Details ............................................................... 366
Table 173 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: SIP: EventSubscribe: Details .................................... 368
Table 174 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: SIP: ResponseMap: Details ...................................... 369
Table 175 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: MGCP ....................................................................... 370
Table 176 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: H.323 ......................................................................... 371
Table 177 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: RTP ........................................................................... 372
Table 178 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: RTP: RTCP ............................................................... 373
Table 179 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: RTP: SRTP ................................................................ 373
Table 180 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: RTP: Redundancy ..................................................... 374
Table 181 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: NumberingPlan ......................................................... 375
Table 182 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: PrefixInfo: Details ...................................................... 376
Table 183 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Tone .......................................................................... 377
Table 184 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Tone: Event: Details .................................................. 378
Table 185 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Tone: Description: Details ......................................... 379
Table 186 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Tone: Pattern: Details ................................................ 380
Table 187 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: ButtonMap: Button: Details ....................................... 382
Table 188 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: FaxT38 ...................................................................... 382
Table 189 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Setup ................................................................ 383
Table 190 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: SIP .................................................................... 384
Table 191 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: SIP: EventSubscribe: Details ........................... 385
Table 192 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Ringer ............................................................... 387
Table 193 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Ringer: Event: Details ............................................... 388
Table 194 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Ringer: Description: Details ....................................... 389
Table 195 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Ringer: Pattern: Details ............................................. 390
Table 196 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: CallingFeatures ......................................................... 391
Table 197 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: VoiceProcessing ........................................................ 393
Table 198 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Codec ............................................................... 393
Table 199 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Codec: List: Details .......................................... 395
Table 200 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Session: Details ................................................ 396
Table 201 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Stats ................................................................. 397
Table 202 TR-104: VoiceService: PhyInterface: Details ...................................................................... 399
Table 203 TR-104: VoiceService: PhyInterface: Tests ......................................................................... 400
Table 204 TR-135: VoiceService: Capabilities ..................................................................................... 406
Table 205 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: DVBT ........................................................................... 406
Table 206 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: IP ................................................................................. 407
Table 207 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: PVR ............................................................................. 408
Table 208 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Audio Decoder ............................................................. 408
Table 209 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Video Decoder ............................................................. 409
Table 210 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG2Part2 ............................................................... 409
Vantage Access User’s Guide
45
List of Tables
Table 211 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG2Part2 ProfileLevel Settings .............................. 410
Table 212 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG4Part2 ................................................................411
Table 213 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG4Part2 ProfileLevel Settings ............................. 412
Table 214 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG4Part10 ............................................................. 413
Table 215 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG4Part10 ProfileLevel Settings ........................... 414
Table 216 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: SMPTE VC-1 ............................................................... 414
Table 217 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: SMPTE VC-1 ProfileLevel Settings ............................. 415
Table 218 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Audio Output ............................................................... 416
Table 219 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Video Output ................................................................ 416
Table 220 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Conditional Access ...................................................... 417
Table 221 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Digital Rights Management ......................................... 417
Table 222 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Service Monitoring ....................................................... 418
Table 223 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Audience Statistics ...................................................... 419
Table 224 TR-135: VoiceService: Components ................................................................................... 419
Table 225 TR-135: STBService: Components: Device FrontEnd ........................................................ 420
Table 226 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Modulation ...................................................... 421
Table 227 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Installation ....................................................... 422
Table 228 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Service List Database ..................................... 423
Table 229 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Service List Channels: Entry ........................... 424
Table 230 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Service List Channel Services: Device ........... 425
Table 231 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Logical Channel Connections ........................ 425
Table 232 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Service Connections ....................................... 426
Table 233 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP ............................................................................... 427
Table 234 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: RTCP .................................................................... 427
Table 235 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: RTPAPVF ............................................................. 428
Table 236 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: IGMP .................................................................... 429
Table 237 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Client Group Entry ................................................ 430
Table 238 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Client Group Statistics Entry ................................. 431
Table 239 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Client Group Statistics: Total ................................ 432
Table 240 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Client Group Statistics: CurrentDay ...................... 433
Table 241 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Client Group Statistics: QuarterHour .................... 433
Table 242 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Dejittering ............................................................. 434
Table 243 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Inbound Details .................................................... 435
Table 244 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Outbound Details .................................................. 436
Table 245 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: ServiceConnect .................................................... 437
Table 246 TR-135: STBService: Components: PVR ........................................................................... 437
Table 247 TR-135: STBService: Components: PVR ........................................................................... 438
Table 248 TR-135: STBService: Components: AudoDecoder Details ................................................. 439
Table 249 TR-135: STBService: Components: VideoDecoder Details ................................................ 440
Table 250 TR-135: STBService: Components: AudioOutput Details ................................................... 441
Table 251 TR-135: STBService: Components: VideoOutput Details ................................................... 442
Table 252 TR-135: STBService: Components: SCART Details ........................................................... 444
Table 253 TR-135: STBService: Components: CA Details .................................................................. 445
46
Vantage Access User’s Guide
List of Tables
Table 254 TR-135: STBService: Components: DRM Details ............................................................... 446
Table 255 TR-135: STBService: AVStreams ....................................................................................... 446
Table 256 TR-135: STBService: AVStreams ....................................................................................... 447
Table 257 TR-135: STBService: AVPlayers ........................................................................................ 448
Table 258 TR-135: STBService: AVStreams ....................................................................................... 450
Table 259 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring ............................................................................ 451
Table 260 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream: Details .......................................... 452
Table 261 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Total Statistics ............................... 453
Table 262 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Dejittering Statistics ....................... 453
Table 263 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream RTP Statistics ................................ 454
Table 264 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream MPEG2TSStats ............................. 455
Table 265 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream VideoDecoderStats ....................... 456
Table 266 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream AudioDecoderStats ....................... 458
Table 267 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream VideoResponseStats ..................... 458
Table 268 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Sample Statistics ........................... 459
Table 269 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Dejittering Sample Stats ................ 460
Table 270 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream RTP Sample Statistics ................... 461
Table 271 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Sample MPEG2TSStats ................ 463
Table 272 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Sample VideoDecoder .................. 464
Table 273 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Sample AudioDecoder .................. 465
Table 274 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Sample VideoResponse ............... 466
Table 275 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream HighLevelMetric Details ................ 467
Table 276 TR-135: STBService: Applications: Audience Statistics ..................................................... 468
Table 277 TR-135: STBService: Applications: Audience Statistics: Channel Statistics ....................... 469
Table 278 TR-106: Device: Config ....................................................................................................... 474
Table 279 TR-106: Device: GatewayInfo ............................................................................................. 474
Table 280 TR-106: Device: Info ........................................................................................................... 475
Table 281 TR-106: ManagementServer .............................................................................................. 476
Table 282 TR-106: Time ...................................................................................................................... 478
Table 283 TR-106: UserInterface ........................................................................................................ 479
Table 284 TR-106: LAN ....................................................................................................................... 481
Table 285 TR-106: LAN: DHCPOption: Details ................................................................................... 482
Table 286 TR-106: LAN: Stats ............................................................................................................. 483
Table 287 TR-106: LAN: DHCPOption: Details ................................................................................... 484
Table 288 TR-106: LAN: TraceRouteDiagnostics ................................................................................ 485
Table 289 TR-106 Amendment 1: Device: Info .................................................................................... 490
Table 290 TR-106 Amendment 1: ManagementServer ....................................................................... 492
Table 291 TR-106 Amendment 1: Device: GatewayInfo ..................................................................... 493
Table 292 TR-106 Amendment 1: Device: Config ............................................................................... 494
Table 293 TR-106 Amendment 1: Time ............................................................................................... 494
Table 294 TR-106 Amendment 1: UserInterface ................................................................................. 495
Table 295 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN ................................................................................................ 497
Table 296 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN: DHCPOption: Details ............................................................ 498
Vantage Access User’s Guide
47
List of Tables
Table 297 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN: Stats ...................................................................................... 499
Table 298 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN: DHCPOption: Details ............................................................ 501
Table 299 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN: TraceRouteDiagnostics ........................................................ 502
Table 300 File Manager: Device Firmware: Management ................................................................... 508
Table 301 File Manager: Device Firmware: Scheduled Upgrade List .................................................. 512
Table 302 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Management ................................................................ 514
Table 303 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Backup ......................................................................... 516
Table 304 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Backup List ................................................................... 517
Table 305 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Restore ......................................................................... 519
Table 306 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Restore List .................................................................. 521
Table 307 Types of Accounts ............................................................................................................... 525
Table 308 System Manager: User Management ................................................................................. 526
Table 309 System Manager: User Management: Add User ................................................................ 527
Table 310 System Manager: User Management: User Group ............................................................. 529
Table 311 System Manager: User Management: User Group: Add .................................................... 530
Table 312 System Manager: User Management: Common Setting .................................................... 531
Table 313 System Manager: Download Server ................................................................................... 533
Table 314 System Manager: System Maintenance: Management ...................................................... 535
Table 315 System Manager: System Maintenance: Backup ............................................................... 536
Table 316 System Manager: System Maintenance: Restore ............................................................... 537
Table 317 System Manager: System Maintenance: License ............................................................... 540
Table 318 System Maintenance: License: Upgrade ............................................................................ 541
Table 319 System Manager: System Setting ....................................................................................... 543
Table 320 Monitor Manager: Log Management: History ...................................................................... 548
Table 321 Log Manager: Log Archive .................................................................................................. 549
Table 322 Monitor Manager: Log Management: Log Setting ............................................................... 550
Table 323 Monitor Manager: Log Management: Log Setting: Add ...................................................... 551
Table 324 Monitor Manager: TR-069 Log Management ...................................................................... 552
Table 325 Monitor Manager: Alert Setting: Email Server ..................................................................... 555
Table 326 Monitor Manager: Disk Space Monitor: Monitor Setting ...................................................... 558
Table 327 Monitor Manager: Disk Space Monitor: Disk Space View ................................................... 559
Table 328 Monitor Manager: Statistical Report .................................................................................... 560
Table 329 Diagnostics Manager: Telnet: File Management ................................................................. 563
Table 330 Diagnostics Manager: Telnet: Add File ............................................................................... 564
Table 331 Diagnostics Manager: Telnet: Task Management ............................................................... 565
Table 332 Diagnostics Manager: Telnet: Add or Edit Task .................................................................. 566
Table 333 Diagnostics Manager: Diagnostic Tests .............................................................................. 567
Table 334 Diagnostics Manager: Diagnostic Tests: Add ...................................................................... 568
Table 335 The Call Center Interface .................................................................................................... 572
Table 336 License Specifications ......................................................................................................... 579
48
Vantage Access User’s Guide
P ART I
Introduction
This part contains the following chapters.
•
•
•
•
Introducing Vantage Access (51)
Installation (53)
The Web Configurator (75)
Initial Setup (93)
49
50
CHAPTER
1
Introducing Vantage Access
This chapter introduces Vantage Access and its key features. Refer to the Quick Start Guide
for setup requirements, installation, and access.
1.1 Overview
Vantage Access is a web-based management tool that allows you to remotely management,
control and monitor devices which support the TR-069, TR-098, TR-104, TR-106, TR-111
and TR-135 protocols (from ZyXEL or other vendors). The following figure shows a typical
network example.
Figure 1 Vantage Access Application Example
A
B
C
In this example, you use a computer (A) to log into the web configurator on the Vantage
Access server (B), also known as the Auto-Configuration Server (ACS). You also need to
configure the devices (C) to update their status to the Vantage Access server. Once the Vantage
Access server collects this information, you can
• monitor device status.
• examine device and system logs or events.
• manage multiple devices at a time (for example, remote firmware upgrade, configuration
changes, etc).
• set the Vantage Access server to perform scheduled firmware upgrades on the managed
device(s).
Vantage Access User’s Guide
51
Chapter 1 Introducing Vantage Access
1.2 Key Features
This section describes the main features of Vantage Access.
Remote Device Management
You can remotely manage compatible devices through Vantage Access. In addition, you can
set Vantage Access to update service provision parameters (such as the WAN connection type,
IP address, etc). Changes can be applied to more than one ZyXEL device.
Device Firmware Upgrades
Batch download device firmware from Vantage Access (after downloading the firmware from
a web site) to multiple devices located anywhere, minimizing time, effort and room for error as
well as ensuring firmware consistency across devices. Batch upgrades can be scheduled using
the upgrade scheduler. Device owners can be notified automatically and reports can be
generated detailing any device’s firmware upload history.
Device Monitors and Logs
Monitor the status of all your devices in one application. You can also look at the logs for all
your devices in Vantage Access. Configuration changes logs are also stored for future
reference.
Statistical Reports
Stores reports for historical analysis. These reports include device registration logs, firmware
upgrade history logs and access logs.
File Management and Data Maintenance
You can backup Vantage Access database (containing the device information) and restore
them later.
Multiple Administration Level
Vantage Access provides different login account types (root, manager and call center) that
allow separation of system, device and user management.
52
Vantage Access User’s Guide
CHAPTER
2
Installation
This chapter shows you how to install the Vantage Access and register a ZyXEL device.
2.1 Installation Overview
Vantage Access consists of three packages: DB, BED and HTTPD. You can install these
packages on different or the same server.
• DB: This is the embedded MySQL database server of Vantage Access.
• BED: BED comprises the protocol suite that is used to manage compatible devices, an
Apache server and a watchdog service.
• HTTPD: This is the download server HTTP Daemon used for firmware and configuration
file transfer.
As Vantage Access comes with its own Apache HTTP server (for the download server) and
MySQL database server, it is recommended that you install Vantage Access on a new Linux
computer. If you plan to install Vantage Access on an existing Linux computer, you must
uninstall Apache and MySQL from that server; otherwise they will conflict with Vantage
Access.
2.1.1 Installation Method
You can install Vantage Access using one of the following methods.
• Wizard screens
The user friendly wizard screens are the recommended way to install Vantage Access. You
must log into your Linux computer in graphical mode (such as GNOME or KDE).
• Text-based line command
If your Linux computer does not support graphical mode, use line commands for the
installation. This is only recommended for advanced network administrators.
2.1.2 Minimum System Requirements
For the Vantage Access server:
•
•
•
•
CPU: Dual Intel Xeon 3.0 GHz
Memory: 4 GB
Hard Disk: 80 GB
Operating System: Red Hat Enterprise Linux ES 3
For a Vantage Access client:
Vantage Access User’s Guide
53
Chapter 2 Installation
•
•
•
•
•
•
CPU: Compatible Intel Pentium 450 MHz
Memory: 256 MB
Hard Disk: 2 GB
Web Browser: Internet Explorer 6.0
Flash Player: Flash 9.0
Screen Resolution: 1024 x 768 pixels
2.2 Preparing to Install
Follow the steps below to copy the installation files to the computer(s).
1 Log into the Linux computer as a root user
2 Insert the Vantage Access CD into the CD-ROM and copy the installation files (.bin)
from the Vantage Access CD to a directory in your computer (for example,./Home/
Access).
"
You must install Vantage Access DB first.
2.3 Installation Using the Wizard Screens
This section shows you how to install Vantage Access using the wizard screens.
2.3.1 Installing Vantage Access DB
1 In the folder where you stored the installation file, enter chmod +x
Vantage_Access_DB.bin to set it to be executable.
2 Enter ./Vantage_Access_DB.bin to start the installation process.
3 The wizard screen displays. Click
Next in each screen to continue.
54
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 2 Installation
4 Specify the location for the
database. Accept the default
location (/usr/local) or enter
the file path in the field provided.
5 Select the location for the shortcut
or select Don’t create links if you
don’t want to create shortcuts.
6 Verify your installation options in
this screen and click Next to start
the installation process.
7 After the software component is
installed successfully, the screen
displays. Click Done.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
55
Chapter 2 Installation
2.3.2 Installing Vantage Access BED
1 In the folder where you stored the installation file, enter chmod +x
Vantage_Access_BED.bin to set it to be executable.
2 Enter ./Vantage_Access_BED.bin to start the installation process.
3 The wizard screen displays. Click
Next in each screen to continue.
4 Specify the file location. Accept
the default location or enter the file
path in the field provided.
5 Select the location for the shortcut
or select Don’t create links if you
don’t want to create shortcuts.
56
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 2 Installation
6 Enter the IP address of the
computer on which you installed
Vantage Access DB.
If you install both Vantage Access
DB and Vantage Access BED on
the same computer, enter the
computer IP address or 127.0.0.1.
7 Verify your installation options in
this screen and click Next to start
the installation process.
8 After the software component is
installed successfully, the screen
displays. Click Done.
2.3.3 Installing Vantage Access HTTPD
1 In the folder where you stored the installation file, enter chmod +x
Vantage_Access_HTTPD.bin to set it to be executable.
2 Enter ./Vantage_Access_HTTPD.bin to start the installation process.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
57
Chapter 2 Installation
3 The wizard screen displays. Click
Next in each screen to continue.
4 Specify the file location. Accept
the default location or click
Choose to specify one.
5 Select the location for the shortcut
or select Don’t create links if you
don’t want to create shortcuts.
6 Specify the user name and
password to log into the Vantage
Access HTTPD server. You can
use the default settings (“zyxel”,
“1234”, and port “80”) or enter the
information in the fields provided.
Remember this user name and
password as you will need this
information later.
58
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 2 Installation
"
If you install Vantage Access BED and Vantage Access HTTPD on the same
computer, enter a different port number other than 80 in this screen. For
example, enter 8080.
7 Verify your installation options in
this screen and click Next to start
the installation process.
8 After the software component is
installed successfully, the screen
displays. Click Done.
2.4 Installation Using Text-based Line Commands
This section shows you how to install Vantage Access using text-based commands.
2.4.1 Installing Vantage Access DB
1 In the folder where you stored the installation file, enter chmod +x
Vantage_Access_DB.bin to set it to be executable.
2 Enter ./Vantage_Access_DB.bin -i console to start the installation
process.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
59
Chapter 2 Installation
3 Press [ENTER] at the prompt to continue.
Script started on Wed 30 Aug 2006 10:59:09 AM HKT
[root@localhost root]# cd /usr/local/vantage
[root@localhost vantage]# ./Vantage_Access_DB.bin -i console
Preparing to install...
Extracting the JRE from the installer archive...
Unpacking the JRE...
Extracting the installation resources from the installer archive...
Configuring the installer for this system's environment...
Launching installer...
Preparing CONSOLE Mode Installation...
===========================================================================
(created with InstallAnywhere by Zero G)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
===============================================================================
Introduction:Before You Begin
----------------------------InstallAnywhere will guide you through the installation of Vantage Access DB.
It is strongly recommended that you quit all programs before continuing with
this installation.
You should uninstall any existing MySQL servers on the computer that you will
install tr069 DataBase,Click the 'Next' button to proceed to the next screen.
If you want to change something on a previous screen, click the 'Previous'
button.
You may cancel this installation at any time by typing 'quit'.
PRESS <ENTER> TO CONTINUE:
4 Specify the location for the database or press [ENTER] to accept the default location and
continue.
===============================================================================
Choose the Installation Folder
-----------------------------Select a folder in which you would like to install tr069 DataBase. Spaces in the folder
name or path are not allowed.
Choose installation folder:
:
60
/usr/local/ (DEFAULT: Tr069_db)
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 2 Installation
5 Enter a number to specify the location for the shortcut or press [ENTER] to create the
shortcut in the default location and continue.
===============================================================================
Choose Link Location
-------------------Where would you like to create tr069 DataBase shortcut?
->1- Default: /root
2- In your home folder
3- Choose another location...
4- Don't create links
ENTER THE NUMBER OF AN OPTION ABOVE, OR PRESS <ENTER> TO ACCEPT THE DEFAULT
:
6 Verify your installation options in this screen and press [ENTER] to start the installation
process.
===============================================================================
Pre-Installation Summary
-----------------------Please Review the Following Before Continuing:
Product Name:
Vantage Access DB
Install Folder:
/usr/local/Tr069_db
Link Folder:
/root
Disk Space Information (for Installation Target):
Required: 71,502,793 bytes
Available: 4,754,452,480 bytes
PRESS <ENTER> TO CONTINUE:
Vantage Access User’s Guide
61
Chapter 2 Installation
7 After the software component is installed successfully, press [ENTER] to exit.
===============================================================================
Installing...
------------[==================|==================|==================|==================]
[------------------|------------------|------------------|------------------]
===============================================================================
Installation Complete
--------------------Congratulations. Vantage Access DB has been successfully installed to:
/usr/local/Tr069_db
Press "enter" to quit the installer.
PRESS <ENTER> TO EXIT THE INSTALLER:
[root@localhost vantage]#
2.4.2 Installing Vantage Access BED
1 In the folder where you stored the installation file, enter chmod +x
Vantage_Access_BED.bin to set it to be executable.
2 Enter ./Vantage_Access_BED.bin -i console to start the installation
process.
62
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 2 Installation
3 Press [ENTER] at the prompt to continue.
[root@localhost vantage]# ./Vantage_Access_BED.bin -i console
Preparing to install...
Extracting the JRE from the installer archive...
Unpacking the JRE...
Extracting the installation resources from the installer archive...
Configuring the installer for this system's environment...
Launching installer...
Preparing CONSOLE Mode Installation...
===============================================================================
(created with InstallAnywhere by Zero G)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
===============================================================================
Introduction
-----------InstallAnywhere will guide you through the installation of Tr069_bed.
It is strongly recommended that you quit all programs before continuing with
this installation.
Respond to each prompt to proceed to the next step in the installation.
want to change something on a previous step, type 'back'.
If you
You may cancel this installation at any time by typing 'quit'.
PRESS <ENTER> TO CONTINUE:
4 Specify the file location or press [ENTER] to accept the default location and continue.
===============================================================================
Get User Input
-------------Enter requested information
Choose installation folder:
:
Vantage Access User’s Guide
/usr/local (DEFAULT: Tr069_bed)
63
Chapter 2 Installation
5
Enter a number to specify the location for the shortcut or press [ENTER] to create the
shortcut in the default location and continue.
===============================================================================
Choose Link Location
-------------------Where would you like to create links?
->1- Default: /root
2- In your home folder
3- Choose another location...
4- Don't create links
ENTER THE NUMBER OF AN OPTION ABOVE, OR PRESS <ENTER> TO ACCEPT THE DEFAULT
:
6 Enter the IP address of the computer on which you installed Vantage Access DB.
If you install both Vantage Access DB and Vantage Access BED on the same computer,
enter the computer IP address or 127.0.0.1.
===============================================================================
Entering Database Address
------------------------Please entering database address
Database Address (DEFAULT: ):
64
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 2 Installation
7 Verify your installation options in this screen and press [ENTER] to start the installation
process.
===============================================================================
Pre-Installation Summary
-----------------------Please Review the Following Before Continuing:
Product Name:
Tr069_bed
Install Folder:
/usr/local/Tr069_bed
Link Folder:
/root
Database Address:
192.168.252.10
Disk Space Information (for Installation Target):
Required: 83,932,756 bytes
Available: 4,629,377,024 bytes
PRESS <ENTER> TO CONTINUE:
8 After the software component is installed successfully, press [ENTER] to exit.
===============================================================================
Installing...
------------[==================|==================|==================|==================]
[------------------|------------------|------------------|------------------]
===============================================================================
Installation Complete
--------------------Congratulations. Tr069_bed has been successfully installed to:
/usr/local/Tr069_bed
PRESS <ENTER> TO EXIT THE INSTALLER:
[root@localhost vantage]#
2.4.3 Installing Vantage Access HTTPD
1 In the folder where you stored the installation file, enter chmod +x
Vantage_Access_HTTPD.bin to set it to be executable.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
65
Chapter 2 Installation
2 Enter ./Vantage_Access_HTTPD.bin -i console to start the installation
process.
3 Press [ENTER] at the prompt to continue.
[root@localhost vantage]# ./Vantage_Access_HTTPD.bin -i console
Preparing to install...
Extracting the JRE from the installer archive...
Unpacking the JRE...
Extracting the installation resources from the installer archive...
Configuring the installer for this system's environment...
Launching installer...
Preparing CONSOLE Mode Installation...
===============================================================================
(created with InstallAnywhere by Zero G)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
===============================================================================
Introduction
-----------InstallAnywhere will guide you through the installation of Tr069_httpd.
It is strongly recommended that you quit all programs before continuing with
this installation.
Click the 'Next' button to proceed to the next screen. If you want to change
something on a previous screen, click the 'Previous' button.
You may cancel this installation at any time by clicking the 'Cancel' button.
PRESS <ENTER> TO CONTINUE:
4 Specify the file location or press [ENTER] to accept the default location and continue.
===============================================================================
Choose Install Folder
--------------------Select a folder which you would like to install Vantage Access HTTPD.
Where Would You Like to Install?
Choose installation folder:
:
66
/usr/local/ (DEFAULT: Tr069_httpd)
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 2 Installation
5
Enter a number to specify the location for the shortcut or press [ENTER] to create the
shortcut in the default location and continue.
===============================================================================
Choose Link Location
-------------------Where would you like to create links for Vantage FW Server?
->1- Default: /root
2- In your home folder
3- Choose another location...
4- Don't create links
ENTER THE NUMBER OF AN OPTION ABOVE, OR PRESS <ENTER> TO ACCEPT THE DEFAULT
:
6 Specify the user name and password to log into the Vantage Access HTTPD server. You
can use the default settings or enter the information in the fields provided.
Remember this user name and password as you will need this information later. Press
[ENTER] to continue.
===============================================================================
Entering username
----------------Please entering username for Vantage Access HTTPD. Valid characters include a-z, A-Z
0-9. Default value is "zyxel".
Username (DEFAULT: zyxel):
===============================================================================
Enter password
-------------Please entering password for Vantage Access HTTPD, Valid characters include a-z, A-Z
0-9. Default value is "1234".
Password (DEFAULT: 1234):
7 Specify a port number for the download server and press [ENTER].
Vantage Access User’s Guide
67
Chapter 2 Installation
"
If you install Vantage Access BED and Vantage Access HTTPD on the same
computer, enter a different port number other than 80 in this screen. For
example, enter 8080.
===============================================================================
Enter port
---------Please entering port for Vantage Access HTTPD, Valid port number between 1 to 65535.
Default value is 80.
Notice:
HTTP server and Vantage Access can run at the same computer just when they use
different port number.Port number of HTTP server can be set to except 80(80 is used by
Vantage Access.).
Port (DEFAULT: 80): 8080
8 Verify your installation options in this screen and press [ENTER] to start the installation
process.
===============================================================================
Pre-Installation Summary
-----------------------Please Review the Following Before Continuing:
Product Name:
Tr069_httpd
Install Folder:
/usr/local/Tr069_httpd
Link Folder:
/root
Disk Space Information (for Installation Target):
Required: 79,164,926 bytes
Available: 4,512,309,248
PRESS <ENTER> TO CONTINUE:
68
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 2 Installation
9 After the software component is installed successfully, press [ENTER] to exit. It is
recommended that you reboot your computer.
===============================================================================
Installing...
------------[==================|==================|==================|==================]
[------------------|------------------|------------------|------------------]
===============================================================================
Installation Complete
--------------------Congratulations. Tr069_httpd has been successfully installed to:
/usr/local/Tr069_httpd
Recommand, reboot your computer!
PRESS <ENTER> TO EXIT THE INSTALLER:
[root@localhost vantage]#
10 Restart your computer.
2.5 Starting Vantage Access
After the installation, you need to start the Vantage Access DB, BED and HTTPD services.
You can do this in one of two ways,
• Enter ./start.sh in the directories (Tr069_db, Tr069_bed and Tr069_httpd).
• If you choose to create shortcuts during the installation process, you can also use the
shortcuts in your home directory (/root) or specific location(s) to start Vantage Access.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
69
Chapter 2 Installation
The following figure shows how to start Vantage Access using the ./start.sh command
for each software component.
[root@localhost local]# cd /usr/local/Tr069_db
[root@localhost Tr069_db]# ./start.sh
Starting mysqld daemon with databases from /usr/local/Tr069_db/mysql/data
############################################################################
###
Vantage_Access_DB started successfully!
###
############################################################################
[root@localhost Tr069_db]# cd /usr/local/Tr069_bed
[root@localhost Tr069_bed]# ./start.sh
Starting tr069...success
Starting httpd...success
Starting watchdog...success
###################################################################
Vantage Access started (tr069 pid 2364; httpd pid 2377)
Version: 2.0.47.83.00b31
Date: 2007-06-15
###################################################################
[root@localhost Tr069_bed]# cd /usr/local/Tr069_httpd
[root@localhost Tr069_httpd]# ./start.sh
############################################################################
Vantage Access HTTPD started successfully from /usr/local/Tr069_httpd
Version: 2.0.47.83.00b3
Date: 2007-06-15
############################################################################
[root@localhost Tr069_httpd]#
2.6 Stopping Vantage Access
You can stop Vantage Access DB, BED and HTTPD services in one of two ways,
• use the ./stop.sh command in the folders (Tr069_db, Tr069_bed and
Tr069_httpd).
• If you choose to create shortcuts during the installation process, you can also use the
shortcuts in your home directory (/root) or specific location(s) to stop Vantage Access
services.
70
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 2 Installation
The following figure shows how to stop Vantage Access services using shortcuts in the home
directory.
[root@localhost root]# ls
manaconda-ks.cfg
LaunchVantageAccess_DB
Vantage_Access_BED.bin
install.log
Vantage_Access_DB.bin
install.log.syslog
StopVantageAccess_BED Vantage_Access_HTTPD.bin LaunchVantageAccess_HTTPD
StopVantageAccess_DB
LaunchVantageAccess_BED
StopVantageAccess_HTTPD
[root@localhost root]#
[root@localhost root]# ./StopVantageAccess_DB
############################################################################
###
Vantage_Access_DB shutdown successfully!
###
############################################################################
[root@localhost root]#
[root@localhost root]# ./StopVantageAccess_BED
Stopping httpd....success
Stopping tr069 server....success
############################################################################
Vantage Access BED stopped successfully
############################################################################
No watchdog is running.
[root@localhost root]# ./StopVantageAccess_HTTPD
############################################################################
Vantage Access HTTPD shutdown successfully
############################################################################
[root@localhost root]#
2.7 Uninstalling Vantage Access
You can uninstall Vantage Access using either text-based commands or the wizard screens. To
remove Vantage Access from your computer, you must run the uninstall script for each
component.
2.7.1 Using Commands
Follow the steps below to uninstall Vantage Access using commands.
1 Open a terminal window and go to the directory where Vantage Access is installed.
2 In the “Uninstall_Vantage Access DB” folder, enter ./
Uninstall_Vantage_Access_DB -i console to uninstall Vantage Access
DB. Press [ENTER] when the uninstall process is complete.
3 In the “Uninstall_Tr069_bed” folder, enter ./Uninstall_Tr069_bed -i
console to uninstall Vantage Access BED. Press [ENTER] when the uninstall process
is complete.
4 In the “Uninstall_Tr069_httpd” folder, enter ./Uninstall_Tr069_httpd
-i console to uninstall Vantage Access HTTPD. Press [ENTER] when the uninstall
process is complete.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
71
Chapter 2 Installation
2.7.2 Using the Wizard Screens
Follow the steps below to uninstall Vantage Access using the wizard screens.
1 Open a terminal window and go to the directory where Vantage Access is installed.
2 In the “Uninstall_Vantage Access DB” folder, enter ./
Uninstall_Vantage_Access_DB to uninstall Vantage Access DB. A screen
displays as shown. Click Uninstall to remove this component. Then click Done when
the uninstall process is complete.
Figure 2 Uninstall: Vantage Access DB
3 In the “Uninstall_Tr069_bed” folder, enter ./Uninstall_Tr069_bed to
uninstall Vantage Access BED. A screen displays as shown. Click Uninstall to remove
this component. Then click Done when the uninstall process is complete.
Figure 3 Uninstall: Vantage Access BED
72
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 2 Installation
4 In the “Uninstall_Tr069_httpd” folder, enter ./Uninstall_Tr069_httpd
to uninstall Vantage Access HTTPD. A screen displays as shown. Click Uninstall to
remove this component. Then click Done when the uninstall process is complete.
Figure 4 Uninstall: Vantage Access HTTPD
Vantage Access User’s Guide
73
Chapter 2 Installation
74
Vantage Access User’s Guide
CHAPTER
3
The Web Configurator
This chapter provides the minimum requirements to use the web configurator, describes how
to access the web configurator, and explains each part of the main screen in the web
configurator.
3.1 Web Browser Requirements
The web configurator is a browser-based interface that you can use to set up, manage, and use
Vantage Access. You can access it on the Vantage Access server or on a different computer.
Your web browser should meet the following requirements:
•
•
•
•
Internet Explorer 6.0
JavaScript enabled
Macromedia Flash Player 9.0 or later
Recommended screen resolution: 1024 x 768 pixels
3.2 Login Accounts
Vantage Access provides three login account types with different privilege levels. The web
configurator screens and privileges vary depending on which account you use to log in. The
following table shows the default user name and password for the different login accounts.
Table 1 Default Login Accounts
TYPE
DEFAULT SETTINGS
Root
User name: root
Password: root
Manager
No default account.
Call Center
No default account.
Refer to Table 307 on page 525 for more information on the login accounts.
3.3 Accessing the Web Configurator
To access the web configurator, follow these steps:
1 Start Vantage Access (refer to the Quick Start Guide).
Vantage Access User’s Guide
75
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
2 Open a web browser, and enter “http://a.b.c.d”, where “a.b.c.d” is the IP address of the
Vantage Access server (for example, http://10.10.10.1).
If you open the web configurator on the same computer Vantage Access is installed, you
can also enter “http://localhost”.
3 Select I have a license to activate Vantage Access to start the product registration.
Then click Continue.
Select I will upgrade later to skip the product registration. Click Continue and a login
screen displays. See step 5.
Figure 5 Web Configurator: License Setup Screen
4 A License screen displays. Enter the license key and the MyZyXEL.com account
information in the fields provided. Click Apply to activate the product.
Figure 6 Web Configurator: License Screen
5 A Login screen displays as shown. Specify the User Name and Password fields.
76
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
Figure 7 Web Configurator: Login Screen
6 Click Login.
"
By default, if you enter the wrong password three times for a user name, you
have to wait for 10 minutes before Vantage Access allows you to log in again
with the same user name. You can change this in the System Manager > User
Management > Common Setting screen. It is recommended that you change the
default manager login password after the first login.
7 For root or manager login, the Vantage Access dashboard screen displays. If you log in
as a user, the About screen displays.
"
If there is no activity for more than 15 minutes, the web configurator
automatically logs you out. If this happens to you, simply log back into the web
configurator again.
3.4 Reinstall Existing License on Vantage Access
If you perform a new installation of Vantage Access, but want to use a license key from a
previously purchased and registered instance of Vantage Access. Do the following:
1 Log into http://www.myzyxel.com.
2 Browse to Vantage Access product detail screen of your already registered Vantage
Access.
3 Click Reinstall to use your existing license key for the new installation of Vantage
Access.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
77
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
Figure 8 Product Information Screen in MyZyXEL.com
4 You are prompted to enter the New Authentication Code which can be copied from
System Manager > License > Authentication Code (AC) on your new install Vantage
Access server. Click Submit then.
Figure 9 Reinstall Product Screen in MyZyXEL.com
5 Connect your Vantage Access to Internet, click Refresh in System Manager > License
to get the latest status update from MyZyXEL.com database.
Figure 10 Web Configurator: License Details Screen
78
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
3.5 The Dashboard Screen
The Dashboard screen is the first screen that you see when you first log into the web
configurator as root or manager. You can also display this screen by clicking Dashboard in
the control panel. Field labels vary depending on your login account type.
This screen shows a summary of the system and managed device information.
Figure 11 Web Configurator: Dashboard
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 2 Dashboard
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Device
Information
Total Devices
This field displays the total number of devices in the Vantage Access database.
Unregistered
This field displays the number of unregistered devices in the Vantage Access
database. If a device is unregistered, Vantage Access is unable to connect to and
update configuration settings to or obtain information from the device.
Registered
This field displays the number of registered devices in the Vantage Access
database. If a device is registered Vantage Access is able to connect to the device,
update configuration settings or obtain information from the device.
Schedule Task
Firmware
This column displays information on tasks related to device firmware upgrades.
Config Backup
This column displays information on tasks related to backing up devices’
configuration.
Config Restore
This column displays information on tasks related to restoring devices’
configuration.
Success Task
This field displays the number of scheduled tasks that Vantage Access has
performed successfully. Click a number to see a list of tasks.
Fail Task
This field displays the number of scheduled tasks that Vantage Access was unable
to perform successfully. Click a number to see a list of tasks.
Timeout Task
This field displays the number of scheduled tasks that timed out and Vantage
Access was unable to perform successfully. Click a number to see a list of tasks.
Incomplete Task
This field displays the number of scheduled tasks that were not finished. Click a
number to see a list of tasks.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
79
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
Table 2 Dashboard (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
System
Resource
CPU Usage
This bar displays the percentage of the CPU’s processing resources the Vantage
Access is using.
Memory Usage
This bar displays the percentage of the memory resources the Vantage Access is
using.
System Status
Version
This field displays the Vantage Access version running on the computer.
IP Address
This field displays the IP address of the Vantage Access computer.
System Uptime
This field displays the time since the Vantage Access service was last restarted on
the computer.
Current Date/
Time
This field displays the current system time and date in the format yyyy-mm-ddThhmm-ss. The character “T” separates the date (yyyy-mm-dd) and time (hh-mm-ss).
Current User
Name
This field displays the user name and the time of login for the current web
configurator session.
Current User
Login Time
This field displays the elapsed time since the user logged in.
Number of Login
Users
This field displays the total number of users logged into Vantage Access.
3.6 Vantage Access Web Configurator Overview
This section describes the parts of a Vantage Access screen.
Figure 12 Web Configurator Screen Overview
A
B
C
80
E
D
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
The web configuration screen is divided into the following parts:
• The control panel (A)
The control panel displays in every web configurator screen. All the common web
configurator buttons are in the control panel.
• The title bar (B)
The title bar displays the login name or device information, and link path.
• The device window (C)
The device window displays the devices that are managed by the Vantage Access. You can
also configure and view the logical groupings of the managed devices.
• The navigation panel (D)
The navigation panel displays a list of links that you click to access configuration or log
screens.
• The configuration window (E)
The configuration window displays the configuration screens that you set for Vantage
Access or a selected device.
"
For security reasons, Vantage Access automatically times out after fifteen
minutes of inactivity. Log in again if this happens.
3.7 Control Panel
The following table describes the icons in the control panel.
Table 3 Title Bar Icon Description
ICON
DESCRIPTION
Click this icon to display the navigation links to screens that allow you to view, monitor
or manage a selected device.
Click this icon to display the navigation links to screens that allow you to manage
device firmware and configuration files.
Note: This icon is available in the web configurator only when you
log in using a manager user account.
Click this icon to display the navigation links to screens that allow you to manage login
user accounts and system logs and, if you log in as root, file server, license and system
settings.
Click this icon to display the navigation links to screens that allow you to manage logs,
email events, disk space and statistical reports.
Click this icon to display the navigation links to screens that allow you to configure
telnet and diagnostic settings.
Click this icon to display the dashboard screen and view the current system
information.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
81
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
Table 3 Title Bar Icon Description (continued)
ICON
DESCRIPTION
Click this icon to open a screen that displays the version of Vantage Access.
Click this icon to open the help page for the current screen in Vantage Access.
Click this icon to log out of Vantage Access.
3.8 Device Window
The device window displays when you click the Provision Manager or icon.
Use the device window to view the logical network topology, search for a device, view general
device status or select which device(s) you want to edit configuration settings.
3.8.1 Topology
You can view the logical network topology in the Topology screen in the device window. You
can also create, delete or rename a device group folder in the Topology screen.
In the Topology screen, you can only view the group folder(s) for your login account. You
cannot view the group folders created by another user.
Figure 13 Device Window: Topology
82
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
The following table describes the labels in the Device window.
Table 4 Device Window: Topology
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Topology
Click Topology to display device groups in a tree structure.
This icon displays to the left of a device when the device is successfully registered.
No icon displays if the device is not registered, registration is incomplete or has failed.
Name
This field displays the descriptive name of a managed device.
Type
This field displays the model number of a managed device. For example, P-2602R.
prev
Click prev to go to the previous screen in the device list.
next
Click next to go to the next screen in the device list.
Go
Enter a page number and click Go to display the entries in that screen.
Search
Click Search to look for a device.
3.8.1.1 Creating a Group Folder
Topology group folders allow you to group managed devices logically. You can add or delete
device(s) in a group. The following steps show you how to create a device group folder in the
Topology screen.
1 In the device window, click Topology.
2 Right-click on Device Pool and click Add Group.
Figure 14 Device Window: Topology: Add a Group
3 The screen displays as shown. Enter a descriptive name for the group and click Save.
Figure 15 Device Window: Topology: Add Group
4 A new folder icon displays.
3.8.1.2 Deleting a Group
Deleting a group removes the association between the device(s) and the group folder. It does
not delete the devices.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
83
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
Follow the steps below to delete a group.
1 In the device window, click Topology.
2 Right-click on a group folder and click Delete Group.
Figure 16 Device Window: Topology: Delete Group
3 A warning screen displays.
Click OK to delete.
Click Cancel to close this screen without deleting the selected group.
Figure 17 Device Window: Topology: Delete Group Prompt
3.8.1.3 Removing a Group
When you remove a group, you delete the group folder and all the associated device(s).
1 In the device window, click Topology.
2 Right-click on a folder and click Remove Group.
Figure 18 Device Window: Topology: Remove a Group
3 A warning screen displays.
84
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
Click OK to delete.
Click Cancel to close this screen without deleting the selected group.
Figure 19 Device Window: Topology: Remove Group
3.8.1.4 Renaming a Group Folder
1 In the device window, click Topology.
2 Right-click on a folder and click Rename.
Figure 20 Device Window: Topology: Rename
3 Specify a unique, descriptive name (up to 64 alphanumerical characters including 0-9, az, A-Z, _, -) in the Group Name field and click Save.
Figure 21 Device Window: Topology: Change Name
3.8.2 Device Search
Use the Search function in the device window to look for a device.
1 In the device window, click Search.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
85
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
Figure 22 Device Window: Search
2 Specify the search criteria (such as the device type, device name, etc.) and click Search.
If you want to see all devices in Vantage Access, leave all search criteria blank and click
Search. The list of devices displayed varies depending on your login account; see
Section 3.8.3.1 on page 87 for more information.
3 Vantage Access displays the device(s) that match any of the search criteria. Refer to
Table 4 on page 83 for information on device information fields and navigation.
After the device(s) are found, you can add the selected device(s) to a group, associate or unassociate the device(s). See Section 3.8.3 on page 86 for more information.
3.8.3 Device List
The Device List screen displays when you preform a device search, or select a device or a
device group in the device window. Use this screen to view detailed device information (such
as the MAC address, firmware version and the registration status). To view detailed status,
display the Device Status screen (see Chapter 5 on page 101).
The title bar displays the name of the device group to which the device belongs and the serial
number. To sort the entries in the table, click on a heading in the table.
86
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
Figure 23 Configuration Window: Device List
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 5 Configuration Screen: Device List
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Entries Per
Page
Select how many entries you want to display in a page.
This icon displays to the left of a device when the device is successfully registered.
No icon displays if the device is not registered, registration is incomplete or has failed.
Name
This field displays the descriptive name of a device.
OUI-SN
This field displays the Organization Unique Identifier (OUI) and the serial number of a
device.
Type
This field displays the model of a device. For example, P-2602R.
Subscriber
This field displays the Subscriber Name you configure in the Device Status screen.
Owner
This field displays the name of the manager who is responsible for this device.
SW Version
This field displays the firmware version the ZyXEL device is currently running.
IP Addr
This field displays the device’s WAN IP address.
Next
Click Next to go to the next screen.
First
This link is not available in the first screen.
Click First to return to the first screen.
Prev
Click Prev to go to the previous screen.
Last
This link is not available in the last screen.
Click Last to go to the last screen.
Go
Enter a page number and click Go to display the entries in that page.
3.8.3.1 Displaying Devices
To view a list of devices in Vantage Access, click Search in the device window, leave all
search criteria blank, and click Search. The list of devices displayed varies depending on your
login account.
• For root login, this screen displays all devices in Vantage Access.
• For manager login, this screen displays the device(s) associated to a manager account.
• For guest login, this screen displays the device(s) associated with the manager that created
the guest account.
3.8.3.2 Adding a Device to a Group
Follow the steps below to add a device to a group.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
87
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
1 In the device window, click Search. Either enter the search criteria for the device and
click Search, or leave the fields blank and click Search to display all devices.
2 Select the device(s) in the list. To select more than one device, hold down the [CTRL]
key and click. To select a range of devices, hold down the [SHIFT] key and click at the
same time. Then click AddToGroup.
3 In the Group Name field, enter or select the name of the group to which you want to
associate the devices and click Save.
Figure 24 Device Window: Device List: Add Device to Group
3.8.3.3 Associating a Device with a User
Devices are members of device groups, and users are members of user groups. To associate a
device with a user, you must assign the device to a device group, assign the user to a user
group, then associate the device group with the user group. Take the following steps.
1
2
3
4
88
Log into Vantage Access as root.
Create a device group. See Section 3.8.1.1 on page 83.
Add the device to the device group. See Section 3.8.3.2 on page 87.
Create a user group that associates the device group with users. Click System Manager
> User Management > User Group > Add. The following screen displays.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
Figure 25 Add User Group
• Enter a Group Name.
• Select the required users from the User Pool and Add them to the User List.
• Select the required device group from the Device Group Pool and Add them to the
Binding Device Group.
• Click Apply. Alternatively, click Back to return to the previous screen without saving
your settings.
3.8.4 Right-click Menu
In the device window, if you right-click without selecting a device first, the following menu
displays.
Figure 26 Device Window: Right-click Menu
Click Settings... to display the Adobe Flash Player Settings screen if you want to change the
Flash privacy settings on Vantage Access. For more information, refer to the online help in the
Adobe Flash Player Settings screen.
Click About Adobe Flash Player 9... to get information about the current version of Flash.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
89
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
3.9 Navigation Panel
Use this panel to navigate to and display the screens. These screens are organized into
different menus. Menus available in the navigation panel vary depending your login account
type and whether you have selected a device or device group.
You can only expand the submenus from a menu at one time. If you expand another one, the
previous one automatically contracts.
"
Not all options are available for all user privilege levels.
Grayed-out links indicate features not available for the current device or group
selection.
The following table describes the menus.
Table 6 Navigation Panel: Menu Summary
MENU
DESCRIPTION
Provision
Manager
Device Status
This link takes you to a screen where you can view the current settings of the
selected ZyXEL device.
Task Monitor
This link takes you to a screen where you can view information about pending
device configuration changes.
History
This link takes you to a screen where you can view device history logs.
Template
This link takes you to screens where you can manage, save and load device
configuration templates.
Device
Manipulation
This link takes you to screens where you can import and rename devices.
Provision
This link takes you to screens where you can view and edit configuration settings
on the selected device or device group.
Short Cut
This link takes you to screens where you can view, add and delete short cuts.
Short cuts allow you to use short names to control complex device configuration
procedures.
File Manager
Device
Firmware
This link takes you to screens where you can manage device firmware files on the
download server and configure device firmware upgrades.
Vendor Config
File
This link takes you to screens where you can manage, backup and restore vendor
configuration files.
System Manager
90
User
Management
This link takes you to screens where you can create, delete and view login
accounts.
Download
Server
This link takes you to a screen where you can specify the download server for file
transfer.
System
Maintenance
This link takes you to a screen where you can view, manage, backup and restore
the backup files on the download server.
License
This link takes you to a screen you use to register Vantage Access and view
registration information.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
Table 6 Navigation Panel: Menu Summary (continued)
MENU
System
Setting
DESCRIPTION
This link takes you to a screen you use to configure mail, download server,
myzyxel.com, firmware and configuration file timing settings.
Monitor Manager
Log
Management
This link takes you to screens where you can view log history, retrieve or delete
archive logs, configure log retention settings, add devices to the debug list, and
manage the TR-069 log.
Alert Setting
This link takes you to screens where you can configure the E-mail server settings
for sending E-mails to users, and manage the log types that trigger E-mails to be
sent.
Disk Space
Monitor
This link takes you to screens where you can see the amount of disk space
currently in use, and configure the maximum percentage of disk space that may
be used.
Statistical
Report
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the frequency and
destination e-mail address of statistical reports. These reports include information
on the total number of devices, the number of registered devices, and the change
in the total number of devices (and registered devices) in a given time period.
Diagnostics
Manager
Telnet
This link takes you to screens where you can configure Telnet tasks and task files.
Diagnostic
Test
This link takes you to screens where you can configure IP Ping Diagnostics, WAN
DSL Diagnostics, WAN ATM F5 Loop back Diagnostics. The diagnostics available
depend on the device type.
3.10 About Vantage Access
The About screen is the first screen that displays every time you click on an icon in the
Control Panel. Use this screen to check the version of your Vantage Access.
Figure 27 About
To display the software version information in a pop-up screen, click the About icon.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
91
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
Figure 28 About: Pop-up
92
Vantage Access User’s Guide
CHAPTER
4
Initial Setup
This chapter shows you how to configure the download server and register a ZyXEL device in
Vantage Access.
4.1 Specifying a Download Server
You must specify a server to store device firmware and configuration files and perform
automatic remote firmware upgrades or configuration restores on the devices.
1 Log into the web configurator as root (the default user name is “root” and the default
password is “root”) and click the System Manager icon in the Control Panel.
2 Click Download Server in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen.
Figure 29 System Manager: Download Server
3 In the IP Address field, enter the IP address of the download server in dotted decimal
notation.
"
If the download server and Vantage Access are installed on the same computer,
you must use a different port number for the download server and specify the
port number. For example, if the download server (192.168.100.1) is using port
8080, then enter “192.168.100.1:8080” in the IP Address field.
4 Set the User Name and Password fields to access the download server. If you have
changed the default settings (“zyxel” and “1234”) during the installation process, enter
the new account information. The account user name and password are case sensitive.
5 Click Apply to save the settings.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
93
Chapter 4 Initial Setup
4.2 Registering a Device
You must register one or more compatible devices to Vantage Access to allow remote
management.
• To register a single device, enter its information in the Provision Manager > Device
Manipulation screen (see Section 8.1.2 on page 113).
• To register single or multiple devices, configure the devices’ information in an XML or
CSV file and upload the file to Vantage Access.
See Section 4.2.1 on page 94 for information on using an XML file, and see Section 4.2.2
on page 95 for information on using a CSV file.
• Configure the device to allow remote management from Vantage Access. See Section
4.2.4 on page 96
"
You can import and register any compliant devices to Vantage Access.
4.2.1 Editing an XML File
You can import multiple devices to Vantage Access at one time using an XML file.
To import multiple devices at one time, you need to create an XML file that contains the
information (such as the device name, OUI, serial number and device type) for each
compatible device. To download an example file, click Provision Manager > Device Manipulation
> Import Devices > Example.xml. You can modify the example file with your devices’ information.
The following shows an example for two ZyXEL compatible devices.
Figure 30 Sample Device XML File
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<Template xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance">
<Device>
<deviceName>a</deviceName>
<OUI>001349</OUI>
<serialNumber>001349000000</serialNumber>
<deviceType>P-2602HW-D1A</deviceType>
<subName>Fred</subName>
<subEmail>[email protected]</subEmail>
<subTelephone>13665120000</subTelephone>
<subPostal>226699</subPostal>
<subAddress>SiPailou</subAddress>
<subCity>Nanjing</subCity>
<subState>Jiangsu</subState>
<subCountry>China</subCountry>
</Device>
</Template>
94
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Initial Setup
4.2.2 Editing a CSV File
You can import multiple devices to Vantage Access at one time using a CSV (CommaSeparated Values) file. You can view and edit CSV files in a spreadsheet application such as
Microsoft Excel.
To import multiple devices at one time, you need to create an CSV file that contains the
information (such as the device name, OUI, serial number and device type) for each
compatible device. To download an example file, click Provision Manager > Device
Manipulation > Import Devices > Example.csv. You can then modify it with your devices’
information. The following shows an example for two ZyXEL compatible devices.
Figure 31 Sample Device CSV File in Microsoft Excel
4.2.3 Importing Devices
Follow the steps below to import the compatible device(s).
1 Log into Vantage Access as root or a manager and click the Provision Manager icon.
Click Device Manipulation > Import Devices in the navigation panel.
Figure 32 Device Manipulation: Import Device
2 To import one device, select Import One Device and enter the device information in the
fields provided. Click More Subscriber Information to see more fields.
To import more than one device, select Import Devices Using File and specify the
location and name of the XML or CSV file or click Browse to locate it.
To import devices with consecutive serial numbers (for example 0012300000565,
0012300000566, 0012300000567, and so on) select Import Devices with consecutive
serial number. Enter the serial number information and device information in the fields
provided.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
95
Chapter 4 Initial Setup
3 Click Import.
4 When the file import is successful, you can Search for the new entry or entries. The new
devices are not yet registered. To complete the device registration, see Section 4.2.4 on
page 96.
If you cannot see the new entry or entries, check the system logs and make sure the XML
or CSV file format is correct.
Figure 33 Check New Device
4.2.4 Device Setup for Registration
You must configure the managed device to allow remote management from Vantage Access.
Refer to the user’s guide that comes with your compatible device for more information. The
following shows how to enable TR-069 communication protocol between a ZyXEL
compatible device and Vantage Access.
The following describes the steps to configure settings on a ZyXEL compatible device. Steps
may vary depending on your device. Refer to the documentation that comes with your device.
1 To activate TR-069 on the ZyXEL compatible device, access the CLI and enter the
following commands.
wan tr load
Enables TR-069 configuration.
wan tr active 1
Activates TR-069 remote management.
wan tr acsUrl
172.25.21.174/TR069
Sets the IP address of the Vantage Access server. For example,
172.25.21.174.
wan tr periodicEnable 1
Enables periodic information update to the server.
wan tr informInterval 30 Sets the information update time. For example, 30 seconds.
wan tr debug on
Enables TR-069 debug mode to view logs.
wan tr save
Saves the settings.
wan tr reset
Sets the device to register to the Vantage Access server right away.
2 Once connected to the network, the ZyXEL device automatically locates and registers to
the Vantage Access server.
96
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Initial Setup
"
For initial setup, the registration process may take several minutes (depending
on your network condition).
3 Search for the device and check its status. If the Registered icon displays (
) and
the device is an Internet Gateway device, device registration is successful and Vantage
Access has stored the ZyXEL compatible device information to its database.
Figure 34 Device List: Check Registered Device
You can now select the device and use the Provision screens in Vantage Access to remotely
configure this ZyXEL compatible device.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
97
Chapter 4 Initial Setup
98
Vantage Access User’s Guide
P ART II
Provision Manager
This part contains the following chapters.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Device Status (101)
Task Monitor (107)
Device History Logs (109)
Device Manipulation (113)
Template Management (119)
Data Model Management (127)
Device Provisioning (129)
Short Cut (137)
99
100
CHAPTER
5
Device Status
This chapter describes the Device Status screen that shows the system status of a selected
device.
5.1 Viewing Device Status
The Device Status screen displays when you select a device in the device window. Use this
screen to view detailed device information (such as the MAC address, firmware version,
registration status, and subscriber information).
Log into Vantage Access and click the Provision Manager in the control panel, select a
device in the Device List panel and click Device Status to display this screen. Labels
displayed in this screen vary depending on the type of device you select.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
101
Chapter 5 Device Status
Figure 35 Provision Manager > Device Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 7 Provision Manager > Device Status
102
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Check Status
Click this to display the current status of the device (online or offline).
Reboot
Click this to reboot the device.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Device Status
Table 7 Provision Manager > Device Status (continued)
LABEL
Retrieve
DESCRIPTION
Click this to obtain the latest device status information from the Vantage Access
database.
Device Information
Model Name
This field displays the device model.
Serial
Number
This field displays the device’s individual factory serial number.
Firmware
Version
This field displays the version of the firmware the device is currently using.
WAN Information
DSL Mode
This field displays the WAN connection type.
MAC
Address
This displays the device’s MAC (Media Access Control) address.
IP Address
This field displays the WAN IP address of the device.
IP Subnet
Mask
This field displays the subnet mask for the WAN IP address above.
Default
Gateway
This field displays the IP address of the default gateway.
DSL
This field displays whether the DSL connection is Up or Down.
VPI/VCI
This field displays the VPI and VCI numbers for the DSL link.
LAN Information
IP Address
This field displays the LAN IP address of the device.
IP Subnet
Mask
This field displays the subnet mask of the LAN IP address above.
DHCP
This field displays the settings of the DHCP server on the device.
WLAN Information
SSID
This field displays the name of the wireless network on the device.
Channel
This field displays the channel number for the wireless network.
WEP
This field displays the information of the WEP security setting.
WLAN
This field displays whether the WLAN interface is enabled or disabled on the
device.
VOIP1 Status
URI
This field displays the URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) to identify this VoIP
connection.
VOIP2 Status
URI
This field displays the URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) to identify this VoIP
connection.
Data Model
Device
Summary
This field displays the configuration template this device is currently using.
Connection Request
TCP
ConnectionR
equestURL
Vantage Access User’s Guide
This field displays the URL of the device to which Vantage Access sends a TCP
(Transmission Control Protocol) connection request.
103
Chapter 5 Device Status
Table 7 Provision Manager > Device Status (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
UDP
ConnectionR
equestURL
This field displays the URL of the device to which Vantage Access sends a UDP
(User Datagram Protocol) connection request.
Protocol
This field displays whether Vantage Access uses TCP or UDP to request a
connection.
ConnectionR
equestUsern
ame
This field displays the user name Vantage Access uses to access the device.
This is required if you want Vantage Access to initiate a connection and access the
device.
ConnectionR
equestPassw
ord
This field displays the password associated with the user name above.
Subscriber Information
Edit (
)
Click this to edit this device’s subscriber information. The Device Status >
Subscriber screen displays.
Subscriber
Name
This displays the subscribers name for this device.
Email
This displays the subscriber’s e-mail address for this device.
Address
This displays the subscriber’s street address for this device.
Telephone
Number
This displays the subscriber’s telephone number for this device.
City
This displays the subscriber’s city for this device.
State
This displays the subscriber’s state, region or province for this device.
Postal
This displays the subscriber’s postal or zip code for this device.
Country
This displays the subscriber’s country for this device.
5.1.1 The Device Status > Subscriber Screen
Use this screen to configure information about a device’s subscriber. This information displays
in the Device Status screen.
To display this screen, log into Vantage Access and click the Provision Manager in the
control panel, select a device in the Device List panel, click Device Status, then click the edit
icon (
). The following screen displays.
Figure 36 Device Status > Subscriber
104
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Device Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 8 Device Status > Subscriber
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Subscriber Name
Enter the subscriber’s name for this device.
Email
Enter the subscriber’s e-mail address for this device.
Address
Enter the subscriber’s street address for this device.
Telephone Number
Enter the subscriber’s telephone number for this device.
City
Enter the subscriber’s city for this device.
State
Enter the subscriber’s state, region or province for this device.
Postal
Enter the subscriber’s postal or zip code for this device.
Country
Enter the subscriber’s country for this device.
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving your changes.
Apply
Click this to save your changes and return to the previous screen.
Reset
Click this to reset the fields in this screen to their default values.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
105
Chapter 5 Device Status
106
Vantage Access User’s Guide
CHAPTER
6
Task Monitor
This chapter describes the Task Monitor screen you use to monitor device configuration
changes.
6.1 Task Monitor Overview
Use the Task Monitor screen to view a list of configuration changes waiting to be applied and
updated on the selected device(s). You can display the list of configuration changes for one or
a group of devices.
When the device modifies a parameter and notifies Vantage Access, the log is removed from
the Task Monitor screen and added to the History screen (see Chapter 7 on page 109).
Click the Provision Manager icon in the control panel, then select a device or device group
folder in the Device List. Then click Task Monitor in the navigation panel to display the
screen.
Figure 37 Provision Manager > Task Monitor
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 9 Provision Manager > Task Monitor
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Entries Per
Page
Select how many entries you want to display in a page.
#
Select this option and click Delete to remove the entry from the table.
Click Select All to select all entries in this screen.
Note: Vantage Access will not make the changes to the device(s)
once the entries are removed from the Task Monitor screen.
Dev Name
This field displays the device’s name.
Method
This field displays the configuration action.
Value
This field displays the new value for the parameter to be changed.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
107
Chapter 6 Task Monitor
Table 9 Provision Manager > Task Monitor (continued)
108
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Parameter
This field displays the name of the parameter to be changed.
Operator
This field displays the action operator of the device.
Next
Click Next to go to the next screen.
First
This link is not available in the first screen.
Click First to return to the first screen.
Prev
Click Prev to go to the previous screen.
Last
This link is not available in the last screen.
Click Last to go to the last screen.
Go
Enter a page number and click Go to display the entries in that screen.
Delete
Click Delete to remove the selected entry or entries.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
CHAPTER
7
Device History Logs
This chapter describes the History screen where you can display, query or purge device logs.
7.1 History Device Log Overview
Vantage Access stores five types of logs: Firmware, provision, system, notification and
VendorConfigFile logs.
• Firmware logs record changes relating to the firmware of a managed device. Configure
firmware changes in the File Manager > Device Firmware screens.
• Provision logs record changes in the provisioning of a managed device. Configure
provisioning changes in the Provision Manager screens.
• System logs relate to the configuration changes and login status in Vantage Access. For
example, you can check the log to see if the device file import is successful.
• Notification logs record changes to parameter values sent from a managed device.
• VendorConfigFile logs record changes relating to the vendor configuration file for a
managed device. Configure vendor configuration files in the File Manager > Vendor
Config File screens.
You can configure log settings in the Monitor Manager > Log Management > Log Setting
screen.
7.1.1 Exporting Logs
The Vantage Access server automatically backs up device and system logs at midnight on a
daily basis. You can still view the logs after the daily backup process until the specific time
configured in the Monitor Manager > Log Management > Log Setting screen (the default is
seven days). After this time period, Vantage Access server exports the logs. That is the
Vantage Access compresses the logs in a ZIP file, saves the file to the download server.
You can also manually save the logs retrieved from the system by clicking the Export button
in the Provision Manager > History or Monitor Manager > Log Management > History
screen. Once you purge the logs, they are removed from the log screens.
When the download server is down, the Vantage Access server automatically retries and saves
the backup log files to the download server at midnight everyday.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
109
Chapter 7 Device History Logs
7.2 Viewing Device Logs
You can view the logs for the managed device(s) in the History screen. If you log in as the
root, you can view logs for all managed devices.
Click the Provision Manager icon in the control panel and select a device or device group
folder in the Device Window. Then click History in the navigation panel. You can sort the
entries in the table by clicking the headings.
Figure 38 Provision Manager > History
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 10 Provision Manager > History
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Select Time
Period
Enter the start and end dates for the logs you want to see in the format: YYYY-MM-DD.
Alternatively, click a calendar icon ( ) and select the date. The first calendar icon sets
the start date, and the second calendar icon sets the end date.
Select
category of
logs
Select the type of logs to display or select All to display all logs.
Keyword
Enter a search term, if required. Vantage Access searches the Dev Name, OUI-SN,
Dev IP, User Name and User IP fields.
Note: You do not need to enter a search term in this field.
110
Retrieve
Click Retrieve to display the logs based on your search criteria.
Export
Click this to save the results in this screen as a CSV file to your computer.
Change
Columns
Click this to specify the columns you want to display in this screen. The Change
Columns screen displays.
Entries Per
Page
Select how many entries you want to display in a page.
Time
This field displays the time the log was created.
Content
This field displays the log message.
Dev Name
This field displays the device name.
Dev IP
This field displays the device’s IP address.
OUI-SN
This field displays the device’s Organizationally Unique Identifier (OUI) and serial
number (SN).
User Name
This field displays the name of the user who made the change.
User IP
This field displays the IP address of the user who made the change.
Next
Click Next to go to the next screen.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Device History Logs
Table 10 Provision Manager > History (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
First
This link is not available in the first screen.
Click First to return to the first screen.
Prev
Click Prev to go to the previous screen.
Last
This link is not available in the last screen.
Click Last to go to the last screen.
Go
Enter a page number (1-9) and click Go to display the entries in that page.
7.2.1 The Change Columns Screen
Use this screen to choose the types of information that display in the Provision Manager >
History screen.
Click Provision Manager > History > Change Columns. The following screen displays.
Figure 39 Provision Manager > History > Change Columns
The following screen describes the labels in this screen.
Table 11 Provision Manager > History > Change Columns
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Time
Select this to have the log history screen display the time at which log
events occurred.
Content
Select this to have the log history screen display log messages.
Dev Name
Select this to have the log history screen display the names of managed
devices.
Dev IP
Select this to have the log history screen display managed devices’ IP
addresses.
OUI-SN
Select this to have the log history screen display managed devices’ OUIs
and serial numbers.
User Name
Select this to have the log history screen display managed devices’
Organizationally Unique Identifiers (OUIs) and serial numbers (SNs).
User IP
Select this to have the log history screen display names of the users who
made changes.
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving your changes.
Apply
Click this to save your changes and return to the previous screen.
Reset
Click this to reset the fields in this screen to their default values.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
111
Chapter 7 Device History Logs
112
Vantage Access User’s Guide
CHAPTER
8
Device Manipulation
This chapter describes the Provision Manager > Device Manipulation screens. These
screens allow you to import and rename the devices managed by Vantage Access.
8.1 The Import Device Screen
This section describes the Import Device screen you use to register one or more devices.
8.1.1 Import Device Overview
You must register one or multiple devices to Vantage Access to allow remote management.
The following outlines the general procedure.
1 To register one device, configure the device information in the Import Device screen. To
register more than one device, edit an XML or CSV file containing the device
information and upload to Vantage Access in the Import Device screen.
2 Configure the settings on a device to allow remote management from Vantage Access.
8.1.1.1 Device XML or CSV File
You can import one or multiple devices to Vantage Access at a time.
To import multiple devices at a time, you need to create an XML or CSV file that contains
basic device information (such as the device name, OUI, serial number and device type) of the
compatible devices. See Figure 30 on page 94 for an XML file example.
8.1.2 Importing One Device
Follow the steps below to register a device to Vantage Access.
1 Log into Vantage Access and click the Provision Manager icon.
2 In the navigation panel, click Device Manipulation > Import Devices.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
113
Chapter 8 Device Manipulation
Figure 40 Provision Manager > Device Manipulation > Import Device
3 Select Import One Device and enter the device information in the fields provided. Click
More Subscriber Information to enter more details.
4 Click Import.
5 View the Device List panel to verify the device is registered to Vantage Access
successfully.
8.1.3 Importing Devices Using XML or CSV File
1
2
3
4
5
Edit the XML or CSV file for your devices.
Log into Vantage Access and click the Provision Manager icon.
In the navigation panel, click Device Manipulation > Import Devices.
Select Import devices with consecutive serial numbers.
If you need an example XML file to modify, click Example.xml and save the file. If you
need an example CSV file to modify, click Example.csv and save the file.
6 Select Import Devices Using File and specify the location and name of the XML or
CSV file in the File Path and Name field, or click Choose... to locate it.
7 Click Import.
8 View the Device List panel to verify the device is registered to Vantage Access
successfully.
8.1.4 Importing Devices with Consecutive Serial Numbers
1 Log into Vantage Access and click the Provision Manager icon.
2 In the navigation panel, click Device Manipulation > Import Devices.
3 Enter the device information in the fields provided.
114
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Device Manipulation
4 If you want to import devices whose serial numbers are not entirely consecutive, enter a
value in the Step field. For example, if you want to skip every second serial number,
enter 2.
5 Click Import.
6 View the Device List panel to verify the device is registered to Vantage Access
successfully.
8.1.5 Verifying Device Import/Registration
When the file import is successful, you should see the new entry or entries in the Device List
panel.
If you cannot see the new entry or entries, or the registered icon (
) does not display,
check the system logs and make sure the XML or CSV file format is correct.
Figure 41 Device Import > Verify in Device List
8.1.6 Device Setup for Registration
After you have uploaded the XML file for a device to the Vantage Access, you must then
configure the device to allow remote management from the Vantage Access. This
communication protocol is known as TR-069. Refer to the user’s guide that comes with your
device for more information.
The following describes the steps to configure settings on a ZyXEL device. Steps may vary
depending on your device. Refer to the documentation that comes with your device.
1 To activate TR-069 on the ZyXEL device, access the CLI and enter the following
commands.
wan tr load
Enable TR-069 configuration.
wan tr active 1
Activate TR-069 remote management.
wan tr acsUrl
172.25.21.174/TR069
Sets the IP address of the Vantage Access server. For example,
172.25.21.174.
wan tr periodicEnable 1
Enable periodic information update to the server.
wan tr informInterval 30 Set the information update time. For example, 30 seconds.
wan tr debug on
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Enable TR-069 debug mode to view logs.
115
Chapter 8 Device Manipulation
wan tr save
Saves the settings.
wan tr reset
Set the device to register to the Vantage Access server.
2 Once connected to the network, the ZyXEL device automatically locates and registers to
the Vantage Access server.
"
For initial setup, the registration process may take several minutes (depending
on your network condition).
3 Check the device status in the Device List panel. If the status is Registered, this
indicates that device registration is successful and that Vantage Access has stored the
ZyXEL device information to its database.
4 You can now select the device and use the Provision screens in Vantage Access to
remotely configure this ZyXEL device.
8.2 Renaming Devices
This section describes how to rename one or more of the devices managed by Vantage Access.
8.2.1 Renaming a Single Device
To rename a single device, select the device in the Device List, right-click on the device and
select Rename. The following screen displays.
Figure 42 Rename a Single Device
Enter the new Device Name and click Save.
8.2.2 Renaming Multiple Devices
To import a CSV file to rename multiple devices, click the Provision Manager tab, then
Device Manipulation > Rename Devices. The following screen displays.
116
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Device Manipulation
Figure 43 Device Manipulation > Rename Devices
If you need an example CSV file to modify, click Example_RenameDevice.csv and save the
file.
In the Source File field, specify the location and name of the CSV file, or click Choose... to
locate it. Then, click Apply to upload the CSV file and rename the devices. Alternatively,
click Reset to clear the Source File field.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
117
Chapter 8 Device Manipulation
118
Vantage Access User’s Guide
CHAPTER
9
Template Management
This chapter describes the Provision Manager > Management screens you use to manage
device templates.
9.1 Device Template Management Overview
On the Vantage Access computer, a device template contains parameter settings of a device.
You can create new templates or load a template to devices.
Two types of templates are available: common and device specific templates.
• A common template file contains configuration settings that are the same across all
devices. This allows you to apply the same parameter settings to all devices. For example,
you can set the same system time and date on all devices.
• A device specific template contains parameter settings that are only for a specific device.
You cannot load the template to another device since a device-specific template file
contains device serial number and MAC address information.
9.2 Managing a Template
You can view all available templates, delete a template or modify template settings in the
Management screen. To display the screen, log into the Web Configurator using a manager
account and click the Provision Manager icon in the control panel. Then click Template >
Management.
Figure 44 Provision Manager > Template > Management
After you have created a template file (using the Template > Save As Template screen), an
entry is created in the Management screen.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
119
Chapter 9 Template Management
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 12 Provision Manager > Template > Management
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Entries Per
Page
Select how many entries you want to display in a page.
#
Select this check box and click Delete to remove the selected template.
Select Select All to mark all entries.
Template
Name
This field displays the descriptive name of a template.
Time
This field displays the time the template was created.
Description
This field displays a short description about the template.
Modify
Click the modify icon to change the settings of the selected template.
Next
Click Next to go to the next screen.
First
This link is not available in the first screen.
Click First to return to the first screen.
Prev
Click Prev to go to the previous screen.
Last
This link is not available in the last screen.
Click Last to go to the last screen.
Go
Enter a page number and click Go to display the entries in that page.
Import
Click this to upload a template file from your computer to Vantage Access. See Section
9.2.1 on page 120 for more information.
Delete
Click Delete to remove the selected template(s).
9.2.1 Importing a Template
Use the Import screen to upload a template file (XML or CSV file) to Vantage Access. If you
are not sure about the template format, download an example file by clicking a file link in the
File Examples section of this screen. Modify it and then import it back using this screen.
Figure 45 Provision Manager > Template > Management > Import
120
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Template Management
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 13 Provision Manager > Template > Management > Import
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Name
This field displays the name of the template to which this parameter belongs.
Template
Type
Select the template type of the file you are going to import in this screen. See Section
9.1 on page 119 for more information.
File
Type the full path or click Browse to locate the template file in your computer.
Description
Enter a short description about the template.
Back
Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Import
Click Import to upload the specified file to Vantage Access.
Reset
Click Reset to start configuring this screen again.
9.3 Editing a Template
Use the Edit screen to change the settings of a template you have created.
1 Log into the web configurator using a manager account and click the Provision
Manager icon in the control panel.
2 Click Provision > Management.
3 Click the modify icon ( ) for the selected template entry.
4 An Edit screen displays.
Figure 46 Provision Manager > Template > Management > Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 14 Provision Manager > Template > Management > Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Template
Name
This field displays the name of the template to which this parameter belongs.
Entries Per
Page
Select how many entries you want to display in a page.
#
Select this check box to modify a parameter.
Parameter
Name
This field displays the descriptive name of a parameter.
OUI-SN
This field displays for device-specific templates.
This field displays the OUI and the serial number of the device.
Value
This field displays the parameter setting.
Modify
Click the modify icon to change the setting of the selected parameter.
Next
Click Next to go to the next screen.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
121
Chapter 9 Template Management
Table 14 Provision Manager > Template > Management > Edit (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
First
This link is not available in the first screen.
Click First to return to the first screen.
Prev
Click Prev to go to the previous screen.
Last
This link is not available in the last screen.
Click Last to go to the last screen.
Go
Enter a page number and click Go to display the entries in that page.
Back
Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Add
Click Add to insert a new parameter.
Delete
Click Delete to remove the selected parameter.
9.3.1 Adding a New Parameter
Use the Add Parameter screen to insert a new parameter to a template. In the template Edit
screen, click Add to display the Add Parameter screen.
Figure 47 Provision Manager > Template > Management > Edit > Add Parameter
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 15 Provision Manager > Template > Management > Edit > Add Parameter
122
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Template
Name
This read-only field displays the name of the template to which this parameter belongs.
Parameter
Name
Enter a descriptive name for a parameter. You can enter up to 250 characters
containing 0-9, a-z, A-Z, _ or - with no spaces.
OUI
This field is available in a device-specific template.
Enter the OUI of the device. You can obtain the device OUI number in the Device List
screen.
Serial
Number
This field is available in a device-specific template.
Enter the unique serial number of the device. You can obtain the device serial number
in the Device List screen.
Type
Select the value type for the parameter.
Value
Specify the setting for the parameter.
Back
Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving the settings.
Apply
Click Apply to save the settings.
Reset
Click Reset to start configuring this screen again.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Template Management
9.3.2 Modifying a Parameter Value
You can change the value of a parameter in a template in the Modify Parameter screen. In the
template Edit screen, click the modify icon ( ) for the selected parameter to display the
Modify Parameter screen. The OUI-SN field displays in the screen if you select a devicespecific template.
Figure 48 Provision Manager > Template > Management > Edit > Modify Parameter
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 16 Provision Manager > Template > Management > Edit > Modify Parameter
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Template
Name
This read-only field displays the name of the template to which this parameter belongs.
Parameter
Name
This field displays the descriptive name for a parameter.
OUI-SN
This field is available in a device-specific template.
This field displays the OUI and the unique serial number of the device.
Type
This field displays the value type for the parameter.
Value
Specify the setting for the parameter.
Back
Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving the settings.
Apply
Click Apply to save the settings.
Reset
Click Reset to start configuring this screen again.
9.4 Template Creation
The following outlines the steps to creating a new template.
1
2
3
4
Select a registered device from the Device List.
Click Template > Save As Template.
Select the parameters of the device you want to include in a template.
Save the settings to a new template.
9.4.1 Selecting Parameters and Creating a Template
After selecting a device for a template, you can then select the parameters and create the new
template in this screen. Select a registered device in the Device List and click Template >
Save as Template.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
123
Chapter 9 Template Management
After a new template is created, an entry is added in the Management screen (click Template
> Management).
Figure 49 Template > Save as Template
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 17 Provision Manager > Pre-Provision > Template > Save
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Parameters
Entries Per
Page
Select how many entries you want to display in a page.
#
Select this check box to include the selected parameter in the new template.
Parameter
Name
Value
Specify the setting for the parameter.
Next
Click Next to go to the next screen.
First
This link is not available in the first screen.
Click First to return to the first screen.
Prev
Click Prev to go to the previous screen.
Last
This link is not available in the last screen.
Click Last to go to the last screen.
Go
Enter a page number and click Go to display the entries in that page.
Save As
Template
Template
Type
124
Specify the template to be used for all devices (Common) or only for the selected
device (Specific)
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Template Management
Table 17 Provision Manager > Pre-Provision > Template > Save (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Template
Name
Enter a descriptive name (up to 128 characters (0-9, a-z, A-Z, _ or - without spaces))
for the new template.
Description
Enter a short description (up to 256 characters (0-9, a-z, A-Z, _ or - without spaces)) for
the new template.
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen.
Note: This button displays only when you are saving a group’s
template.
Save
Click Save to create a new template with the settings.
Reset
Click Reset to start configuring this screen again.
9.5 Loading a Template
"
Applying a template replaces the current configuration on the specified device
or all devices in a group.
Use the Load From Template screen to apply a template to a device or all devices in a group.
When loading a device-specific template, Vantage Access automatically applies the parameter
settings to the device whose OUI and serial number matches the ones in the template.
Click Template > Load Template. Select a template in the list and click Load.
Figure 50 Template > Load Template
The following describes the labels in this screen.
Table 18 Template > Load Template
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Entries Per
Page
Select how many entries you want to display in a page.
#
Select this check box and click Load to apply the selected template.
Select Select All to mark all entries.
Template
Name
This field displays the descriptive name of a template.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
125
Chapter 9 Template Management
Table 18 Template > Load Template
126
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Time
This field displays the time the template was created.
Description
This field displays a short description about the template. Click this to see the whole
description.
Load
Click Load to apply the template to the device(s).
Next
Click Next to go to the next screen.
First
This link is not available in the first screen.
Click First to return to the first screen.
Prev
Click Prev to go to the previous screen.
Last
This link is not available in the last screen.
Click Last to go to the last screen.
Go
Enter a page number and click Go to display the entries in that page.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
CHAPTER
10
Data Model Management
This chapter discusses how to view and configure data models. Data models are standard
configuration templates used by the managed devices. Only root can configure data models.
10.1 Managing a Data Model (Root)
This screen allows you to see the data models used by Vantage Access. To display the screen,
log into the Web Configurator as root and click the Provision Manager icon in the control
panel. Then click Provision > Management. The following screen displays.
Figure 51 Provision > Management (Root)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 19 Provision > Management (Root)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Entries Per Page
Select how many entries you want to display in a page.
#
Select this check box and click Delete to remove the selected data model.
Select Select All to mark all entries.
Name
This field displays the data model’s name. Click a data model name to
download the data model.
Version
This field displays the data model’s version number.
Specification
This field displays the specification to which this data model applies.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
127
Chapter 10 Data Model Management
Table 19 Provision > Management (Root)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Import
Click this to upload a data model to Vantage Access. The Import Data
Model screen displays.
Delete
Select a data model and click this to delete a data model from Vantage
Access.
Note: Once a data model has been deleted, it cannot be
retrieved. You must import it again.
10.1.1 The Import Data Model Screen
Use this screen to upload a data model to Vantage Access. To display the screen, log into
Vantage Access as root and click Provision Manager. Then click Provision > Management
> Import. The following screen displays.
Figure 52 Provision > Management (Root) > Import Data Model
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 20 Provision > Management (Root) > Import Data Model
128
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Source File
Specify the location and name of the XML file, or click Choose... to locate it.
File Example
Click one of the links to download an example data model of the specified
type in XML format.
Back
Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving the settings.
Apply
Click Apply to save the settings.
Reset
Click Reset to start configuring this screen again.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
CHAPTER
11
Device Provisioning
This chapter introduces the Provision screens and shows you how to configure device settings
through Vantage Access.
11.1 Device Provision Overview
"
The Provision screens are available for manager accounts only. The Provision
screens available for root are covered in Chapter 10 on page 127
11.2 Device Provision
Use this method to configure one or more devices.
1 Log into Vantage Access using a manager account and click the Provision Manager
icon in the control panel.
2 Select a device or group of devices in the Device List window.
3 Click Provision in the navigation panel.
11.2.1 Provisioning Unregistered Devices
For unregistered devices, the Provision Manager > Data Model screen appears.
Figure 53 Provision Manager > Provision (Unregistered Device)
Vantage Access User’s Guide
129
Chapter 11 Device Provisioning
The table below describes the fields in the screen for unregistered devices.
Table 21 Provision Manager > Provision > Unregistered Device
TABLE HEADING
DESCRIPTION
Root Object
InternetGateway
Device
This CPE (customer premise equipment) device is either a broadband router or
a broadband access device able to be managed by the Vantage Access.
Select Version 1.0 to apply TR-069 settings. Select Version 1.1 to apply TR106 amendment 1 settings. Select Version 1.2 to apply TR-098 amendment 1
settings.
Device
This is a CPE device on your local network connected to a gateway, router or
bridge. Select Version 1.0 to apply TR-106 settings to the devices. Select
Version 1.1 to apply TR-111 settings to the devices.
Service Object
STBService
Select this configuration template for set-top box devices and specify a version
number. The default Version 1.0 applies TR-135 settings to the devices.
VoiceService
Select this configuration template for VoIP devices and specify a version
number. The default Version 1.0 applies TR-104 settings to the devices.
Apply
Click Apply to save the changes.
Rest
Click this to return the fields in this screen to their last-saved details.
Select the appropriate device type and version according to your device type. Then click
Apply to update the Data Model and Profile menu lists.
11.2.2 Provisioning Registered Devices
You cannot provision registered devices. You can only view the data model assigned to the
device. A proper data model is assigned to a device when the device first connects to Vantage
Access and completes the registration successfully. Select a registered device in the Device
List and then select Provision. The following menu options display.
Figure 54 Provision Manager > Provision (Registered Device)
Click Data Model to view the standard data model assigned to the device (see Section 11.2.3
on page 130).
11.2.3 Data Model
The data model tree displays when you select a registered device in the Device List and click
Provision > Data Model.
130
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 11 Device Provisioning
Figure 55 The Data Model Tree
The data model tree contains all the parameter sets ( ) related to the given data model. When
a parameter set has subsets, a folder icon ( ) displays.
When you click a parameter set icon, a list of parameters displays.
11.2.3.1 Parameter List
A parameter list screen displays the parameters in a data model parameter set. The following
shows an example.
Figure 56 Provision > Example Data Model Parameter List
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 22 Provision > Example Parameter List
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Retrieve
Click this to update the screen from the information in the database.
Parameter Name
This displays the name of the parameter as defined in the data model.
Value
This displays the parameter’s value.
Attribute
This displays the attribute setting associated with the parameter.
Time
This displays the date and time that the parameter was altered, in the
format yyyy-mm-ddThh-mm-ss. The character “T” separates the date
(yyyy-mm-dd) and time (hh-mm-ss).
Modify
Click this icon to edit a parameter’s Attribute (for read-only parameters) or
Value (for configurable parameters). See Section 11.2.4 on page 132.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
131
Chapter 11 Device Provisioning
11.2.3.2 Table Pop-up Screen
If the text is too long to fit into a table column, Vantage Access displays the text as a link.
Click on the link to display a pop-up screen that shows the text in full. The following shows an
example.
Figure 57 Table Pop-up Screen
11.2.4 Configuring CPE Methods
CPE (Customer Premises Equipment) methods are functions the managed devices support to
modify or send back parameter information. Only the Vantage Access server is allowed to
send requests to the devices to execute these functions. The Vantage Access server can request
information from or configure settings on the devices.
To configure CPE method settings for all the parameters in a Data Model screen, click the
modify icon ( ) in the right-hand corner of the screen.
To configure the CPE method settings for a parameter, click the modify icon (
or
) next
to the selected parameter in any Single Device screen. Fields in this screen vary depending on
the option you select in the CPE Methods field.
The following shows a screen example.
Figure 58 Provision > CPE Methods
132
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 11 Device Provisioning
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 23 Provision > CPE Methods
"
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
CPE
Methods
Select SetParameterValues to change the value of the parameter on the device.
Select GetParameterValues to obtain information of one or more parameters from the
device.
Select GetParameterNames to obtain the names of the parameter(s) on the device.
Select SetParameterAttribute to change the settings of one or more parameters on the
device.
Select GetParameterAttribute to obtain information of one or more parameters from
the device.
Select AddObject to create a new instance of the selected parameter.
Select DeleteObject to remove the specified instance of the selected parameter.
Connection
Request
Select this to have the device initiate a connection to Vantage Access immediately when
Vantage Access requests.
It is recommended to select this if you have disabled the Periodic Inform feature
(PeriodicInformEnable=False) on the device. Otherwise, Vantage Access will fail to
send any settings to the device. See Figure 71 on page 145.
NextLevel
This field displays when you select GetParameterNames in the CPE Methods field.
Select this option to set the device to reply with a one-level (or relative) path for the
parameter name.
Clear this check box to set the device to reply with a complete (or full) path for the
parameter name.
Attribute
This field displays when you select SetParameterAttribute in the CPE Methods field.
Select Active Notification to set the device to send a notification message to the
Vantage Access server immediately when the value(s) of the parameter(s) is changed.
Select Notification Off to set the device not to return a notification when the value(s) of
the parameter(s) is changed.
Select Passive Notification to set the device to send a notification message to the
Vantage Access server in the next session when the value(s) of the parameter(s) is
changed.
Type
This field displays when you select SetParameterValues in the CPE Methods field.
This read-only field displays the type and number of characters you can enter for the
parameter value in the field below.
For example, string(256) indicates that you can enter up to 256 printable ASCII
characters
Value
Enter a new value for the parameter in this text box.
MultiOperati
on
Select this if it is allowed to include multiple parameter settings in a provisioning packet.
Select this to reduce the time for provisioning from Vantage Access to the device.
Otherwise, you can clear this to include only one parameter setting in a provisioning
packet.
Back
Click Back to return to the previous screen. All unsaved changes will be lost.
Apply
Click Apply to save the changes.
Reset
Click Reset to start configuring this screen again.
Labels displayed in the Provision screens vary depending on settings in the
InternetGatewayDevice field.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
133
Chapter 11 Device Provisioning
11.2.5 Profile
Use this menu to quickly find and configure specific parameter settings for an unregistered
device. You can also use this menu to view existing profile settings for a registered device.
This is an example to show you how to define profiles for an unregistered device.
1 Select an unregistered device in the Device List and then select Provision > Data
Model. The screen displays as shown.
Figure 59 Profile Configuration Example: Specifiy the Data Model
2 Select an appropriate object and version. For example, Device and Version 1.1. The
additional profile list appears.
3 Select the profile(s) you want to show in the Profile screen. For example, select LAN.
Then click Apply.
Figure 60 Profile Configuration Example: Addisional Profile List under a Data Model
4 Click Provision > Profile, the profile you just configured appears. Click LAN to display
the related objects in the configuration window.
134
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 11 Device Provisioning
Figure 61 Profile Configuration Example: Profile Submenus
5 Click an object name. For example, Device.LAN. The related parameter list appears.
Figure 62 Profile Configuration Example: Parameter List
6 See Section 11.2.3.1 on page 131 and Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for how to configure
the parameters.
11.3 Device Configuration Update Request
When you change the device settings in Vantage Access, a configuration update request is
generated for the device(s). At specified intervals, the Vantage Access server sends the request
to the device(s) which then updates its configuration based on the parameter information
received.
You can view the request information in the Task Monitor screen. Refer to Chapter 6 on page
107 for more information.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
135
Chapter 11 Device Provisioning
136
Vantage Access User’s Guide
CHAPTER
12
Short Cut
This chapter discusses how to view, add and delete short cuts. Short cuts let you easily apply
parameters (settings).
12.1 Short Cut Overview
A short cut uses a brief name to avoid needing to jump into complex device configuration
submenus. For example, you can configure the parameter value of
InternetGatewayDevice.DeviceInfo in the Short Cut screen. Otherwise, you have to click
Data Model, InternetGatewayDevice, and then the DeviceInfo screen to configure its value.
Parameters are grouped in objects. An object is a list of parameters.
12.1.1 Managing Short Cuts
This screen allows you to view the short cuts you have configured. To display the screen, log
into the Web Configurator using a manager account and click the Provision Manager icon in
the control panel. Then click Short cut > Operation.
Figure 63 Provision > Short cut > Operation
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 24 Provision > Short cut > Operation
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Entries Per Page
Select how many entries you want to display in a page.
#
Select this check box and click Delete to remove the selected short cut.
Shortcut Name
This field displays the descriptive name of this short cut.
Category
This field displays the category name to which this short cut belongs.
Object Path
This field displays the path of where the short cut takes you to.
Add
Click this to add a short cut. The Add Short Cut screen displays.
Delete
Select a short cut and click this to delete it from Vantage Access.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
137
Chapter 12 Short Cut
12.1.2 Add a Short Cut
Use this screen to configure a new short cut. To display the screen, log into Vantage Access
using a manager account and click Provision Manager. Then click Short cut > Operation >
Add.
Figure 64 Provision > Short Cut > Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 25 Provision > Short Cut > Add
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Shortcut Name
Enter a descriptive name (up to 128 characters (0-9, a-z, A-Z, _ or - without
spaces)) for the new short cut.
Shortcut Category
Enter a category name for this short cut to group similar short cuts. You can
also select an existing category for this short cut, if any.
Object Name
Enter the name of a valid object for this short cut.
You can also enter part of an object name’s beginning charactors, all the
related objects will display in a list. Then you can select the object you want
to use here. An example is shown next.
Figure 65 Provision > Short Cut > Add > Object Name List
138
Back
Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving the settings.
Apply
Click Apply to save the settings.
Reset
Click Reset to start configuring this screen again.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
P ART III
Internet Gateway
Device 1.0 (TR-069)
This part contains the following chapters.
• General Device Setup (141)
• LAN Device (153)
• WAN Device (171)
139
140
CHAPTER
13
General Device Setup
This chapter describes the general Configuration screens you display to view and set basic
device settings.
13.1 Internet Gateway Device
You can view the number and type of interfaces on a device.
1 Log into Vantage Access using a manager account and click the Provision Manager
icon in the control panel.
2 Select a device in the Device List window.
3 Click Provision > InternetGatewayDevice.
Figure 66 TR-069: InternetGatewayDevice
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 26 TR-069: InternetGatewayDevice
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
LANDeviceNumb
erOfEntries
This field displays the number of LAN interfaces on the selected device.
WANDeviceNumb
erOfEntries
This field displays the number of WAN interfaces on the selected device.
13.2 Device Information
Click InternetGatewayDevice > DeviceInfo. This screen displays the general information of
the selected device.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
141
Chapter 13 General Device Setup
Figure 67 TR-069: DeviceInfo
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 27 TR-069: DeviceInfo
142
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Manufacturer
This is the name of the company that produced this device.
ManufacturerOUI
This field displays the six-hexadecimal-digit OUI (Organization Unit Identifier) of
the company. The OUI is a unique number assigned by the IANA. Devices
produced by the same company have the same hard-wired OUI.
ModelName
This field displays the device model name.
Description
This field displays additional information about the device.
ProductClass
This field identifies the product class or product over which the SerialNumber
parameter is unique.
SerialNumber
This field displays the device serial number.
HardwareVersion
This field displays the hardware model name.
SoftwareVersion
This field displays the firmware version number.
ModemFirmware
Version
This field displays the modem firmware version number.
EnabledOptions
This field displays the name of the options enabled on the device.
AdditionalHardwa
reVersion
This field displays the available information of the additional hardware version.
AdditionalSoftwar
eVersion
This field displays the available information of the additional software version.
SpecVersion
This field displays the specification version implemented on the device.
ProvisioningCode
The provisioning code is used by the service provider to identify specific
parameter settings for the device.
Enter the identifier of the CPE service provider or provisioning information. You
can enter up to 64 characters (use only A-Z, 0-9 and “.” with no spaces allowed).
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 13 General Device Setup
Table 27 TR-069: DeviceInfo (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
UpTime
This field displays the time (in seconds) since the device was last restarted.
FirstUseDate
This field displays the time and date the device first established a network
connection.
DeviceLog
Enter additional information for this device.
VendorConfigFile
NumberOfEntries
This field displays the number of configuration files.
13.3 Device Configuration
Display the DeviceConfig screen to view general information about the configuration file on a
device.
Click InternetGatewayDevice > DeviceConfig.
Figure 68 TR-069: DeviceConfig
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 28 TR-069: DeviceConfig
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
PersistentData
This field displays the configuration data that must remain intact after a device
system reboot.
ConfigFile
This field displays the name of the vendor specific configuration file used for the
device.
13.4 Vendor Configuration File
The VendorConfigFile screen displays the name of the vendor configuration file and the time
it was first applied on the device. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field
descriptions.
Click InternetGatewayDevice > DeviceInfo > VendorConfigFile. Click on a file name to
display detailed information.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
143
Chapter 13 General Device Setup
Figure 69 TR-069: VendorConfigFile
13.4.1 Vendor Configuration File Details
Use this screen to find detailed vendor configuration information.
You can display this screen using one of the following methods:
• click a file name in the VendorConfigFile screen
• click InternetGatewayDevice > DeviceInfo > VendorConfigFile and click a number.
Figure 70 TR-069: VendorConfigFile: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 29 TR-069: VendorConfigFile: Details
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Name
This field displays the name of the vendor configuration file applied to the device.
Version
This field displays the version number of the vendor configuration file.
Date
This field displays the time and date the vendor configuration file was applied on
the device.
Description
This field displays a description about the vendor configuration file.
13.5 Management Server
Use the Management Server screen to configure settings on the device that connects to the
Vantage Access server.
Click InternetGatewayDevice > ManagementServer.
144
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 13 General Device Setup
Figure 71 TR-069: ManagementServer
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 30 TR-069: ManagementServer
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
URL
This field displays the address of the Vantage Access server to which the device
connects for remote management.
For example, “http://www.zyxel.com/TR069”.
Username
This field displays the user name the device uses to access Vantage Access.
Password
This field displays the password (up to 256 alphanumeric characters) associated
with the user name above.
Note: You must configure the same access user name and
password on the device and the Vantage Access server.
PeriodicInformEn
able
This field displays true to indicate that the device is set to regularly send device
information updates to Vantage Access.
This field displays false to indicate that this feature is disabled. In this case, you
must then manually update device information changes.
PeriodicInformInte This field is applicable when the PeriodicInformEnable field is 1.
rval
This field displays the time (in seconds) the device is to wait before sending device
request information updates to Vantage Access.
PeriodicInformTim This field is applicable when the PeriodicInformEnable field is 1.
e
This field displays the reference time and date the device is to initiate the
information updates.
The time in the format yyyy-mm-ddThh:mm:ss. The character “T” separates the
date (yyyy-mm-dd) and time (hh-mm-ss).
ParameterKey
This field displays the parameter that has changed as a result of the most recent
information update.
ConnectionReque
stURL
This field displays the URL of the device to which Vantage Access sends a
connection request.
ConnectionReque
stUsername
This field displays the user name Vantage Access uses to access the device.
This is required if you want Vantage Access to initiate a connection and access the
device.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
145
Chapter 13 General Device Setup
Table 30 TR-069: ManagementServer (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
ConnectionReque
stPassword
This field displays the password associated with the user name above.
UpgradesManage
d
This field displays 1 to show that the Vantage Access may upgrade firmware on
the device. This field displays 0 to indicate that remote firmware upgrade through
Vantage Access is disabled.
KickURL
This field displays the URL on the LAN from which the device can initiate a Kick
request.
DownloadProgres
sURL
This field displays the URL of a web site on the LAN to which a user’s web
browser is redirected to display the file transfer progress of the device.
13.6 Time
Use the Time screen to configure time settings (such as the network time server and time
zone) on the device.
Click InternetGatewayDevice > Time.
Figure 72 TR-069: Time
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 31 TR-069: Time
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
NTPServer1 .. 5
This field displays the IP address or host name of the time server the device is to
use to update the system time. For example, “http://www.zyxel.com”.
CurrentLocalTime
This field displays the current system time on the device.
LocalTimeZone
This field displays the time offset from the UTC (Universal Time Coordinate). For
example, +08:00.
LocalTimeZoneNa This field displays the name of the local time zone.
me
146
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 13 General Device Setup
Table 31 TR-069: Time (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
DaylightSavingsU
sed
This field displays 1 to indicate that daylight savings time is enabled on the device.
This field displays 0 if this feature is disabled.
DaylightSavingsSt This field is applicable if the DaylightSavingsUsed field is 1.
art
This field displays the starting date of the daylight savings time in the format 000000-00T00:00:00.
DaylightSavingsE
nd
This field is applicable if the DaylightSavingsUsed field is 1.
This field displays the end date of the daylight savings time in the format 0000-0000T00:00:00.
13.7 User Interface
Use the UserInterface screen to configure remote management settings to access the web
configurator on the device.
Click InternetGatewayDevice > UserInterface to display the screen as shown.
Figure 73 TR-069: UserInterface
Vantage Access User’s Guide
147
Chapter 13 General Device Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 32 TR-069: UserInterface
148
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
PasswordRequire
d
This field displays 1 if a password is required to log into the web configurator on
the device.
This field displays 0 if a password is not required.
PasswordUserSel
ectable
This field displays 1 if a user can specify a different password for Autoconfiguration on the device; otherwise it displays 0.
UpgradeAvailable
This field displays 1 to allow a user to view the upgrade information on the device;
otherwise it displays 0.
WarrantyDate
This field displays the time the warranty on the device expires.
ISPName
This field displays the name of your Internet Service Provider (ISP).
ISPHelpDesk
This field displays the telephone number of your ISP’s help desk.
ISPHomePage
This field displays the website address of your ISP’s home page.
ISPHelpPage
This field displays the website address of your ISP’s online support web page.
ISPLogo
This field displays the base64 encoded character for your ISP’s logo graphic. The
graphic can be a GIF or JEPG file smaller than 4095 bytes.
ISPLogoSize
This field displays the size of the logo graphic file.
ISPMailServer
This field displays the address of your ISP’s mail server.
ISPNewsServer
This field displays the address of your ISP’s news server.
TextColor
This field displays the color (in six-character RGB number) of the text in the web
configurator. For example, FFFFFF means white.
BackgroundColor
This field displays the color (in six-character RGB number) of the background in
the web configurator. For example, FFFFFF means white.
ButtonColor
This field displays the color (in six-character RGB number) of the buttons in the
web configurator. For example, FFFFFF means white.
ButtonTextColor
This field displays the color (in six-character RGB number) of the text on the
buttons in the web configurator. For example, FFFFFF means white.
AutoUpdateServe
r
This field is applicable if the UpgradesManaged field in the ManagementServer
screen shows 1 (see Section 13.5 on page 144).
This field displays the address of the server the device is to check for new
firmware. If a new firmware is available, the device is to update the firmware
automatically.
UserUpdateServe
r
This field is applicable if the UpgradesManaged field in the ManagementServer
screen shows 0 (see Section 13.5 on page 144).
This field displays the address of the server a user can check for new firmware
updates available for the device.
ExampleLogin
This field displays the correct username format. This is to show users the correct
format to enter.
ExamplePasswor
d
This field displays the correct password format. This is to show users the correct
format to enter.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 13 General Device Setup
13.8 Layer3 Forwarding
Use the Layer3Forwarding screen to view the current layer 3 forwarding status and the
number of forwarding entries on the device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision >
InternetGatewayDevice > Layer3Forwarding.
Figure 74 TR-069: Layer3Forwarding
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 33 TR-069: Layer3Forwarding
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Default
ConnectionService
This field displays the complete hierarchical name for the default WAN
interface.
ForwardNumberofEntries
This field displays the number of forwarding entries.
13.8.1 Forwarding Table
The Forwarding screen displays the list of forwarding tables on the device. Refer to Section
11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Click InternetGatewayDevice > Layer3Forwarding > Forwarding.
Figure 75 TR-069: Layer3 Forwarding Table
13.8.2 Forwarding Table Details
Use the detailed Forwarding screen to configure the layer 3 forwarding table on the device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision >
InternetGatewayDevice > Layer3Forwarding > Forwarding. Then click on an index
number.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
149
Chapter 13 General Device Setup
Figure 76 TR-069: Layer3 Forwarding Table: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 34 TR-069: Layer3 Forwarding: Forwarding
150
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that entry in the forwarding table is enabled.
A value of 0 means that the rule is disabled. This is the default setting for new
forwarding entries.
Status
This field displays the status of the forwarding entry.
Type
This field displays the route type.
Default sets the device to route packets with any destination.
Host sets the device to route packets to a specific destination IP address.
Network sets the device to route packets to an IP network.
DestIPAddress
This field displays the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation for the
route entry.
DestSubnetMask
This field displays the destination subnet mask in dotted decimal notation for
the route entry.
SourceIPAddress
This field displays the source IP address in dotted decimal notation for the route
entry.
SourceSubnetMask
This field displays the source subnet mask in dotted decimal notation for the
route entry.
GatewayIPAddress
This field displays the IP address of the gateway in dotted decimal notation for
the route entry.
Interface
This field displays the hierarchical name of the WAN interface associated to this
route entry. For example, “InternetGatewayDevice.WANDevice.1.WANConnectionDevice.1.WANPPPConnection.1”
ForwardingMetric
This field displays the number of hops to the destination. This is associated to
the cost of the route.
-1 means this route is not used to forward traffic.
MTU
This field displays the maximum Ethernet packet size allowed on this route.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 13 General Device Setup
13.9 LAN Configuration Security
Use the LANConfigSecurity screen to display and configure the password to allow LAN
access on the device for auto-configuration settings. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANConfigSecurity.
Figure 77 TR-069: LANConfigSecurity
13.10 IP Ping Diagnostics
Use the IPPingDiagnostics screen to configure the ping test settings on a device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision
InternetGatewayDevice > IPPingDiagnostics.
Figure 78 TR-069: IPPingDiagnostics
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 35 TR-069: IPPingDiagnostics
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
DiagnosticsState
This field displays the ping test result.
Interface
This field displays the hierarchical name of the interface for ping diagnostics.
For example, “InternetGatewayDevice.WANDevice.1.WANConnectionDevice.1.WANPPPConnection.1”
You can enter up to 256 characters for the interface name.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
151
Chapter 13 General Device Setup
Table 35 TR-069: IPPingDiagnostics (continued)
152
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Host
This field displays the IP address or domain name of the host the device is to
ping to test the connection.
NumberOfRepetition
s
This field displays the number of ping test before displaying the result.
Timeout
This field displays the timeout (in milli-seconds) for a ping test.
DataBlockSize
This field displays the size of the packet to send for each ping test.
DSCP
This field displays the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) to use for the test packets.
The default is 0.
SuccessCount
This field displays the number of ping tests that are successful before the
timeout.
FailureCount
This field displays the number of ping tests that failed.
AverageResponseTi
me
This field displays the average response time (in milli-seconds) of successful
ping tests. If there is no successful responses, this field displays 0.
MinimumResponseT
ime
This field displays the minimum response time (in milli-seconds) of successful
ping tests. If there is no successful responses, this field displays 0.
MaximumResponse
Time
This field displays the maximum response time (in milli-seconds) of successful
ping tests. If there is no successful responses, this field displays 0.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
CHAPTER
14
LAN Device
This chapter describes the screens you use to configure and view LAN settings.
14.1 LAN Device Screen
Use the LANDevice screens to configure or view the LAN interface settings on the selected
device. The number of screens and field labels available vary depending on your device
model. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice to display the screen.
Figure 79 TR-069: LANDevice
14.1.1 Detailed LAN Device Information
Use this screen to view detailed LAN device information. Click Provision >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice and a number.
Figure 80 TR-069: LANDevice: Details
Vantage Access User’s Guide
153
Chapter 14 LAN Device
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 36 TR-069: LANDevice: Details
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
LANEthernetInterf This field displays the number of instances on the LAN interface.
aceNumberOfEntr
ies
LANUSBInterface
NumberOfEntries
This field displays the number of instances on the USB interface.
LANWLANConfig
urationNumberOf
Entries
This field displays the number of instances on the WLAN interface.
14.2 LAN Host Configuration Management
Use the LANHostConfigManagement screen to view and configure DHCP settings on the
LAN interface.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice. Click a number and LANHostConfigManagement
to display the screen.
Figure 81 TR-069: LAN Device: LANHostConfigManagement
154
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 14 LAN Device
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 37 TR-069: LAN Device: LANHostConfigManagement
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
DHCPServerConfigurable
This field displays 1 if Vantage Access can change the default DHCP
server setting on the LAN interface.
This field displays 0 to have the device use the default DHCP server
settings on the LAN. No changes are allowed.
DHCPServerEnable
This field displays 1 to indicate that the DHCP server setting on the LAN
interface is enabled.
This field displays 0 to indicate that the DHCP server setting on the LAN
interface is disabled.
DHCPRelay
This field displays 1 when the device is set to act as a DHCP relay on the
LAN. The device will forward DHCP requests from the clients to the actual
DHCP server on the LAN. In this case, you must set up a DHCP server.
This field displays 0 when DHCP relay is deactivated. In this case, the
device acts as a DHCP server.
MinAddress
This field displays the first IP address in the DHCP IP pool the DHCP
server assigns to a DHCP client on the LAN.
MaxAddress
This field displays the last IP address in the DHCP IP pool the DHCP
server assigns to a DHCP client on the LAN.
ReservedAddresses
This field displays the IP address(es) in the DHCP IP pool that is reserved
and not assigned to a DHCP client on the LAN.
IP addresses are separated by a comma (,).
SubnetMask
This field displays the subnet mask for the DHCP clients.
DNSServers
This field displays the IP address of the DNS server whose information
the device sends to the DHCP clients.
DNS server IP addresses are separated by a comma (,).
DomainName
This field displays the domain name the device is to assign to DHCP
clients.
IPRouters
This field displays the IP address of the default gateway on the LAN.
IP addresses are separated by a comma (,).
DHCPLeaseTime
This field displays the lease time (in seconds) for the assigned IP address
to DHCP client(s).
This field displays -1 to indicate that a lease time never times out.
UseAllocatedWAN
This field displays how the device is to assign DHCP client IP
address(es).
Normal means the device is set to assign IP addresses from the DHCP
IP pool configured.
UseAllocatedSubnet means the device is set to assign IP addresses
from the range of WAN IP addresses provided by your ISP.
Passthrough means the device is set to assign IP addresses to DHCP
clients whose MAC address is marked for passthrough.
AssociatedConnection
This field is applicable if the UseAllocatedWAN field displays
UseAllocatedSubnet or Passthrough.
This field displays the complete hierarchical name for the default WAN
interface to which this connection is associated.
PassthroughLease
This field displays the lease time (in seconds) to DHCP clients when the
WAN IP address is passthrough.
PassthroughMACAddress
This field is applicable if you select Passthrough in the
UseAllocatedWAN field.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
155
Chapter 14 LAN Device
Table 37 TR-069: LAN Device: LANHostConfigManagement (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
AllowedMACAddresses
This field displays the MAC address(es) allowed to pass through the LAN.
IPInterfaceNumberOfEntri
es
This field displays the number of IP subnets on the LAN.
This field is 1 if IP alias is not supported on the LAN.
14.2.1 IP Interface
The IPInterface screen allows you to view IP settings per each subnet on the LAN. Refer to
Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice >
LANDevice. Click a number and LANHostConfigManagement. Click IPInterface to
display the screen.
Figure 82 TR-069: LAN Device: IPInterface
14.2.2 IP Interface Details
Use this screen to view detailed IP interface information.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice
> LANDevice.
2 Click a number and LANHostConfigManagement.
3 Click IPInterface and a number to display the screen.
Figure 83 TR-069: LAN Device: IPInterface: Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 38 TR-069: LAN Device: IPInterface: Details
156
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that the LAN interface is enabled.
0 means the LAN interface is disabled and no traffic is allowed through.
IPInterfaceIPAddress
This field displays the LAN IP address of the device in dotted decimal notation,
for example, 192.168.1.1.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 14 LAN Device
Table 38 TR-069: LAN Device: IPInterface: Details (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
IPInterfaceSubnetMas This field displays the subnet mask on the LAN. For example, 255.255.255.0.
k
IPInterfaceAddressing This field displays the method to assign IP address on the LAN interface.
Type
DHCP means the device is set to assign IP addresses from a DHCP server.
Static means the device is set to use a fixed IP address configured in the field
above.
AutoIP means the device is set to use the default IP settings on the LAN
interface.
14.3 LAN Ethernet Interface
The LANEthernetInterfaceConfig screen allows you to view LAN Ethernet settings. Refer
to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice >
LANDevice. Then click a number and LANEthernetInterfaceConfig to display the screen.
Figure 84 TR-069: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig
14.3.1 LAN Ethernet Interface Details
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice.
2 Click a number and LANEthernetInterfaceConfig.
3 Click a number to display the configuration screen for a LAN Ethernet interface.
Use this screen to enable or disable the LAN Ethernet interface, configure the port speed and
duplex mode. You can also use this screen to enable or disable static MAC address learning.
Figure 85 TR-069: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Details
Vantage Access User’s Guide
157
Chapter 14 LAN Device
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 39 TR-069: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Details
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that the LAN Ethernet interface is active.
0 indicates the LAN Ethernet interface is disabled. In this case, no connection is
allowed.
Status
This field displays the connection status of the Ethernet interface.
MACAddress
This field displays the MAC address of the Ethernet interface.
MACAddress
ControlEnable
d
This field displays 1 to indicate that traffic with the specified MAC addresses is
allowed on this port. You can specify the MAC addresses in the
LANHostConfigManagement screen (refer to Section 14.2 on page 154).
This field displays 0 to indicate that MAC address control is disabled. All traffic is
allowed through the LAN interface.
MaxBitRate
This field displays the connection speed in megabits per second (Mbps).
Auto (auto-negotiation) allows the port to negotiate with a peer port automatically to
obtain the connection speed that both ends support.
DuplexMode
This field displays the duplex mode for the connection.
Auto allows the port to negotiate with a peer port automatically to obtain the duplex
mode that both ends support.
14.3.2 Ethernet Interface Stats
The Stats screen shows the statistics on the LAN interface.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice
> LANDevice.
2 Click a number and LANEthernetInterfaceConfig.
3 Click a number and Stats.
Figure 86 TR-069: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Stats
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 40 TR-069: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Stats
158
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
BytesSent
This field displays the number of transmitted bytes on this interface.
BytesReceive
d
This field displays the number of received bytes on this interface.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 14 LAN Device
Table 40 TR-069: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Stats (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
PacketsSent
This field displays the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
PacketsRecei
ved
This field displays the number of received packets on this interface.
14.4 LAN USB Interface
The LANUSBInterfaceConfig screen is applicable when your device comes with a USB port.
Use this screen to view a summary of the USB interface. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132
for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice >
LANDevice. Then click a number and LANUSBInterfaceConfig to display the screen.
Figure 87 TR-069: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig
14.4.1 LAN USB Interface Details
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice
> LANDevice.
2 Click a number and LANUSBInterfaceConfig.
3 Click a number to display the screen as shown.
Use this screen to activate the USB interface and/or enable MAC address learning control.
Figure 88 TR-069: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig: Details
Vantage Access User’s Guide
159
Chapter 14 LAN Device
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 41 TR-069: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig: Details
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that the USB interface on the LAN is enabled;
otherwise, it displays 0.
Status
This field displays the connection status of the USB interface on the LAN.
MACAddress
This field displays the MAC address of the USB interface on the LAN.
MACAddress
ControlEnable
d
This field displays 1 to allow traffic with the specified MAC addresses on this port. You
can specify the MAC addresses in the LANHostConfigManagement screen
(refer to Section 14.2 on page 154).
This field displays 0 to indicate that MAC address control is disabled on this port. All
traffic is allowed through the USB interface on the LAN.
Standard
This field displays version of the USB standard supported on the device.
Type
This field displays the type of USB interface on the device.
Rate
This field displays the speed of the USB interface.
Power
This field displays how the USB interface is to obtain power.
14.4.2 USB Interface Stats
Display the Stats screen to view the statistics of the USB interface on the LAN.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice >
LANDevice > LANUSBInterfaceConfig, click a number and Stats to display the screen as
shown.
Figure 89 TR-069: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig: Stats
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 42 TR-069: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig: Stats
160
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
BytesSent
This field displays the number of transmitted bytes on this interface.
BytesReceive
d
This field displays the number of received bytes on this interface.
CellsSent
This field displays the number of transmitted cells on this interface.
CellsReceived
This field displays the number of received cells on this interface.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 14 LAN Device
14.5 WLAN Configuration
The settings in the WLANConfiguration screen is applicable to a device with built-in
wireless capabilities.
Use the WLANConfiguration screen to view the number of wireless LAN interface on the
device. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice >
LANDevice. Click a number and WLANConfiguration to display the screen as shown.
Figure 90 TR-069: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration
14.5.1 WLAN Configuration Details
The settings in the WLANConfiguration screen is applicable to a device with built-in
wireless capabilities. Use this configuration screen to view and configure basic wireless LAN
settings on the device.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice
> LANDevice.
2 Click a number and WLANConfiguration.
3 Click a number to display the screen as shown.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
161
Chapter 14 LAN Device
Figure 91 TR-069: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 43 TR-069: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration
162
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that the WLAN interface is enabled; otherwise, it
displays 0.
Status
This field displays the connection status of the WLAN interface.
BSSID
This field displays identification (usually the MAC address) of the wireless
interface.
MaxBitRate
This field displays the maximum bit rate (in Mbps) allowed on the WLAN
interface.
“auto” means the device automatically uses the highest transmission rate in the
OperationalDataTransmitRates field.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 14 LAN Device
Table 43 TR-069: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Channel
This field displays the wireless channel number (0 to 255) to use for transmission.
SSID
This field displays the name (up to 32 characters) to identify the wireless network.
BeaconType
This field displays the WLAN security mode for wireless transmission.
Select None to disable wireless security.
MACAddressContr
olEnabled
This field displays 1 to indicate that traffic with the specified MAC addresses is
allowed on this port. You can specify the MAC addresses in the
LANHostConfigManagement screen (refer to Section 14.2 on page 154).
0 means the MAC address control feature is disabled. All traffic is allowed
through the USB interface on the LAN.
Standard
This field displays the wireless standard in which the device is currently
operating.
WEPKeyIndex
This field displays the index number (1 - 4) of the WEP key the device is to use for
data encryption.
KeyPassphrase
This field displays the passphrase the device uses to generate the WEP keys.
WEPEncryptionLe
vel
This field displays the wireless encryption level supported on the device.
BasicEncryptionMo This field is applicable when you select a basic security option for the
des
BeaconType field.
WEPEncryption means the device is set to use basic WEP encryption for
wireless transmission.
None means WEP encryption is disabled. In this case, traffic sent through the
wireless network is not secure.
BasicAuthenticatio
nMode
This field is applicable when you select a basic security option in the
BeaconType field.
EAPAuthentication enables user authentication before wireless connection is
allowed for the WLAN clients.
None deactivates this feature. In this case, your wireless network may be
accessible by anyone.
WPAEncryptionMo
des
This field is applicable when you select a WPA security option in the BeaconType
field.
This field displays the encryption method used to secure traffic over the wireless
network.
WPAAuthentication This field is applicable when you select a WPA security option in the BeaconType
Mode
field.
This field displays the authentication method used to control access to your
wireless network.
IEEE11iEncryption
Modes
This field is applicable when you select an 11i security option in the BeaconType
field.
This field displays the encryption method to secure traffic over the wireless
network.
IEEE11iAuthenticat This field is applicable when you select an 11i security option in the BeaconType
ionMode
field.
This field displays the authentication method used to control access to your
wireless network.
PossibleChannels
Vantage Access User’s Guide
This field displays wireless channels available for your device as defined by the
regulatory body.
163
Chapter 14 LAN Device
Table 43 TR-069: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration (continued)
164
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
BasicDataTransmit
Rates
This field displays the wireless transmission rate (Mbps) for broadcast, multicast
and unicast frames on the device.
Multiple transmission rates are separated by commas (,). For example, “1,2”
means the device is able to send at 1 Mbps or 2 Mbps.
OperationalDataTr
ansmitRates
This field displays the maximum transmission rate (in Mbps) allowed for unicast
frames on the device.
Multiple transmission rates are separated by commas (,). For example, if the
BasicDataTransmitRates field is “1,2” and this field is “1,2,5.5,11”, then the
device can transmit unicast frames at the maximum rates of 5.5 Mbps or 11
Mbps.
PossibleDataTrans
mitRates
This field displays the transmission rates for unicast frames WLAN clients are
allowed when connecting to the device.
For example, if this field displays “1,2,5.5”. This means that the device allows a
wireless connection of up to 5.5 Mbps even though it is capable of connecting at
11 Mbps.
InsecureOOBAcce
ssEnabled
This field displays 1 to indicate that configuration changes are to be sent through
insecure management methods other than the WAN CPE Management Protocol.
0 disables this feature.
BeaconAdvertisem
entEnabled
This field displays 1 to indicate that the device is set to send beacons to advertise
its presence; otherwise, this field is 0.
RadioEnabled
This field display 1 to indicate that the wireless transmission is allowed on the
device; otherwise, this field displays 0.
AutoRateFallBack
Enabled
This field displays 1 to indicate that the device is set to automatically reduce
wireless transmission rate due to noise or contention.
0 deactivates this feature.
LocationDescriptio
n
This field displays the location of the device for identification purposes.
RegulatoryDomain
This field displays the name of the regulatory body in your geographical area.
The first two characters are the country code as defined in ISO/IEC 3166-1. For
the third character, “ “ means all environment, “I” means inside and “O” means
outside.
TotalPSKFailures
This field is applicable for WPA and 802.11i authentication methods.
This field displays the number of times pre-shared key authentication has failed.
TotalIntegrityFailur
es
This field is applicable for WPA and 802.11i authentication methods.
This field displays the number of times MICHEAL integrity check has failed.
ChannelsInUse
This field displays the channel number(s) that is currently used on the device for
wireless transmission.
DeviceOperationM
ode
This field displays the wireless operation mode for the device.
DistanceFromRoot
This field displays the number of hops between this device and the wireless
bridge/repeater.
PeerBSSID
This field displays the MAC address of the peer wireless bridge/repeater.
AuthenticationServ
iceMode
If user authentication is enabled, this field displays the location of the user
database the device is to check.
TotalBytesSent
This field displays the number of transmitted bytes on this interface.
TotalBytesReceive
d
This field displays the number of received bytes on this interface.
TotalPacketsSent
This field displays the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 14 LAN Device
Table 43 TR-069: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
TotalPacketsRecei
ved
This field displays the number of received packets on this interface.
TotalAssociations
This field displays the number of wireless clients associated to this device.
14.6 WLAN Association List
The AssociatedDevice screen displays a list of WLAN devices that are currently connected to
the device. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice
> LANDevice.
2 Click a number and WLANConfiguration.
3 Click a number and AssociatedDevice to display the screen as shown.
Figure 92 TR-069: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: AssociatedDevice
14.6.1 WLAN Association List Details
Display the AssociatedDevice screen to view information on a wireless client currently
connected to the device.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice
> LANDevice.
2 Click a number and WLANConfiguration.
3 Click a number and AssociatedDevice.
4 Click a number to display the screen as shown.
Figure 93 TR-069: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: AssociatedDevice: Details
Vantage Access User’s Guide
165
Chapter 14 LAN Device
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 44 TR-069: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: AssociatedDevice
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
AssociatedDeviceMACA
ddress
This field displays the MAC address of an associated device.
AssociatedDeviceIPAddr
ess
This field displays the IP address or domain name of an associated device.
AssociatedDeviceAuthen
ticationState
This field displays whether the associated device is authenticated (Enable)
or not (Disable).
LastRequestedUnicastCi
pher
This field is applicable for 802.11i authentication methods.
This field displays the last unicast cipher used for a device with the
specified MAC address.
LastRequestedMulticast
Cipher
This field is applicable for 802.11i authentication methods.
This field displays the last multicast cipher used for a device with the
specified MAC address.
LastPMKId
This field is applicable for 802.11i authentication methods.
This field displays the last pairwise master key used for a device with the
specified MAC address.
14.7 WEP Key
Use the WEPKey screen to view the WEP key object information. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on
page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice
> LANDevice.
2 Click a number and WLANConfiguration.
3 Click a number and WEPKey to display the screen as shown.
Figure 94 TR-069: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: WEPKey
14.7.1 WEP Key Details
Use this configuration screen to view and set up WEP encryption keys for secure wireless
communication on the device.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice
> LANDevice.
2 Click a number and WLANConfiguration.
3 Click a number and WEPKey.
4 Click a number to display the screen as shown.
166
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 14 LAN Device
Figure 95 TR-069: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: WEPKey: Details
The WEPKey field displays the WEP key content. Depending on the encryption level in the
WEPEncryptionLevel field in the WLANConfiguration screen, the key length varies.
For 40-bit encryption level, this field displays 10 hexadecimal characters (“0-9”, “a-z”, “AF”). For 104-bit encryption level, this field displays 26 hexadecimal characters (“0-9”, “a-z”,
“A-F”). The WEP key content is not sent when requested. An empty string is returned.
Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
14.8 Pre-shared Key
Use the PreSharedKey screen to view the pre-shared key information. Refer to Section 11.2.4
on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice
> LANDevice.
2 Click a number and WLANConfiguration.
3 Click a number and PreSharedKey to display the screen as shown.
Figure 96 TR-069: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: PreSharedKey
14.8.1 Pre-shared Key Details
Use the detailed PreSharedKey screen to configure the passphrase the device uses to generate
the pre-shared key and/or WEP keys automatically.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice
> LANDevice.
2 Click a number and WLANConfiguration.
3 Click a number and PreSharedKey.
4 Click a number to display the screen as shown.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
167
Chapter 14 LAN Device
Figure 97 TR-069: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: PreSharedKey: Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 45 TR-069: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: PreSharedKey: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
PreSharedKey
This field displays a pre-shared key for WPA security.
KeyPassphrase
This field displays the passphrase the device uses to generate a preshared key or WEP key based.
AssociatedDeviceMACA
ddress
This field displays the MAC address of a wireless client associated to this
key.
14.9 LAN Hosts
In the Hosts screen, you can view the number of LAN hosts that are assigned a dynamic or
static IP address by the device. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice >
LANDevice. Click a number and Hosts to display the screen.
Figure 98 TR-069: LAN Device: Hosts
14.9.1 LAN Host Table
Display the Host screen to view the host table name. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice
> LANDevice.
2 Click a number and Hosts.
3 Click Host to display the screen.
168
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 14 LAN Device
Figure 99 TR-069: LAN Device: Hosts: Host
14.9.2 LAN Host Table Details
Display the detailed Host screen to view or configure DHCP host settings (such as IP address,
lease time, etc.).
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice
> LANDevice.
2 Click a number and Hosts.
3 Click Host and a number to display the screen.
Figure 100 TR-069: LAN Device: Hosts: Host: Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 46 TR-069: LAN Device: Hosts: Host: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
IPAddress
This field displays the IP address assigned to the LAN host.
AddressSource
This field indicates whether the LAN host obtains the IP address statically
(Static), dynamically from the device (DHCP) or through automatic
assignment (Auto).
LeaseTimeRemaining
If the host IP address is assigned through DHCP, this field displays the lease
time remaining (in seconds). A value of -1 means that the lease never times
out.
This field displays zero if the IP address assignment is not through DHCP.
MACAddress
This field displays the MAC address of the LAN host.
HostName
This field displays the name of the LAN host.
InterfaceType
This field displays the name of the interface the LAN host uses to connect to
the device.
Active
This field is Enabled to indicate that the LAN host is currently present in the
network. Otherwise, this field shows Disable.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
169
Chapter 14 LAN Device
170
Vantage Access User’s Guide
CHAPTER
15
WAN Device
This chapter describes the screens you use to configure and view WAN settings.
15.1 WAN Device Screen Overview
Use the WAN Device screens to configure or view the WAN interface settings on the selected
device. The number of screens and field labels available vary depending on your device
model.
The WANDevice screen displays the number of connected WAN interface. Refer to Section
11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice >
WANDevice.
Figure 101 TR-069: WANDevice
15.1.1 WAN Device Details
To view the number of WAN connections, select a registered device in the Device List window
and click InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice and then click an index.
The value for the WANConnectionNumberOfEntries displays the number of connections on
the WAN interface. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions
Figure 102 TR-069: WANDevice: Details
Vantage Access User’s Guide
171
Chapter 15 WAN Device
15.2 WAN Common Interface Configuration
You can view basic common connection status in the WANCommonInterfaceConfig screen.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice >
WANDevice. Click a number and WANCommonInterfaceConfig to display the screen.
Figure 103 TR-069: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 47 TR-069: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig
172
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
EnabledForInternet
This field displays 1 to indicate that the WAN interface is enabled for
Internet access; otherwise, the field displays 0.
WANAccessType
This field displays the type of connection for Internet access on the
WAN interface.
Layer1UpstreamMaxBitRate
This field displays the maximum upstream transmission rate in bits
per second.
Layer1DownstreamMaxBitRate
This field displays the maximum download transmission rate in bits
per second.
PhysicalLinkStatus
This field displays the link status. Possible states are Up, Down,
Initializing and Unavailable.
WANAccessProvider
This field displays the name of the ISP providing the Internet access
service.
TotalBytesSent
This field displays the total number of bytes transmitted.
TotalBytesReceived
This field displays the total number of bytes received.
TotalPacketsSent
This field displays the total number of packets transmitted.
TotalPacketsReceived
This field displays the total number of packets received.
MaximumActiveConnections
This field displays the maximum number of connections allowed on
the device for Internet access.
NumberOfActiveConnections
This field displays the number of active connections on the device for
Internet access.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 15 WAN Device
15.2.1 Connection
Use the Connection screen to view the Internet connection instance. Refer to Section 11.2.4
on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice
> WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANCommonInterfaceConfig.
3 Click Connection to display the screen.
Figure 104 TR-069: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig: Connection
15.2.2 Connection Setup
Use the Connection screen to configure general connection settings.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice
> WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANCommonInterfaceConfig.
3 Click Connection and a number to display the screen.
Figure 105 TR-069: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig: Connection: Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 48 TR-069: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig: Connection: Setup
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
ActiveConnectionDeviceContai
ner
This field displays the hierarchical name of the WAN interface
associated with the connection. For example,
“InternetGatewayDevice.WANDevice.1.WANConnectionDevice.1.WANPPPConnection.1”
ActiveConnectionServiceID
This field displays the hierarchical name of the interface object for
this connection.
15.3 WAN DSL Interface Configuration
Use the WANDSLInterfaceConfig to configure the DSL connection for Internet access. DSL
connection setup is independent of other WAN interface parameter settings.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
173
Chapter 15 WAN Device
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice >
WANDevice. Click a number and WANDSLInterfaceConfig to display the screen.
Figure 106 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 49 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig
174
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that the link is active; otherwise, it displays
0.
Status
This field displays the link status.
ModulationType
This field displays the modulation method used on the link.
LineEncoding
This field displays the line encoding method used to establish a connection
to the ISP.
DataPath
This field displays whether the link uses fast (lower latency) or interleave
(lower error rate) data path.
InterleaveDepth
This field is applicable when the DataPath field shows Interleave.
This field displays the interleaved depth.
LineNumber
This field displays the number of the line pair used for the connection. For
example, 1 means the inner most pair.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 15 WAN Device
Table 49 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
UpstreamCurrRate
This field displays the current payload bandwidth (in kbps) of the upstream
DSL channel.
DownstreamCurrRate
This field displays the current payload bandwidth (in kbps) of the
downstream DSL channel.
UpstreamMaxRate
This field displays the attainable bandwidth (in kbps) for the upstream DSL
channel.
DownstreamMaxRate
This field displays the attainable bandwidth (in kbps) for the downstream
DSL channel.
UpstreamNoiseMargin
This field displays the current upstream Noise-to-Signal ratio (in 0.1 dB) for
the upstream DSL channel.
DownstreamNoiseMargin
This field displays the current upstream Noise-to-Signal ratio (in 0.1 dB) for
the downstream DSL channel.
UpstreamAttenuation
This field displays the current upstream signal loss (in 0.1 dB).
DownstreamAttenuation
This field displays the current downstream signal loss (in 0.1 dB).
UpstreamPower
This field displays the output power (in 0.1dBmV).
DownstreamPower
This field displays the received power (in 0.1dBmV).
ATURVendor
This field displays the ATU-R vendor identifier.
ATURCountry
This field displays the ATU-R country code.
ATURANSIStd
This field displays the ATU-R T1.413 version number.
ATURANSIRev
This field displays the ATU-R vendor revision number.
ATUCVendor
This field displays the ATU-C vendor identifier.
ATUCCountry
This field displays the ATU-C country code.
ATUCANSIStd
This field displays the ATU-C T1.413 version number.
ATUCANSIRev
This field displays the ATU-C vendor revision number.
TotalStart
This field displays the number of seconds that elapsed since the start of
the statistics information collection.
ShowtimeStart
This field displays the number of seconds since the beginning of the period
used for collecting first ShowTime statistics.
LastShowtimeStart
This field displays the number of seconds since the beginning of the
second most recent period used for collecting the ShowTime statistics.
CurrentDayStart
This field displays the number of seconds since the beginning of the period
used for collecting CurrentDayStart statistics.
QuarterHourStart
This field displays the number of seconds since the beginning of the period
used for collecting QuarterHour statistics.
15.3.1 WAN DSL Line Stats
Use the Stats screen to view the DSL connection statistics instance. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on
page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANDSLInterfaceConfig.
3 Click Stats.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
175
Chapter 15 WAN Device
Figure 107 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig: Stats
15.3.2 WAN DSL Line Statistics Details
You can view the line statistics in the Stats screens. The following statistics screens are
available. Field labels are the same in all the screens.
• Total: This screen displays the statistics with the totals.
• Showtime: This screen displays the statistics since the most recent DSL Showtime.
• LastShowtime: This screen displays the statistics since the second most recent DSL
Showtime.
• CurrentDay: This screen displays the statistics accumulated during the current day.
• QuarterHour: This screen displays the statistics accumulated during the current 15
minutes.
Follow the steps below to display a statistics screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANDSLInterfaceConfig.
3 Click Stats and click on the type of statistics you want to see.
Figure 108 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig: Stats (Total)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 50 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig: Stats (Total)
176
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
ReceiveBlocks
This field displays the number of blocks received.
TransmitBlocks
This field displays the number of blocks sent.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 15 WAN Device
Table 50 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig: Stats (Total) (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
CellDelin
This field displays the number of cell-delineation errors.
LinkRetrain
This field displays the number to link retrain errors.
InitErrors
This field displays the number of initialization errors.
InitTimeouts
This field displays the number of initialization timeout errors.
LossOfFraming
This field displays the number of Loss Of Framing errors.
ErroredSecs
This field displays the number of Errored Seconds.
SeverelyErroredSecs
This field displays the number of Severely Errored Seconds.
FECErrors
This field displays the number of FEC errors.
ATUCFECErrors
This field displays the number of FEC errors detected by the ATU-C.
HECErrors
This field displays the number of HEC errors.
ATUCHECErrors
This field displays the number of HEC errors detected by the ATU-C.
CRCErrors
This field displays the number of CRC errors.
ATUCCRCErrors
This field displays the number of CRC errors detected by the ATU-C.
15.4 WAN Ethernet Interface Configuration
You can set the Ethernet settings on the WAN interface in the WANEthernetInterfaceConfig
screen.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice >
WANDevice. Click a number and WANEthernetInterfaceConfig to display the screen.
Figure 109 TR-069: WAN Device: WANEthernetInterfaceConfig
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 51 TR-069: WAN Device: WANEthernetInterfaceConfig
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that this interface is active; otherwise, it displays 0.
Status
This field displays the status of this interface.
MACAddress
This field displays the MAC address of the interface.
MaxBitRate
This field displays the maximum link speed (10, 100 or Auto) on the interface.
DuplexMode
This field displays the duplex mode (Half, Full or Auto) for the interface.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
177
Chapter 15 WAN Device
15.4.1 WAN Ethernet Statistics
View the statistics for the WAN interface in the Stats screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice
> WANDevice.
2 Click a number WANEthernetInterfaceConfig.
3 Click Stats to display the statistics screen.
Figure 110 TR-069: WAN Device: WANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Stats
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 52 TR-069: WAN Device: WANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Stats
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
BytesSent
This field displays the total number of bytes sent through the WAN since the
device was last reset.
BytesReceived
This field displays the total number of bytes received on the WAN since the
device was last reset.
PacketsSent
This field displays the total number of packets sent through the WAN since the
device was last reset.
PacketsReceived
This field displays the total number of packets received on the WAN since the
device was last reset.
15.5 WAN DSL Connection Management
The WANDSLConnectionManagement screen displays the number of WAN connection
services on the device. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice >
WANDevice. Click a number and WANDSLConnectionManagement to display the screen.
Figure 111 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLConnectionManagement
178
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 15 WAN Device
15.6 WAN DSL Connection Service Information
You can view a list of connection service instances in the ConnectionService screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice
> WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANDSLConnectionManagement.
3 Click ConnectionService to display the screen.
Figure 112 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLConnectionManagement: ConnectionService
15.6.1 WAN DSL Connection Service Setup
You can view a list of connection service instances in the ConnectionService screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice
> WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANDSLConnectionManagement.
3 Click ConnectionService and a number to display the screen.
Figure 113 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLConnectionManagement: ConnectionService:
Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 53 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLConnectionManagement: ConnectionService:
Setup
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
WANConnectionDevice
This field displays the hierarchical name of the WAN connection device
object associated with the connection. For example,
“InternetGatewayDevice.WANDevice.1.WANConnectionDevice.2”
WANConnectionServic
e
This field displays the hierarchical name of the WAN connection device
object associated with the connection service. For example,
“InternetGatewayDevice.WANDevice.1.WANConnectionDevice.2.WANPPP
Connection.1”.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
179
Chapter 15 WAN Device
Table 53 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLConnectionManagement: ConnectionService:
Setup (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
DestinationAddress
This field shows the destination address of the connection. The address
displayed varies depending on the connection type.
This field displays VCI/VPI for a PVC connection.
This field displays an ATM connection name or ATM address for an SVC
connection.
LinkType
This field displays the type of the link.
ConnectionType
This field displays the name of the connection type.
Name
This field displays the descriptive name for this connection.
15.7 WAN DSL Diagnostics
You can view the DSL connection diagnostics data in the WANDSLDiagnostics screen.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice >
WANDevice. Click a number and WANDSLDiagnostics to display the screen as shown.
Figure 114 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLDiagnostics
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 54 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLDiagnostics
PARAMETER VALUE
NAME
180
LoopDiagnost
icsState
This field displays the availability of the link diagnostic test result. Requested
indicates a test is to be initialized.
ACTPSDds
This field displays the actual power spectral density for the downstream traffic.
ACTPSDus
This field displays the actual power spectral density for the upstream traffic.
ACTATPds
This field displays the actual aggregate transmitter power for the downstream traffic.
ACTATPus
This field displays the actual aggregate transmitter power for the upstream traffic.
HLINSCds
This field displays the linear representation scale for the downstream traffic.
HLINpsds
This field displays the linear channel characteristics per subcarrier for the upstream
traffic.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 15 WAN Device
Table 54 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLDiagnostics (continued)
PARAMETER VALUE
NAME
QLNpsds
This field displays the quiet line noise per subcarrier for the downstream traffic in
comma-separated list of numbers.
Maximum list of numbers is 256 for an ADSL/ADSL2 connection and 512 for an
ADSL2+ connection.
SNRpsds
This field displays the Signal-to-Noise ratio per subcarrier for the downstream traffic.
BITSpsds
This field displays the bit allocation per subcarrier for the downstream traffic.
GAINSpsds
This field displays the gain allocation per subcarrier for the downstream traffic.
15.8 WAN Connection Device
For DSL connections, you can view the connection instances associated to an ATM VC in the
WANConnectionDevice screen.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice. Click a number and WANConnectionDevice to
display the screen as shown.
Figure 115 TR-069: WAN Device: WANConnectionDevice
15.9 WAN Connection Device Details
You can view the number of connection instances associated to WAN connection devices in
the detailed WANConnectionDevice screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click on an index to display the screen as shown.
Figure 116 TR-069: WAN Device: WANConnectionDevice: Details
Vantage Access User’s Guide
181
Chapter 15 WAN Device
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 55 TR-069: WAN Device: WANConnectionDevice: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
WANIPConnectionNumberOf
Entries
This field displays the number of WANIPConnection entries
associated to the WANConnectionDevice.
WANPPPConnectionNumber
OfEntries
This field displays the number of WANPPPConnection entries
associated to the WANConnectionDevice.
15.9.1 WAN DSL Link Configuration
Use the WANDSLLinkConfig screen to set the ATM layer properties for the physical DSL
connection.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Cick a number and WANDSLLinkConfig to display the screen as shown.
Figure 117 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLLinkConfig
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 56 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLLinkConfig
182
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that the DSL link is active; otherwise, this
field displays 0.
LinkStatus
This field displays the link status (Up, Down, Initializing or Unavailable).
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 15 WAN Device
Table 56 TR-069: WAN Device: WANDSLLinkConfig (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
LinkType
This field displays the type for this DSL link.
EoA sets the device to use the bridged Ethernet over ATM (RFC2684) link
type.
IPoA sets the device to use the routed IP over ATM (RFC2684) link type.
PPPoA sets the device to use the PPP over ATM (RFC2364) link type.
PPPoE sets the device to use the PPP over Ethernet on bridged Ethernet
over ATM (RFC2516, RFC2684) link type.
CIP sets the device to use the Classical IP over ATM (RFC1577) link type.
Unconfigured means an unknown link type.
AutoConfig
This field displays whether the auto-configuration feature is enabled or
disable for this DSL link.
ModulationType
This field displays the type of modulation used on the interface associated
to this DSL link.
DestinationAddress
This field displays the destination address for the DSL link. The type of
address you entry varies depending on the connection type.
This field displays the VCI/VPI for a PVC connection.
This field displays an ATM connection name or ATM address for an SVC
connection.
ATMEncapsulation
This field displays the encapsulation (LLC or VCMUX) to use for this DSL
link.
FCSPreserved
This field displays 1 to include a checksum in the ATM payload for error
correction.
0 means the checksum is not included in the ATM payload. No error
correction is available.
VCSearchList
This field displays the VCI/VPI number pairs (separated by a comma) the
link uses to establish a connection if the destination address specified
cannot be reached.
ATMAAL
This field displays the ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL) the link uses.
ATMTransmittedBlocks
This field displays the number of ATM blocks transmitted successfully.
ATMReceivedBlocks
This field displays the number of ATM blocks received successfully.
ATMQoS
Select the ATM Quality of Service (QoS) method to use on this link.
ATMPeakCellRate
This field displays the peak cell rate (between 0 and 4294967295) for the
upstream traffic in cells per second.
ATMMaximumBurstSize
This field displays the maximum burst rate (between 0 and 4294967295)
for the upstream traffic in cells.
ATMSustainableCellRate
This field displays the sustainable cell rate (between 0 and 4294967295) for
the upstream traffic in cells per second. This value is used for traffic
shaping.
AAL5CRCErrors
This field displays the number of AAL5 layer cyclic redundancy check
errors.
ATMCRCErrors
This field displays the number of ATM layer cyclic redundancy check errors.
ATMHECErrors
This field displays the number of Header Error Check related errors at the
ATM layer.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
183
Chapter 15 WAN Device
15.10 WAN ATM F5 Loopback Diagnostics
Use the WANATMF5LoopbackDiagnostics screen to view loopback diagnostic (ping) test
results and to configure timeout settings for the ping test on the ATM layer.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice
> WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANATMF5LoopbackDiagnostics to display the screen as shown.
Figure 118 TR-069: WAN Device: WANATMF5LoopbackDiagnostics
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 57 TR-069: WAN Device: WANATMF5LoopbackDiagnostics
184
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
DiagnosticsState
This field displays the availability of the ping test result. Requested means
a test is to be initiated.
NumberOfRepetitions
This field displays the number of ping tests (between 1 and 4294967295) to
perform before displaying the test results.
Timeout
This field displays the timeout (between 1 and 4294967295 milliseconds)
for the ping test.
SuccessCount
This field displays the number of pings that received a successful response
within the timeout in the most recent ping test.
FailureCount
This field displays the number of pings that failed to receive a successful
response within the timeout in the most recent ping test.
AverageResponseTime
This field displays the average response time (in milliseconds) of all pings
that received a successful response in the most recent ping test.
If there is no successful response from the ping test, this field displays zero.
MinimumResponseTime
This field displays the minimum response time (in milliseconds) of the ping
that received a successful response in the most recent ping test.
If there is no successful response from the ping test, this field displays zero.
MaximumResponseTime
This field displays the maximum response time (in milliseconds) of the ping
that received a successful response in the most recent ping test.
If there is no successful response from the ping test, this field displays zero.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 15 WAN Device
15.11 WAN Ethernet Link Configuration
The WANEthernetLinkConfig screen displays the Ethernet link status (Up, Down or
Unavailable) in the EthernetLinkStatus field. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other
field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice
> WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANEthernetLinkConfig to display the screen as shown.
Figure 119 TR-069: WAN Device: WANEthernetLinkConfig
15.12 WAN POTS Link Configuration
You can view the WAN POTS connection status in the WANPOTSLinkConfig screen. The
POST connection is used for dialing to the ISP for Internet access.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice
> WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANPOTSLinkConfig to display the screen as shown.
Figure 120 TR-069: WAN Device: WANPOTSLinkConfig
Vantage Access User’s Guide
185
Chapter 15 WAN Device
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 58 TR-069: WAN Device: WANPOTSLinkConfig
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that the POTS link is active; otherwise it
displays 0.
LinkStatus
This field displays the link status (Up, Down, Dialing, Connecting or
Unavailable).
ISPPhoneNumber
This field displays the phone number (up to 64 digits in countrycodeareacode-phone number format) to dial to connect to the ISP. For example,
+86-10-62618501.
Multiple phone numbers are separated with a semicolon (:).
ISPInfo
This field displays a descriptive name (up to 64 characters) to identify this
ISP.
LinkType
The default link type is PPP_Dialup.
NumberOfRetries
This field displays the number of times (between 0 and 4294967295) the
CPE device is to re-dial for Internet connection.
DelayBetweenRetries
This field displays the time (in milliseconds) the CPE device is to wait
before attempting to connect to the ISP again.
Fclass
This field indicates the transmission functions the CPE device is capable of.
0:data
1, 2, 2.0: fax
8: voice
80: DSVD
DataModulationSupporte
d
This field displays the modulation method(s) supported for data transfer.
DataProtocol
This field displays the protocol(s) supported for data transfer.
DataCompression
This field displays the compression method used for data transfer.
PlusVTRCommandSupp
orted
This field indicates whether full-duplex mode is activated on the link or not.
15.13 WAN IP Connection
You can view the IP settings for the WAN connection in the WANIPConnection screen. Refer
to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice
> WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANIPConnection to display the screen as shown.
Figure 121 TR-069: WAN Device: WANIPConnection
186
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 15 WAN Device
15.13.1 WAN IP Connection Details
You can configure and view basic IP settings for the WAN connection in the detailed
WANIPConnection screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice
> WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANIPConnection.
4 Click a number to display the screen as shown.
Figure 122 TR-069: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 59 TR-069: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that this link is active; otherwise this field
displays 0.
ConnectionStatus
This field displays the link status (Unconfigured, Connecting,
Connected, PendingDisconnect, Disconnecting, Disconnected).
PossibleConnectionType
s
This field displays the connection type(s) this link supports.
ConnectionType
This field displays the connection type for this link.
Name
This field displays a descriptive name (up to 256 characters) for this link.
Uptime
This field displays the number of seconds the link has been up.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
187
Chapter 15 WAN Device
Table 59 TR-069: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: Details (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
LastConnectionError
This field displays the cause for the last failed connection attempt.
AutoDisconnectTime
This field displays the number of seconds (between 0 and 4294967295) the
device is to wait before disconnecting the link.
IdleDisconnectTime
This field displays the number of seconds (between 0 and 4294967295) of
inactivity timeout for a link. When the time is reached without any network
activity through the link, the device automatically disconnect the link.
WarnDisconnectDelay
This field displays the number of seconds (between 0 and 4294967295)
before the device disconnects the link.
RSIPAvailable
This field displays whether the Realm-specific IP (RSIP) feature is
supported on the device.
NATEnabled
This field displays 1 to indicate that the NAT (Network Address Translation)
feature is enabled for this link; otherwise the field displays 0.
AddressingType
This field displays DHCP to set the device to obtain a dynamic IP address
from the ISP for this link on the WAN.
This field displays Static to set the link to use a fixed WAN IP address.
Then configure the fields below.
ExternalIPAddress
This field is applicable when you select Static in the AddressingType field.
SubnetMask
This field is applicable when you select Static in the AddressingType field.
DefaultGateway
This field is applicable when you select Static in the AddressingType field.
DNSEnabled
This field displays 1 to set the device to resolve domain names through this
link; otherwise, this field is 0.
DNSOverrideAllowed
This field displays 1 to allow a non-empty DNS address to be replaced by a
DNS entry received on the WAN; otherwise, this field is 0.
DNSServers
This field displays the IP address(es) of the DNS server(s). Multiple IP
addresses are separated by a comma.
MaxMTUSize
This field displays the maximum size (between 1 and 1540) for the Ethernet
frames allowed on this link.
MACAddress
This field is applicable when you select Enable in the
MACAdddressOverride field.
This field displays the MAC address on this link.
MACAddressOverride
This field displays 1 to change the MAC address of this interface in the
MACAddress field.
This field is 0 if you do not allow MAC address modification.
ConnectionTrigger
This field displays how the device will establish a connection for Internet
access. Choices are AlwaysOn, OnDemand and Manual.
RouteProtocolRx
This field displays the routing protocol (RIP1, RIP2 or OSPF) the link is to
use. Off means the routing feature is disabled.
PortMappingNumberOfE
ntries
This field displays the number of port mappings on this link.
15.13.2 Port Mapping Table
Use the PortMapping screen to view the port mapping instance for the WAN IP connection.
Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice
> WANDevice.
188
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 15 WAN Device
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANIPConnection.
4 Click a number and PortMapping to display the screen as shown.
Figure 123 TR-069: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: PortMapping
15.13.3 Port Mapping Table Details
Use the detailed PortMapping screen to configure the port mapping settings for the WAN IP
connection.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice
> WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANIPConnection.
4 Click a number and PortMapping.
5 Click a number to display the screen as shown.
Figure 124 TR-069: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: PortMapping: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 60 TR-069: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: PortMapping: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
PortMappingEnabled
This field displays 1 to indicate that the port mapping entry on this link is
enabled; otherwise this field displays 0.
PortMappingLeaseDurati
on
This field displays the time (between 1 to 4294967295 seconds) the device
stores the port mapping entry. After this, the entry is removed from the port
mapping table.
0 means that a port mapping entry is static and cannot be removed from
the port mapping table.
RemoteHost
This field displays the IP address of the remote host device.
If this field is blank, it indicates a wildcard which the device must support. In
this case, when a packet is sent to the external port on the WAN, the device
will forward the packet to the internal port.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
189
Chapter 15 WAN Device
Table 60 TR-069: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: PortMapping: Details (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
ExternalPort
This field displays a port number (between 0 and 4294967295) the device
listens on for NAT connection requests.
0 indicates a wildcard. This sets the device to forward a wildcard packet to
the internal port.
InternalPort
This field displays a port number for the internal port (between 1 and
4294967295) to which the device forwards packets with wildcard.
PortMappingProtocol
This field displays the protocol (UDP or TCP) used for port mapping.
InternalClient
This field displays the IP address or domain name of a host on the LAN.
To allow UDP port mapping or multiple NAT clients to use the same port
number, use the broadcast address of 255.255.255.255 for the internal
client.
PortMappingDescription
This field displays a descriptive name (up to 256 characters) to identify this
port mapping entry.
15.13.4 WAN IP Connection Statistics
Display the Stats screen to view the statistics of all IP connections on the WAN interface.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice
> WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANIPConnection.
4 Click a number and Stats to display the screen as shown.
Figure 125 TR-069: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: Stats
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 61 TR-069: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: Stats
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
EthernetBytesSent This field displays the total number of bytes sent through the WAN since the
device was last reset.
190
EthernetBytesRec
eived
This field displays the total number of bytes received on the WAN since the
device was last reset.
EthernetPacketsS
ent
This field displays the total number of packets sent through the WAN since the
device was last reset.
EthernetPacketsR
eceived
This field displays the total number of packets received on the WAN since the
device was last reset.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 15 WAN Device
15.14 WAN PPP Connection
Display the WANPPPConnection screen to view PPP connection instance on the WAN
interface. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANPPPConnection to display the screen as shown.
Figure 126 TR-069: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection
15.14.1 WAN PPP Connection Details
Display the detailed WANPPPConnection screen to configure and view basic PPP settings
for Internet access on the WAN interface.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANPPPConnection.
4 Click a number to display the screen as shown.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
191
Chapter 15 WAN Device
Figure 127 TR-069: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 62 TR-069: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Details
192
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that this link is active; otherwise, it displays
0.
ConnectionStatus
This field displays the link status
PossibleConnectionType
s
This field displays the connection type(s) this link supports.
ConnectionType
This field displays the connection type for this link.
Name
This field displays a descriptive name (up to 256 characters) for this link.
Uptime
This field displays the number of seconds the link has been up.
LastConnectionError
This field displays the cause for the last failed connection attempt.
AutoDisconnectTime
This field displays the number of seconds (between 0 and 4294967295) the
device is to wait before disconnecting the link.
0 means you do not want the device to disconnect the link automatically.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 15 WAN Device
Table 62 TR-069: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Details (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
IdleDisconnectTime
This field displays the number of seconds (between 0 and 4294967295) of
inactivity before a link times out. When the time is reached without any
network activity through the link, the device automatically disconnects the
link.
0 means you do not want the device to disconnect the link automatically.
WarnDisconnectDelay
This field displays the number of seconds (between 0 and 4294967295)
before the device changes the state of the link to the disconnecting state.
RSIPAvailable
This field displays whether the Realm-specific IP (RSIP) feature is
supported on the device.
NATEnabled
This field displays 1 to indicate that the NAT (Network Address Translation)
feature is enabled for this link; otherwise, this field displays 0.
Username
This field displays the Internet access account user name (up to 64
characters) provided by the ISP for authentication.
Password
This field displays the Internet access account password (up to 64
characters) provided by the ISP for authentication.
PPPEncryptionProtocol
This field displays the protocol used for PPP encryption between the device
and the ISP’s network.
PPPCompressionProtoc
ol
This field displays the protocol used for PPP traffic compression between
the device and the ISP’s network.
PPPAuthenticationProtoc This field displays the protocol used for PPP connection authentication
ol
between the device and the ISP’s network.
ExternalIPAddress
This field displays the IP address used by NAT for this connection.
RemoteIPAddress
This field displays the remote IP address for this connection.
MaxMRUSize
This field displays the maximum size (between 1 and 1540) for the Ethernet
frames allowed on this link.
CurrentMRUSize
This field displays the current configured maximum frame size allowed from
a remote host.
DNSEnabled
This field displays 1 to set the device to resolve domain names through this
link; otherwise, this field is 0.
DNSOverrideAllowed
This field displays 1 to allow a non-empty DNS address to be replaced by a
DNS entry received on the WAN; otherwise, this field displays 0.
DNSServers
This field displays the IP address(es) of the DNS server(s).
Multiple IP addresses are separated by a comma.
MACAddress
This field is applicable when you select Enable in the
MACAdddressOverride field.
This field displays the MAC address of this interface on the device.
MACAddressOverride
This field displays 1 to allow change of MAC address on this interface in the
MACAddress field.
This field displays 0 if you do not allow MAC address modification.
TransportType
This field displays the transport protocol for the PPP connection.
PPPoEACName
This field displays the descriptive name for the PPPoE Access
Concentrator (AC).
PPPoEServiceName
This field displays the descriptive name for the PPPoE service.
ConnectionTrigger
This field displays how the device will establish a connection (AlwaysOn,
OnDemand and Manual) for Internet access.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
193
Chapter 15 WAN Device
Table 62 TR-069: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Details (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
RouteProtocolRx
This field displays the routing protocol (RIP1, RIP2 or OSPF) the link is to
use.
Off disables the routing feature.
PPPLCPEcho
This field displays the time (in seconds) for PPP Link Control Protocol
(LCP) echo.
PPPLCPEchoRetry
This field displays the time (in seconds) for PPP Link Control Protocol
(LCP) echo retry.
PortMappingNumberOfE
ntries
This field displays the number of port mappings on this link.
15.14.2 Port Mapping Table
Use the PortMapping screen to view the port mapping instance for the WAN PPP connection.
Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice
> WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANPPPConnection.
4 Click a number and PortMapping to display the screen as shown.
Figure 128 TR-069: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: PortMapping
15.14.3 Port Mapping Table Details
Use the detailed PortMapping screen to configure the port mapping settings for the WAN
PPP connection.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice
> WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANPPPConnection.
4 Click a number and PortMapping.
5 Click a number to display the screen as shown.
194
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 15 WAN Device
Figure 129 TR-069: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: PortMapping: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 63 TR-069: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: PortMapping: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
PortMappingEnabled
This field displays 1 to indicate that the port mapping entry on this link is
enabled; otherwise this field displays 0.
PortMappingLeaseDurati
on
This field displays the time (between 1 to 4294967295 seconds) the device
stores the port mapping entry. After this, the entry is removed from the port
mapping table.
0 means that a port mapping entry is static and cannot be removed from
the port mapping table.
RemoteHost
This field displays the IP address of the remote host device.
If this field is blank, it indicates a wildcard which the device must support. In
this case, when a packet is sent to the external port on the WAN, the device
will forward the packet to the internal port.
ExternalPort
This field displays a port number (between 0 and 4294967295) the device
listens on for NAT connection requests.
0 indicates a wildcard. This sets the device to forward a wildcard packet to
the internal port.
InternalPort
This field displays a port number for the internal port (between 1 and
4294967295) to which the device forwards packets with wildcard.
PortMappingProtocol
This field displays the protocol (UDP or TCP) used for port mapping.
InternalClient
This field displays the IP address or domain name of a host on the LAN.
To allow UDP port mapping or multiple NAT clients to use the same port
number, use the broadcast address of 255.255.255.255 for the internal
client.
PortMappingDescription
This field displays a descriptive name (up to 256 characters) to identify this
port mapping entry.
15.14.4 WAN PPP Connection Statistics
Display the Stats screen to view the statistics of all PPP connections on the WAN interface.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click InternetGatewayDevice
> WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANPPPConnection.
4 Click a number and Stats to display the screen as shown.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
195
Chapter 15 WAN Device
Figure 130 TR-069: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Stats
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 64 TR-069: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Stats
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
EthernetBytesSent This field displays the total number of bytes sent through the WAN since the
device was last reset.
196
EthernetBytesRec
eived
This field displays the total number of bytes received on the WAN since the
device was last reset.
EthernetPacketsS
ent
This field displays the total number of packets sent through the WAN since the
device was last reset.
EthernetPacketsR
eceived
This field displays the total number of packets received on the WAN since the
device was last reset.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
P ART IV
Internet Gateway
Device 1.1 (TR-098)
This part contains the following chapters.
• General Device Setup (199)
• LAN Device (229)
• WAN Device (247)
197
198
CHAPTER
16
General Device Setup
This chapter describes the general Configuration screens you display to view and set basic
device settings.
16.1 Internet Gateway Device
You can view the number and type of interfaces on a device.
1 Log into Vantage Access using a manager account and click the Provision Manager
icon in the control panel.
2 Select a device in the Device List window.
3 Click Provision > Data Model > InternetGatewayDevice.
Figure 131 TR-098: InternetGatewayDevice
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 65 TR-098: InternetGatewayDevice
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
DeviceSummary
This field displays a summary information of the device.
LANDeviceNumb
erOfEntries
This field displays the number of LAN interfaces on the selected device.
WANDeviceNumb
erOfEntries
This field displays the number of WAN interfaces on the selected device.
16.2 Device Information
View detailed device information in the DeviceInfo screen.
Click Provision > Data Model > InternetGatewayDevice > DeviceInfo to display the
general information of the selected device.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
199
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
Figure 132 TR-098: DeviceInfo
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 66 TR-098: DeviceInfo
200
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Manufacturer
This is the name of the company that produced this device.
ManufacturerOUI
This field displays the six-hexadecimal-digit OUI (Organization Unit Identifier) of
the company. The OUI is a unique number assigned by the IANA. Devices
produced by the same company have the same hard-wired OUI.
ModelName
This field displays the device model name.
Description
This field displays additional information about the device.
ProductClass
This field identifies the product class or product over which the SerialNumber
parameter is unique.
SerialNumber
This field displays the device serial number.
HardwareVersion
This field displays the hardware model name.
SoftwareVersion
This field displays the firmware version number.
ModemFirmware
Version
This field displays the modem firmware version number.
EnabledOptions
This field displays the name of the options enabled on the device.
AdditionalHardwa
reVersion
This field displays the available information of the additional hardware version.
AdditionalSoftwar
eVersion
This field displays the available information of the additional software version.
SpecVersion
This field displays the specification version implemented on the device.
ProvisioningCode
The provisioning code is used by the service provider to identify specific
parameter settings for the device.
Enter the identifier of the DSL service provider or provisioning information. You
can enter up to 64 characters (use only A-Z, 0-9 and “.” with no spaces allowed).
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
Table 66 TR-098: DeviceInfo (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
UpTime
This field displays the time (in seconds) since the device was last restarted.
FirstUseDate
This field displays the time and date the device first established a network
connection.
DeviceLog
Enter additional information for this device.
VendorConfigFile
NumberOfEntries
This field displays the number of configuration files.
16.3 Device Configuration
Display the DeviceConfig screen to view general information about the configuration file on a
device.
Click Provision > Data Model > InternetGatewayDevice > DeviceConfig.
Figure 133 TR-098: DeviceConfig
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 67 TR-098: DeviceConfig
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
PersistentData
This field displays the configuration data that must remain intact after a device
system reboot.
ConfigFile
This field displays the name of the vendor specific configuration file used for the
device.
16.4 Vendor Configuration File
The VendorConfigFile screen displays the name of the vendor configuration file and the time
it was first applied on the device. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field
descriptions.
Click Provision > Data Model > InternetGatewayDevice > DeviceInfo >
VendorConfigFile. Click on a file name to display detailed information.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
201
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
Figure 134 TR-098: VendorConfigFile
16.4.1 Vendor Configuration File Details
This screen displays detailed vendor configuration file information. You can find this screen
using one of the following methods:
• click a file name in the VendorConfigFile screen
• click Provision > Data Model > InternetGatewayDevice > DeviceInfo >
VendorConfigFile and click a number.
Figure 135 TR-098: VendorConfigFile: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 68 TR-098: VendorConfigFile: Details
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Name
This field displays the name of the vendor configuration file applied to the device.
Version
This field displays the version number of the vendor configuration file.
Date
This field displays the time and date the vendor configuration file was applied on
the device.
Description
This field displays a description about the vendor configuration file.
16.5 Management Server
Use the Management Server screen to configure settings on the device to connect to the
Vantage Access server.
Click Provision > Data Model > InternetGatewayDevice > ManagementServer.
202
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
Figure 136 TR-098: ManagementServer
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 69 TR-098: ManagementServer
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
URL
This field displays the address of the Vantage Access server to which the device
connects for remote management.
For example, “http://www.zyxel.com/TR098”.
Username
This field displays the user name the device uses to access Vantage Access.
Password
This field displays the password (up to 256 alphanumeric characters) associated
with the user name above.
Note: You must configure the same access user name and
password on the device and the Vantage Access server.
PeriodicInformEn
able
This field displays true to indicate that the device is set to regularly send device
information updates to Vantage Access.
This field displays false to indicate that this feature is disabled. In this case, you
must then manually update device information changes.
PeriodicInformInte This field is applicable when the PeriodicInformEnable field is 1.
rval
This field displays the time (in seconds) the device is to wait before sending device
request information updates to Vantage Access.
PeriodicInformTim This field is applicable when in the PeriodicInformEnable field is 1.
e
This field displays the reference time and date the device is to initiate the
information updates. The time in the format yyyy-mm-ddThh:mm:ss.
ParameterKey
This field displays the parameter that is changed from the most recent information
update.
ConnectionReque
stURL
This field displays the URL of the device to which Vantage Access sends a
connection request.
ConnectionReque
stUsername
This field displays the user name Vantage Access uses to access the device.
This is required if you want Vantage Access to initiate a connection and access the
device.
ConnectionReque
stPassword
This field displays the password associated with the user name above.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
203
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
Table 69 TR-098: ManagementServer (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
UpgradesManage
d
This field displays 1 to allow Vantage Access to upgrade firmware on the device.
This field displays 0 to indicate that remote firmware upgrade through Vantage
Access is disabled.
KickURL
This field displays the URL on the LAN from which the device can initiate a Kick
request.
DownloadProgres
sURL
This field displays the URL of a website on the LAN to which a user’s web browser
is redirected to display the file transfer progress of the device.
16.6 Time
Use the Time screen to configure time settings (such as the network time server and time
zone) on the device.
Click Provision > Data Model > InternetGatewayDevice > Time.
Figure 137 TR-098: Time
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 70 TR-098: Time
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
NTPServer1 .. 5
This field displays the IP address or host name of the time server the device is to
use to update the system time. For example, “http://www.zyxel.com”.
CurrentLocalTime
This field displays the current system time on the device.
LocalTimeZone
This field displays the time offset from the UTC (Universal Time Coordinate). For
example, +08:00.
LocalTimeZoneNa This field displays the name of the local time zone.
me
DaylightSavingsU
sed
204
This field displays 1 to indicate that daylight savings time is enabled on the device.
This field displays 0 if this feature is disabled.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
Table 70 TR-098: Time (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
DaylightSavingsSt This field is applicable if the DaylightSavingsUsed field is 1.
art
This field displays the starting date of the daylight savings time in the format 000000-00T00:00:00.
DaylightSavingsE
nd
This field is applicable if the DaylightSavingsUsed field is 1.
This field displays the end date of the daylight savings time in the format 0000-0000T00:00:00.
16.7 User Interface
Use the UserInterface screen to configure remote management settings to access the web
configurator on the device.
Click Provision > Data Model > InternetGatewayDevice > UserInterface to display the
screen as shown.
Figure 138 TR-098: UserInterface
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 71 TR-098: UserInterface
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
PasswordRequire
d
This field displays 1 if a password is required to log into the web configurator on
the device.
This field displays 0 if a password is not required.
PasswordUserSel
ectable
This field displays 1 if a user can specify a different password for Autoconfiguration on the device; otherwise it displays 0.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
205
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
Table 71 TR-098: UserInterface (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
UpgradeAvailable
This field displays 1 to allow user to view the upgrade information on the device;
otherwise it displays 0.
WarrantyDate
This field displays the time the warranty on the device expires.
ISPName
This field displays the name of your Internet Service Provider (ISP).
ISPHelpDesk
This field displays the telephone number of your ISP’s help desk.
ISPHomePage
This field displays the website address of your ISP’s home page.
ISPHelpPage
This field displays the website address of your ISP’s online support web page.
ISPLogo
This field displays the base64 encoded character for your ISP’s logo graphic. The
graphic can be a GIF or JEPG file smaller than 4095 bytes.
ISPLogoSize
This field displays the size of the logo graphic file.
ISPMailServer
This field displays the address of your ISP’s mail server.
ISPNewsServer
This field displays the address of your ISP’s news server.
TextColor
This field displays the color (in six-character RGB number) of the text in the web
configurator. For example, FFFFFF means white.
BackgroundColor
This field displays the color (in six-character RGB number) of the background in
the web configurator. For example, FFFFFF means white.
ButtonColor
This field displays the color (in six-character RGB number) of the buttons in the
web configurator. For example, FFFFFF means white.
ButtonTextColor
This field displays the color (in six-character RGB number) of the text on the
buttons in the web configurator. For example, FFFFFF means white.
AutoUpdateServe
r
This field is applicable if the UpgradesManaged field in the ManagementServer
screen shows 1 (see Section 16.5 on page 202).
This field displays the address of the server the device is to check for new
firmware. If new firmware is available, the device is to update the firmware
automatically.
UserUpdateServe
r
This field is applicable if the UpgradesManaged field in the ManagementServer
screen shows 0 (see Section 16.5 on page 202).
This field displays the address of the server a user can check for new firmware
updates available for the device.
ExampleLogin
This field displays the correct username format. This is to show users the correct
format to enter.
ExamplePasswor
d
This field displays the correct password format. This is to show users the correct
format to enter.
16.8 Layer3 Forwarding
Use the Layer3Forwarding screen to view the current layer 3 forwarding status and the
number of forwarding entries on the device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > Layer3Forwarding.
206
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
Figure 139 TR-098: Layer3Forwarding
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 72 TR-098: Layer3Forwarding
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Default
ConnectionService
This field displays the complete hierarchical name for the default WAN
interface.
ForwardNumberofEntries
This field displays the number of forwarding entries.
16.8.1 Layer3 Forwarding Table
The Forwarding screen displays the list of forwarding tables on the device. Refer to Section
11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Click Provision > Data Model > InternetGatewayDevice > Layer3Forwarding >
Forwarding.
Figure 140 TR-098: Layer3 Forwarding Table
16.8.2 Layer3 Forwarding Table Details
Use the detailed Forwarding screen to configure the layer 3 forwarding table on the device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > Layer3Forwarding > Forwarding. Then click on an index
number.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
207
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
Figure 141 TR-098: Layer3 Forwarding Table: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 73 TR-098: Layer3 Forwarding: Forwarding
208
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that entry in the forwarding table is enabled.
A value of 0 means that the rule is disabled. This is the default setting for new
forwarding entries.
Status
This field displays the status of the forwarding entry.
Type
This field displays the route type.
Default sets the device to route packets with any destination.
Host sets the device to route packets to a specific destination IP address.
Network sets the device to route packets to an IP network.
DestIPAddress
This field displays the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation for the
route entry.
DestSubnetMask
This field displays the destination subnet mask in dotted decimal notation for
the route entry.
SourceIPAddress
This field displays the source IP address in dotted decimal notation for the route
entry.
SourceSubnetMask
This field displays the source subnet mask in dotted decimal notation for the
route entry.
ForwardingPolicy
This field displays the index number of the forwarding policy the device is to
use.
GatewayIPAddress
This field displays the IP address of the gateway in dotted decimal notation for
the route entry.
Interface
This field displays the hierarchical name of the WAN interface associated to this
route entry. For example, “InternetGatewayDevice.WANDevice.1.WANConnectionDevice.1.WANPPPConnection.1”
ForwardingMetric
This field displays the number of hops to the destination. This is associated to
the cost of the route.
-1 means this route is not used to forward traffic.
MTU
This field displays the maximum Ethernet packet size allowed on this route.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
16.9 Layer2 Bridging
Use the Layer2Bridging screen to configure the bridge settings between layer2 LAN and/or
WAN interfaces on the device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > Layer2Bridging.
Figure 142 TR-098: Layer2Bridging
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 74 TR-098: Layer2Bridging
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
MaxBridgeEntries
This field displays the maximum number of entries in the bridge table.
MaxFilterEntries
This field displays the maximum number of entries in the filter table.
MaxMarkingEntries
This field displays the maximum number of entries in the marking table.
BridgeNumberOfEnt
ries
This field displays the number of entries in the bridge table.
FilterNumberOfEntri
es
This field displays the number of entries in the filter table.
MarkingNumberOfE
ntries
This field displays the number of entries in the marking table.
AvailableInterfaceNu
mberOfEntries
This field displays the number of entries in the interface table.
16.9.1 Bridging Table
Use the Bridge screen to view the bridge table list on the device. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on
page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > Layer2Bridging > Bridge.
Figure 143 TR-098: Layer2Bridging: Bridge
Vantage Access User’s Guide
209
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
16.9.2 Bridging Table Details
Use the detailed Bridge screen to view and configure the bridge table entry on the device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > Layer2Bridging > Bridge. Click a number to display the screen.
Figure 144 TR-098: Layer2Bridging: Bridge: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 75 TR-098: Layer2Bridging: Bridge: Details
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
BridgeKey
This field displays the index number of the entry.
BridgeEnable
This field indicates whether the entry is activated or not.
BridgeStatus
This field displays the status of the entry.
BridgeName
This field displays the descriptive name of the entry.
VLANID
This field displays the ID of the VLAN to which the entry belongs.
16.9.3 Filter Table
Use the Filter screen to view the filter table list on the device. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page
132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > Layer2Bridging > Filter.
Figure 145 TR-098: Layer2Bridging: Filter
16.9.4 Filter Table Details
Use the detailed Filter screen to view and configure the filter table entry on the device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > Layer2Bridging > Filter. Click a number to display the screen.
210
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
Figure 146 TR-098: Layer2Bridging: Filter: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 76 TR-098: Layer2Bridging: Filter: Details
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
FilterKey
This field displays the index number of the filter table entry.
FilterEnable
This field displays whether the entry is enabled.
FilterStatus
This field displays the status of the entry.
FilterBridgeReferenc
e
This field displays the index number of the bridge table entry associated with
this filter table entry.
ExclusivityOrder
This field displays whether the device is to match the filter table exclusively or
non-exclusively.
FilterInterface
This field displays the name of the interface to which this filter table entry is
applied.
VLANIDFilter
This field displays the VLAN ID of the packets the device is to filter on the
specified interface.
AdmitOnlyVLANTag
ged
This field displays whether the device is to allow tagged-only packets.
EthertypeFilterList
This field displays the Ethernet type(s) for the filter list. Multiple entries are
separated by commas.
EthertypeFilterExclu
de
This field displays whether the filter is to allow packets with the Ethernet type
not specified.
SourceMACAddress
FilterList
This field displays the list of source MAC address(es) to filter. Multiple entries
are separated by commas.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
211
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
Table 76 TR-098: Layer2Bridging: Filter: Details (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
SourceMACAddress
FilterExclude
This field displays whether the filter is to allow packets with the source MAC
address(es) not specified.
DestMACAddressFilt This field displays the list of destination MAC address(es) to filter. Multiple
erList
entries are separated by commas.
DestMACAddressFilt This field displays whether the filter is to allow packets with the destination MAC
erExclude
address(es) not specified.
SourceMACFromVe
ndorClassIDFilter
This field displays the list of device vendor ID (obtained through DHCP) to
which source MAC address filter is applied. Multiple entries are separated by
commas.
SourceMACFromVe
ndorClassIDFilterEx
clude
This field displays whether the filter is to allow packets with the vendor ID not
specified for the source MAC.
DestMACFromVend
orClassIDFilter
This field displays the list of device vendor ID (obtained through DHCP) to
which destination MAC address filter is applied. Multiple entries are separated
by commas.
DestMACFromVend
orClassIDFilterExclu
de
This field displays whether the filter is to allow packets with the vendor ID not
specified for the destination MAC.
SourceMACFromCli
entIDFilter
This field displays the list of DHCP client ID (option61, RFC2132) to which
source MAC address filter is applied. Multiple entries are separated by
commas.
SourceMACFromCli
entIDFilterExclude
This field displays whether the filter is to allow packets with the client ID not
specified for the source MAC.
DestMACFromClient
IDFilter
This field displays the list of DHCP client ID (option61, RFC2132) to which
destination MAC address filter is applied. Multiple entries are separated by
commas.
DestMACFromClient
IDFilterExclude
This field displays whether the filter is to allow packets with the client ID not
specified for the destination MAC.
SourceMACFromUs
erClassIDFilter
This field displays the list of DHCP user class identification ID (option77,
RFC3004) to which source MAC address filter is applied. Multiple entries are
separated by commas.
SourceMACFromUs
erClassIDFilterExclu
de
This field displays whether the filter is to allow packets with the class
identification ID not specified for the source MAC.
DestMACFromUser
ClassIDFilter
This field displays the list of DHCP user class identification ID (option77,
RFC3004) to which destination MAC address filter is applied. Multiple entries
are separated by commas.
DestMACFromUser
This field displays whether the filter is to allow packets with the class
ClassIDFilterExclude identification ID not specified for the destination MAC.
16.9.5 Marking Table
Use the Marking screen to view the marking table list on the device. Refer to Section 11.2.4
on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > Layer2Bridging > Marking.
212
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
Figure 147 TR-098: Layer2Bridging: Marking
16.9.6 Marking Table Details
Use the detailed Marking screen to view and configure the marking table entry on the device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > Layer2Bridging > Marking. Click a number to display the
screen.
Figure 148 TR-098: Layer2Bridging: Marking: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 77 TR-098: Layer2Bridging: Marking: Details
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
MarkingKey
This field displays the index number of the marking table entry.
MarkingEnable
This field displays whether the marking table entry is activated or not.
MarkingStatus
This field displays the status of the marking table entry.
MarkingBridgeRefer
ence
This field displays the index number of the bridge table entry associated with
this marking table entry.
MarkingInterface
This field displays the name of the interface to which the device applies this
marking table entry.
VLANIDUntag
This field displays whether the device removes the VLAN tag from outgoing
packets on the interface.
VLANIDMark
This field displays the VLAN ID of the outgoing packets to which this marking
table entry is to apply.
EthernetPriorityMark
This field displays the Ethernet priority level to add to incoming packets on the
interface.
-1 means that the device does not change the priority level assigned by the
classifier.
EthernetPriorityOver
ride
This field displays whether the priority level marking is to apply to all packets on
the interface.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
213
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
16.9.7 Available Interface Table
Use the AvailableInterface screen to view the interface table list on the device. Refer to
Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > Layer2Bridging > AvailableInterface.
Figure 149 TR-098: Layer2Bridging: AvailableInterface
16.9.8 Available Interface Table Details
Use the detailed AvailableInterface screen to view and configure the interface table entry on
the device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > Layer2Bridging > AvailableInterface. Click a number to display
the screen.
Figure 150 TR-098: Layer2Bridging: AvailableInterface: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 78 TR-098: Layer2Bridging: AvailableInterface: Details
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
AvailableInterfaceKe
y
This field displays the index number of the available interface table entry.
InterfaceType
This field displays the type of interface.
InterfaceReference
This field displays the parameter name of the interface.
16.10 Queue Management
Use the QueueManagement screen to configure settings to manage queues on the device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > QueueManagement.
214
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
Figure 151 TR-098: QueueManagement
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 79 TR-098: QueueManagement
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable
This field displays whether queue management is activated or not.
MaxQueues
This field displays the maximum number of queues on the device.
MaxClassificationEnt This field displays the maximum number of entries in the classification table.
ries
ClassificationNumbe
rOfEntries
This field displays the number of entries currently in the classification table.
MaxAppEntries
This field displays the maximum number of entries in the application table.
AppNumberOfEntrie
s
This field displays the number of entries currently in the application table.
MaxFlowEntries
This field displays the maximum number of entries in the flow table.
FlowNumberOfEntrie This field displays the number of entries currently in the flow table.
s
MaxPolicerEntries
This field displays the maximum number of entries in the policer table.
PolicerNumberOfEnt
ries
This field displays the number of entries currently in the policer table.
MaxQueueEntries
This field displays the maximum number of entries in the queue table.
QueueNumberOfEnt
ries
This field displays the number of entries currently in the queue table.
DefaultForwardingP
olicy
This field displays the index number of the forwarding policy table associated to
the traffic.
DefaultPolicer
This field displays the index number of the default policer table for traffic without
a specified classifier.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
215
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
Table 79 TR-098: QueueManagement
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
DefaultQueue
This field displays the index number of the default queue table for traffic without
a specified classifier.
DefaultDSCPMark
This field displays the default DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) for traffic without a
specified classifier.
DefaultEthernetPriori This field displays the default priority level for traffic without a specified
tyMark
classifier.
AvailableAppList
This field displays a comma-separated list of protocols supported by the
application table.
16.10.1 Queue Classification
Use the Classification screen to view the classification table list on the device. Refer to
Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > QueueManagement> Classification.
Figure 152 TR-098: QueueManagement: Classification
16.10.2 Queue Classification Details
Use the detailed Classification screen to view and configure queue classification settings.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > QueueManagement > Classification. Click a number to display
the screen.
216
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
Figure 153 TR-098: QueueManagement: Classification: Details
Vantage Access User’s Guide
217
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 80 TR-098: QueueManagement: Classification: Details
218
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
ClassificationKey
This field displays the index number of the classification table.
ClassificationEnable
This field displays whether the classification table is activated or not.
ClassificationStatus
This field displays the status of the classification table.
ClassificationOrder
This field displays the precedence of the entry in the classification table.
ClassInterface
This field displays the interface associated to this classification table. This is
one of the classification criteria.
DestIP
This field displays the destination IP address to be classified.
DestMask
This field displays the destination subnet mask of the destination IP address to
be classified.
DestIPExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets with destination IP
address(es) not specified above.
SourceIP
This field displays the source IP address of the packet to be classified.
SourceMask
This field displays the subnet mask of the source IP address to be classified.
SourceIPExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose source IP
address is not specified above.
Protocol
This field displays the protocol number to classify.
ProtocolExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose protocol type
is not specified above.
DestPort
This field displays the destination port number to be classified.
DestPortRangeMax
This field displays the end of the destination port number range the device is to
classify.
DestPortExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose destination
port number is not specified above or in the range.
SourcePort
This field displays the source port number to be classified.
SourcePortRangeM
ax
This field displays the end of the source port number range the device is to
classify.
SourcePortExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose source port
number is not specified above.
SourceMACAddress
This field displays the source MAC address to be classified.
SourceMACMask
This field displays the network portion of the source MAC address the device is
to classify.
SourceMACExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose source MAC
address is not specified above.
DestMACAddress
This field displays the destination MAC address to be classified.
DestMACMask
This field displays the network portion of the destination MAC address the
device is to classify.
DestMACExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose destination
MAC address is not specified above.
Ethertype
This field displays the Ethernet type to be classified.
EthertypeExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose Ethernet
type is not specified above.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
Table 80 TR-098: QueueManagement: Classification: Details
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
SSAP
This field displays the value of the Source link Service Access Point (SSAP) the
device is to classify.
SSAPExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose SSAP value
is not specified above.
DSAP
This field displays the value of the Destination link Service Access Point
(SSAP) the device is to classify.
DSAPExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose DSAP value
is not specified above.
LLCControl
This field displays the control value in the Logical Link Control (LLC) header the
device is to classify.
LLCControlExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose control value
in the LLC header is not specified above.
SNAPOUI
This field displays the OUI value in the SNAP header the device is to classify.
SNAPOUIExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose OUI value in
the SNAP header is not specified above.
SourceVendorClassI
D
This field displays the source vendor class ID the device is to classify.
SourceVendorClassI
DExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose source
vendor class ID is not specified above.
DestVendorClassID
This field displays the destination vendor class ID the device is to classify.
DestVendorClassID
Exclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose destination
vendor class ID is not specified above.
SourceClientID
This field displays the source client ID the device is to classify.
SourceClientIDExclu
de
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose source client
ID is not specified above.
DestClientID
This field displays the destination client ID the device is to classify.
DestClientIDExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose destination
client ID is not specified above.
SourceUserClassID
This field displays the source user class ID the device is to classify.
SourceUserClassID
Exclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose source user
class ID is not specified above.
DestUserClassID
This field displays the destination user class ID the device is to classify.
DestUserClassIDExc This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose destination
lude
user class ID is not specified above.
TCPACK
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets with ACK control bit
set in all TCP segments.
TCPACKExclude
This field displays whether the class includes packets not marked by TCPACK
above.
IPLengthMin
This field displays the minimum IP packet length in bytes.
IPLengthMax
This field displays the maximum IP packet length in bytes.
IPLengthExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose IP packet
length falls within the range specified above.
DSCPCheck
This field displays whether the device is to match the DSCP in the packets.
DSCPExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose DSCP
matches or does not match DSCPCheck above.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
219
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
Table 80 TR-098: QueueManagement: Classification: Details
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
DSCPMark
This field displays whether the device is to change the DSCP settings on
incoming packets.
EthernetPriorityChec
k
This field displays whether the device is to match the priority level in the
packets.
EthernetPriorityExcl
ude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose priority level
matches or does not match EthernetPriorityCheck above.
EthernetPriorityMark
This field displays whether the device is to change the priority level on incoming
packets.
VLANIDCheck
This field displays whether the device is to match the VLAN ID in the packets.
VLANIDExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose VLAN ID
matches or does not match VLANIDCheck above.
ForwardingPolicy
This field displays whether the device is to change the VLAN ID on incoming
packets.
ClassPolicer
This field displays the name of the policer instance associated to this
classification table.
ClassQueue
This field displays the name of the queue instance associated to this
classification table.
ClassApp
This field displays the name of the application instance associated to this
classification table.
16.10.3 Application Queue
Use the App screen to view the application queue list on the device. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on
page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > QueueManagement > App.
Figure 154 TR-098: QueueManagement: App
16.10.4 Application Queue Details
Use the detailed App screen to view and configure the application queue table entry on the
device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > QueueManagement > App. Click a number to display the screen.
220
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
Figure 155 TR-098: QueueManagement: App: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 81 TR-098: QueueManagement: App: Details
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
AppKey
This field displays the index number of the application table entry.
AppEnable
This field displays whether this entry is activated or not.
AppStatus
This field displays the status of the entry.
ProtocolIdentifier
This field displays the number that identifies the protocol.
AppName
This field displays the descriptive name of the protocol.
AppDefaultForwardi
ngPolicy
This field displays the index number of the forwarding policy entry associated
with this entry.
AppDefaultPolicer
This field displays the index number of the policer table entry associated with
this entry.
AppDefaultQueue
This field displays the index number of the queue table entry associated with
this entry.
AppDefaultDSCPMa
rk
This field displays the default DSCP marking associated with this entry.
AppDefaultEthernet
PriorityMark
This field displays the default priority level associated with this entry.
16.10.5 Queue Flow
Use the Flow screen to view the queue flow table list on the device. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on
page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > QueueManagement > Flow.
Figure 156 TR-098: QueueManagement: Flow
Vantage Access User’s Guide
221
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
16.10.6 Queue Flow Details
Use the detailed Flow screen to view and configure the queue flow table entry on the device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > QueueManagement > Flow. Click a number to display the
screen.
Figure 157 TR-098: QueueManagement: Flow: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 82 TR-098: QueueManagement: Flow: Details
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
FlowKey
This field displays the index number of the flow table entry.
FlowEnable
This field displays whether this entry is activated or not.
FlowStatus
This field displays the status of the entry.
FlowType
This field displays the flow type associated with the queue and policer.
FlowTypeParameter
s
This field displays the value of the flow type.
FlowName
This field displays the descriptive name for this entry.
AppIdentifier
This field displays the index number of the application table entry associated
with this entry.
FlowForwardingPolic This field displays the index number of the forwarding policy entry associated
y
with this entry.
222
FlowPolicer
This field displays the index number of the policer table entry associated with
this entry.
FlowQueue
This field displays the index number of the queue table entry associated with
this entry.
FlowDSCPMark
This field displays the default DSCP marking associated with this entry.
FlowEthernetPriority
Mark
This field displays the default priority level associated with this entry.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
16.10.7 Queue Policer
Use the Policer screen to view the queue policy table list on the device. Refer to Section
11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > QueueManagement > Policer.
Figure 158 TR-098: QueueManagement: Policer
16.10.8 Queue Policer Details
Use the detailed Policer screen to view and configure the queue policy table entry on the
device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > QueueManagement > Policer. Click a number to display the
screen.
Figure 159 TR-098: QueueManagement: Policer: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 83 TR-098: QueueManagement: Policer: Details
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
PolicerKey
This field displays the index number of the policer table entry.
PolicerEnable
This field displays whether the entry is activated or not.
PolicerStatus
This field displays the current status of the entry.
CommittedRate
This field displays the committed rate (in bits/sec) allowed for this entry.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
223
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
Table 83 TR-098: QueueManagement: Policer: Details (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
CommittedBurstSize
This field displays the committed burst rate (in bytes) for this entry.
ExcessBurstSize
This field displays the excess burst rate (in bytes) for this entry.
PeakRate
This field displays the peak rate (in bits/sec) allowed for this entry.
PeakBurstSize
This field displays the peak burst rate (in bytes) for this entry.
MeterType
This field displays the traffic measurement method to use for this entry.
PossibleMeterTypes
This field displays the comma-separated list of supported traffic measurement
types.
ConformingAction
This field displays how the device is to handle conforming traffic.
PartialConformingAc
tion
This field displays how the device is to handle partially conforming traffic.
NonConformingActio
n
This field displays how the device is to handle non-conforming traffic.
CountedPackets
This field displays the number of packets as a result of the count meter action.
CountedBytes
This field displays the number of bytes as a result of the count meter action.
16.10.9 Queue
Use the Queue screen to view the queue table list on the device. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on
page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > QueueManagement > Queue.
Figure 160 TR-098: QueueManagement: Queue
16.10.10 Queue Details
Use the detailed Queue screen to view and configure the queue table entry on the device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > QueueManagement > Queue. Click a number to display the
screen.
224
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
Figure 161 TR-098: QueueManagement: Queue: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 84 TR-098: QueueManagement: Queue: Details
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
QueueKey
This field displays the index number of the queue table entry.
QueueEnable
This field displays whether the entry is activated or not.
QueueStatus
This field displays the current status of the entry.
QueueInterface
This field displays the name of the interface to which the entry is applied.
QueueBufferLength
This field displays the queue buffer size in bytes.
QueueWeight
This field displays the queue weight for weighted queuing methods.
QueuePrecedence
This field displays the priority level of the queue relative to other queues.
REDThreshold
This field displays the threshold for Random Early Discard (RED) algorithm.
REDPercentage
This field displays the percentage for Random Early Discard (RED) algorithm.
DropAlgorithm
This field displays the name of the drop algorithm for this queue in case of
network congestion.
SchedulerAlgorithm
This field displays the name of the algorithm used by the scheduler.
ShapingRate
This field displays the shaping rate for the queue.
ShapingBurstSize
This field displays the burst size in bytes for traffic shaping.
16.11 LAN Configuration Security
Use the LANConfigSecurity screen to display and configure the password to allow LAN
access on the device for auto-configuration settings. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANConfigSecurity.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
225
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
Figure 162 TR-098: LANConfigSecurity
16.12 IP Ping Diagnostics
Use the IPPingDiagnostics screen to configure the ping test settings on a device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > IPPingDiagnostics.
Figure 163 TR-098: IPPingDiagnostics
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 85 TR-098: IPPingDiagnostics
226
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
DiagnosticsState
This field displays the ping test result.
Interface
This field displays the hierarchical name of the interface for ping diagnostics.
For example,
“InternetGatewayDevice.WANDevice.1.WANConnectionDevice.1.WANPPPCo
nnection.1”.
You can enter up to 256 characters for the interface name.
Host
This field displays the IP address or domain name of the host the device is to
ping to test the connection.
NumberOfRepetition
s
This field displays the number of ping test before displaying the result.
Timeout
This field displays the timeout (in milli-seconds) for a ping test.
DataBlockSize
This field displays the size of the packet to send for each ping test.
DSCP
This field displays the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) to use for the test packets.
The default is 0.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
Table 85 TR-098: IPPingDiagnostics (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
SuccessCount
This field displays the number of ping tests that are successful before the
timeout.
FailureCount
This field displays the number of ping tests that failed.
AverageResponseTi
me
This field displays the average response time (in milli-seconds) of successful
ping tests. If there are no successful responses, this field displays 0.
MinimumResponseT
ime
This field displays the minimum response time (in milli-seconds) of successful
ping tests. If there are no successful responses, this field displays 0.
MaximumResponse
Time
This field displays the maximum response time (in milli-seconds) of successful
ping tests. If there are no successful responses, this field displays 0.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
227
Chapter 16 General Device Setup
228
Vantage Access User’s Guide
CHAPTER
17
LAN Device
This chapter describes the screens you use to configure and view LAN settings.
17.1 LAN Device Screen
Use the LANDevice screens to configure or view the LAN interface settings on the selected
device. The number of screens and field labels available vary depending on your device
model. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice to display the screen.
Figure 164 TR-098: LANDevice
17.1.1 Detailed LAN Device Information
Use this screen to view detailed LAN device information. To find this screen, click Provision
> Data Model > InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice and a number.
Figure 165 TR-098: LANDevice: Details
Vantage Access User’s Guide
229
Chapter 17 LAN Device
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 86 TR-098: LANDevice: Details
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
LANEthernetInterf This field displays the number of instances on the LAN interface.
aceNumberOfEntr
ies
LANUSBInterface
NumberOfEntries
This field displays the number of instances on the USB interface.
LANWLANConfig
urationNumberOf
Entries
This field displays the number of instances on the WLAN interface.
17.2 LAN Host Configuration Management
Use the LANHostConfigManagement screen to view and configure DHCP settings on the
LAN interface.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice. Click a number and LANHostConfigManagement
to display the screen.
Figure 166 TR-098: LAN Device: LANHostConfigManagement
230
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 17 LAN Device
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 87 TR-098: LAN Device: LANHostConfigManagement
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
DHCPServerConfigurable
This field displays 1 if Vantage Access can change the default DHCP
server setting on the LAN interface.
This field displays 0 to have the device use the default DHCP server
settings on the LAN. No changes are allowed.
DHCPServerEnable
This field displays 1 to indicate that the DHCP server setting on the LAN
interface in enabled.
This field displays 0 to indicate that the DHCP server setting on the LAN
interface is disabled.
DHCPRelay
This field displays 1 when the device is set to act as a DHCP relay on the
LAN. The device will forward DHCP requests from the clients to the actual
DHCP server on the LAN. In this case, you must set up a DHCP server.
This field displays 0 when DHCP relay is deactivated. In this case, the
device acts as a DHCP server.
MinAddress
This field displays the first IP address in the DHCP IP pool the DHCP
server assigns to a DHCP client on the LAN.
MaxAddress
This field displays the last IP address in the DHCP IP pool the DHCP
server assigns to a DHCP client on the LAN.
ReservedAddresses
This field displays the IP address(es) in the DHCP IP pool that is reserved
and not assigned to a DHCP client on the LAN.
IP addresses are separated by a comma (,).
SubnetMask
This field displays the subnet mask for the DHCP clients.
DNSServers
This field displays the IP address of the DNS server whose information
the device sends to the DHCP clients.
DNS server IP addresses are separated by a comma (,).
DomainName
This field displays the domain name the device is to assign to DHCP
clients.
IPRouters
This field displays the IP address of the default gateway on the LAN.
IP addresses are separated by a comma (,).
DHCPLeaseTime
This field displays the lease time (in seconds) for the assigned IP address
to DHCP client(s).
This field displays -1 to indicate that a lease time never times out.
UseAllocatedWAN
This field displays how the device is to assign DHCP client IP
address(es).
Normal means the device is set to assign IP address from the DHCP IP
pool configured.
UserAllocatedSubnet means the device is set to assign IP address from
the range of WAN IP addresses provided by your ISP.
Passthrough means the device is set to assign IP address to the DHCP
client whose MAC address is marked for passthrough.
AssociatedConnection
This field is applicable if the UseAllocatedWAN field displays
UseAllocatedSubnet or Passthrough.
This field displays the complete hierarchical name for the default WAN
interface to which this connection is associated.
PassthroughLease
This field displays the lease time (in seconds) to DHCP clients when the
WAN IP address is passthrough.
PassthroughMACAddress
This field is applicable if you select Passthrough in the
UseAllocatedWAN field.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
231
Chapter 17 LAN Device
Table 87 TR-098: LAN Device: LANHostConfigManagement (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
AllowedMACAddresses
This field displays the MAC address(es) allowed to pass through the LAN.
IPInterfaceNumberOfEntri
es
This field displays the number of IP subnets on the LAN.
This field is 1 if IP alias is not supported on the LAN.
17.2.1 IP Interface
The IPInterface screen allows you to view IP settings per each subnet on the LAN. Refer to
Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice > LANHostConfigManagement. Click IPInterface
to display the screen.
Figure 167 TR-098: LAN Device: IPInterface
17.2.2 IP Interface Details
Use this screen to view detailed IP interface information.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice.
2 Click a number and LANHostConfigManagement.
3 Click IPInterface and a number to display the screen.
Figure 168 TR-098: LAN Device: IPInterface: Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 88 TR-098: LAN Device: IPInterface: Details
232
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that the LAN interface is enabled.
0 means the LAN interface is disabled and no traffic is allowed through.
IPInterfaceIPAddress
This field displays the LAN IP address of the device in dotted decimal notation,
for example, 192.168.1.1.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 17 LAN Device
Table 88 TR-098: LAN Device: IPInterface: Details (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
IPInterfaceSubnetMas This field displays the subnet mask on the LAN. For example, 255.255.255.0.
k
IPInterfaceAddressing This field displays the method to assign IP address on the LAN interface.
Type
DHCP means the device is set to assign IP address from a DHCP server.
Static means the device is set to use a fixed IP address configured in the field
above.
AutoIP means the device is set to use the default IP settings on the LAN
interface.
17.3 LAN Ethernet Interface
The LANEthernetInterfaceConfig screen allows you to view LAN Ethernet settings. Refer
to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice. Then click a number and
LANEthernetInterfaceConfig to display the screen.
Figure 169 TR-098: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig
17.3.1 LAN Ethernet Interface Details
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice.
2 Click a number and LANEthernetInterfaceConfig.
3 Click a number to display the configuration screen for a LAN Ethernet interface.
Use this screen to enable or disable the LAN Ethernet interface, configure the port speed and
duplex mode. You can also use this screen to enable or disable static MAC address learning.
Figure 170 TR-098: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Details
Vantage Access User’s Guide
233
Chapter 17 LAN Device
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 89 TR-098: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Details
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that the LAN Ethernet interface is active.
0 indicates the LAN Ethernet interface is disabled. In this case, no connection is
allowed.
Status
This field displays the connection status of the Ethernet interface.
MACAddress
This field displays the MAC address of the Ethernet interface.
MACAddress
ControlEnable
d
This field displays 1 to indicate that traffic with the specified MAC addresses is
allowed on this port. You can specify the MAC addresses in the
LANHostConfigManagement screen (refer to Section 17.2 on page 230).
This field displays 0 to indicate that MAC address control is disabled. All traffic is
allowed through the LAN interface.
MaxBitRate
This field displays the connection speed in megabits per second (Mbps).
Auto (auto-negotiation) allows the port to negotiate with a peer port automatically to
obtain the connection speed that both ends support.
DuplexMode
This field displays the duplex mode for the connection.
Auto allows the port to negotiate with a peer port automatically to obtain the duplex
mode that both ends support.
17.3.2 Ethernet Interface Statistics
The Stats screen shows the statistics on the LAN interface.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice.
2 Click a number and LANEthernetInterfaceConfig.
3 Click a number and Stats.
Figure 171 TR-098: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Stats
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 90 TR-098: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Stats
234
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
BytesSent
This field displays the number of transmitted bytes on this interface.
BytesReceive
d
This field displays the number of received bytes on this interface.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 17 LAN Device
Table 90 TR-098: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Stats (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
PacketsSent
This field displays the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
PacketsRecei
ved
This field displays the number of received packets on this interface.
17.4 LAN USB Interface
The LANUSBInterfaceConfig screen is applicable when your device comes with a USB port.
Use this screen to view a summary of the USB interface. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132
for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice. Then click a number and LANUSBInterfaceConfig
to display the screen.
Figure 172 TR-098: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig
17.4.1 LAN USB Interface Details
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice.
2 Click a number and LANUSBInterfaceConfig.
3 Click a number to display the screen as shown.
Use this screen to activate the USB interface and/or enable MAC address learning control.
Figure 173 TR-098: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig: Details
Vantage Access User’s Guide
235
Chapter 17 LAN Device
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 91 TR-098: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig: Details
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that the USB interface on the LAN is enabled;
otherwise, it displays 0.
Status
This field displays the connection status of the USB interface on the LAN.
MACAddress
This field displays the MAC address of the USB interface on the LAN.
MACAddress
ControlEnable
d
This field displays 1 to allow traffic with the specified MAC addresses on this port. You
can specify the MAC addresses in the LANHostConfigManagement screen
(refer to Section 17.2 on page 230).
This field displays 0 to indicate that MAC address control is disabled on this port. All
traffic is allowed through the USB interface on the LAN.
Standard
This field displays the version of the USB standard supported on the device.
Type
This field displays the type of USB interface on the device.
Rate
This field displays the speed of the USB interface.
Power
This field displays how the USB interface is to obtain power.
17.4.2 USB Interface Statistics
Display the Stats screen to view the statistics of the USB interface on the LAN.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice > LANUSBInterfaceConfig, click a number and
Stats to display the screen as shown.
Figure 174 TR-098: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig: Stats
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 92 TR-098: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig: Stats
236
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
BytesSent
This field displays the number of transmitted bytes on this interface.
BytesReceive
d
This field displays the number of received bytes on this interface.
CellsSent
This field displays the number of transmitted cells on this interface.
CellsReceived
This field displays the number of received cells on this interface.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 17 LAN Device
17.5 WLAN Configuration
The settings in the WLANConfiguration screen is applicable to a device with built-in
wireless capabilities.
Use the WLANConfiguration screen to view the number of wireless LAN interfaces on the
device. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice. Click a number and WLANConfiguration to
display the screen as shown.
Figure 175 TR-098: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration
17.5.1 WLAN Configuration Details
The settings in the WLANConfiguration screen are applicable to a device with built-in
wireless capabilities. Use this configuration screen to view and configure basic wireless LAN
settings on the device.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice.
2 Click a number and WLANConfiguration.
3 Click a number to display the screen as shown.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
237
Chapter 17 LAN Device
Figure 176 TR-098: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 93 TR-098: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration
238
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that the WLAN interface is enabled; otherwise, it
displays 0.
Status
This field displays the connection status of the WLAN interface.
BSSID
This field displays identification (usually the MAC address) of the wireless
interface.
MaxBitRate
This field displays the maximum bit rate (in Mbps) allowed on the WLAN
interface.
“auto” means the device automatically uses the highest transmission rate in the
OperationalDataTransmitRates field.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 17 LAN Device
Table 93 TR-098: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Channel
This field displays the wireless channel number (0 to 255) to use for transmission.
SSID
This field displays the name (up to 32 characters) to identify the wireless network.
BeaconType
This field displays the WLAN security mode for wireless transmission.
Select None to disable wireless security.
MACAddressContr
olEnabled
This field displays 1 to indicate that traffic with the specified MAC addresses is
allowed on this port. You can specify the MAC addresses in the
LANHostConfigManagement screen (refer to Section 17.2 on page 230).
0 means the MAC address control feature is disabled. All traffic is allowed
through the USB interface on the LAN.
Standard
This field displays the wireless standard in which the device is currently
operating.
WEPKeyIndex
This field displays the index number (1 - 4) of the WEP key the device is to use for
data encryption.
KeyPassphrase
This field displays the passphrase the device uses to generate the WEP keys.
WEPEncryptionLe
vel
This field displays the wireless encryption level supported on the device.
BasicEncryptionMo This field is applicable when you select a basic security option for the
des
BeaconType field.
WEPEncryption means the device is set to use basic WEP encryption for
wireless transmission.
None means WEP encryption is disabled. In this case, traffic sent through the
wireless network is not secure.
BasicAuthenticatio
nMode
This field is applicable when you select a basic security option in the
BeaconType field.
EAPAuthentication enables user authentication before wireless connection is
allowed for the WLAN clients.
None deactivates this feature. In this case, your wireless network may be
accessible by anyone.
WPAEncryptionMo
des
This field is applicable when you select a WPA security option in the BeaconType
field.
This field displays the encryption method to secure traffic over the wireless
network.
WPAAuthentication This field is applicable when you select a WPA security option in the BeaconType
Mode
field.
This field displays the authentication method to control access to your wireless
network.
IEEE11iEncryption
Modes
This field is applicable when you select an 11i security option in the BeaconType
field.
This field displays the encryption method to secure traffic over the wireless
network.
IEEE11iAuthenticat This field is applicable when you select an 11i security option in the BeaconType
ionMode
field.
This field displays the authentication method to control access to your wireless
network.
PossibleChannels
Vantage Access User’s Guide
This field displays wireless channels available for your device as defined by the
regulatory body.
239
Chapter 17 LAN Device
Table 93 TR-098: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration (continued)
240
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
BasicDataTransmit
Rates
This field displays the wireless transmission rate (Mbps) for broadcast, multicast
and unicast frames on the device.
Multiple transmission rates are separated by commas (,). For example, “1,2”
means the device is able to send at 1 Mbps or 2 Mbps.
OperationalDataTr
ansmitRates
This field displays the maximum transmission rate (in Mbps) allowed for unicast
frames on the device.
Multiple transmission rates are separated by commas (,). For example, if the
BasicDataTransmitRates field is “1,2” and this field is “1,2,5.5,11”, then the
device can transmit unicast frames at the maximum rates of 5.5 Mbps or 11
Mbps.
PossibleDataTrans
mitRates
This field displays the transmission rates for unicast frames WLAN clients are
allowed when connected to the device.
For example, if this field displays “1,2,5.5”. This means that the device allows a
wireless connection of up to 5.5 Mbps even though it is capable of connecting at
11 Mbps.
InsecureOOBAcce
ssEnabled
This field displays 1 to indicate that configuration changes are allowed to send
through insecure management methods other than the WAN CPE Management
Protocol.
0 disables this feature.
BeaconAdvertisem
entEnabled
This field displays 1 to indicate that the device is set to send beacons to advertise
its presence; otherwise, this field is 0.
RadioEnabled
This field display 1 to indicate that the wireless transmission is allowed on the
device; otherwise, this field displays 0.
AutoRateFallBack
Enabled
This field displays 1 to indicate that the device is set to automatically reduce
wireless transmission rates due to noise or contention.
0 deactivates this feature.
LocationDescriptio
n
This field displays the location of the device for identification purposes.
RegulatoryDomain
This field displays the name of the regulatory body in your geographical area.
The first two characters are the country code as defined in ISO/IEC 3166-1. For
the third character, “ “ means all environment, “I” means inside and “O” means
outside.
TotalPSKFailures
This field is applicable for WPA and 802.11i authentication methods.
This field displays the number of times pre-shared key authentication has failed.
TotalIntegrityFailur
es
This field is applicable for WPA and 802.11i authentication methods.
This field displays the number of times MICHEAL integrity check has failed.
ChannelsInUse
This field displays the channel number(s) that is currently used on the device for
wireless transmission.
DeviceOperationM
ode
This field displays the wireless operation mode for the device.
DistanceFromRoot
This field displays the number of hops between this device and the wireless
bridge/repeater.
PeerBSSID
This field displays the MAC address of the peer wireless bridge/repeater.
AuthenticationServ
iceMode
If user authentication is enabled, this field displays the location of the user
database the device is to check.
TotalBytesSent
This field displays the number of transmitted bytes on this interface.
TotalBytesReceive
d
This field displays the number of received bytes on this interface.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 17 LAN Device
Table 93 TR-098: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
TotalPacketsSent
This field displays the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
TotalPacketsRecei
ved
This field displays the number of received packets on this interface.
TotalAssociations
This field displays the number of wireless clients associated to this device.
17.6 WLAN Association List
The AssociatedDevice screen displays a list of WLAN devices that are currently connected to
the device. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice.
2 Click a number and WLANConfiguration.
3 Click a number and AssociatedDevice to display the screen as shown.
Figure 177 TR-098: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration:AssociatedDevice
17.6.1 WLAN Association List Details
Display the AssociatedDevice screen to view information on a wireless client currently
connected to the device.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice.
2 Click a number and WLANConfiguration.
3 Click a number and AssociatedDevice.
4 Click a number to display the screen as shown.
Figure 178 TR-098: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: AssociatedDevice: Details
Vantage Access User’s Guide
241
Chapter 17 LAN Device
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 94 TR-098: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: AssociatedDevice: Details
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
AssociatedDeviceMACA
ddress
This field displays the MAC address of an associated device.
AssociatedDeviceIPAddr
ess
This field displays the IP address or domain name of an associated device.
AssociatedDeviceAuthen
ticationState
This field displays whether the associated device is authenticated (Enable)
or not (Disable).
LastRequestedUnicastCi
pher
This field is applicable for 802.11i authentication methods.
This field displays the last unicast cipher used for a device with the
specified MAC address.
LastRequestedMulticast
Cipher
This field is applicable for 802.11i authentication methods.
This field displays the last multicast cipher used for a device with the
specified MAC address.
LastPMKId
This field is applicable for 802.11i authentication methods.
This field displays the last pairwise master key used for a device with the
specified MAC address.
17.7 WEP Key
Use the WEPKey screen to view the WEP key object information. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on
page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice.
2 Click a number and WLANConfiguration.
3 Click a number and WEPKey to display the screen as shown.
Figure 179 TR-098: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: WEPKey
17.7.1 WEP Key Details
Use this configuration screen to view and set up WEP encryption keys for secure wireless
communication on the device.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice.
2 Click a number and WLANConfiguration.
3 Click a number and WEPKey.
4 Click a number to display the screen as shown.
242
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 17 LAN Device
Figure 180 TR-098: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: WEPKey: Details
The WEPKey field displays the WEP key content. Depending on the encryption level in the
WEPEncryptionLevel field in the WLANConfiguration screen, the key length varies.
For 40-bit encryption level, this field displays 10 hexadecimal characters (“0-9”, “a-z”, “AF”). For 104-bit encryption level, this field displays 26 hexadecimal characters (“0-9”, “a-z”,
“A-F”). The WEP key content is not sent when requested. An empty string is returned.
Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
17.8 Pre-shared Key
Use the PreSharedKey screen to view the pre-shared key information. Refer to Section 11.2.4
on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice.
2 Click a number and WLANConfiguration.
3 Click a number and PreSharedKey to display the screen as shown.
Figure 181 TR-098: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: PreSharedKey
17.8.1 Pre-shared Key Details
Use the detailed PreSharedKey screen to configure the passphrase the device uses to generate
the pre-shared key and/or WEP keys automatically.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice.
2 Click a number and WLANConfiguration.
3 Click a number and PreSharedKey.
4 Click a number to display the screen as shown.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
243
Chapter 17 LAN Device
Figure 182 TR-098: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: PreSharedKey: Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 95 TR-098: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: PreSharedKey: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
PreSharedKey
This field displays a pre-shared key for WPA security.
KeyPassphrase
This field displays the passphrase the device uses to generate a preshared key or WEP key based.
AssociatedDeviceMACA
ddress
This field displays the MAC address of a wireless client associated to this
key.
17.9 LAN Hosts
In the Hosts screen, you can view the number of LAN hosts that are assigned a dynamic or
static IP address by the device. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice. Click a number and Hosts to display the screen.
Figure 183 TR-098: LAN Device: Hosts
17.9.1 LAN Host Table
Display the Host screen to view the host table name. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice.
2 Click a number and Hosts.
3 Click Host to display the screen.
244
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 17 LAN Device
Figure 184 TR-098: LAN Device: Hosts: Host
17.9.2 LAN Host Table Details
Display the detailed Host screen to view or configure DHCP host settings (such as IP address,
lease time, etc.).
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice.
2 Click a number and Hosts.
3 Click Host and a number to display the screen.
Figure 185 TR-098: LAN Device: Hosts: Host: Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 96 TR-098: LAN Device: Hosts: Host: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
IPAddress
This field displays the IP address assigned to the LAN host.
AddressSource
This field indicates whether the LAN host obtains the IP address statically
(Static), dynamically from the device (DHCP) or through automatic
assignment (Auto).
LeaseTimeRemaining
If the host IP address is assigned through DHCP, this field displays the lease
time remaining (in seconds). A value of -1 means that the lease never times
out.
This field displays zero if the IP address assignment is not through DHCP.
MACAddress
This field displays the MAC address of the LAN host.
HostName
This field displays the name of the LAN host.
InterfaceType
This field displays the name of the interface the LAN host uses to connect to
the device.
Active
This field is Enabled to indicate that the LAN host is currently present in the
network. Otherwise, this field is Disable.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
245
Chapter 17 LAN Device
246
Vantage Access User’s Guide
CHAPTER
18
WAN Device
This chapter describes the screens you use to configure and view WAN settings.
18.1 WAN Device Screen Overview
Use the WAN Device screens to configure or view the WAN interface settings on the selected
device. The number of screens and field labels available vary depending on your device
model.
The WANDevice screen displays the number of connected WAN interface. Refer to Section
11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
Figure 186 TR-098: WANDevice
18.1.1 WAN Device Details
To view the number of WAN connections, select a registered device in the Device List window
and click Data Model > InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice and then click an index.
The value for the WANConnectionNumberOfEntries displays the number of connections on
the WAN interface. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Figure 187 TR-098: WANDevice: Details
Vantage Access User’s Guide
247
Chapter 18 WAN Device
18.2 WAN Common Interface Configuration
You can view basic common connection status in the WANCommonInterfaceConfig screen.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice. Click a number and
WANCommonInterfaceConfig to display the screen.
Figure 188 TR-098: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 97 TR-098: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig
248
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
EnabledForInternet
This field displays 1 to indicate that the WAN interface is enabled for
Internet access; otherwise, the field displays 0.
WANAccessType
This field displays the type of connection for Internet access on the
WAN interface.
Layer1UpstreamMaxBitRate
This field displays the maximum upstream transmission rate in bits
per second.
Layer1DownstreamMaxBitRate
This field displays the maximum download transmission rate in bits
per second.
PhysicalLinkStatus
This field displays the link status. Possible states are Up, Down,
Initializing and Unavailable.
WANAccessProvider
This field displays the name of the ISP providing the Internet access
service.
TotalBytesSent
This field displays the total number of bytes transmitted.
TotalBytesReceived
This field displays the total number of bytes received.
TotalPacketsSent
This field displays the total number of packets transmitted.
TotalPacketsReceived
This field displays the total number of packets received.
MaximumActiveConnections
This field displays the maximum number of connections allowed on
the device for Internet access.
NumberOfActiveConnections
This field displays the number of active connections on the device for
Internet access.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 18 WAN Device
18.2.1 Connection
Use the Connection screen to view the Internet connection instance. Refer to Section 11.2.4
on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANCommonInterfaceConfig.
3 Click Connection to display the screen.
Figure 189 TR-098: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig: Connection
18.2.2 Connection Setup
Use the Connection screen to configure general connection settings.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANCommonInterfaceConfig.
3 Click Connection and a number to display the screen.
Figure 190 TR-098: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig: Connection: Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 98 TR-098: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig: Connection: Setup
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
ActiveConnectionDeviceContai
ner
This field displays the hierarchical name of the WAN interface
associated with the connection. For example,
“InternetGatewayDevice.WANDevice.1.WANConnectionDevice.1.WANPPPConnection.1”
ActiveConnectionServiceID
This field displays the hierarchical name of the interface object for
this connection.
18.3 WAN DSL Interface Configuration
Use the WANDSLInterfaceConfig to configure the DSL connection for Internet access. DSL
connection setup is independent of other WAN interface parameter settings.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
249
Chapter 18 WAN Device
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice. Click a number and WANDSLInterfaceConfig to
display the screen.
Figure 191 TR-098: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 99 TR-098: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig
250
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that the link is active; otherwise, it displays
0.
Status
This field displays the link status.
ModulationType
This field displays the modulation method used on the link.
LineEncoding
This field displays the line encoding method used to establish a connection
to the ISP.
DataPath
This field displays whether the link uses fast (lower latency) or interleave
(lower error rate) data path.
InterleaveDepth
This field is applicable when the DataPath field shows Interleave.
This field displays the interleaved depth.
LineNumber
This field displays the number of the line pair used for the connection. For
example, 1 means the inner most pair.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 18 WAN Device
Table 99 TR-098: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
UpstreamCurrRate
This field displays the current payload bandwidth (in kbps) of the upstream
DSL channel.
DownstreamCurrRate
This field displays the current payload bandwidth (in kbps) of the
downstream DSL channel.
UpstreamMaxRate
This field displays the attainable bandwidth (in kbps) for the upstream DSL
channel.
DownstreamMaxRate
This field displays the attainable bandwidth (in kbps) for the downstream
DSL channel.
UpstreamNoiseMargin
This field displays the current upstream Noise-to-Signal ratio (in 0.1 dB) for
the upstream DSL channel.
DownstreamNoiseMargin
This field displays the current upstream Noise-to-Signal ratio (in 0.1 dB) for
the downstream DSL channel.
UpstreamAttenuation
This field displays the current upstream signal loss (in 0.1 dB).
DownstreamAttenuation
This field displays the current downstream signal loss (in 0.1 dB).
UpstreamPower
This field displays the output power (in 0.1dBmV).
DownstreamPower
This field displays the received power (in 0.1dBmV).
ATURVendor
This field displays the ATU-R vendor identifier.
ATURCountry
This field displays the ATU-R country code.
ATURANSIStd
This field displays the ATU-R T1.413 version number.
ATURANSIRev
This field displays the ATU-R vendor revision number.
ATUCVendor
This field displays the ATU-C vendor identifier.
ATUCCountry
This field displays the ATU-C country code.
ATUCANSIStd
This field displays the ATU-C T1.413 version number.
ATUCANSIRev
This field displays the ATU-C vendor revision number.
TotalStart
This field displays the number of seconds that elapsed since statistics
information collection started.
ShowtimeStart
This field displays the number of seconds since the beginning of the period
used for collecting first ShowTime statistics.
LastShowtimeStart
This field displays the number of seconds since the beginning of the
second most recent period used for collecting the ShowTime statistics.
CurrentDayStart
This field displays the number of seconds since the beginning of the period
used for collecting CurrentDayStart statistics.
QuarterHourStart
This field displays the number of seconds since the beginning of the period
used for collecting QuarterHour statistics.
18.3.1 WAN DSL Line Statistics
Use the Stats screen to view the DSL connection statistics instance. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on
page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANDSLInterfaceConfig.
3 Click Stats.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
251
Chapter 18 WAN Device
18.3.2 WAN DSL Line Statistics Details
You can view the line statistics in the Stats screens. The following statistics screens are
available. Field labels are the same in all the screens.
• Total: This screen displays the statistics with the totals.
• Showtime: This screen displays the statistics since the most recent DSL Showtime.
• LastShowtime: This screen displays the statistics since the second most recent DSL
Showtime.
• CurrentDay: This screen displays the statistics accumulated during the current day.
• QuaterHour: This screen displays the statistics accumulated during the current 15
minutes.
Follow the steps below to display a statistics screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANDSLInterfaceConfig.
3 Click Stats and click on the type of statistics you want to see.
Figure 192 TR-098: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig: Stats (Total)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 100 TR-098: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig: Stats (Total)
252
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
ReceiveBlocks
This field displays the number of blocks received.
TransmitBlocks
This field displays the number of blocks sent.
CellDelin
This field displays the number of cell-delineation errors.
LinkRetrain
This field displays the number to link retrain errors.
InitErrors
This field displays the number of initialization errors.
InitTimeouts
This field displays the number of initialization timeout errors.
LossOfFraming
This field displays the number of Loss Of Framing errors.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 18 WAN Device
Table 100 TR-098: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig: Stats (Total) (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
ErroredSecs
This field displays the number of Errored Seconds.
SeverelyErroredSecs
This field displays the number of Severely Errored Seconds.
FECErrors
This field displays the number of FEC errors.
ATUCFECErrors
This field displays the number of FEC errors detected by the ATU-C.
HECErrors
This field displays the number of HEC errors.
ATUCHECErrors
This field displays the number of HEC errors detected by the ATU-C.
CRCErrors
This field displays the number of CRC errors.
ATUCCRCErrors
This field displays the number of CRC errors detected by the ATU-C.
18.4 WAN Ethernet Interface Configuration
You can set the Ethernet settings on the WAN interface in the WANEthernetInterfaceConfig
screen.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice. Click a number and WANEthernetInterfaceConfig
to display the screen.
Figure 193 TR-098: WAN Device: WANEthernetInterfaceConfig
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 101 TR-098: WAN Device: WANEthernetInterfaceConfig
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that this interface is active; otherwise, it displays 0.
Status
This field displays the status of this interface.
MACAddress
This field displays the MAC address of the interface.
MaxBitRate
This field displays the maximum link speed (10, 100 or Auto) on the interface.
DuplexMode
This field displays the duplex mode (Half, Full or Auto) for the interface.
18.4.1 WAN Ethernet Statistics
View the statistics for the WAN interface in the Stats screen.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
253
Chapter 18 WAN Device
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number WANEthernetInterfaceConfig.
3 Click Stats to display the statistics screen.
Figure 194 TR-098: WAN Device: WANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Stats
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 102 TR-098: WAN Device: WANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Stats
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
BytesSent
This field displays the total number of bytes sent through the WAN since the
device was last reset.
BytesReceived
This field displays the total number of bytes received on the WAN since the
device was last reset.
PacketsSent
This field displays the total number of packets sent through the WAN since the
device was last reset.
PacketsReceived
This field displays the total number of packets received on the WAN since the
device was last reset.
18.5 WAN DSL Connection Management
The WANDSLConnectionManagement screen displays the number of WAN connection
services on the device. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice. Click a number and
WANDSLConnectionManagement to display the screen.
Figure 195 TR-098: WAN Device: WANDSLConnectionManagement
254
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 18 WAN Device
18.6 WAN DSL Connection Service Information
You can view a list of connection service instances in the ConnectionService screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANDSLConnectionManagement.
3 Click ConnectionService to display the screen.
Figure 196 TR-098: WAN Device: ConnectionService
18.6.1 WAN DSL Connection Service Setup
You can view and configure WAN DSL connection service settings in the ConnectionService
screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANDSLConnectionManagement.
3 Click ConnectionService and a number to display the screen.
Figure 197 TR-098: WAN Device: ConnectionService: Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 103 TR-098: WAN Device: ConnectionService: Setup
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
WANConnectionDevice
This field displays the hierarchical name of the WAN connection device
object associated with the connection. For example,
“InternetGatewayDevice.WANDevice.1.WANConnectionDevice.2”
WANConnectionServic
e
This field displays the hierarchical name of the WAN connection device
object associated with the connection service. For example,
“InternetGatewayDevice.WANDevice.1.WANConnectionDevice.2.WANPPP
Connection.1”.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
255
Chapter 18 WAN Device
Table 103 TR-098: WAN Device: ConnectionService: Setup (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
DestinationAddress
This field shows the destination address of the connection. The address
displayed varies depending on the connection type.
This field displays VCI/VPI for a PVC connection.
This field displays an ATM connection name or ATM address for an SVC
connection.
LinkType
This field displays the type of the link.
ConnectionType
This field displays the name of the connection type.
Name
This field displays the descriptive name for this connection.
18.7 WAN DSL Diagnostics
You can view the DSL connection diagnostics data in the WANDSLDiagnostics screen.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice. Click a number and WANDSLDiagnostics to
display the screen as shown.
Figure 198 TR-098: WAN Device: WANDSLDiagnostics
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 104 TR-098: WAN Device: WANDSLDiagnostics
PARAMETER VALUE
NAME
256
LoopDiagnost
icsState
This field displays the availability of the link diagnostic test result. Requested
indicates a test is to be initialized.
ACTPSDds
This field displays the actual power spectral density for the downstream traffic.
ACTPSDus
This field displays the actual power spectral density for the upstream traffic.
ACTATPds
This field displays the actual aggregate transmitter power for the downstream traffic.
ACTATPus
This field displays the actual aggregate transmitter power for the upstream traffic.
HLINSCds
This field displays the linear representation scale for the downstream traffic.
HLINpsds
This field displays the linear channel characteristics per subcarrier for the upstream
traffic.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 18 WAN Device
Table 104 TR-098: WAN Device: WANDSLDiagnostics (continued)
PARAMETER VALUE
NAME
QLNpsds
This field displays the quiet line noise per subcarrier for the downstream traffic in
comma-separated list of numbers.
Maximum list of numbers is 256 for an ADSL/ADSL2 connection and 512 for an
ADSL2+ connection.
SNRpsds
This field displays the Signal-to-Noise ratio per subcarrier for the downstream traffic.
BITSpsds
This field displays the bit allocation per subcarrier for the downstream traffic.
GAINSpsds
This field displays the gain allocation per subcarrier for the downstream traffic.
18.8 WAN Connection Device
For DSL connections, you can view the connection instances associated to an ATM VC in the
WANConnectionDevice screen.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice. Click a number and WANConnectionDevice to
display the screen as shown.
Figure 199 TR-098: WAN Device: WANConnectionDevice
18.9 WAN Connection Device Details
You can view the number of connection instances associated to WAN connection device in the
detailed WANConnectionDevice screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click on an index to display the screen as shown.
Figure 200 TR-098: WAN Device: WANConnectionDevice: Details
Vantage Access User’s Guide
257
Chapter 18 WAN Device
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 105 TR-098: WAN Device: WANConnectionDevice: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
WANIPConnectionNumberOf
Entries
This field displays the number of WANIPConnection entries
associated to the WANConnectionDevice.
WANPPPConnectionNumber
OfEntries
This field displays the number of WANPPPConnection entries
associated to the WANConnectionDevice.
18.9.1 WAN DSL Link Configuration
Use the WANDSLLinkConfig screen to set the ATM layer properties for the physical DSL
connection.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Cick a number and WANDSLLinkConfig to display the screen as shown.
Figure 201 TR-098: WAN Device: WANDSLLinkConfig
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 106 TR-098: WAN Device: WANDSLLinkConfig
258
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that the DSL link is active; otherwise, this
field displays 0.
LinkStatus
This field displays the link status (Up, Down, Initializing or Unavailable).
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 18 WAN Device
Table 106 TR-098: WAN Device: WANDSLLinkConfig (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
LinkType
This field displays the type for this DSL link.
EoA sets the device to use the bridged Ethernet over ATM (RFC2684) link
type.
IPoA sets the device to use the routed IP over ATM (RFC2684) link type.
PPPoA sets the device to use the PPP over ATM (RFC2364) link type.
PPPoE sets the device to use the PPP over Ethernet on bridged Ethernet
over ATM (RFC2516, RFC2684) link type.
CIP sets the device to use the Classical IP over ATM (RFC1577) link type.
Unconfigured means an unknown link type.
AutoConfig
This field displays whether the auto-configuration feature is enabled or
disabled for this DSL link.
ModulationType
This field displays the type of modulation used on the interface associated
to this DSL link.
DestinationAddress
This field displays the destination address for the DSL link. The type of
address you enter varies depending on the connection type.
This field displays the VCI/VPI for a PVC connection.
This field displays an ATM connection name or ATM address for an SVC
connection.
ATMEncapsulation
This field displays the encapsulation (LLC or VCMUX) to use for this DSL
link.
FCSPreserved
This field displays 1 to include a checksum in the ATM payload for error
correction.
0 means the checksum is not included in the ATM payload. No error
correction is available.
VCSearchList
This field displays the VCI/VPI number pairs (separated by a comma) the
link uses to establish a connection if the destination address specified
cannot be reached.
ATMAAL
This field displays the ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL) the link uses.
ATMTransmittedBlocks
This field displays the number of ATM blocks transmitted successfully.
ATMReceivedBlocks
This field displays the number of ATM blocks received successfully.
ATMQoS
Select the ATM Quality of Service (QoS) method to use on this link.
ATMPeakCellRate
This field displays the peak cell rate (between 0 and 4294967295) for the
upstream traffic in cells per second.
ATMMaximumBurstSize
This field displays the maximum burst rate (between 0 and 4294967295)
for the upstream traffic in cells.
ATMSustainableCellRate
This field displays the sustainable cell rate (between 0 and 4294967295) for
the upstream traffic in cells per second. This value is used for traffic
shaping.
AAL5CRCErrors
This field displays the number of AAL5 layer cyclic redundancy check
errors.
ATMCRCErrors
This field displays the number of ATM layer cyclic redundancy check errors.
ATMHECErrors
This field displays the number of Header Error Check related errors at the
ATM layer.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
259
Chapter 18 WAN Device
18.10 WAN ATM F5 Loopback Diagnostics
Use the WANATMF5LoopbackDiagnostics screen to view loopback diagnostic (ping) test
results and to configure timeout settings for the ping test on the ATM layer.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANATMF5LoopbackDiagnostics to display the screen as shown.
Figure 202 TR-098: WAN Device: WANATMF5LoopbackDiagnostics
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 107 TR-098: WAN Device: WANATMF5LoopbackDiagnostics
260
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
DiagnosticsState
This field displays the availability of the ping test result. Requested means
a test is to be initiated.
NumberOfRepetitions
This field displays the number of ping tests (between 1 and 4294967295) to
perform before displaying the test results.
Timeout
This field displays the timeout (between 1 and 4294967295 milliseconds)
for the ping test.
SuccessCount
This field displays the number of pings that received a successful response
within the timeout in the most recent ping test.
FailureCount
This field displays the number of pings that failed to receive a successful
response within the timeout in the most recent ping test.
AverageResponseTime
This field displays the average response time (in milliseconds) of all pings
that received a successful response in the most recent ping test.
If there is no successful response from the ping test, this field displays zero.
MinimumResponseTime
This field displays the minimum response time (in milliseconds) of the ping
that received a successful response in the most recent ping test.
If there is no successful response from the ping test, this field displays zero.
MaximumResponseTime
This field displays the maximum response time (in milliseconds) of the ping
that received a successful response in the most recent ping test.
If there is no successful response from the ping test, this field displays zero.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 18 WAN Device
18.11 WAN Ethernet Link Configuration
The WANEthernetLinkConfig screen displays the Ethernet link status (Up, Down or
Unavailable) in the EthernetLinkStatus field. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other
field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANEthernetLinkConfig to display the screen as shown.
Figure 203 TR-098: WAN Device: WANEthernetLinkConfig
18.12 WAN POTS Link Configuration
You can view the WAN POTS connection status in the WANPOTSLinkConfig screen. The
POST connection is used for dialing to the ISP for Internet access.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANPOTSLinkConfig to display the screen as shown.
Figure 204 TR-098: WAN Device: WANPOTSLinkConfig
Vantage Access User’s Guide
261
Chapter 18 WAN Device
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 108 TR-098: WAN Device: WANPOTSLinkConfig
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that the POTS link is active; otherwise it
displays 0.
LinkStatus
This field displays the link status (Up, Down, Dialing, Connecting or
Unavailable).
ISPPhoneNumber
This field displays the phone number (up to 64 digits in countrycodeareacode-phone number format) to dial to connect to the ISP. For example,
+86-10-62618501.
Multiple phone numbers are separated with a colon (:).
ISPInfo
This field displays a descriptive name (up to 64 characters) to identify this
ISP.
LinkType
The default link type is PPP_Dialup.
NumberOfRetries
This field displays the number of times (between 0 and 4294967295) the
CPE device is to re-dial for Internet connection.
DelayBetweenRetries
This field displays the time (in milliseconds) the CPE device is to wait
before attempting to connect to the ISP again.
Fclass
This field indicates the transmission functions the CPE device is capable of.
0:data
1, 2, 2.0: fax
8: voice
80: DSVD
DataModulationSupporte
d
This field displays the modulation method(s) supported for data transfer.
DataProtocol
This field displays the protocol(s) supported for data transfer.
DataCompression
This field displays the compression method used for data transfer.
PlusVTRCommandSupp
orted
This field indicates whether full-duplex mode is activated on the link or not.
18.13 WAN IP Connection
You can view the IP settings for the WAN connection in the WANIPConnection screen. Refer
to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANIPConnection to display the screen as shown.
Figure 205 TR-098: WAN Device: WANIPConnection
262
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 18 WAN Device
18.13.1 WAN IP Connection Details
You can configure and view basic IP settings for the WAN IP connection in the detailed
WANIPConnection screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANIPConnection.
4 Click a number to display the screen as shown.
Figure 206 TR-098: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 109 TR-098: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that this link is active; otherwise this field
displays 0.
ConnectionStatus
This field displays the link status (Unconfigured, Connecting,
Connected, PendingDisconnect, Disconnecting, Disconnected).
PossibleConnectionType
s
This field displays the connection type(s) this link supports.
ConnectionType
This field displays the connection type for this link.
Name
This field displays a descriptive name (up to 256 characters) for this link.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
263
Chapter 18 WAN Device
Table 109 TR-098: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: Details (continued)
264
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Uptime
This field displays the number of seconds the link has been up.
LastConnectionError
This field displays the cause for the last failed connection attempt.
AutoDisconnectTime
This field displays the number of seconds (between 0 and 4294967295) the
device is to wait before disconnecting the link.
IdleDisconnectTime
This field displays the inactivity timeout in seconds (between 0 and
4294967295) for a link. When the time is reached without any network
activity through the link, the device automatically disconnect the link.
WarnDisconnectDelay
This field displays the number of seconds (between 0 and 4294967295)
before the device disconnects the link.
RSIPAvailable
This field displays whether the Realm-specific IP (RSIP) feature is
supported on the device.
NATEnabled
This field displays 1 to indicate that the NAT (Network Address Translation)
feature is enabled for this link; otherwise the field displays 0.
AddressingType
This field displays DHCP to set the device to obtain a dynamic IP address
from the ISP for this link on the WAN.
This field displays Static to set the link to use a fixed WAN IP address.
Then configure the fields below.
ExternalIPAddress
This field is applicable when you select Static in the AddressingType field.
SubnetMask
This field is applicable when you select Static in the AddressingType field.
DefaultGateway
This field is applicable when you select Static in the AddressingType field.
DNSEnabled
This field displays whether is the device to resolve domain names through
this link.
DNSOverrideAllowed
This field displays 1 when a non-empty DNS address is to be replaced by a
DNS entry received on the WAN; otherwise, this field is 0.
DNSServers
This field displays the IP address(es) of the DNS server(s). Multiple IP
addresses are separated by a comma.
MaxMTUSize
This field displays the maximum size (between 1 and 1540) for the Ethernet
frames allowed on this link.
MACAddress
This field is applicable when you select Enable in the
MACAddressOverride field.
This field displays the MAC address on this link.
MACAddressOverride
This field displays 1 to change the MAC address of this interface in the
MACAddress field.
This field is 0 if you do not allow MAC address modification.
ConnectionTrigger
This field displays how the device will establish a connection for Internet
access. Choices are AlwaysOn, OnDemand and Manual.
RouteProtocolRx
This field displays the routing protocol (RIP1, RIP2 or OSPF) the link is to
use. Off means the routing feature is disabled.
ShapingRate
This field displays the rate (in bits per second) the device shapes the
outgoing traffic to.
ShapingBurstSize
This field displays the burst size (in bytes) for traffic shaping.
PortMappingNumberOfE
ntries
This field displays the number of port mappings on this link.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 18 WAN Device
18.13.2 Port Mapping Table
Use the PortMapping screen to view the port mapping instance for the WAN IP connection.
Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANIPConnection.
4 Click a number and PortMapping to display the screen as shown.
Figure 207 TR-098: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: PortMapping
18.13.3 Port Mapping Table Details
Use the detailed PortMapping screen to configure the port mapping settings for the WAN IP
connection.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANIPConnection.
4 Click a number and PortMapping.
5 Click a number to display the screen as shown.
Figure 208 TR-098: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: PortMapping: Details
Vantage Access User’s Guide
265
Chapter 18 WAN Device
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 110 TR-098: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: PortMapping: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
PortMappingEnabled
This field displays 1 to indicate that the port mapping entry on this link is
enabled; otherwise this field displays 0.
PortMappingLeaseDurati
on
This field displays the time (between 1 to 4294967295 seconds) the device
stores the port mapping entry. After this, the entry is removed from the port
mapping table.
0 means that a port mapping entry is static and cannot be removed from
the port mapping table.
RemoteHost
This field displays the IP address of the remote host device.
If this field is blank, it indicates a wildcard which the device must support. In
this case, when a packet is sent to the external port on the WAN, the device
will forward the packet to the internal port.
ExternalPort
This field displays a port number (between 0 and 4294967295) the device
listens on for NAT connection requests.
0 indicates a wildcard. This sets the device to forward a wildcard packet to
the internal port.
InternalPort
This field displays a port number for the internal port (between 1 and
4294967295) to which the device forwards packets with wildcard.
PortMappingProtocol
This field displays the protocol (UDP or TCP) used for port mapping.
InternalClient
This field displays the IP address or domain name of a host on the LAN.
To allow UDP port mapping or multiple NAT clients to use the same port
number, use the broadcast address of 255.255.255.255 for the internal
client.
PortMappingDescription
This field displays a descriptive name (up to 256 characters) to identify this
port mapping entry.
18.13.4 WAN IP Connection Statistics
Display the Stats screen to view the statistics of all IP connections on the WAN interface.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANIPConnection.
4 Click a number and Stats to display the screen as shown.
Figure 209 TR-098: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: Stats
266
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 18 WAN Device
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 111 TR-098: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: Stats
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
EthernetBytesSent This field displays the total number of bytes sent through the WAN since the
device was last reset.
EthernetBytesRec
eived
This field displays the total number of bytes received on the WAN since the
device was last reset.
EthernetPacketsS
ent
This field displays the total number of packets sent through the WAN since the
device was last reset.
EthernetPacketsR
eceived
This field displays the total number of packets received on the WAN since the
device was last reset.
18.14 WAN PPP Connection
Display the WANPPPConnection screen to view a PPP connection instance on the WAN
interface. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANPPPConnection to display the screen as shown.
Figure 210 TR-098: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection
18.14.1 WAN PPP Connection Details
Display the detailed WANPPPConnection screen to configure and view basic PPP settings
for Internet access on the WAN interface.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANPPPConnection.
4 Click a number to display the screen as shown.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
267
Chapter 18 WAN Device
Figure 211 TR-098: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 112 TR-098: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Details
268
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that this link is active; otherwise, it displays
0.
ConnectionStatus
This field displays the link status
PossibleConnectionType
s
This field displays the connection type(s) this link supports.
ConnectionType
This field displays the connection type for this link.
Name
This field displays a descriptive name (up to 256 characters) for this link.
Uptime
This field displays the number of seconds the link has been up.
LastConnectionError
This field displays the cause for the last failed connection attempt.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 18 WAN Device
Table 112 TR-098: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Details (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
AutoDisconnectTime
This field displays the number of seconds (between 0 and 4294967295) the
device is to wait before disconnecting the link.
0 means you do not want the device to disconnect the link automatically.
IdleDisconnectTime
This field displays the number of seconds (between 0 and 4294967295) of
inactivity timeout for a link. When the time is reached without any network
activity through the link, the device automatically disconnects the link.
0 means you do not want the device to disconnect the link automatically.
WarnDisconnectDelay
This field displays the number of seconds (between 0 and 4294967295)
before the device changes the state of the link to the disconnecting state.
RSIPAvailable
This field displays whether the Realm-specific IP (RSIP) feature is
supported on the device.
NATEnabled
This field displays 1 to indicate that the NAT (Network Address Translation)
feature is enabled for this link; otherwise, this field displays 0.
Username
This field displays the Internet access account user name (up to 64
characters) provided by the ISP for authentication.
Password
This field displays the Internet access account password (up to 64
characters) provided by the ISP for authentication.
PPPEncryptionProtocol
This field displays the protocol used for PPP encryption between the device
and the ISP’s network.
PPPCompressionProtoc
ol
This field displays the protocol used for PPP traffic compression between
the device and the ISP’s network.
PPPAuthenticationProtoc This field displays the protocol used for PPP connection authentication
ol
between the device and the ISP’s network.
ExternalIPAddress
This field displays the IP address used by NAT for this connection.
RemoteIPAddress
This field displays the remote IP address for this connection.
MaxMRUSize
This field displays the maximum size (between 1 and 1540) for the Ethernet
frames allowed on this link.
CurrentMRUSize
This field displays the current configured maximum frame size allowed from
a remote host.
DNSEnabled
This field displays 1 to set the device to resolve domain names through this
link; otherwise, this field is 0.
DNSOverrideAllowed
This field displays 1 to allow a non-empty DNS address to be replaced by a
DNS entry received on the WAN; otherwise, this field displays 0.
DNSServers
This field displays the IP address(es) of the DNS server(s).
Multiple IP addresses are separated by a comma.
MACAddress
This field is applicable when you select Enable in the
MACAdddressOverride field.
This field displays the MAC address of this interface on the device.
MACAddressOverride
This field displays 1 to allow change of MAC address on this interface in the
MACAddress field.
This field displays 0 if you do not allow MAC address modification.
TransportType
This field displays the transport protocol for the PPP connection.
PPPoEACName
This field displays the descriptive name for the PPPoE Access
Concentrator (AC).
PPPoEServiceName
This field displays the descriptive name for the PPPoE service.
ConnectionTrigger
This field displays how the device will establish a connection (AlwaysOn,
OnDemand and Manual) for Internet access.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
269
Chapter 18 WAN Device
Table 112 TR-098: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Details (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
RouteProtocolRx
This field displays the routing protocol (RIP1, RIP2 or OSPF) the link is to
use.
Off disables the routing feature.
PPPLCPEcho
This field displays the time (in seconds) for PPP Link Control Protocol
(LCP) echo.
PPPLCPEchoRetry
This field displays the time (in seconds) for PPP Link Control Protocol
(LCP) echo retry.
ShapingRate
This field displays the rate (in bits per second) the device shapes the
outgoing traffic to.
ShapingBurstSize
This field displays the burst size (in bytes) for traffic shaping.
PortMappingNumberOfE
ntries
This field displays the number of port mappings on this link.
18.14.2 Port Mapping Table
Use the PortMapping screen to view the port mapping instance for the WAN PPP connection.
Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANPPPConnection.
4 Click a number and PortMapping to display the screen as shown.
Figure 212 TR-098: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: PortMapping
18.14.3 Port Mapping Table Details
Use the detailed PortMapping screen to configure the port mapping settings for the WAN
PPP connection.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANPPPConnection.
4 Click a number and PortMapping.
5 Click a number to display the screen as shown.
270
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 18 WAN Device
Figure 213 TR-098: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: PortMapping: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 113 TR-098: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: PortMapping: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
PortMappingEnabled
This field displays 1 to indicate that the port mapping entry on this link is
enabled; otherwise this field displays 0.
PortMappingLeaseDurati
on
This field displays the time (between 1 to 4294967295 seconds) the device
stores the port mapping entry. After this, the entry is removed from the port
mapping table.
0 means that a port mapping entry is static and cannot be removed from
the port mapping table.
RemoteHost
This field displays the IP address of the remote host device.
If this field is blank, it indicates a wildcard which the device must support. In
this case, when a packet is sent to the external port on the WAN, the device
will forward the packet to the internal port.
ExternalPort
This field displays a port number (between 0 and 4294967295) the device
listens on for NAT connection requests.
0 indicates a wildcard. This sets the device to forward a wildcard packet to
the internal port.
InternalPort
This field displays a port number for the internal port (between 1 and
4294967295) to which the device forwards packets with wildcard.
PortMappingProtocol
This field displays the protocol (UDP or TCP) used for port mapping.
InternalClient
This field displays the IP address or domain name of a host on the LAN.
To allow UDP port mapping or multiple NAT clients to use the same port
number, use the broadcast address of 255.255.255.255 for the internal
client.
PortMappingDescription
This field displays a descriptive name (up to 256 characters) to identify this
port mapping entry.
18.14.4 WAN PPP Connection Statistics
Display the Stats screen to view the statistics of all PPP connections on the WAN interface.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANPPPConnection.
4 Click a number and Stats to display the screen as shown.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
271
Chapter 18 WAN Device
Figure 214 TR-098: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Stats
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 114 TR-098: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Stats
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
EthernetBytesSent This field displays the total number of bytes sent through the WAN since the
device was last reset.
272
EthernetBytesRec
eived
This field displays the total number of bytes received on the WAN since the
device was last reset.
EthernetPacketsS
ent
This field displays the total number of packets sent through the WAN since the
device was last reset.
EthernetPacketsR
eceived
This field displays the total number of packets received on the WAN since the
device was last reset.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 18 WAN Device
Vantage Access User’s Guide
273
Chapter 18 WAN Device
274
Vantage Access User’s Guide
P ART V
Internet Gateway
Device 1.2 (TR-098
Amendment 1)
This part contains the following chapters.
• General Device Setup (277)
• LAN Device (309)
• WAN Device (327)
275
276
CHAPTER
19
General Device Setup
This chapter describes the general Configuration screens you display to view and set basic
device settings.
19.1 Internet Gateway Device
You can view the number and type of interfaces on a device.
1 Log into Vantage Access using a manager account and click the Provision Manager
icon in the control panel.
2 Select a device in the Device List window.
3 Click Provision > Data Model > InternetGatewayDevice.
Figure 215 TR-098 Amendment 1: InternetGatewayDevice
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 115 TR-098 Amendment 1: InternetGatewayDevice
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
DeviceSummary
This field displays a summary information of the device.
LANDeviceNumb
erOfEntries
This field displays the number of LAN interfaces on the selected device.
WANDeviceNumb
erOfEntries
This field displays the number of WAN interfaces on the selected device.
19.2 Device Information
View detailed device information in the DeviceInfo screen.
Click Data Model > InternetGatewayDevice > DeviceInfo to display the general
information of the selected device.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
277
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
Figure 216 TR-098 Amendment 1: DeviceInfo
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 116 TR-098 Amendment 1: DeviceInfo
278
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Manufacturer
This is the name of the company that produced this device.
ManufacturerOUI
This field displays the six-hexadecimal-digit OUI (Organization Unit Identifier) of
the company. The OUI is a unique number assigned by the IANA. Devices
produced by the same company have the same hard-wired OUI.
ModelName
This field displays the device model name.
Description
This field displays additional information about the device.
ProductClass
This field identifies the product class or product over which the SerialNumber
parameter is unique.
SerialNumber
This field displays the device serial number.
HardwareVersion
This field displays the hardware model name.
SoftwareVersion
This field displays the firmware version number.
ModemFirmware
Version
This field displays the modem firmware version number.
EnabledOptions
This field displays the name of the options enabled on the device.
AdditionalHardwa
reVersion
This field displays the available information of the additional hardware version.
AdditionalSoftwar
eVersion
This field displays the available information of the additional software version.
SpecVersion
This field displays the specification version implemented on the device.
ProvisioningCode
The provisioning code is used by the service provider to identify specific
parameter settings for the device.
Enter the identifier of the DSL service provider or provisioning information. You
can enter up to 64 characters (use only A-Z, 0-9 and “.” with no spaces allowed).
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
Table 116 TR-098 Amendment 1: DeviceInfo (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
UpTime
This field displays the time (in seconds) since the device was last restarted.
FirstUseDate
This field displays the time and date the device first established a network
connection.
DeviceLog
Enter additional information for this device.
VendorConfigFile
NumberOfEntries
This field displays the number of configuration files.
19.3 Vendor Configuration File
The VendorConfigFile screen displays the name of the vendor configuration file and the time
it was first applied on the device. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field
descriptions.
Click Data Model > InternetGatewayDevice > DeviceInfo > VendorConfigFile. Click on a
file name to display detailed information.
Figure 217 TR-098 Amendment 1: VendorConfigFile
19.3.1 Vendor Configuration File Details
This screen displays detailed vendor configuration file information. You can find this screen
using one of the following methods:
• click a file name in the VendorConfigFile screen
• click Data Model > InternetGatewayDevice > DeviceInfo > VendorConfigFile and
click a number.
Figure 218 TR-098 Amendment 1: VendorConfigFile: Details
Vantage Access User’s Guide
279
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 117 TR-098 Amendment 1: VendorConfigFile: Details
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Name
This field displays the name of the vendor configuration file applied to the device.
Version
This field displays the version number of the vendor configuration file.
Date
This field displays the time and date the vendor configuration file was applied on
the device.
Description
This field displays a description about the vendor configuration file.
19.4 Device Configuration
Display the DeviceConfig screen to view general information about the configuration file on a
device.
Click Data Model > InternetGatewayDevice > DeviceConfig.
Figure 219 TR-098 Amendment 1: DeviceConfig
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 118 TR-098 Amendment 1: DeviceConfig
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
PersistentData
This field displays the configuration data that must remain intact after a device
system reboot.
ConfigFile
This field displays the name of the vendor specific configuration file used for the
device.
19.5 Management Server
Use the Management Server screen to configure settings on the device to connect to the
Vantage Access server.
Click Data Model > InternetGatewayDevice > ManagementServer.
280
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
Figure 220 TR-098 Amendment 1: ManagementServer
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 119 TR-098 Amendment 1: ManagementServer
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
URL
This field displays the address of the Vantage Access server to which the device
connects for remote management.
For example, “http://www.zyxel.com/TR098”.
Username
This field displays the user name the device uses to access Vantage Access.
Password
This field displays the password (up to 256 alphanumeric characters) associated
with the user name above.
Note: You must configure the same access user name and
password on the device and the Vantage Access server.
PeriodicInformEn
able
This field displays true to indicate that the device is set to regularly send device
information updates to Vantage Access.
This field displays false to indicate that this feature is disabled. In this case, you
must then manually update device information changes.
PeriodicInformInte This field is applicable when the PeriodicInformEnable field is 1.
rval
This field displays the time (in seconds) the device is to wait before sending device
request information updates to Vantage Access.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
281
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
Table 119 TR-098 Amendment 1: ManagementServer (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
PeriodicInformTim This field is applicable when in the PeriodicInformEnable field is 1.
e
This field displays the reference time and date the device is to initiate the
information updates. The time in the format yyyy-mm-ddThh:mm:ss.
ParameterKey
This field displays the parameter that is changed from the most recent information
update.
ConnectionReque
stURL
This field displays the URL of the device to which Vantage Access sends a
connection request.
ConnectionReque
stUsername
This field displays the user name Vantage Access uses to access the device.
This is required if you want Vantage Access to initiate a connection and access the
device.
ConnectionReque
stPassword
This field displays the password associated with the user name above.
UpgradesManage
d
This field displays 1 to allow Vantage Access to upgrade firmware on the device.
This field displays 0 to indicate that remote firmware upgrade through Vantage
Access is disabled.
KickURL
This field displays the URL on the LAN from which the device can initiate a Kick
request.
DownloadProgres
sURL
This field displays the URL of a website on the LAN to which a user’s web browser
is redirected to display the file transfer progress of the device.
UDPConnectionR
equestAddress
This field displays the URL of the device to which Vantage Access sends a UDP
connection request.
UDPConnectionR
equestAddressNo
tificationLimit
This field displays the minimum time, in seconds, between Active Notifications
resulting from changes to the UDPConnectionRequestAddress (if Active
Notification is enabled).
STUNEnable
This displays whether STUN (Simple Traversal of User Datagram Protocol through
Network Address Translators (NATs)) is enabled or not.
STUNServerAddr
ess
This displays the STUN server’s IP address.
STUNServerPort
This displays the port number of the STUN server.
STUNUsername
This displays the STUN server username.
STUNPassword
This displays the STUN server password associated with the STUNUsername.
STUNMaximumK
eepAlivePeriod
This displays the STUN server maximum keep-alive period.
STUNMinimumKe
epAlivePeriod
This displays the STUN server minimum keep-alive period.
NATDetected
This displays whether NAT (Network Address Translation) is in operation.
ManageableDevic
eNumberOfEntrie
s
This displays the number of devices connected to this device that can be
managed by Vantage Access.
ManageableDevic
eNotificationLimit
This displays the maximum number of manageable devices after which a
notification is sent.
19.6 Manageable Device
Use the Manageable Device screen to see layer 3 forwarding settings on the device.
282
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
Click Provision > Data Model > InternetGatewayDevice > ManageableDevice.
Figure 221 TR-098 Amendment 1: Manageable Devices
19.6.1 Manageable Device Details
Use the detailed Managed Devices screen to configure the layer 3 forwarding table on the
device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > ManageableDevice. Then click on an index number.
Figure 222 TR-098 Amendment 1: Manageable Devices: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 120 TR-098 Amendment 1: Manageable Devices: Details
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
ManufacturerOUI
This displays the OUI of the manageable device.
SerialNumber
This displays the serial number of the manageable device.
ProductClass
This displays the model name of the manageable device.
19.7 Time
Use the Time screen to configure time settings (such as the network time server and time
zone) on the device.
Click Data Model > InternetGatewayDevice > Time.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
283
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
Figure 223 TR-098 Amendment 1: Time
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 121 TR-098 Amendment 1: Time
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
NTPServer1 .. 5
This field displays the IP address or host name of the time server the device is to
use to update the system time. For example, “http://www.zyxel.com”.
CurrentLocalTime
This field displays the current system time on the device.
LocalTimeZone
This field displays the time offset from the UTC (Universal Time Coordinate). For
example, +08:00.
LocalTimeZoneNa This field displays the name of the local time zone.
me
DaylightSavingsU
sed
This field displays 1 to indicate that daylight savings time is enabled on the device.
This field displays 0 if this feature is disabled.
DaylightSavingsSt This field is applicable if the DaylightSavingsUsed field is 1.
art
This field displays the starting date of the daylight savings time in the format 000000-00T00:00:00.
DaylightSavingsE
nd
This field is applicable if the DaylightSavingsUsed field is 1.
This field displays the end date of the daylight savings time in the format 0000-0000T00:00:00.
19.8 User Interface
Use the UserInterface screen to configure remote management settings to access the web
configurator on the device.
Click Data Model > InternetGatewayDevice > UserInterface to display the screen as
shown.
284
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
Figure 224 TR-098 Amendment 1: UserInterface
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 122 TR-098 Amendment 1: UserInterface
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
PasswordRequire
d
This field displays 1 if a password is required to log into the web configurator on
the device.
This field displays 0 if a password is not required.
PasswordUserSel
ectable
This field displays 1 if a user can specify a different password for Autoconfiguration on the device; otherwise it displays 0.
UpgradeAvailable
This field displays 1 to allow user to view the upgrade information on the device;
otherwise it displays 0.
WarrantyDate
This field displays the time the warranty on the device expires.
ISPName
This field displays the name of your Internet Service Provider (ISP).
ISPHelpDesk
This field displays the telephone number of your ISP’s help desk.
ISPHomePage
This field displays the website address of your ISP’s home page.
ISPHelpPage
This field displays the website address of your ISP’s online support web page.
ISPLogo
This field displays the base64 encoded character for your ISP’s logo graphic. The
graphic can be a GIF or JEPG file smaller than 4095 bytes.
ISPLogoSize
This field displays the size of the logo graphic file.
ISPMailServer
This field displays the address of your ISP’s mail server.
ISPNewsServer
This field displays the address of your ISP’s news server.
TextColor
This field displays the color (in six-character RGB number) of the text in the web
configurator. For example, FFFFFF means white.
BackgroundColor
This field displays the color (in six-character RGB number) of the background in
the web configurator. For example, FFFFFF means white.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
285
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
Table 122 TR-098 Amendment 1: UserInterface (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
ButtonColor
This field displays the color (in six-character RGB number) of the buttons in the
web configurator. For example, FFFFFF means white.
ButtonTextColor
This field displays the color (in six-character RGB number) of the text on the
buttons in the web configurator. For example, FFFFFF means white.
AutoUpdateServe
r
This field is applicable if the UpgradesManaged field in the ManagementServer
screen shows 1 (see Section 19.5 on page 280).
This field displays the address of the server the device is to check for new
firmware. If new firmware is available, the device is to update the firmware
automatically.
UserUpdateServe
r
This field is applicable if the UpgradesManaged field in the ManagementServer
screen shows 0 (see Section 19.5 on page 280).
This field displays the address of the server a user can check for new firmware
updates available for the device.
ExampleLogin
This field displays the correct username format. This is to show users the correct
format to enter.
ExamplePasswor
d
This field displays the correct password format. This is to show users the correct
format to enter.
19.9 Layer3 Forwarding
Use the Layer3Forwarding screen to view the current layer 3 forwarding status and the
number of forwarding entries on the device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model > >
InternetGatewayDevice > Layer3Forwarding.
Figure 225 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer3Forwarding
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 123 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer3Forwarding
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Default
ConnectionService
This field displays the complete hierarchical name for the default WAN
interface.
ForwardNumberofEntries
This field displays the number of forwarding entries.
19.9.1 Layer3 Forwarding Table
The Forwarding screen displays the list of forwarding tables on the device. Refer to Section
11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
286
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
Click Data Model > InternetGatewayDevice > Layer3Forwarding > Forwarding.
Figure 226 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer3 Forwarding Table
19.9.2 Layer3 Forwarding Table Details
Use the detailed Forwarding screen to configure the layer 3 forwarding table on the device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > Layer3Forwarding > Forwarding. Then click on an index
number.
Figure 227 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer3 Forwarding Table: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 124 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer3 Forwarding: Forwarding
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that entry in the forwarding table is enabled.
A value of 0 means that the rule is disabled. This is the default setting for new
forwarding entries.
Status
This field displays the status of the forwarding entry.
Type
This field displays the route type.
Default sets the device to route packets with any destination.
Host sets the device to route packets to a specific destination IP address.
Network sets the device to route packets to an IP network.
DestIPAddress
This field displays the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation for the
route entry.
DestSubnetMask
This field displays the destination subnet mask in dotted decimal notation for
the route entry.
SourceIPAddress
This field displays the source IP address in dotted decimal notation for the route
entry.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
287
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
Table 124 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer3 Forwarding: Forwarding (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
SourceSubnetMask
This field displays the source subnet mask in dotted decimal notation for the
route entry.
ForwardingPolicy
This field displays the index number of the forwarding policy the device is to
use.
GatewayIPAddress
This field displays the IP address of the gateway in dotted decimal notation for
the route entry.
Interface
This field displays the hierarchical name of the WAN interface associated to this
route entry. For example, “InternetGatewayDevice.WANDevice.1.WANConnectionDevice.1.WANPPPConnection.1”
ForwardingMetric
This field displays the number of hops to the destination. This is associated to
the cost of the route.
-1 means this route is not used to forward traffic.
MTU
This field displays the maximum Ethernet packet size allowed on this route.
19.10 Layer2 Bridging
Use the Layer2Bridging screen to configure the bridge settings between layer2 LAN and/or
WAN interfaces on the device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > Layer2Bridging.
Figure 228 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 125 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging
288
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
MaxBridgeEntries
This field displays the maximum number of entries in the bridge table.
MaxFilterEntries
This field displays the maximum number of entries in the filter table.
MaxMarkingEntries
This field displays the maximum number of entries in the marking table.
BridgeNumberOfEnt
ries
This field displays the number of entries in the bridge table.
FilterNumberOfEntri
es
This field displays the number of entries in the filter table.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
Table 125 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
MarkingNumberOfE
ntries
This field displays the number of entries in the marking table.
AvailableInterfaceNu
mberOfEntries
This field displays the number of entries in the interface table.
19.10.1 Bridging Table
Use the Bridge screen to view the bridge table list on the device. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on
page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > Layer2Bridging > Bridge.
Figure 229 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging: Bridge
19.10.2 Bridging Table Details
Use the detailed Bridge screen to view and configure the bridge table entry on the device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model > >
InternetGatewayDevice > Layer2Bridging > Bridge. Click a number to display the screen.
Figure 230 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging: Bridge: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 126 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging: Bridge: Details
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
BridgeKey
This field displays the index number of the entry.
BridgeEnable
This field indicates whether the entry is activated or not.
BridgeStatus
This field displays the status of the entry.
BridgeName
This field displays the descriptive name of the entry.
VLANID
This field displays the ID of the VLAN to which the entry belongs.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
289
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
19.10.3 Filter Table
Use the Filter screen to view the filter table list on the device. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page
132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model > >
InternetGatewayDevice > Layer2Bridging > Filter.
Figure 231 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging: Filter
19.10.4 Filter Table Details
Use the detailed Filter screen to view and configure the filter table entry on the device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model > >
InternetGatewayDevice > Layer2Bridging > Filter. Click a number to display the screen.
Figure 232 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging: Filter: Details
290
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 127 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging: Filter: Details
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
FilterKey
This field displays the index number of the filter table entry.
FilterEnable
This field displays whether the entry is enabled.
FilterStatus
This field displays the status of the entry.
FilterBridgeReferenc
e
This field displays the index number of the bridge table entry associated with
this filter table entry.
ExclusivityOrder
This field displays whether the device is to match the filter table exclusively or
non-exclusively.
FilterInterface
This field displays the name of the interface to which this filter table entry is
applied.
VLANIDFilter
This field displays the VLAN ID of the packets the device is to filter on the
specified interface.
AdmitOnlyVLANTag
ged
This field displays whether the device is to allow tagged-only packets.
EthertypeFilterList
This field displays the Ethernet type(s) for the filter list. Multiple entries are
separated by commas.
EthertypeFilterExclu
de
This field displays whether the filter is to allow packets with the Ethernet type
not specified.
SourceMACAddress
FilterList
This field displays the list of source MAC address(es) to filter. Multiple entries
are separated by commas.
SourceMACAddress
FilterExclude
This field displays whether the filter is to allow packets with the source MAC
address(es) not specified.
DestMACAddressFilt This field displays the list of destination MAC address(es) to filter. Multiple
erList
entries are separated by commas.
DestMACAddressFilt This field displays whether the filter is to allow packets with the destination MAC
erExclude
address(es) not specified.
SourceMACFromVe
ndorClassIDFilter
This field displays the list of device vendor ID (obtained through DHCP) to
which source MAC address filter is applied. Multiple entries are separated by
commas.
SourceMACFromVe
ndorClassIDFilterEx
clude
This field displays whether the filter is to allow packets with the vendor ID not
specified for the source MAC.
DestMACFromVend
orClassIDFilter
This field displays the list of device vendor ID (obtained through DHCP) to
which destination MAC address filter is applied. Multiple entries are separated
by commas.
DestMACFromVend
orClassIDFilterExclu
de
This field displays whether the filter is to allow packets with the vendor ID not
specified for the destination MAC.
SourceMACFromCli
entIDFilter
This field displays the list of DHCP client ID (option61, RFC2132) to which
source MAC address filter is applied. Multiple entries are separated by
commas.
SourceMACFromCli
entIDFilterExclude
This field displays whether the filter is to allow packets with the client ID not
specified for the source MAC.
DestMACFromClient
IDFilter
This field displays the list of DHCP client ID (option61, RFC2132) to which
destination MAC address filter is applied. Multiple entries are separated by
commas.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
291
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
Table 127 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging: Filter: Details (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
DestMACFromClient
IDFilterExclude
This field displays whether the filter is to allow packets with the client ID not
specified for the destination MAC.
SourceMACFromUs
erClassIDFilter
This field displays the list of DHCP user class identification ID (option77,
RFC3004) to which source MAC address filter is applied. Multiple entries are
separated by commas.
SourceMACFromUs
erClassIDFilterExclu
de
This field displays whether the filter is to allow packets with the class
identification ID not specified for the source MAC.
DestMACFromUser
ClassIDFilter
This field displays the list of DHCP user class identification ID (option77,
RFC3004) to which destination MAC address filter is applied. Multiple entries
are separated by commas.
DestMACFromUser
This field displays whether the filter is to allow packets with the class
ClassIDFilterExclude identification ID not specified for the destination MAC.
19.10.5 Marking Table
Use the Marking screen to view the marking table list on the device. Refer to Section 11.2.4
on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model > >
InternetGatewayDevice > Layer2Bridging > Marking.
Figure 233 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging: Marking
19.10.6 Marking Table Details
Use the detailed Marking screen to view and configure the marking table entry on the device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > Layer2Bridging > Marking. Click a number to display the
screen.
Figure 234 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging: Marking: Details
292
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 128 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging: Marking: Details
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
MarkingKey
This field displays the index number of the marking table entry.
MarkingEnable
This field displays whether the marking table entry is activated or not.
MarkingStatus
This field displays the status of the marking table entry.
MarkingBridgeRefer
ence
This field displays the index number of the bridge table entry associated with
this marking table entry.
MarkingInterface
This field displays the name of the interface to which the device applies this
marking table entry.
VLANIDUntag
This field displays whether the device removes the VLAN tag from outgoing
packets on the interface.
VLANIDMark
This field displays the VLAN ID of the outgoing packets to which this marking
table entry is to apply.
EthernetPriorityMark
This field displays the Ethernet priority level to add to incoming packets on the
interface.
-1 means that the device does not change the priority level assigned by the
classifier.
EthernetPriorityOver
ride
This field displays whether the priority level marking is to apply to all packets on
the interface.
19.10.7 Available Interface Table
Use the AvailableInterface screen to view the interface table list on the device. Refer to
Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model > >
InternetGatewayDevice > Layer2Bridging > AvailableInterface.
Figure 235 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging: AvailableInterface
19.10.8 Available Interface Table Details
Use the detailed AvailableInterface screen to view and configure the interface table entry on
the device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > Layer2Bridging > AvailableInterface. Click a number to display
the screen.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
293
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
Figure 236 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging: AvailableInterface: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 129 TR-098 Amendment 1: Layer2Bridging: AvailableInterface: Details
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
AvailableInterfaceKe
y
This field displays the index number of the available interface table entry.
InterfaceType
This field displays the type of interface.
InterfaceReference
This field displays the parameter name of the interface.
19.11 Queue Management
Use the QueueManagement screen to configure settings to manage queues on the device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > QueueManagement.
Figure 237 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement
294
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 130 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable
This field displays whether queue management is activated or not.
MaxQueues
This field displays the maximum number of queues on the device.
MaxClassificationEnt This field displays the maximum number of entries in the classification table.
ries
ClassificationNumbe
rOfEntries
This field displays the number of entries currently in the classification table.
MaxAppEntries
This field displays the maximum number of entries in the application table.
AppNumberOfEntrie
s
This field displays the number of entries currently in the application table.
MaxFlowEntries
This field displays the maximum number of entries in the flow table.
FlowNumberOfEntrie This field displays the number of entries currently in the flow table.
s
MaxPolicerEntries
This field displays the maximum number of entries in the policer table.
PolicerNumberOfEnt
ries
This field displays the number of entries currently in the policer table.
MaxQueueEntries
This field displays the maximum number of entries in the queue table.
QueueNumberOfEnt
ries
This field displays the number of entries currently in the queue table.
DefaultForwardingP
olicy
This field displays the index number of the forwarding policy table associated to
the traffic.
DefaultPolicer
This field displays the index number of the default policer table for traffic without
a specified classifier.
DefaultQueue
This field displays the index number of the default queue table for traffic without
a specified classifier.
DefaultDSCPMark
This field displays the default DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) for traffic without a
specified classifier.
DefaultEthernetPriori This field displays the default priority level for traffic without a specified
tyMark
classifier.
AvailableAppList
This field displays a comma-separated list of protocols supported by the
application table.
19.11.1 Queue Classification
Use the Classification screen to view the classification table list on the device. Refer to
Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > QueueManagement> Classification.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
295
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
Figure 238 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: Classification
19.11.2 Queue Classification Details
Use the detailed Classification screen to view and configure queue classification settings.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > QueueManagement > Classification. Click a number to display
the screen.
296
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
Figure 239 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: Classification: Details
Vantage Access User’s Guide
297
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 131 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: Classification: Details
298
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
ClassificationKey
This field displays the index number of the classification table.
ClassificationEnable
This field displays whether the classification table is activated or not.
ClassificationStatus
This field displays the status of the classification table.
ClassificationOrder
This field displays the precedence of the entry in the classification table.
ClassInterface
This field displays the interface associated to this classification table. This is
one of the classification criteria.
DestIP
This field displays the destination IP address to be classified.
DestMask
This field displays the destination subnet mask of the destination IP address to
be classified.
DestIPExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets with destination IP
address(es) not specified above.
SourceIP
This field displays the source IP address of the packet to be classified.
SourceMask
This field displays the subnet mask of the source IP address to be classified.
SourceIPExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose source IP
address is not specified above.
Protocol
This field displays the protocol number to classify.
ProtocolExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose protocol type
is not specified above.
DestPort
This field displays the destination port number to be classified.
DestPortRangeMax
This field displays the end of the destination port number range the device is to
classify.
DestPortExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose destination
port number is not specified above or in the range.
SourcePort
This field displays the source port number to be classified.
SourcePortRangeM
ax
This field displays the end of the source port number range the device is to
classify.
SourcePortExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose source port
number is not specified above.
SourceMACAddress
This field displays the source MAC address to be classified.
SourceMACMask
This field displays the network portion of the source MAC address the device is
to classify.
SourceMACExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose source MAC
address is not specified above.
DestMACAddress
This field displays the destination MAC address to be classified.
DestMACMask
This field displays the network portion of the destination MAC address the
device is to classify.
DestMACExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose destination
MAC address is not specified above.
Ethertype
This field displays the Ethernet type to be classified.
EthertypeExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose Ethernet
type is not specified above.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
Table 131 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: Classification: Details
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
SSAP
This field displays the value of the Source link Service Access Point (SSAP) the
device is to classify.
SSAPExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose SSAP value
is not specified above.
DSAP
This field displays the value of the Destination link Service Access Point
(SSAP) the device is to classify.
DSAPExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose DSAP value
is not specified above.
LLCControl
This field displays the control value in the Logical Link Control (LLC) header the
device is to classify.
LLCControlExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose control value
in the LLC header is not specified above.
SNAPOUI
This field displays the OUI value in the SNAP header the device is to classify.
SNAPOUIExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose OUI value in
the SNAP header is not specified above.
SourceVendorClassI
D
This field displays the source vendor class ID the device is to classify.
SourceVendorClassI
DExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose source
vendor class ID is not specified above.
DestVendorClassID
This field displays the destination vendor class ID the device is to classify.
DestVendorClassID
Exclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose destination
vendor class ID is not specified above.
SourceClientID
This field displays the source client ID the device is to classify.
SourceClientIDExclu
de
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose source client
ID is not specified above.
DestClientID
This field displays the destination client ID the device is to classify.
DestClientIDExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose destination
client ID is not specified above.
SourceUserClassID
This field displays the source user class ID the device is to classify.
SourceUserClassID
Exclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose source user
class ID is not specified above.
DestUserClassID
This field displays the destination user class ID the device is to classify.
DestUserClassIDExc This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose destination
lude
user class ID is not specified above.
TCPACK
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets with ACK control bit
set in all TCP segments.
TCPACKExclude
This field displays whether the class includes packets not marked by TCPACK
above.
IPLengthMin
This field displays the minimum IP packet length in bytes.
IPLengthMax
This field displays the maximum IP packet length in bytes.
IPLengthExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose IP packet
length falls within the range specified above.
DSCPCheck
This field displays whether the device is to match the DSCP in the packets.
DSCPExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose DSCP
matches or does not match DSCPCheck above.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
299
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
Table 131 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: Classification: Details
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
DSCPMark
This field displays whether the device is to change the DSCP settings on
incoming packets.
EthernetPriorityChec
k
This field displays whether the device is to match the priority level in the
packets.
EthernetPriorityExcl
ude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose priority level
matches or does not match EthernetPriorityCheck above.
EthernetPriorityMark
This field displays whether the device is to change the priority level on incoming
packets.
VLANIDCheck
This field displays whether the device is to match the VLAN ID in the packets.
VLANIDExclude
This field displays whether the device is to classify packets whose VLAN ID
matches or does not match VLANIDCheck above.
ForwardingPolicy
This field displays whether the device is to change the VLAN ID on incoming
packets.
ClassPolicer
This field displays the name of the policer instance associated to this
classification table.
ClassQueue
This field displays the name of the queue instance associated to this
classification table.
ClassApp
This field displays the name of the application instance associated to this
classification table.
19.11.3 Application Queue
Use the App screen to view the application queue list on the device. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on
page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > QueueManagement > App.
Figure 240 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: App
19.11.4 Application Queue Details
Use the detailed App screen to view and configure the application queue table entry on the
device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > QueueManagement > App. Click a number to display the screen.
300
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
Figure 241 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: App: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 132 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: App: Details
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
AppKey
This field displays the index number of the application table entry.
AppEnable
This field displays whether this entry is activated or not.
AppStatus
This field displays the status of the entry.
ProtocolIdentifier
This field displays the number that identifies the protocol.
AppName
This field displays the descriptive name of the protocol.
AppDefaultForwardi
ngPolicy
This field displays the index number of the forwarding policy entry associated
with this entry.
AppDefaultPolicer
This field displays the index number of the policer table entry associated with
this entry.
AppDefaultQueue
This field displays the index number of the queue table entry associated with
this entry.
AppDefaultDSCPMa
rk
This field displays the default DSCP marking associated with this entry.
AppDefaultEthernet
PriorityMark
This field displays the default priority level associated with this entry.
19.11.5 Queue Flow
Use the Flow screen to view the queue flow table list on the device. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on
page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > QueueManagement > Flow.
Figure 242 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: Flow
Vantage Access User’s Guide
301
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
19.11.6 Queue Flow Details
Use the detailed Flow screen to view and configure the queue flow table entry on the device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > QueueManagement > Flow. Click a number to display the
screen.
Figure 243 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: Flow: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 133 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: Flow: Details
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
FlowKey
This field displays the index number of the flow table entry.
FlowEnable
This field displays whether this entry is activated or not.
FlowStatus
This field displays the status of the entry.
FlowType
This field displays the flow type associated with the queue and policer.
FlowTypeParameter
s
This field displays the value of the flow type.
FlowName
This field displays the descriptive name for this entry.
AppIdentifier
This field displays the index number of the application table entry associated
with this entry.
FlowForwardingPolic This field displays the index number of the forwarding policy entry associated
y
with this entry.
302
FlowPolicer
This field displays the index number of the policer table entry associated with
this entry.
FlowQueue
This field displays the index number of the queue table entry associated with
this entry.
FlowDSCPMark
This field displays the default DSCP marking associated with this entry.
FlowEthernetPriority
Mark
This field displays the default priority level associated with this entry.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
19.11.7 Queue Policer
Use the Policer screen to view the queue policy table list on the device. Refer to Section
11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > QueueManagement > Policer.
Figure 244 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: Policer
19.11.8 Queue Policer Details
Use the detailed Policer screen to view and configure the queue policy table entry on the
device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > QueueManagement > Policer. Click a number to display the
screen.
Figure 245 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: Policer: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 134 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: Policer: Details
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
PolicerKey
This field displays the index number of the policer table entry.
PolicerEnable
This field displays whether the entry is activated or not.
PolicerStatus
This field displays the current status of the entry.
CommittedRate
This field displays the committed rate (in bits/sec) allowed for this entry.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
303
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
Table 134 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: Policer: Details (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
CommittedBurstSize
This field displays the committed burst rate (in bytes) for this entry.
ExcessBurstSize
This field displays the excess burst rate (in bytes) for this entry.
PeakRate
This field displays the peak rate (in bits/sec) allowed for this entry.
PeakBurstSize
This field displays the peak burst rate (in bytes) for this entry.
MeterType
This field displays the traffic measurement method to use for this entry.
PossibleMeterTypes
This field displays the comma-separated list of supported traffic measurement
types.
ConformingAction
This field displays how the device is to handle conforming traffic.
PartialConformingAc
tion
This field displays how the device is to handle partially conforming traffic.
NonConformingActio
n
This field displays how the device is to handle non-conforming traffic.
CountedPackets
This field displays the number of packets as a result of the count meter action.
CountedBytes
This field displays the number of bytes as a result of the count meter action.
19.11.9 Queue
Use the Queue screen to view the queue table list on the device. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on
page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > QueueManagement > Queue.
Figure 246 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: Queue
19.11.10 Queue Details
Use the detailed Queue screen to view and configure the queue table entry on the device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > QueueManagement > Queue. Click a number to display the
screen.
304
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
Figure 247 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: Queue: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 135 TR-098 Amendment 1: QueueManagement: Queue: Details
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
QueueKey
This field displays the index number of the queue table entry.
QueueEnable
This field displays whether the entry is activated or not.
QueueStatus
This field displays the current status of the entry.
QueueInterface
This field displays the name of the interface to which the entry is applied.
QueueBufferLength
This field displays the queue buffer size in bytes.
QueueWeight
This field displays the queue weight for weighted queuing methods.
QueuePrecedence
This field displays the priority level of the queue relative to other queues.
REDThreshold
This field displays the threshold for Random Early Discard (RED) algorithm.
REDPercentage
This field displays the percentage for Random Early Discard (RED) algorithm.
DropAlgorithm
This field displays the name of the drop algorithm for this queue in case of
network congestion.
SchedulerAlgorithm
This field displays the name of the algorithm used by the scheduler.
ShapingRate
This field displays the shaping rate for the queue.
ShapingBurstSize
This field displays the burst size in bytes for traffic shaping.
19.12 LAN Configuration Security
Use the LANConfigSecurity screen to display and configure the password to allow LAN
access on the device for auto-configuration settings. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANConfigSecurity.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
305
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
Figure 248 TR-098 Amendment 1: LANConfigSecurity
19.13 IP Ping Diagnostics
Use the IPPingDiagnostics screen to configure the ping test settings on a device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > IPPingDiagnostics.
Figure 249 TR-098 Amendment 1: IPPingDiagnostics
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 136 TR-098 Amendment 1: IPPingDiagnostics
306
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
DiagnosticsState
This field displays the ping test result.
Interface
This field displays the hierarchical name of the interface for ping diagnostics.
For example, “InternetGatewayDevice.WANDevice.1.WANConnectionDevice.1.WANPPPConnection.1”
You can enter up to 256 characters for the interface name.
Host
This field displays the IP address or domain name of the host the device is to
ping to test the connection.
NumberOfRepetition
s
This field displays the number of ping test before displaying the result.
Timeout
This field displays the timeout (in milli-seconds) for a ping test.
DataBlockSize
This field displays the size of the packet to send for each ping test.
DSCP
This field displays the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) to use for the test packets.
The default is 0.
SuccessCount
This field displays the number of ping tests that are successful before the
timeout.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
Table 136 TR-098 Amendment 1: IPPingDiagnostics (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
FailureCount
This field displays the number of ping tests that failed.
AverageResponseTi
me
This field displays the average response time (in milli-seconds) of successful
ping tests. If there are no successful responses, this field displays 0.
MinimumResponseT
ime
This field displays the minimum response time (in milli-seconds) of successful
ping tests. If there are no successful responses, this field displays 0.
MaximumResponse
Time
This field displays the maximum response time (in milli-seconds) of successful
ping tests. If there are no successful responses, this field displays 0.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
307
Chapter 19 General Device Setup
308
Vantage Access User’s Guide
CHAPTER
20
LAN Device
This chapter describes the screens you use to configure and view LAN settings.
20.1 LAN Device Screen
Use the LANDevice screens to configure or view the LAN interface settings on the selected
device. The number of screens and field labels available vary depending on your device
model. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice to display the screen.
Figure 250 TR-098 Amendment 1: LANDevice
20.1.1 Detailed LAN Device Information
Use this screen to view detailed LAN device information. To find this screen, click Provision
> Data Model > InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice and a number.
Figure 251 TR-098 Amendment 1: LANDevice: Details
Vantage Access User’s Guide
309
Chapter 20 LAN Device
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 137 TR-098 Amendment 1: LANDevice: Details
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
LANEthernetInterf This field displays the number of instances on the LAN interface.
aceNumberOfEntr
ies
LANUSBInterface
NumberOfEntries
This field displays the number of instances on the USB interface.
LANWLANConfig
urationNumberOf
Entries
This field displays the number of instances on the WLAN interface.
20.2 LAN Host Configuration Management
Use the LANHostConfigManagement screen to view and configure DHCP settings on the
LAN interface.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Provision > Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice. Click a number and LANHostConfigManagement
to display the screen.
Figure 252 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: LANHostConfigManagement
310
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 20 LAN Device
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 138 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: LANHostConfigManagement
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
DHCPServerConfigurable
This field displays 1 if Vantage Access can change the default DHCP
server setting on the LAN interface.
This field displays 0 to have the device use the default DHCP server
settings on the LAN. No changes are allowed.
DHCPServerEnable
This field displays 1 to indicate that the DHCP server setting on the LAN
interface in enabled.
This field displays 0 to indicate that the DHCP server setting on the LAN
interface is disabled.
DHCPRelay
This field displays 1 when the device is set to act as a DHCP relay on the
LAN. The device will forward DHCP requests from the clients to the actual
DHCP server on the LAN. In this case, you must set up a DHCP server.
This field displays 0 when DHCP relay is deactivated. In this case, the
device acts as a DHCP server.
MinAddress
This field displays the first IP address in the DHCP IP pool the DHCP
server assigns to a DHCP client on the LAN.
MaxAddress
This field displays the last IP address in the DHCP IP pool the DHCP
server assigns to a DHCP client on the LAN.
ReservedAddresses
This field displays the IP address(es) in the DHCP IP pool that is reserved
and not assigned to a DHCP client on the LAN.
IP addresses are separated by a comma (,).
SubnetMask
This field displays the subnet mask for the DHCP clients.
DNSServers
This field displays the IP address of the DNS server whose information
the device sends to the DHCP clients.
DNS server IP addresses are separated by a comma (,).
DomainName
This field displays the domain name the device is to assign to DHCP
clients.
IPRouters
This field displays the IP address of the default gateway on the LAN.
IP addresses are separated by a comma (,).
DHCPLeaseTime
This field displays the lease time (in seconds) for the assigned IP address
to DHCP client(s).
This field displays -1 to indicate that a lease time never times out.
UseAllocatedWAN
This field displays how the device is to assign DHCP client IP
address(es).
Normal means the device is set to assign IP address from the DHCP IP
pool configured.
UserAllocatedSubnet means the device is set to assign IP address from
the range of WAN IP addresses provided by your ISP.
Passthrough means the device is set to assign IP address to the DHCP
client whose MAC address is marked for passthrough.
AssociatedConnection
This field is applicable if the UseAllocatedWAN field displays
UseAllocatedSubnet or Passthrough.
This field displays the complete hierarchical name for the default WAN
interface to which this connection is associated.
PassthroughLease
This field displays the lease time (in seconds) to DHCP clients when the
WAN IP address is passthrough.
PassthroughMACAddress
This field is applicable if you select Passthrough in the
UseAllocatedWAN field.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
311
Chapter 20 LAN Device
Table 138 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: LANHostConfigManagement (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
AllowedMACAddresses
This field displays the MAC address(es) allowed to pass through the LAN.
IPInterfaceNumberOfEntri
es
This field displays the number of IP subnets on the LAN.
This field is 1 if IP alias is not supported on the LAN.
20.2.1 IP Interface
The IPInterface screen allows you to view IP settings per each subnet on the LAN. Refer to
Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice > LANHostConfigManagement. Click IPInterface
to display the screen.
Figure 253 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: IPInterface
20.2.2 IP Interface Details
Use this screen to view detailed IP interface information.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice.
2 Click a number and LANHostConfigManagement.
3 Click IPInterface and a number to display the screen.
Figure 254 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: IPInterface: Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 139 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: IPInterface: Details
312
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that the LAN interface is enabled.
0 means the LAN interface is disabled and no traffic is allowed through.
IPInterfaceIPAddress
This field displays the LAN IP address of the device in dotted decimal notation,
for example, 192.168.1.1.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 20 LAN Device
Table 139 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: IPInterface: Details (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
IPInterfaceSubnetMas This field displays the subnet mask on the LAN. For example, 255.255.255.0.
k
IPInterfaceAddressing This field displays the method to assign IP address on the LAN interface.
Type
DHCP means the device is set to assign IP address from a DHCP server.
Static means the device is set to use a fixed IP address configured in the field
above.
AutoIP means the device is set to use the default IP settings on the LAN
interface.
20.3 LAN Ethernet Interface
The LANEthernetInterfaceConfig screen allows you to view LAN Ethernet settings. Refer
to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice. Then click a number and
LANEthernetInterfaceConfig to display the screen.
Figure 255 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig
20.3.1 LAN Ethernet Interface Details
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice.
2 Click a number and LANEthernetInterfaceConfig.
3 Click a number to display the configuration screen for a LAN Ethernet interface.
Use this screen to enable or disable the LAN Ethernet interface, configure the port speed and
duplex mode. You can also use this screen to enable or disable static MAC address learning.
Figure 256 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Details
Vantage Access User’s Guide
313
Chapter 20 LAN Device
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 140 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Details
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that the LAN Ethernet interface is active.
0 indicates the LAN Ethernet interface is disabled. In this case, no connection is
allowed.
Status
This field displays the connection status of the Ethernet interface.
MACAddress
This field displays the MAC address of the Ethernet interface.
MACAddress
ControlEnable
d
This field displays 1 to indicate that traffic with the specified MAC addresses is
allowed on this port. You can specify the MAC addresses in the
LANHostConfigManagement screen (refer to Section 20.2 on page 310).
This field displays 0 to indicate that MAC address control is disabled. All traffic is
allowed through the LAN interface.
MaxBitRate
This field displays the connection speed in megabits per second (Mbps).
Auto (auto-negotiation) allows the port to negotiate with a peer port automatically to
obtain the connection speed that both ends support.
DuplexMode
This field displays the duplex mode for the connection.
Auto allows the port to negotiate with a peer port automatically to obtain the duplex
mode that both ends support.
20.3.2 Ethernet Interface Statistics
The Stats screen shows the statistics on the LAN interface.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice.
2 Click a number and LANEthernetInterfaceConfig.
3 Click a number and Stats.
Figure 257 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Stats
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 141 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Stats
314
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
BytesSent
This field displays the number of transmitted bytes on this interface.
BytesReceive
d
This field displays the number of received bytes on this interface.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 20 LAN Device
Table 141 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: LANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Stats
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
PacketsSent
This field displays the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
PacketsRecei
ved
This field displays the number of received packets on this interface.
20.4 LAN USB Interface
The LANUSBInterfaceConfig screen is applicable when your device comes with a USB port.
Use this screen to view a summary of the USB interface. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132
for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice. Then click a number and LANUSBInterfaceConfig
to display the screen.
Figure 258 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig
20.4.1 LAN USB Interface Details
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice.
2 Click a number and LANUSBInterfaceConfig.
3 Click a number to display the screen as shown.
Use this screen to activate the USB interface and/or enable MAC address learning control.
Figure 259 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig: Details
Vantage Access User’s Guide
315
Chapter 20 LAN Device
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 142 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig: Details
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that the USB interface on the LAN is enabled;
otherwise, it displays 0.
Status
This field displays the connection status of the USB interface on the LAN.
MACAddress
This field displays the MAC address of the USB interface on the LAN.
MACAddress
ControlEnable
d
This field displays 1 to allow traffic with the specified MAC addresses on this port. You
can specify the MAC addresses in the LANHostConfigManagement screen
(refer to Section 20.2 on page 310).
This field displays 0 to indicate that MAC address control is disabled on this port. All
traffic is allowed through the USB interface on the LAN.
Standard
This field displays the version of the USB standard supported on the device.
Type
This field displays the type of USB interface on the device.
Rate
This field displays the speed of the USB interface.
Power
This field displays how the USB interface is to obtain power.
20.4.2 USB Interface Statistics
Display the Stats screen to view the statistics of the USB interface on the LAN.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice. Click a number and LANUSBInterfaceConfig.
Click a number and Stats to display the screen as shown.
Figure 260 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig: Stats
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 143 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: LANUSBInterfaceConfig: Stats
316
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
BytesSent
This field displays the number of transmitted bytes on this interface.
BytesReceive
d
This field displays the number of received bytes on this interface.
CellsSent
This field displays the number of transmitted cells on this interface.
CellsReceived
This field displays the number of received cells on this interface.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 20 LAN Device
20.5 WLAN Configuration
The settings in the WLANConfiguration screen is applicable to a device with built-in
wireless capabilities.
Use the WLANConfiguration screen to view the number of wireless LAN interfaces on the
device. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice. Click a number and WLANConfiguration to
display the screen as shown.
Figure 261 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration
20.5.1 WLAN Configuration Details
The settings in the WLANConfiguration screen are applicable to a device with built-in
wireless capabilities. Use this configuration screen to view and configure basic wireless LAN
settings on the device.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice.
2 Click a number and WLANConfiguration.
3 Click a number to display the screen as shown.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
317
Chapter 20 LAN Device
Figure 262 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 144 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration
318
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that the WLAN interface is enabled; otherwise, it
displays 0.
Status
This field displays the connection status of the WLAN interface.
BSSID
This field displays identification (usually the MAC address) of the wireless
interface.
MaxBitRate
This field displays the maximum bit rate (in Mbps) allowed on the WLAN
interface.
“auto” means the device automatically uses the highest transmission rate in the
OperationalDataTransmitRates field.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 20 LAN Device
Table 144 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Channel
This field displays the wireless channel number (0 to 255) to use for transmission.
SSID
This field displays the name (up to 32 characters) to identify the wireless network.
BeaconType
This field displays the WLAN security mode for wireless transmission.
Select None to disable wireless security.
MACAddressContr
olEnabled
This field displays 1 to indicate that traffic with the specified MAC addresses is
allowed on this port. You can specify the MAC addresses in the
LANHostConfigManagement screen (refer to Section 20.2 on page 310).
0 means the MAC address control feature is disabled. All traffic is allowed
through the USB interface on the LAN.
Standard
This field displays the wireless standard in which the device is currently
operating.
WEPKeyIndex
This field displays the index number (1 - 4) of the WEP key the device is to use for
data encryption.
KeyPassphrase
This field displays the passphrase the device uses to generate the WEP keys.
WEPEncryptionLe
vel
This field displays the wireless encryption level supported on the device.
BasicEncryptionMo This field is applicable when you select a basic security option for the
des
BeaconType field.
WEPEncryption means the device is set to use basic WEP encryption for
wireless transmission.
None means WEP encryption is disabled. In this case, traffic sent through the
wireless network is not secure.
BasicAuthenticatio
nMode
This field is applicable when you select a basic security option in the
BeaconType field.
EAPAuthentication enables user authentication before wireless connection is
allowed for the WLAN clients.
None deactivates this feature. In this case, your wireless network may be
accessible by anyone.
WPAEncryptionMo
des
This field is applicable when you select a WPA security option in the BeaconType
field.
This field displays the encryption method to secure traffic over the wireless
network.
WPAAuthentication This field is applicable when you select a WPA security option in the BeaconType
Mode
field.
This field displays the authentication method to control access to your wireless
network.
IEEE11iEncryption
Modes
This field is applicable when you select an 11i security option in the BeaconType
field.
This field displays the encryption method to secure traffic over the wireless
network.
IEEE11iAuthenticat This field is applicable when you select an 11i security option in the BeaconType
ionMode
field.
This field displays the authentication method to control access to your wireless
network.
PossibleChannels
Vantage Access User’s Guide
This field displays wireless channels available for your device as defined by the
regulatory body.
319
Chapter 20 LAN Device
Table 144 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration (continued)
320
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
BasicDataTransmit
Rates
This field displays the wireless transmission rate (Mbps) for broadcast, multicast
and unicast frames on the device.
Multiple transmission rates are separated by commas (,). For example, “1,2”
means the device is able to send at 1 Mbps or 2 Mbps.
OperationalDataTr
ansmitRates
This field displays the maximum transmission rate (in Mbps) allowed for unicast
frames on the device.
Multiple transmission rates are separated by commas (,). For example, if the
BasicDataTransmitRates field is “1,2” and this field is “1,2,5.5,11”, then the
device can transmit unicast frames at the maximum rates of 5.5 Mbps or 11
Mbps.
PossibleDataTrans
mitRates
This field displays the transmission rates for unicast frames WLAN clients are
allowed when connected to the device.
For example, if this field displays “1,2,5.5”. This means that the device allows a
wireless connection of up to 5.5 Mbps even though it is capable of connecting at
11 Mbps.
InsecureOOBAcce
ssEnabled
This field displays 1 to indicate that configuration changes are allowed to send
through insecure management methods other than the WAN CPE Management
Protocol.
0 disables this feature.
BeaconAdvertisem
entEnabled
This field displays 1 to indicate that the device is set to send beacons to advertise
its presence; otherwise, this field is 0.
RadioEnabled
This field display 1 to indicate that the wireless transmission is allowed on the
device; otherwise, this field displays 0.
AutoRateFallBack
Enabled
This field displays 1 to indicate that the device is set to automatically reduce
wireless transmission rates due to noise or contention.
0 deactivates this feature.
LocationDescriptio
n
This field displays the location of the device for identification purposes.
RegulatoryDomain
This field displays the name of the regulatory body in your geographical area.
The first two characters are the country code as defined in ISO/IEC 3166-1. For
the third character, “ “ means all environment, “I” means inside and “O” means
outside.
TotalPSKFailures
This field is applicable for WPA and 802.11i authentication methods.
This field displays the number of times pre-shared key authentication has failed.
TotalIntegrityFailur
es
This field is applicable for WPA and 802.11i authentication methods.
This field displays the number of times MICHEAL integrity check has failed.
ChannelsInUse
This field displays the channel number(s) that is currently used on the device for
wireless transmission.
DeviceOperationM
ode
This field displays the wireless operation mode for the device.
DistanceFromRoot
This field displays the number of hops between this device and the wireless
bridge/repeater.
PeerBSSID
This field displays the MAC address of the peer wireless bridge/repeater.
AuthenticationServ
iceMode
If user authentication is enabled, this field displays the location of the user
database the device is to check.
TotalBytesSent
This field displays the number of transmitted bytes on this interface.
TotalBytesReceive
d
This field displays the number of received bytes on this interface.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 20 LAN Device
Table 144 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
TotalPacketsSent
This field displays the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
TotalPacketsRecei
ved
This field displays the number of received packets on this interface.
TotalAssociations
This field displays the number of wireless clients associated to this device.
20.6 WLAN Association List
The AssociatedDevice screen displays a list of WLAN devices that are currently connected to
the device. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice.
2 Click a number and WLANConfiguration.
3 Click a number and AssociatedDevice to display the screen as shown.
Figure 263 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration:AssociatedDevice
20.6.1 WLAN Association List Details
Display the AssociatedDevice screen to view information on a wireless client currently
connected to the device.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice.
2 Click a number and WLANConfiguration.
3 Click a number and AssociatedDevice.
4 Click a number to display the screen as shown.
Figure 264 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: AssociatedDevice
Vantage Access User’s Guide
321
Chapter 20 LAN Device
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 145 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: AssociatedDevice
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
AssociatedDeviceMACA
ddress
This field displays the MAC address of an associated device.
AssociatedDeviceIPAddr
ess
This field displays the IP address or domain name of an associated device.
AssociatedDeviceAuthen
ticationState
This field displays whether the associated device is authenticated (Enable)
or not (Disable).
LastRequestedUnicastCi
pher
This field is applicable for 802.11i authentication methods.
This field displays the last unicast cipher used for a device with the
specified MAC address.
LastRequestedMulticast
Cipher
This field is applicable for 802.11i authentication methods.
This field displays the last multicast cipher used for a device with the
specified MAC address.
LastPMKId
This field is applicable for 802.11i authentication methods.
This field displays the last pairwise master key used for a device with the
specified MAC address.
20.7 WEP Key
Use the WEPKey screen to view the WEP key object information. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on
page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice.
2 Click a number and WLANConfiguration.
3 Click a number and WEPKey to display the screen as shown.
Figure 265 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: WEPKey
20.7.1 WEP Key Details
Use this configuration screen to view and set up WEP encryption keys for secure wireless
communication on the device.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice.
2 Click a number and WLANConfiguration.
3 Click a number and WEPKey.
4 Click a number to display the screen as shown.
322
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 20 LAN Device
Figure 266 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: WEPKey: Details
The WEPKey field displays the WEP key content. Depending on the encryption level in the
WEPEncryptionLevel field in the WLANConfiguration screen, the key length varies.
For 40-bit encryption level, this field displays 10 hexadecimal characters (“0-9”, “a-z”, “AF”). For 104-bit encryption level, this field displays 26 hexadecimal characters (“0-9”, “a-z”,
“A-F”). The WEP key content is not sent when requested. An empty string is returned.
Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
20.8 Pre-shared Key
Use the PreSharedKey screen to view the pre-shared key information. Refer to Section 11.2.4
on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice.
2 Click a number and WLANConfiguration.
3 Click a number and PreSharedKey to display the screen as shown.
Figure 267 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: PreSharedKey
20.8.1 Pre-shared Key Details
Use the detailed PreSharedKey screen to configure the passphrase the device uses to generate
the pre-shared key and/or WEP keys automatically.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice.
2 Click a number and WLANConfiguration.
3 Click a number and PreSharedKey.
4 Click a number to display the screen as shown.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
323
Chapter 20 LAN Device
Figure 268 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: PreSharedKey: Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 146 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: WLANConfiguration: PreSharedKey: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
PreSharedKey
This field displays a pre-shared key for WPA security.
KeyPassphrase
This field displays the passphrase the device uses to generate a preshared key or WEP key based.
AssociatedDeviceMACA
ddress
This field displays the MAC address of a wireless client associated to this
key.
20.9 LAN Hosts
In the Hosts screen, you can view the number of LAN hosts that are assigned a dynamic or
static IP address by the device. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice. Click a number and Hosts to display the screen.
Figure 269 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: Hosts
20.9.1 LAN Host Table
Display the Host screen to view the host table name. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice.
2 Click a number and Hosts.
3 Click Host to display the screen.
324
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 20 LAN Device
Figure 270 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: Hosts: Host
20.9.2 LAN Host Table Details
Display the detailed Host screen to view or configure DHCP host settings (such as IP address,
lease time, etc.).
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > LANDevice.
2 Click a number and Hosts.
3 Click Host and a number to display the screen.
Figure 271 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: Hosts: Host: Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 147 TR-098 Amendment 1: LAN Device: Hosts: Host: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
IPAddress
This field displays the IP address assigned to the LAN host.
AddressSource
This field indicates whether the LAN host obtains the IP address statically
(Static), dynamically from the device (DHCP) or through automatic
assignment (Auto).
LeaseTimeRemaining
If the host IP address is assigned through DHCP, this field displays the lease
time remaining (in seconds). A value of -1 means that the lease never times
out.
This field displays zero if the IP address assignment is not through DHCP.
MACAddress
This field displays the MAC address of the LAN host.
HostName
This field displays the name of the LAN host.
InterfaceType
This field displays the name of the interface the LAN host uses to connect to
the device.
Active
This field is Enabled to indicate that the LAN host is currently present in the
network. Otherwise, this field is Disable.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
325
Chapter 20 LAN Device
326
Vantage Access User’s Guide
CHAPTER
21
WAN Device
This chapter describes the screens you use to configure and view WAN settings.
21.1 WAN Device Screen Overview
Use the WAN Device screens to configure or view the WAN interface settings on the selected
device. The number of screens and field labels available vary depending on your device
model.
The WANDevice screen displays the number of connected WAN interface. Refer to Section
11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
Figure 272 TR-098 Amendment 1: WANDevice
21.1.1 WAN Device Details
To view the number of WAN connections, select a registered device in the Device List window
and click Data Model > InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice and then click an index.
The value for the WANConnectionNumberOfEntries displays the number of connections on
the WAN interface. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Figure 273 TR-098 Amendment 1: WANDevice: Details
Vantage Access User’s Guide
327
Chapter 21 WAN Device
21.2 WAN Common Interface Configuration
You can view basic common connection status in the WANCommonInterfaceConfig screen.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice. Click a number and
WANCommonInterfaceConfig to display the screen.
Figure 274 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 148 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig
328
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
EnabledForInternet
This field displays 1 to indicate that the WAN interface is enabled for
Internet access; otherwise, the field displays 0.
WANAccessType
This field displays the type of connection for Internet access on the
WAN interface.
Layer1UpstreamMaxBitRate
This field displays the maximum upstream transmission rate in bits
per second.
Layer1DownstreamMaxBitRate
This field displays the maximum download transmission rate in bits
per second.
PhysicalLinkStatus
This field displays the link status. Possible states are Up, Down,
Initializing and Unavailable.
WANAccessProvider
This field displays the name of the ISP providing the Internet access
service.
TotalBytesSent
This field displays the total number of bytes transmitted.
TotalBytesReceived
This field displays the total number of bytes received.
TotalPacketsSent
This field displays the total number of packets transmitted.
TotalPacketsReceived
This field displays the total number of packets received.
MaximumActiveConnections
This field displays the maximum number of connections allowed on
the device for Internet access.
NumberOfActiveConnections
This field displays the number of active connections on the device for
Internet access.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 21 WAN Device
21.2.1 Connection
Use the Connection screen to view the Internet connection instance. Refer to Section 11.2.4
on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANCommonInterfaceConfig.
3 Click Connection to display the screen.
Figure 275 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig: Connection
21.2.2 Connection Setup
Use the Connection screen to configure general connection settings.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANCommonInterfaceConfig.
3 Click Connection and a number to display the screen.
Figure 276 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig: Connection:
Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 149 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANCommonInterfaceConfig: Connection:
Setup
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
ActiveConnectionDeviceContai
ner
This field displays the hierarchical name of the WAN interface
associated with the connection. For example,
“InternetGatewayDevice.WANDevice.1.WANConnectionDevice.1.WANPPPConnection.1”
ActiveConnectionServiceID
This field displays the hierarchical name of the interface object for
this connection.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
329
Chapter 21 WAN Device
21.3 WAN DSL Interface Configuration
Use the WANDSLInterfaceConfig to configure the DSL connection for Internet access. DSL
connection setup is independent of other WAN interface parameter settings.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice. Click a number and WANDSLInterfaceConfig to
display the screen.
Figure 277 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 150 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig
330
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that the link is active; otherwise, it displays
0.
Status
This field displays the link status.
ModulationType
This field displays the modulation method used on the link.
LineEncoding
This field displays the line encoding method used to establish a connection
to the ISP.
DataPath
This field displays whether the link uses fast (lower latency) or interleave
(lower error rate) data path.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 21 WAN Device
Table 150 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
InterleaveDepth
This field is applicable when the DataPath field shows Interleave.
This field displays the interleaved depth.
LineNumber
This field displays the number of the line pair used for the connection. For
example, 1 means the inner most pair.
UpstreamCurrRate
This field displays the current payload bandwidth (in kbps) of the upstream
DSL channel.
DownstreamCurrRate
This field displays the current payload bandwidth (in kbps) of the
downstream DSL channel.
UpstreamMaxRate
This field displays the attainable bandwidth (in kbps) for the upstream DSL
channel.
DownstreamMaxRate
This field displays the attainable bandwidth (in kbps) for the downstream
DSL channel.
UpstreamNoiseMargin
This field displays the current upstream Noise-to-Signal ratio (in 0.1 dB) for
the upstream DSL channel.
DownstreamNoiseMargin
This field displays the current upstream Noise-to-Signal ratio (in 0.1 dB) for
the downstream DSL channel.
UpstreamAttenuation
This field displays the current upstream signal loss (in 0.1 dB).
DownstreamAttenuation
This field displays the current downstream signal loss (in 0.1 dB).
UpstreamPower
This field displays the output power (in 0.1dBmV).
DownstreamPower
This field displays the received power (in 0.1dBmV).
ATURVendor
This field displays the ATU-R vendor identifier.
ATURCountry
This field displays the ATU-R country code.
ATURANSIStd
This field displays the ATU-R T1.413 version number.
ATURANSIRev
This field displays the ATU-R vendor revision number.
ATUCVendor
This field displays the ATU-C vendor identifier.
ATUCCountry
This field displays the ATU-C country code.
ATUCANSIStd
This field displays the ATU-C T1.413 version number.
ATUCANSIRev
This field displays the ATU-C vendor revision number.
TotalStart
This field displays the number of seconds that elapsed since statistics
information collection started.
ShowtimeStart
This field displays the number of seconds since the beginning of the period
used for collecting first ShowTime statistics.
LastShowtimeStart
This field displays the number of seconds since the beginning of the
second most recent period used for collecting the ShowTime statistics.
CurrentDayStart
This field displays the number of seconds since the beginning of the period
used for collecting CurrentDayStart statistics.
QuarterHourStart
This field displays the number of seconds since the beginning of the period
used for collecting QuarterHour statistics.
21.3.1 WAN DSL Line Statistics
Use the Stats screen to view the DSL connection statistics instance. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on
page 132 for other field descriptions.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
331
Chapter 21 WAN Device
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANDSLInterfaceConfig.
3 Click Stats.
21.3.2 WAN DSL Line Statistics Details
You can view the line statistics in the Stats screens. The following statistics screens are
available. Field labels are the same in all the screens.
• Total: This screen displays the statistics with the totals.
• Showtime: This screen displays the statistics since the most recent DSL Showtime.
• LastShowtime: This screen displays the statistics since the second most recent DSL
Showtime.
• CurrentDay: This screen displays the statistics accumulated during the current day.
• QuaterHour: This screen displays the statistics accumulated during the current 15
minutes.
Follow the steps below to display a statistics screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANDSLInterfaceConfig.
3 Click Stats and click on the type of statistics you want to see.
Figure 278 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig: Stats (Total)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 151 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig: Stats (Total)
332
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
ReceiveBlocks
This field displays the number of blocks received.
TransmitBlocks
This field displays the number of blocks sent.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 21 WAN Device
Table 151 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANDSLInterfaceConfig: Stats (Total)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
CellDelin
This field displays the number of cell-delineation errors.
LinkRetrain
This field displays the number to link retrain errors.
InitErrors
This field displays the number of initialization errors.
InitTimeouts
This field displays the number of initialization timeout errors.
LossOfFraming
This field displays the number of Loss Of Framing errors.
ErroredSecs
This field displays the number of Errored Seconds.
SeverelyErroredSecs
This field displays the number of Severely Errored Seconds.
FECErrors
This field displays the number of FEC errors.
ATUCFECErrors
This field displays the number of FEC errors detected by the ATU-C.
HECErrors
This field displays the number of HEC errors.
ATUCHECErrors
This field displays the number of HEC errors detected by the ATU-C.
CRCErrors
This field displays the number of CRC errors.
ATUCCRCErrors
This field displays the number of CRC errors detected by the ATU-C.
21.4 WAN Ethernet Interface Configuration
You can set the Ethernet settings on the WAN interface in the WANEthernetInterfaceConfig
screen.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice. Click a number and WANEthernetInterfaceConfig
to display the screen.
Figure 279 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANEthernetInterfaceConfig
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 152 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANEthernetInterfaceConfig
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that this interface is active; otherwise, it displays 0.
Status
This field displays the status of this interface.
MACAddress
This field displays the MAC address of the interface.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
333
Chapter 21 WAN Device
Table 152 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANEthernetInterfaceConfig (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
MaxBitRate
This field displays the maximum link speed (10, 100 or Auto) on the interface.
DuplexMode
This field displays the duplex mode (Half, Full or Auto) for the interface.
21.4.1 WAN Ethernet Statistics
View the statistics for the WAN interface in the Stats screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number WANEthernetInterfaceConfig.
3 Click Stats to display the statistics screen.
Figure 280 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Stats
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 153 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANEthernetInterfaceConfig: Stats
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
BytesSent
This field displays the total number of bytes sent through the WAN since the
device was last reset.
BytesReceived
This field displays the total number of bytes received on the WAN since the
device was last reset.
PacketsSent
This field displays the total number of packets sent through the WAN since the
device was last reset.
PacketsReceived
This field displays the total number of packets received on the WAN since the
device was last reset.
21.5 WAN DSL Connection Management
The WANDSLConnectionManagement screen displays the number of WAN connection
services on the device. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice. Click a number and
WANDSLConnectionManagement to display the screen.
334
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 21 WAN Device
Figure 281 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANDSLConnectionManagement
21.6 WAN DSL Connection Service Information
You can view a list of connection service instances in the ConnectionService screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANDSLConnectionManagement.
3 Click ConnectionService to display the screen.
Figure 282 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: ConnectionService
21.6.1 WAN DSL Connection Service Setup
You can view and configure WAN DSL connection service settings in the ConnectionService
screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANDSLConnectionManagement.
3 Click ConnectionService and a number to display the screen.
Figure 283 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: ConnectionService: Setup
Vantage Access User’s Guide
335
Chapter 21 WAN Device
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 154 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: ConnectionService: Setup
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
WANConnectionDevice
This field displays the hierarchical name of the WAN connection device
object associated with the connection. For example,
“InternetGatewayDevice.WANDevice.1.WANConnectionDevice.2”
WANConnectionServic
e
This field displays the hierarchical name of the WAN connection device
object associated with the connection service. For example,
“InternetGatewayDevice.WANDevice.1.WANConnectionDevice.2.WANPPP
Connection.1”.
DestinationAddress
This field shows the destination address of the connection. The address
displayed varies depending on the connection type.
This field displays VCI/VPI for a PVC connection.
This field displays an ATM connection name or ATM address for an SVC
connection.
LinkType
This field displays the type of the link.
ConnectionType
This field displays the name of the connection type.
Name
This field displays the descriptive name for this connection.
21.7 WAN DSL Diagnostics
You can view the DSL connection diagnostics data in the WANDSLDiagnostics screen.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice. Click a number and WANDSLDiagnostics to
display the screen as shown.
Figure 284 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANDSLDiagnostics
336
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 21 WAN Device
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 155 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANDSLDiagnostics
PARAMETER VALUE
NAME
LoopDiagnost
icsState
This field displays the availability of the link diagnostic test result. Requested
indicates a test is to be initialized.
ACTPSDds
This field displays the actual power spectral density for the downstream traffic.
ACTPSDus
This field displays the actual power spectral density for the upstream traffic.
ACTATPds
This field displays the actual aggregate transmitter power for the downstream traffic.
ACTATPus
This field displays the actual aggregate transmitter power for the upstream traffic.
HLINSCds
This field displays the linear representation scale for the downstream traffic.
HLINpsds
This field displays the linear channel characteristics per subcarrier for the upstream
traffic.
QLNpsds
This field displays the quiet line noise per subcarrier for the downstream traffic in
comma-separated list of numbers.
Maximum list of numbers is 256 for an ADSL/ADSL2 connection and 512 for an
ADSL2+ connection.
SNRpsds
This field displays the Signal-to-Noise ratio per subcarrier for the downstream traffic.
BITSpsds
This field displays the bit allocation per subcarrier for the downstream traffic.
GAINSpsds
This field displays the gain allocation per subcarrier for the downstream traffic.
21.8 WAN Connection Device
For DSL connections, you can view the connection instances associated to an ATM VC in the
WANConnectionDevice screen.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice. Click a number and WANConnectionDevice to
display the screen as shown.
Figure 285 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANConnectionDevice
21.9 WAN Connection Device Details
You can view the number of connection instances associated to WAN connection device in the
detailed WANConnectionDevice screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
337
Chapter 21 WAN Device
3 Click on an index to display the screen as shown.
Figure 286 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANConnectionDevice: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 156 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANConnectionDevice: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
WANIPConnectionNumberOf
Entries
This field displays the number of WANIPConnection entries
associated to the WANConnectionDevice.
WANPPPConnectionNumber
OfEntries
This field displays the number of WANPPPConnection entries
associated to the WANConnectionDevice.
21.9.1 WAN DSL Link Configuration
Use the WANDSLLinkConfig screen to set the ATM layer properties for the physical DSL
connection.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Cick a number and WANDSLLinkConfig to display the screen as shown.
Figure 287 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANDSLLinkConfig
338
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 21 WAN Device
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 157 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANDSLLinkConfig
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that the DSL link is active; otherwise, this
field displays 0.
LinkStatus
This field displays the link status (Up, Down, Initializing or Unavailable).
LinkType
This field displays the type for this DSL link.
EoA sets the device to use the bridged Ethernet over ATM (RFC2684) link
type.
IPoA sets the device to use the routed IP over ATM (RFC2684) link type.
PPPoA sets the device to use the PPP over ATM (RFC2364) link type.
PPPoE sets the device to use the PPP over Ethernet on bridged Ethernet
over ATM (RFC2516, RFC2684) link type.
CIP sets the device to use the Classical IP over ATM (RFC1577) link type.
Unconfigured means an unknown link type.
AutoConfig
This field displays whether the auto-configuration feature is enabled or
disabled for this DSL link.
ModulationType
This field displays the type of modulation used on the interface associated
to this DSL link.
DestinationAddress
This field displays the destination address for the DSL link. The type of
address you enter varies depending on the connection type.
This field displays the VCI/VPI for a PVC connection.
This field displays an ATM connection name or ATM address for an SVC
connection.
ATMEncapsulation
This field displays the encapsulation (LLC or VCMUX) to use for this DSL
link.
FCSPreserved
This field displays 1 to include a checksum in the ATM payload for error
correction.
0 means the checksum is not included in the ATM payload. No error
correction is available.
VCSearchList
This field displays the VCI/VPI number pairs (separated by a comma) the
link uses to establish a connection if the destination address specified
cannot be reached.
ATMAAL
This field displays the ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL) the link uses.
ATMTransmittedBlocks
This field displays the number of ATM blocks transmitted successfully.
ATMReceivedBlocks
This field displays the number of ATM blocks received successfully.
ATMQoS
Select the ATM Quality of Service (QoS) method to use on this link.
ATMPeakCellRate
This field displays the peak cell rate (between 0 and 4294967295) for the
upstream traffic in cells per second.
ATMMaximumBurstSize
This field displays the maximum burst rate (between 0 and 4294967295)
for the upstream traffic in cells.
ATMSustainableCellRate
This field displays the sustainable cell rate (between 0 and 4294967295) for
the upstream traffic in cells per second. This value is used for traffic
shaping.
AAL5CRCErrors
This field displays the number of AAL5 layer cyclic redundancy check
errors.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
339
Chapter 21 WAN Device
Table 157 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANDSLLinkConfig (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
ATMCRCErrors
This field displays the number of ATM layer cyclic redundancy check errors.
ATMHECErrors
This field displays the number of Header Error Check related errors at the
ATM layer.
21.10 WAN ATM F5 Loopback Diagnostics
Use the WANATMF5LoopbackDiagnostics screen to view loopback diagnostic (ping) test
results and to configure timeout settings for the ping test on the ATM layer.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANATMF5LoopbackDiagnostics to display the screen as shown.
Figure 288 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANATMF5LoopbackDiagnostics
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 158 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANATMF5LoopbackDiagnostics
340
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
DiagnosticsState
This field displays the availability of the ping test result. Requested means
a test is to be initiated.
NumberOfRepetitions
This field displays the number of ping tests (between 1 and 4294967295) to
perform before displaying the test results.
Timeout
This field displays the timeout (between 1 and 4294967295 milliseconds)
for the ping test.
SuccessCount
This field displays the number of pings that received a successful response
within the timeout in the most recent ping test.
FailureCount
This field displays the number of pings that failed to receive a successful
response within the timeout in the most recent ping test.
AverageResponseTime
This field displays the average response time (in milliseconds) of all pings
that received a successful response in the most recent ping test.
If there is no successful response from the ping test, this field displays zero.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 21 WAN Device
Table 158 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANATMF5LoopbackDiagnostics
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
MinimumResponseTime
This field displays the minimum response time (in milliseconds) of the ping
that received a successful response in the most recent ping test.
If there is no successful response from the ping test, this field displays zero.
MaximumResponseTime
This field displays the maximum response time (in milliseconds) of the ping
that received a successful response in the most recent ping test.
If there is no successful response from the ping test, this field displays zero.
21.11 WAN Ethernet Link Configuration
The WANEthernetLinkConfig screen displays the Ethernet link status (Up, Down or
Unavailable) in the EthernetLinkStatus field. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other
field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANEthernetLinkConfig to display the screen as shown.
Figure 289 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANEthernetLinkConfig
21.12 WAN POTS Link Configuration
You can view the WAN POTS connection status in the WANPOTSLinkConfig screen. The
POST connection is used for dialing to the ISP for Internet access.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANPOTSLinkConfig to display the screen as shown.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
341
Chapter 21 WAN Device
Figure 290 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANPOTSLinkConfig
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 159 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANPOTSLinkConfig
342
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that the POTS link is active; otherwise it
displays 0.
LinkStatus
This field displays the link status (Up, Down, Dialing, Connecting or
Unavailable).
ISPPhoneNumber
This field displays the phone number (up to 64 digits in countrycodeareacode-phone number format) to dial to connect to the ISP. For example,
+86-10-62618501.
Multiple phone numbers are separated with a colon (:).
ISPInfo
This field displays a descriptive name (up to 64 characters) to identify this
ISP.
LinkType
The default link type is PPP_Dialup.
NumberOfRetries
This field displays the number of times (between 0 and 4294967295) the
CPE device is to re-dial for Internet connection.
DelayBetweenRetries
This field displays the time (in milliseconds) the CPE device is to wait
before attempting to connect to the ISP again.
Fclass
This field indicates the transmission functions the CPE device is capable of.
0:data
1, 2, 2.0: fax
8: voice
80: DSVD
DataModulationSupporte
d
This field displays the modulation method(s) supported for data transfer.
DataProtocol
This field displays the protocol(s) supported for data transfer.
DataCompression
This field displays the compression method used for data transfer.
PlusVTRCommandSupp
orted
This field indicates whether full-duplex mode is activated on the link or not.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 21 WAN Device
21.13 WAN IP Connection
You can view the IP settings for the WAN connection in the WANIPConnection screen. Refer
to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANIPConnection to display the screen as shown.
Figure 291 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANIPConnection
21.13.1 WAN IP Connection Details
You can configure and view basic IP settings for the WAN IP connection in the detailed
WANIPConnection screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANIPConnection.
4 Click a number to display the screen as shown.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
343
Chapter 21 WAN Device
Figure 292 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 160 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: Details
344
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that this link is active; otherwise this field
displays 0.
ConnectionStatus
This field displays the link status (Unconfigured, Connecting,
Connected, PendingDisconnect, Disconnecting, Disconnected).
PossibleConnectionType
s
This field displays the connection type(s) this link supports.
ConnectionType
This field displays the connection type for this link.
Name
This field displays a descriptive name (up to 256 characters) for this link.
Uptime
This field displays the number of seconds the link has been up.
LastConnectionError
This field displays the cause for the last failed connection attempt.
AutoDisconnectTime
This field displays the number of seconds (between 0 and 4294967295) the
device is to wait before disconnecting the link.
IdleDisconnectTime
This field displays the inactivity timeout in seconds (between 0 and
4294967295) for a link. When the time is reached without any network
activity through the link, the device automatically disconnect the link.
WarnDisconnectDelay
This field displays the number of seconds (between 0 and 4294967295)
before the device disconnects the link.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 21 WAN Device
Table 160 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: Details (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
RSIPAvailable
This field displays whether the Realm-specific IP (RSIP) feature is
supported on the device.
NATEnabled
This field displays 1 to indicate that the NAT (Network Address Translation)
feature is enabled for this link; otherwise the field displays 0.
AddressingType
This field displays DHCP to set the device to obtain a dynamic IP address
from the ISP for this link on the WAN.
This field displays Static to set the link to use a fixed WAN IP address.
Then configure the fields below.
ExternalIPAddress
This field is applicable when you select Static in the AddressingType field.
SubnetMask
This field is applicable when you select Static in the AddressingType field.
DefaultGateway
This field is applicable when you select Static in the AddressingType field.
DNSEnabled
This field displays whether is the device to resolve domain names through
this link.
DNSOverrideAllowed
This field displays 1 when a non-empty DNS address is to be replaced by a
DNS entry received on the WAN; otherwise, this field is 0.
DNSServers
This field displays the IP address(es) of the DNS server(s). Multiple IP
addresses are separated by a comma.
MaxMTUSize
This field displays the maximum size (between 1 and 1540) for the Ethernet
frames allowed on this link.
MACAddress
This field is applicable when you select Enable in the
MACAddressOverride field.
This field displays the MAC address on this link.
MACAddressOverride
This field displays 1 to change the MAC address of this interface in the
MACAddress field.
This field is 0 if you do not allow MAC address modification.
ConnectionTrigger
This field displays how the device will establish a connection for Internet
access. Choices are AlwaysOn, OnDemand and Manual.
RouteProtocolRx
This field displays the routing protocol (RIP1, RIP2 or OSPF) the link is to
use. Off means the routing feature is disabled.
ShapingRate
This field displays the rate (in bits per second) the device shapes the
outgoing traffic to.
ShapingBurstSize
This field displays the burst size (in bytes) for traffic shaping.
PortMappingNumberOfE
ntries
This field displays the number of port mappings on this link.
21.13.2 Port Mapping Table
Use the PortMapping screen to view the port mapping instance for the WAN IP connection.
Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANIPConnection.
4 Click a number and PortMapping to display the screen as shown.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
345
Chapter 21 WAN Device
Figure 293 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: PortMapping
21.13.3 Port Mapping Table Details
Use the detailed PortMapping screen to configure the port mapping settings for the WAN IP
connection.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANIPConnection.
4 Click a number and PortMapping.
5 Click a number to display the screen as shown.
Figure 294 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: PortMapping: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 161 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: PortMapping: Details
346
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
PortMappingEnabled
This field displays 1 to indicate that the port mapping entry on this link is
enabled; otherwise this field displays 0.
PortMappingLeaseDurati
on
This field displays the time (between 1 to 4294967295 seconds) the device
stores the port mapping entry. After this, the entry is removed from the port
mapping table.
0 means that a port mapping entry is static and cannot be removed from
the port mapping table.
RemoteHost
This field displays the IP address of the remote host device.
If this field is blank, it indicates a wildcard which the device must support. In
this case, when a packet is sent to the external port on the WAN, the device
will forward the packet to the internal port.
ExternalPort
This field displays a port number (between 0 and 4294967295) the device
listens on for NAT connection requests.
0 indicates a wildcard. This sets the device to forward a wildcard packet to
the internal port.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 21 WAN Device
Table 161 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: PortMapping: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
InternalPort
This field displays a port number for the internal port (between 1 and
4294967295) to which the device forwards packets with wildcard.
PortMappingProtocol
This field displays the protocol (UDP or TCP) used for port mapping.
InternalClient
This field displays the IP address or domain name of a host on the LAN.
To allow UDP port mapping or multiple NAT clients to use the same port
number, use the broadcast address of 255.255.255.255 for the internal
client.
PortMappingDescription
This field displays a descriptive name (up to 256 characters) to identify this
port mapping entry.
21.13.4 WAN IP Connection Statistics
Display the Stats screen to view the statistics of all IP connections on the WAN interface.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANIPConnection.
4 Click a number and Stats to display the screen as shown.
Figure 295 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: Stats
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 162 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANIPConnection: Stats
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
EthernetBytesSent This field displays the total number of bytes sent through the WAN since the
device was last reset.
EthernetBytesRec
eived
This field displays the total number of bytes received on the WAN since the
device was last reset.
EthernetPacketsS
ent
This field displays the total number of packets sent through the WAN since the
device was last reset.
EthernetPacketsR
eceived
This field displays the total number of packets received on the WAN since the
device was last reset.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
347
Chapter 21 WAN Device
21.14 WAN PPP Connection
Display the WANPPPConnection screen to view a PPP connection instance on the WAN
interface. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANPPPConnection to display the screen as shown.
Figure 296 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection
21.14.1 WAN PPP Connection Details
Display the detailed WANPPPConnection screen to configure and view basic PPP settings
for Internet access on the WAN interface.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANPPPConnection.
4 Click a number to display the screen as shown.
348
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 21 WAN Device
Figure 297 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 163 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays 1 to indicate that this link is active; otherwise, it displays
0.
ConnectionStatus
This field displays the link status
PossibleConnectionType
s
This field displays the connection type(s) this link supports.
ConnectionType
This field displays the connection type for this link.
Name
This field displays a descriptive name (up to 256 characters) for this link.
Uptime
This field displays the number of seconds the link has been up.
LastConnectionError
This field displays the cause for the last failed connection attempt.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
349
Chapter 21 WAN Device
Table 163 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Details (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
AutoDisconnectTime
This field displays the number of seconds (between 0 and 4294967295) the
device is to wait before disconnecting the link.
0 means you do not want the device to disconnect the link automatically.
IdleDisconnectTime
This field displays the number of seconds (between 0 and 4294967295) of
inactivity timeout for a link. When the time is reached without any network
activity through the link, the device automatically disconnects the link.
0 means you do not want the device to disconnect the link automatically.
WarnDisconnectDelay
This field displays the number of seconds (between 0 and 4294967295)
before the device changes the state of the link to the disconnecting state.
RSIPAvailable
This field displays whether the Realm-specific IP (RSIP) feature is
supported on the device.
NATEnabled
This field displays 1 to indicate that the NAT (Network Address Translation)
feature is enabled for this link; otherwise, this field displays 0.
Username
This field displays the Internet access account user name (up to 64
characters) provided by the ISP for authentication.
Password
This field displays the Internet access account password (up to 64
characters) provided by the ISP for authentication.
PPPEncryptionProtocol
This field displays the protocol used for PPP encryption between the device
and the ISP’s network.
PPPCompressionProtoc
ol
This field displays the protocol used for PPP traffic compression between
the device and the ISP’s network.
PPPAuthenticationProtoc This field displays the protocol used for PPP connection authentication
ol
between the device and the ISP’s network.
350
ExternalIPAddress
This field displays the IP address used by NAT for this connection.
RemoteIPAddress
This field displays the remote IP address for this connection.
MaxMRUSize
This field displays the maximum size (between 1 and 1540) for the Ethernet
frames allowed on this link.
CurrentMRUSize
This field displays the current configured maximum frame size allowed from
a remote host.
DNSEnabled
This field displays 1 to set the device to resolve domain names through this
link; otherwise, this field is 0.
DNSOverrideAllowed
This field displays 1 to allow a non-empty DNS address to be replaced by a
DNS entry received on the WAN; otherwise, this field displays 0.
DNSServers
This field displays the IP address(es) of the DNS server(s).
Multiple IP addresses are separated by a comma.
MACAddress
This field is applicable when you select Enable in the
MACAdddressOverride field.
This field displays the MAC address of this interface on the device.
MACAddressOverride
This field displays 1 to allow change of MAC address on this interface in the
MACAddress field.
This field displays 0 if you do not allow MAC address modification.
TransportType
This field displays the transport protocol for the PPP connection.
PPPoEACName
This field displays the descriptive name for the PPPoE Access
Concentrator (AC).
PPPoEServiceName
This field displays the descriptive name for the PPPoE service.
ConnectionTrigger
This field displays how the device will establish a connection (AlwaysOn,
OnDemand and Manual) for Internet access.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 21 WAN Device
Table 163 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Details (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
RouteProtocolRx
This field displays the routing protocol (RIP1, RIP2 or OSPF) the link is to
use.
Off disables the routing feature.
PPPLCPEcho
This field displays the time (in seconds) for PPP Link Control Protocol
(LCP) echo.
PPPLCPEchoRetry
This field displays the time (in seconds) for PPP Link Control Protocol
(LCP) echo retry.
ShapingRate
This field displays the rate (in bits per second) the device shapes the
outgoing traffic to.
ShapingBurstSize
This field displays the burst size (in bytes) for traffic shaping.
PortMappingNumberOfE
ntries
This field displays the number of port mappings on this link.
21.14.2 Port Mapping Table
Use the PortMapping screen to view the port mapping instance for the WAN PPP connection.
Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANPPPConnection.
4 Click a number and PortMapping to display the screen as shown.
Figure 298 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: PortMapping
21.14.3 Port Mapping Table Details
Use the detailed PortMapping screen to configure the port mapping settings for the WAN
PPP connection.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANPPPConnection.
4 Click a number and PortMapping.
5 Click a number to display the screen as shown.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
351
Chapter 21 WAN Device
Figure 299 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: PortMapping: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 164 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: PortMapping: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
PortMappingEnabled
This field displays 1 to indicate that the port mapping entry on this link is
enabled; otherwise this field displays 0.
PortMappingLeaseDurati
on
This field displays the time (between 1 to 4294967295 seconds) the device
stores the port mapping entry. After this, the entry is removed from the port
mapping table.
0 means that a port mapping entry is static and cannot be removed from
the port mapping table.
RemoteHost
This field displays the IP address of the remote host device.
If this field is blank, it indicates a wildcard which the device must support. In
this case, when a packet is sent to the external port on the WAN, the device
will forward the packet to the internal port.
ExternalPort
This field displays a port number (between 0 and 4294967295) the device
listens on for NAT connection requests.
0 indicates a wildcard. This sets the device to forward a wildcard packet to
the internal port.
InternalPort
This field displays a port number for the internal port (between 1 and
4294967295) to which the device forwards packets with wildcard.
PortMappingProtocol
This field displays the protocol (UDP or TCP) used for port mapping.
InternalClient
This field displays the IP address or domain name of a host on the LAN.
To allow UDP port mapping or multiple NAT clients to use the same port
number, use the broadcast address of 255.255.255.255 for the internal
client.
PortMappingDescription
This field displays a descriptive name (up to 256 characters) to identify this
port mapping entry.
21.14.4 WAN PPP Connection Statistics
Display the Stats screen to view the statistics of all PPP connections on the WAN interface.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model >
InternetGatewayDevice > WANDevice.
2 Click a number and WANConnectionDevice.
3 Click a number and WANPPPConnection.
4 Click a number and Stats to display the screen as shown.
352
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 21 WAN Device
Figure 300 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Stats
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 165 TR-098 Amendment 1: WAN Device: WANPPPConnection: Stats
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
EthernetBytesSent This field displays the total number of bytes sent through the WAN since the
device was last reset.
EthernetBytesRec
eived
This field displays the total number of bytes received on the WAN since the
device was last reset.
EthernetPacketsS
ent
This field displays the total number of packets sent through the WAN since the
device was last reset.
EthernetPacketsR
eceived
This field displays the total number of packets received on the WAN since the
device was last reset.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
353
Chapter 21 WAN Device
354
Vantage Access User’s Guide
P ART VI
Voice Service 1.0
(TR-104)
This part contains the following chapters.
• Voice Service (357)
355
356
CHAPTER
22
Voice Service
This chapter describes the screens you use to configure and view VoIP settings.
22.1 Services
Display the Services screen to view the number of voice service entries on the device. Refer to
Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services to display the screen.
Figure 301 TR-104: Services
22.2 Voice Service Screen
Display the first VoiceService screen to view the number of VoIP services available on the
device. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService to display the screen.
Figure 302 TR-104: VoiceService
22.2.1 Voice Service Details
Display the detailed VoiceService screen to view the number of VoIP profiles on the device.
Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService and click an index number to display the screen.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
357
Chapter 22 Voice Service
Figure 303 TR-104: VoiceService: Details
22.3 VoIP Capabilities
You can view the VoIP functions available on the device in the Capabilities screen.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService. Click a number and Capabilities to display the screen.
Figure 304 TR-104: VoiceService: Capabilities
358
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Voice Service
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 166 TR-104: VoiceService: Capabilities
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
MaxProfileCount
This field displays the maximum number of voice profiles supported on the
device.
MaxLineCount
This field displays the maximum number of voice connections to a peer VoIP
endpoint supported on the device.
MaxSessionsPerLine
This field displays the maximum number of sessions per connection.
MaxSessionCount
This field displays the maximum number of sessions allowed on the device.
SignalingProtocols
This field displays the signaling protocol(s) supported on the device.
Regions
This field displays the two-character code for the country in which the device
is configured to work.
If this field is empty, the device is not customized to work in any geographical
area.
RTCP
This field indicates whether RTCP (Real Time Control Protocol) is activated
on the device or not.
SRTP
This field indicates whether SRTP (Secure Real Time Control Protocol) is
activated on the device or not.
SRTPKeyingMethods
This field displays the supported SRTP keying method(s) the device supports.
SRTPEncryptionKeyS
izes
This field displays the supported encryption key lengths(s) for SRTP this
device supports.
RTPRedundancy
This field indicates whether the RTP redundancy is activated on the device or
not.
DSCPCoupled
This field indicates if the device is to send call control packets with the same
DSCP setting as the transmitted RTP packets.
EthernetTaggingCoupl This field indicates if the device is to send call control packets with the same
ed
tag as the transmitted RTP packets.
PSTNSoftSwitchOver
This field indicates if the device is able to forward calls to PSTN lines in case
the VoIP connection is down.
FaxT38
This field indicates whether the T.38 fax feature is supported on the device or
not.
FaxPassThrough
This field indicates whether the fax passthrough feature is supported on the
device or not.
ModemPassThrough
This field indicates whether the modem passthrough feature is supported on
the device or not.
ToneGeneration
This field indicates whether the tone generation feature is supported on the
device or not.
ToneDescriptionsEdita This field displays whether you can change the tone description and the tone
ble
pattern tables.
PatternBasedToneGe
neration
This field displays whether the device supports tone generation based on tone
patterns.
FileBasedToneGenera This field displays whether the device supports tone generation based on file
tion
playback.
ToneFileFormats
This field displays the list of tone file formats the device supports.
RingGeneration
This field indicates whether the ring generation feature is supported on the
device or not.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
359
Chapter 22 Voice Service
Table 166 TR-104: VoiceService: Capabilities (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
RingDescriptionsEdita
ble
This field displays whether you can change the ring description and the ring
pattern tables.
PatternBasedRingGe
neration
This field displays whether the device supports ring generation based on tone
patterns.
RingPatternEditable
This field displays whether you can change the ring pattern table.
FileBasedRingGenera
tion
This field displays whether the device supports ring generation based on file
playback.
RingFileFormats
This field displays the list of ring file formats the device supports.
DigitMap
This field displays whether the device supports the digimap parameters.
NumberingPlan
This field indicates whether numbering plan configuration is supported on the
device or not.
ButtonMap
This field indicates whether button map configuration is supported on the
device or not.
VoicePortTests
This field indicates whether the voice port testing feature is supported on the
device or not.
22.3.1 SIP Setup
You can view and configure SIP settings in the SIP screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration > Device
> Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and Capabilities.
3 Click SIP to display the screen.
Figure 305 TR-104: VoiceService: Capabilities: SIP
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 167 TR-104: VoiceService: Capabilities: SIP
360
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Role
This field displays the operation mode of the device in the network.
Extensions
This field displays the SIP extension methods supported on the device.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Voice Service
Table 167 TR-104: VoiceService: Capabilities: SIP (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Transports
This field displays the list of SIP transport protocols supported on the device.
URISchemes
This field displays additional URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) schemes
supported on the device.
EventSubscription
This field indicates whether SIP event subscription is activated on the device.
ResponseMap
This field indicates whether SIP response map is activated on the device.
TLSAuthenticationPro
tocols
This field displays the authentication protocol used for TLS (Transport Layer
Security) communication.
TLSAuthenticationKey This field displays the size of the authentication key.
Sizes
TLSEncryptionProtoc
ols
This field displays the encryption protocol used.
TLSEncryptionKeySiz
es
This field displays the size of the encryption key.
TLSKeyExchangeProt
ocols
This field displays the protocols used for key exchange.
22.3.2 MGCP Setup
You can view and configure the MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) settings in the
MGCP screen. The Extensions field displays the name(s) of the MGCP package supported. If
there is more than one name, the names are separated by a comma. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on
page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration > Device
> Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and Capabilities.
3 Click MGCP to display the screen.
Figure 306 TR-104: VoiceService: Capabilities: MGCP
22.3.3 H.323 Setup
You can view and configure the H323 settings in the H323 screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration > Device
> Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and Capabilities.
3 Click H323 to display the screen.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
361
Chapter 22 Voice Service
Figure 307 TR-104: VoiceService: Capabilities: H323
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 168 TR-104: VoiceService: Capabilities: H323
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
FastStart
This field displays whether the faststart feature is enabled (1) for H323.
H235AuthenticationM
ethods
This field displays the authentication method used for H323.
22.3.4 Codecs
You can view the number of codec instances in the Codecs screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on
page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration > Device
> Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and Capabilities.
3 Click Codecs to display the screen.
Figure 308 TR-104: VoiceService: Capabilities: Codecs
22.3.5 Codecs Details
You can view and configure codec settings in the detailed Codecs screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Configuration > Device
> Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and Capabilities.
3 Click Codecs and a number to display the screen.
362
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Voice Service
Figure 309 TR-104: VoiceService: Capabilities: Codecs: Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 169 TR-104: VoiceService: Capabilities: Codecs: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
EntryID
This field displays the index number of the codec entry.
Codec
This field displays the name of the codec.
BitRate
This field displays the bit rate in bits per second.
PacketizationPeriod
This field displays the list of packetization periods (in milliseconds) supported
on the device.
SilenceSuppression
This field indicates whether the silence suppression feature is supported by
the codec or not.
22.4 Voice Profile
Use the VoiceProfile to view the number of voice profiles on the device. Refer to Section
11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService. Click a number and VoiceProfile to display the configuration
screen.
Figure 310 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile
22.4.1 Voice Profile Details
Use the detailed VoiceProfile to configure common profile settings for the voice connection(s)
on the device.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
363
Chapter 22 Voice Service
3 Click a number to display the configuration screen.
Figure 311 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 170 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Details
364
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays Enabled to indicate the profile is active.
This field displays Disabled to indicate the profile is not active.
This field displays Quiescent to prevent new session generation on the active
line(s).
Reset
This field displays 1 to reset the line(s) on which the profile is applied.
This field displays 0 to disable line reset.
NumberOfLines
This field displays the number of lines associated with the voice profile.
Name
This field displays a descriptive name (up to 64 characters) to identify the
profile.
SignalingProtocol
This field displays the signaling protocol the profile is to use.
MaxSessions
This field displays the maximum number of simultaneous sessions allowed on
the line(s) on which the profile is applied. Enter a number between 1 and
4294967295.
DTMFMethod
This field displays the DTMF method the profile is to pass.
DTMFMethodG711
This field displays the DTMF method the profile is to pass if the current codec
is G.711.
Region
This field displays the geographical area this profile is used. This may be used
by the device to customize localization settings.
DigitMap
This field displays the requirements before the device sends out a request.
DigitMapEnable
This field displays 1 to use a digitmap for voice transmission; otherwise, this
field is 0.
STUNEnable
This field displays 1 to allow STUN to work in a NAT environment; otherwise,
this field displays 0.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Voice Service
Table 170 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Details (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
STUNServer
This field displays the server name or the IP address of the STUN server.
NonVoiceBandwidthR
eservedUpstream
This field displays the amount of upstream bandwidth (in bps) that the device
uses for non-voice traffic.
NonVoiceBandwidthR
eservedDownstream
This field displays the amount of downstream bandwidth (in bps) that the
device uses for non-voice traffic.
PSTNFailOver
This field displays 1 to indicate that the device will use the PSTN server when
the voice network is down.
FaxPassThrough
This field displays how the device is to handle fax data.
ModemPassThrough
This field displays how the device is to handle modem data.
22.5 Voice Service Provider Information
Use the ServiceProviderInfo screen to view and configure service provider information.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and ServiceProviderInfo to display the configuration screen.
Figure 312 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: ServiceProviderInfo
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 171 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: ServiceProviderInfo
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Name
This field displays the name of the service provider.
URL
This field displays the website address of the service provider.
ContactPhoneNumber This field displays the customer support phone number of the service
provider.
EmailAddress
This field displays the customer support email address of the service provider.
22.6 SIP Profile
Use this SIP screen to view and configure SIP settings for the voice profile.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
365
Chapter 22 Voice Service
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and SIP to display the configuration screen.
Figure 313 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: SIP
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 172 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: SIP: Details
366
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
ProxyServer
This field displays the IP address or the host name of the SIP proxy server. All
SIP signalling traffic is sent to this proxy server.
ProxyServerPort
This field displays the SIP server port number to which the device is to
connect.
ProxyServerTransport
This field displays the transport protocol the device is to use to connect to the
SIP server.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Voice Service
Table 172 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: SIP: Details (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
RegistrarServer
This field displays the IP address or the host name of the SIP registrar server.
RegistrarServerPort
This field displays the SIP registrar server port number to which the device is
to connect.
RegistrarServerTrans
port
This field displays the transport protocol the device is to use to connect to the
SIP registrar server.
UserAgentDomain
This field displays the domain name of the device.
UserAgentPort
This field displays the port number used for incoming call control signaling.
UserAgentTransport
This field displays the transport protocol used for incoming call control
signaling.
OutboundProxy
This field displays the IP address or the host name of the outbound proxy
server.
OutboundProxyPort
This field displays the port number on the outbound proxy server to which the
device is to connect.
Organization
This field displays the name of the organization (up to 256 characters) to
include in the packets.
RegistrationPeriod
This field displays the time (between 1 and 4294967295 seconds) the device
waits before re-registering to the SIP server.
TimerT1, T2, T4, A..K
This field displays the value for the SIP timer (in milliseconds).
InviteExpires
This field displays the time (in seconds) the SIP invite request expires.
ReInviteExpires
This field displays the time (in seconds) the SIP reinvite request expires.
RegisterExpires
This field displays the time (between 1 and 4294967295 seconds) the SIP
registration expires.
RegistersMinExpires
This field displays the time (in seconds) the min-register request expires.
RegisterRetryInterval
This field displays the time (in seconds) the register request retry expires.
InboundAuth
This field displays the authentication type for inbound request.
InboundAuthUsernam
e
This field displays the username for inbound authentication.
InboundAuthPasswor
d
This field displays the password associated with the username above.
UseCodecPriorityInS
DPResponse
This field displays 1 to set the device to use the highest-priority codec offered
to respond to an invite packet; otherwise, this field is 0.
DSCPMark
This field displays the DiffServ code point (DSCP) to use for outgoing SIP
signaling packets.
VLANIDMark
This field displays the VLAN ID to use for outgoing SIP signaling packets.
EthernetPriorityMark
This field displays the IEEE 802.1D priority level to use for outgoing SIP
signaling packets.
SIPEventSubscribeNu This field displays the number of EventSubscribe objects.
mberOfElements
SIPResponseMapNu
mberOfElements
This field displays the number of SIPResponseMap objects.
22.6.1 SIP Event Subscription
Use the EventSubscribe screen to view the list of SIP event subscriptions. Refer to Section
11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
367
Chapter 22 Voice Service
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and SIP.
4 Click EventSubscribe to display the screen.
Figure 314 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: SIP: EventSubscribe
22.6.2 SIP Event Subscription Details
Use the EventSubscribe screen to view the list of SIP event subscriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and SIP.
4 Click EventSubscribe and a number to display the screen.
Figure 315 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: SIP: EventSubscribe: Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 173 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: SIP: EventSubscribe: Details
368
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Event
This field displays the event name.
Notifier
This field displays the domain name or the IP address of the event notifying
server.
NotifierPort
This field displays the port number used to connect to the event notifier.
NotifierTransport
This field displays the transport protocol used to connect to the event notifier.
ExpireTime
This field displays the subscription refresh timer in seconds.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Voice Service
22.6.3 SIP Response Mapping Table
Use the ResponseMap screen to view the list of SIP response mapping for received messages
and tones. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and SIP.
4 Click ResponseMap to display the screen.
Figure 316 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: SIP: ResponseMap
22.6.4 SIP Response Mapping Details
Use the detailed ResponseMap screen to view the list of SIP event subscriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and SIP.
4 Click ResponseMap and a number to display the screen.
Figure 317 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: SIP: ResponseMap: Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 174 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: SIP: ResponseMap: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
SIPResponseNumber
This field displays the response code number.
TextMessage
This field displays the text displays on the screen when a SIP response is
received.
Tone
This field displays the name of the tone the user hears when a SIP response
is received.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
369
Chapter 22 Voice Service
22.7 MGCP
Use the MGCP screen to view and configure settings for the MGCP call agent(s) for the
profile.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and MGCP.
Figure 318 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: MGCP
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 175 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: MGCP
370
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
CallAgent1 .. 2
This field displays the host name or the IP address of the MSCP call agent.
CallAgentPort1 .. 2
This field displays the destination port to use to connect to the MSCP call
agent.
RetranIntervalTimer
This field displays the time interval (in milliseconds) the device is to wait
before sending the message again.
MaxRetranCount
This field displays the maximum number of times the device is to resend a
message.
RegisterMode
This field displays the registration mode.
LocalPort
This field displays the listening port number for incoming call control
signalling.
Domain
This field displays the name of the domain to which the device belongs.
User
This field displays the user name used to access the call agent.
DSCPMark
This field displays the DiffServ Code Point the device adds to outgoing
MGCP signalling packets.
VLANIDMark
This field displays the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID the device adds to outgoing
MGCP signalling packets.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Voice Service
Table 175 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: MGCP (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
EthernetPriorityMark
This field displays the IEEE 802.p priority level the device adds to outgoing
MGCP signalling packets.
AllowPiggybackEvents
This field displays whether piggy back event is allowed to the MGCP call
agent.
SendRSIPImmediately
This field displays whether the device is to send RSIP immediately after
restart.
22.8 H323
Use the H323 screen to view and configure H.323 call signal settings for the profile.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and H323.
Figure 319 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: H323
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 176 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: H.323
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Gatekeeper
This field displays the host name of the IP address of the H.323 Gatekeeper.
GatekeeperPort
This field displays the destination port number to use to connect to the H.323
Gatekeeper.
GatekeeperID
This field displays the ID number of the H.323 Gatekeeper.
TimeToLive
This field displays the time to live (TTL) in milliseconds when registering to an
H.323 Gatekeeper.
H235Authentication
This field displays whether H.235 security is enabled.
AuthPassword
This field displays the password for use with H.235 security.
SendersID
This field displays the device ID for use with H.235 security.
DSCPMark
This field displays the DiffServ Code Point the device adds to outgoing H.323
signalling packets.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
371
Chapter 22 Voice Service
Table 176 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: H.323 (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
VLANIDMark
This field displays the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID the device adds to outgoing
H.323 signalling packets.
EthernetPriorityMark
This field displays the IEEE 802.p priority level the device adds to outgoing
H.323 signalling packets.
22.9 Voice Profile RTP Setup
Use the RTP screen to configure RTP (Real Time Protocol) settings for sending voice traffic
on the device.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and RTP to display the configuration screen.
Figure 320 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: RTP
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 177 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: RTP
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
LocalPortMin
This field displays the start of the local port range for incoming voice traffic.
LocalPortMax
This field displays the end of the local port range for incoming voice traffic.
DSCPMark
This field displays the DiffServ code number for the outgoing voice traffic.
VLANIDMark
This field displays the VLAN ID to use for the outgoing voice traffic.
EnthernetPriorityMark
This field displays the IEEE 802.1D priority level to use for the outgoing voice
traffic.
TelephoneEventPaylo
adType
This field displays the traffic type for the RTF telephone event.
22.9.1 Voice Profile RTCP Setup
Use the RTCP screen to configure RTCP (Real-time Transport Control Protocol) settings for
sending voice traffic on the device.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
372
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Voice Service
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and RTP.
4 Click RTCP to display the configuration screen.
Figure 321 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: RTP: RTCP
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 178 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: RTP: RTCP
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays whether RTCP is enabled or disabled.
TxRepeatInterval
This field displays the repeat transmission interval (in milliseconds).
LocalCName
This field displays the local Cname (canonical name).
22.9.2 Voice Profile SRTP Setup
Use the SRTP screen to configure SRTP (Secure Real-time Transport Protocol) settings for
sending voice traffic on the device.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and RTP.
4 Click SRTP to display the configuration screen.
Figure 322 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: RTP: SRTP
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 179 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: RTP: SRTP
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays whether SRTP is enabled or disabled.
KeyingMethods
This field displays the keying methods the device can use.
EncryptionKeySizes
This field displays the encryption key sizes the device can use.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
373
Chapter 22 Voice Service
22.9.3 Voice Profile RTP Redundancy Setup
Use the Redundancy screen to configure RTP payload redundancy.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and RTP.
4 Click Redundancy to display the configuration screen.
Figure 323 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: RTP: Redundancy
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 180 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: RTP: Redundancy
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays whether RTP payload redundancy is enabled or disabled.
PayloadType
This field displays the RTP payload type.
BlockPayloadType
This field displays the block payload type of the RTP redundancy packet.
FaxAndModemRedun
dancy
This field displays the redundancy number for fax data passthrough.
ModemRedundancy
This field displays the redundancy number for modem data passthrough.
DTMFRedundancy
This field displays the redundancy number for DTMF transmission.
VoiceRedundancy
This field displays the redundancy number for voice transmission.
MaxSessionsUsingRe
dundancy
This field displays the maximum number of sessions with RTP redundancy for
this voice profile.
22.10 Voice Profile Numbering Plan
Use the NumberingPlan screen to configure the numbering plan for this voice profile.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and NumberingPlan to display the configuration screen.
374
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Voice Service
Figure 324 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: NumberingPlan
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 181 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: NumberingPlan
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
MinimumNumberOfDi
gits
This field displays the minimum number of digits to collect before initiating an
out-going request (such as a SIP INVITE).
MaximumNumberOfDi This field displays the maximum number of digits to collect before initiating an
gits
out-going request (such as a SIP INVITE). Additional numbers will be ignored.
InterDigitTimerStd
This field displays the maximum time allowed between dialing of numbers.
The timer resets with each number dialed. When the timer expires, this
indicates the dialing is complete.
InterDigitTimerOpen
This field displays the maximum time allowed between dialing of numbers
defined in a prefix based has been reached.
InvalidNumberTone
This field displays the name of the tone a user hears when an invalid number
is dialed.
PrefixInfoMaxEntries
This field displays the maximum number of prefix objects allowed.
PrefixInfoNumberOfE
ntries
This field displays the number of PrefixInfo objects.
22.10.1 Voice Profile Prefix Information
Use the PrefixInfo screen to view the list of prefix information entries for the voice profile.
Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and NumberingPlan.
4 Click PrefixInfo to display the screen.
Figure 325 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: NumberingPlan: PrefixInfo
Vantage Access User’s Guide
375
Chapter 22 Voice Service
22.10.2 Voice Profile Prefix Information Setup
Use the detailed PrefixInfo screen to view the list of prefix information entries for the voice
profile.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and NumberingPlan.
4 Click PrefixInfo and a number to display the screen.
Figure 326 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: PrefixInfo: Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 182 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: PrefixInfo: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
PrefixRange
This field displays the range of prefixes
PrefixMinNumberOfDi
gits
This field displays the minimum digits allowed for the prefix range. Once the
inter-digit timer and the minimum input digit is reached, an out-going request
is initiated.
PrefixMaxNumberOfD
igits
This field displays the maximum digits allowed for the prefix range. Once the
inter-digit timer and the maximum input digit is reached, an out-going request
is initiated.
NumberOfDigitsToRe
move
This field displays the number of digits to remove from the position specified in
the internal digit buffer.
PosOfDigitsToRemov
e
This field displays the position of the digits in the internal buffer to remove.
DialTone
This field displays the name of the dial tone to display when a user dials the
same prefix number as specified.
FacilityAction
This field displays the name of the facility action the device performs.
FacilityActionArgumen This field displays the arguments used by the facility action above.
t
22.11 Voice Profile Tone Setup
Use the Tone screen to view and configure the tones and announcements generated by the
device.
376
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Voice Service
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and Tone to display the screen.
Figure 327 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Tone
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 183 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Tone
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
EventNumberOfEntrie
s
This field displays the number of entries in the tone event table.
DescriptionNumberOf
Entries
This field displays the number of entries in the tone description table.
PatternNumberOfEntri This field displays the number of entries in the tone pattern table.
es
22.11.1 Voice Profile Tone Event
Use the Event screen to view a list of tone events. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and Tone.
4 Click Event to display the screen.
Figure 328 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Tone: Event
22.11.2 Voice Profile Tone Event Setup
Use the detailed Event screen to configure tone event settings.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
377
Chapter 22 Voice Service
3 Click a number and Tone.
4 Click Event and a number to display the screen.
Figure 329 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Tone: Event: Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 184 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Tone: Event: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Function
This field displays the name of the event to which the tone is applied.
ToneID
This field displays the index number of the tone (in the description table) to
play for this event.
22.11.3 Voice Profile Tone Description
Use the Description screen to view a list of tone descriptions. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page
132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and Tone.
4 Click Description to display the screen.
Figure 330 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Tone: Description
22.11.4 Voice Profile Tone Description Setup
Use the detailed Description screen to configure tone event descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and Tone.
4 Click Description and a number to display the screen.
378
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Voice Service
Figure 331 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Tone: Description: Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 185 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Tone: Description: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
EntryID
This field displays the index number.
ToneEnable
This field displays whether the tone is activated or not.
ToneName
This field displays the name for this tone.
TonePattern
This field displays the index number in the pattern table that starts the tone
pattern.
ToneFile
This field displays the name of the tone file downloaded to the device.
ToneRepetitions
This field displays the number of times data in the tone file is repeated.
ToneText
This field displays the text a user sees on the screen when the tone is played.
22.11.5 Voice Profile Tone Pattern
Use the Pattern screen to view a list of tone patterns. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and Tone.
4 Click Pattern to display the screen.
Figure 332 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Tone: Pattern
22.11.6 Voice Profile Tone Pattern Setup
Use the detailed Pattern screen to configure tone event settings.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
379
Chapter 22 Voice Service
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and Tone.
4 Click Pattern and a number to display the screen.
Figure 333 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Tone: Pattern: Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 186 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Tone: Pattern: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
EntryID
This field displays the index number of a single phase in the tone pattern.
ToneOn
This field displays whether or not the tone pattern is enabled during a phase.
Frequency1..4
This field displays the frequency of the tone component in hertz.
Power1..4
This field displays the tone power level in units of 0.1dBm0.
ModulationFrequency
This field displays the modulation frequency in hertz.
ModulationPower
This field displays the modulation power in units of 0.1dBm0.
Duration
This field displays the time (in milliseconds) for this phase of the tone pattern.
NextEntryID
This field displays the index number of the next phase of the tone pattern after
the duration of the current phase is completed.
22.12 Voice Profile Button Map
Use the ButtonMap screen to view the number of button objects.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and ButtonMap to display the screen.
380
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Voice Service
Figure 334 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: ButtonMap
22.12.1 Voice Profile Button
Use the Button screen to view a list of button objects. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and ButtonMap.
4 Click Button to display the screen.
Figure 335 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: ButtonMap: Button
22.12.2 Voice Profile Button Setup
Use the detailed Button screen to configure tone event settings.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and ButtonMap.
4 Click Button and a number to display the screen.
Figure 336 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: ButtonMap: Button: Details
Vantage Access User’s Guide
381
Chapter 22 Voice Service
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 187 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: ButtonMap: Button: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
ButtonName
This field displays the name of the button.
FacilityAction
This field displays the name of the optional facility action.
FacilityActionArgumen This field displays the argument for the optional facility action.
t
QuickDialNumber
This field displays the quick dial number.
ButtonMessage
This field displays the text a user sees on the screen when the button is
pressed.
UserAccess
This field displays whether the user is allowed to change the button settings.
22.13 Voice Profile FaxT38
Use the FaxT38 screen to configure fax T38 relay settings.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and FaxT38 to display the screen.
Figure 337 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: FaxT38
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 188 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: FaxT38
382
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This field displays whether T38 is enabled or not.
BitRate
This field displays the maximum bit rate for fax transmission.
HighSpeedPacketRat
e
This field displays the rate at which high speed data will be sent.
HighSpeedRedundan
cy
This field displays the packet-level redundancy for high speed transmission.
LowSpeedRedundanc
y
This field displays the packet-level redundancy for low speed transmission.
TCFMethod
This field displays the method used to send data through the network.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Voice Service
22.14 Voice Profile Line
Use the Line screen to view the list of voice lines associated to a voice profile. Refer to
Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and Line to display the screen.
Figure 338 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line
22.14.1 Voice Profile Line Setup
Use the Line screen to view and configure the voice line associated to a voice profile.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and Line
4 Click a number to display the screen.
Figure 339 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 189 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Setup
PARAMETER
NAME
DESCRIPTION
Enable
This field displays whether the line is activated or not.
DirectoryNumb
er
This field displays the directory number associated with this line.
Status
This field displays the status of the line.
CallState
This field displays the call status of the line.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
383
Chapter 22 Voice Service
Table 189 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Setup (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
DESCRIPTION
PhyReferenceLi This field displays the list of physical references associated with this line.
st
RingMuteStatus This field displays whether or not the ringing has been muted locally.
RingVolumeStat This field displays the percentage volume of the current ring tone.
us
22.14.2 Voice Profile Line SIP Setup
Use the SIP screen for a line to view and configure parameters associated to a SIP line.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and Line
4 Click a number and SIP to display the screen.
Figure 340 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: SIP
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 190 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: SIP
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
AuthUserName
This field displays the account user name to connect to the SIP server.
AuthPassword
This field displays the password associated with the user name above for
authentication.
URI
This field displays the URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) to identify this SIP
connection.
SIPEventSubsc
ribeNumberOfE
lements
This field displays the number of SIP event subscription.
22.14.3 Line SIP Event Subscription
Use the EventSubscribe screen to view the list of SIP event subscriptions for a voice line.
Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
384
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Voice Service
3 Click a number and Line.
4 Click a number and SIP.
5 Click EventSubscribe to display the screen.
Figure 341 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: SIP Event Subscription
22.14.4 Line SIP Event Subscription Details
Use the detailed EventSubscribe screen to view the list of SIP event subscriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and Line.
4 Click a number and SIP.
5 Click EventSubscribe and a number to display the screen.
Figure 342 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: SIP: EventSubscribe: Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 191 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: SIP: EventSubscribe: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Event
This field displays the event name.
AuthUserName
This field displays the account user name to connect to the SIP server.
AuthPassword
This field displays the password associated with the user name above for
authentication.
22.14.5 Voice Profile Line MGCP
Use the MGCP screen to view the name of the line using MGCP (Media Gateway Control
Protocol) signaling. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and Line.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
385
Chapter 22 Voice Service
4 Click a number and MGCP to display the screen.
Figure 343 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: MGCP
22.14.6 Voice Profile Line H323
Use the H323 screen to view the H323 ID assigned to the line. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page
132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and Line.
4 Click a number and H323 to display the screen.
Figure 344 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: H323
22.14.7 Line Ringer Setup
Use the Ringer screen to view and configure the ring sequence the device generates.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and Line.
4 Click a number and Ringer to display the screen.
Figure 345 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Ringer
386
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Voice Service
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 192 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Ringer
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
EventNumberOfEntri
es
This field displays the number of entries in the ringer event table.
DescriptionNumberOf This field displays the number of entries in the ringer description table.
Entries
PatternNumberOfEnt
ries
This field displays the number of entries in the ringer pattern table.
22.14.8 Voice Profile Ringer Event
Use the Event screen to view a list of ringer events. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and Line.
4 Click a number and Ringer.
5 Click Event to display the screen.
Figure 346 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Ringer: Event
22.14.9 Voice Profile Ringer Event Setup
Use the detailed Event screen to configure ringer event settings.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and Line.
4 Click a number and Ringer.
5 Click Event and a number to display the screen.
Figure 347 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Ringer: Event: Details
Vantage Access User’s Guide
387
Chapter 22 Voice Service
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 193 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Ringer: Event: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Function
This field displays the name of the event to which the ringer is applied.
RingID
This field displays the index number of the ringer (in the description table) to
play for this event.
22.14.10 Voice Profile Ringer Description
Use the Description screen to view a list of ringer descriptions. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on
page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and Line.
4 Click a number and Ringer.
5 Click Description to display the screen.
Figure 348 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Ringer: Description
22.14.11 Voice Profile Ringer Description Setup
Use the detailed Description screen to configure ringer description event settings.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and Line.
4 Click a number and Ringer.
5 Click Description and a number to display the screen.
Figure 349 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Ringer: Description: Details
388
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Voice Service
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 194 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Ringer: Description: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
EntryID
This field displays the index number.
RingEnable
This field displays whether the entry is activated or not.
RingName
This field displays the name for this entry.
RingPattern
This field displays the index number in the pattern table that starts the ring
pattern.
RingFile
This field displays the name of the ring file downloaded to the device.
22.14.12 Voice Profile Ringer Pattern
Use the Pattern screen to view a list of ring patterns. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and Line.
4 Click a number and Ringer.
5 Click Pattern to display the screen.
Figure 350 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Ringer: Pattern
22.14.13 Voice Profile Ringer Pattern Setup
Use the detailed Pattern screen to configure ringer pattern settings.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and Line.
4 Click a number and Ringer.
5 Click Pattern and a number to display the screen.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
389
Chapter 22 Voice Service
Figure 351 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Ringer: Pattern: Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 195 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Ringer: Pattern: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
EntryID
This field displays the index number of a single phase in the ring pattern.
RingerOn
This field displays whether or not the ring pattern is enabled during a phase.
Duration
This field displays the time (in milliseconds) for this phase of the ring pattern.
NextEntryID
This field displays the index number of the next phase of the ring pattern after
the duration of the current phase is completed.
22.14.14 Voice Profile Line Call Features
Use the CallingFeatures screen to configure the call feature settings for a VoIP profile.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and Line.
4 Click a number and CallingFeatures to display the screen.
390
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Voice Service
Figure 352 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: CallFeatures
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 196 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: CallingFeatures
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
CallerIDEnable
This field displays whether the device is to send the caller ID information on
outgoing calls.
CallerIDNameEnable
This field displays whether the device is to send the caller name information
on outgoing calls.
CallerIDName
This field displays the name to identify the caller on the device.
CallWaitingEnable
This field displays whether the call waiting feature is enabled (1) on the
device.
CallWaitingStatus
This field displays the status (Disabled, Idle, SecondaryRinging,
SecondaryConnecting or SecondaryConnected) of the call waiting feature.
MaxSessions
This field displays the maximum number of simultaneous conference calls
allowed on the device.
ConferenceCallingStat This field displays the status of the managed conference calls on the device.
us
ConferenceCallingSes This field indicates the number of active conference calls on the device.
sionCount
This field displays 0 to indicate that the device has no call sessions.
1 means a single call is in progress through the device.
A number larger than 1 indicates multiple calls in progress through the device.
CallForwardUnconditi
onalEnable
This field displays whether the call forwarding feature is enabled on the
device.
CallForwardUnconditi
onalNumber
This field displays the number to which all incoming calls are forwarded on the
device when the call forwarding feature is enabled.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
391
Chapter 22 Voice Service
Table 196 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: CallingFeatures (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
CallForwardOnBusyE
nable
This field displays whether the call forwarding feature is enabled on the device
when the line is busy.
CallForwardOnBusyN
umber
This field displays the number to which all incoming calls are forwarded on the
device when CallForwardonBusyEnable is enabled and the line is busy.
CallForwardOnNoAns
werEnable
This field displays whether the call forwarding feature is enabled on the device
when the line is busy.
CallForwardOnNoAns
werNumber
This field displays the number to which all incoming calls are forwarded on the
device when CallForwardOnNoAnswerEnable is enabled and the line is busy.
CallForwardOnNoAns
werRingCount
This field displays the number of rings before the line is considered busy and
the call is forwarded.
CallTransferEnable
This field displays whether the call transfer feature is enabled on the device.
MWIEnable
This field displays whether the Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) feature is
enabled on the device.
An MWI notifies the user if a voice message or other types of message is
waiting.
MessageWaiting
This field indicates whether a message is currently waiting in line.
AnonymousCallBlock
Enable
This field displays whether anonymous call blocking is enabled on the device.
AnonymousCalEnable This field displays whether anonymous call is allowed on the device.
DoNotDisturbEnable
This field displays whether the Do-Not-Disturb feature is enabled on the
device.
CallReturnEnable
This field displays whether the call return feature is enabled on the device.
RepeatDialEnable
This field displays whether the re-dial feature is enabled on the device.
22.14.15 Voice Profile Line Voice Processing
Use the VoiceProcessing screen to configure voice signal processing settings for the profile.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and Line.
4 Click a number and VoiceProcessing to display the screen.
Figure 353 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: VoiceProcessing
392
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Voice Service
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 197 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: VoiceProcessing
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
TransmitGain
This field displays the gain (in 0.1dB) to apply to the transmitted voice signal
before encoding.
ReceiveGain
This field displays the gain (in 0.1dB) to apply to the received voice signal
before decoding.
EchoCancellationEna
ble
This field displays whether echo cancellation is enabled for this line.
EchoCancellationInUs
e
This field displays whether echo cancellation is currently in use for this line.
EchoCancellationTail
This field displays the length (in milliseconds) of the echo cancellation for this
line.
22.14.16 Line Codec Information
You can view the codec settings of a line in the Codec screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and Line.
4 Click a number and Codec to display the screen.
Figure 354 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Codec
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 198 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Codec
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
TransmitCodec
This field displays the codec the device uses to send voice traffic.
ReceiveCodec
This field displays the codec the device uses to receive voice traffic.
TransmitBitRate
This field displays the transmission rate (in bits per second).
ReceiveBitRate
This field displays the receiving rate (in bits per second).
TransmitSilenceSuppr
ession
This field indicates whether silence suppression is enabled for outgoing voice
traffic.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
393
Chapter 22 Voice Service
Table 198 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Codec (continued)
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
ReceiveSilenceSuppr
ession
This field indicates whether silence suppression is enabled for incoming voice
traffic.
TransmitPacketization
Period
This field displays the packetization in milliseconds for outgoing voice traffic.
22.14.17 Codec List
You can view the status of the received and transmitted codec and the codec list entries in the
Codec screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and Line.
4 Click a number and Codec.
5 Click List to display the screen.
Figure 355 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Codec: List
22.14.18 Codec List Details
Use the detailed List screen to view and change an entry in the codec list.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and Line.
4 Click a number and Codec.
5 Click List and a number to display the screen.
Figure 356 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Codec: List: Details
394
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Voice Service
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 199 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Codec: List: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
EntryID
This field displays the index number of the entry.
Codec
This field displays the name of the codec for this entry.
BitRate
This field displays the data rate in bits per second.
PacketizationPeriod
This field displays the packetization period(s) (in milliseconds). Multiple
options are separated by commas (,).
SilenceSuppression
This field indicates whether silence suppression is enabled.
Enable
This field displays whether this codec entry is activated or not.
Priority
Specify the priority of the codec entry.
22.14.19 Line Session
You can view a list of sessions associated with a line in the Session screen. Refer to Section
11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and Line.
4 Click a number and Session to display the screen.
Figure 357 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Session
22.14.20 Line Session Details
You can view detailed session information of a line in the detailed Session screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and Line.
4 Click a number and Session.
5 Click a number to display the screen.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
395
Chapter 22 Voice Service
Figure 358 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Session: Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 200 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Session: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
SessionStartTime
This field displays the time the session first started.
SessionDuration
This field displays the time (in seconds) the current session has been up.
FarEndIPAddress
This field displays the IP address of the peer VoIP device.
FarEndUDPPort
This field displays the UDP port number of the peer VoIP device.
LocalUDPPort
This field displays the UDP port number on the device.
22.14.21 Line Statistics
You can view the codec line statistics in the Stats screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and VoiceProfile.
3 Click a number and Line.
4 Click a number and Stats to display the screen.
396
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Voice Service
Figure 359 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Stats
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 201 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Stats
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
ResetStatistics
Select Enable and click Apply to reset the counters.
Select Disable to keep the counters.
PacketsSent
This field displays the number of packets sent for this line.
PacketsReceived
This field displays the number of packets received for this line.
BytesSent
This field displays the number of bytes sent for this line.
BytesReceived
This field displays the number of bytes received for this line.
PacketsLost
This field displays the number packets lost through transmission.
Overruns
This field displays the number of times the received jitter buffer has overrun
for this line.
Underruns
This field displays the number of times the received jitter buffer has underrun
for this line.
IncomingCallsReceive This field displays the number of incoming calls received.
d
IncomingCallsAnswer
ed
This field displays the number of incoming calls answered.
IncomingCallsConnec
ted
This field displays the number of incoming calls that have completed the
signaling setup process.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
397
Chapter 22 Voice Service
Table 201 TR-104: VoiceService: VoiceProfile: Line: Stats (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IncomingCallsFailed
This field displays the number of incoming calls that failed to complete the
signaling setup process.
OutgoingCallsAttempt
ed
This field displays the number of outgoing calls tried.
OutgoingCallsAnswer
ed
This field displays the number of outgoing calls answered.
OutgoingCallsConnec
ted
This field displays the number of outgoing calls that have completed the
signaling setup process.
OutgoingCallsFailed
This field displays the number of outgoing calls that failed to complete the
signaling setup process.
CallsDropped
This field displays the number of calls dropped.
TotalCallTime
This field displays the call duration (in seconds).
ServerDownTime
This field displays the number of seconds the device is to wait before
declaring the SIP server is down.
ReceivePacketLossR
ate
This field displays the percentage rate of receive packet lost currently on the
device.
FarEndPacketLossRa
te
This field displays the current percentage rate of packet lost as reported from
the far-end device.
ReceiveInterarrivalJitt
er
This field displays the current interarrival jitter in milliseconds.
FarEndInterarrivalJitte
r
This field displays the current interarrival jitter in milliseconds as reported by
the far-end device.
RoundTripDelay
This field displays the current round trip delay in milliseconds.
AverageReceiveIntera This field displays the interarrival jitter in milliseconds since the beginning of
rrivalJitter
the current call.
AverageFarEndInterar This field displays the interarrival jitter in milliseconds since the beginning of
rivalJitter
the current call as reported by the far-end device.
AverageRoundTripDel
ay
This field displays the current round trip delay in milliseconds since the
beginning of the current call.
22.15 PhyInterface
Use the PhyInterface screen to view a list of interfaces associated with a physical FXS
(Foreign eXchange Station) port. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field
descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService. Click a number and PhyInterface to display the screen.
Figure 360 TR-104: VoiceService: PhyInterface
398
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Voice Service
22.15.1 PhyInterface Details
You can view detailed information (such as the port number and the interface ID) about a
physical interface in the detailed PhyInterface screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and PhyInterface.
3 Click a number to display the screen.
Figure 361 TR-104: VoiceService: PhyInterface: Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 202 TR-104: VoiceService: PhyInterface: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
PhyPort
This field displays the physical port number on the device.
InterfaceID
This field displays the unique ID for the physical port.
Description
This field displays a description for the physical port.
22.15.2 PhyInterface Tests
You can view the voice line test results in the Tests screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > VoiceService.
2 Click a number and PhyInterface.
3 Click a number and Tests to display the screen.
Figure 362 TR-104: VoiceService: PhyInterface: Tests
Vantage Access User’s Guide
399
Chapter 22 Voice Service
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 203 TR-104: VoiceService: PhyInterface: Tests
400
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
TestState
This field displays the status of the line test.
TestSelector
This field displays the name of the test to perform on the line.
PhoneConnectivity
This field displays whether at least one phone line associated to this physical
interface is connected.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Voice Service
Vantage Access User’s Guide
401
Chapter 22 Voice Service
402
Vantage Access User’s Guide
P ART VII
STB 1.0 (TR-135)
This part contains the following chapters.
• STB Service (405)
403
404
CHAPTER
23
STB Service
This chapter describes the screens you use to configure and view STB settings.
23.1 Services
Display the Services screen to view the number of STB service entries on the device. Refer to
Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered STB device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services to display the screen.
Figure 363 TR-135: Services
23.1.1 STB Service Details
Display the detailed STBService screen to enable or disable an STBService instance. Refer to
Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService and click an index number to display the screen.
Figure 364 TR-135: STBService
23.2 STB Capabilities
You can view the STB functions available on the device in the Capabilities screen.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService. Click a number and Capabilities to display the screen.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
405
Chapter 23 STB Service
Figure 365 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 204 TR-135: VoiceService: Capabilities
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
MaxActiveAVStreams
This displays the maximum number of AV streams.
MaxActiveAVPlayers
This displays the maximum number of AV players.
23.2.1 DVBT Setup
You can view and configure DVBT (Digital Video Broadcasting - Terrestrial) settings in the
DVBT screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Capabilities.
3 Click FrontEnd > DVBT to display the screen.
Figure 366 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: DVBT
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 205 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: DVBT
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
MaxActiveDVBTStrea
ms
This displays the maximum number of DVBT (Digital Video Broadcasting Terrestrial) streams.
MaxLogicalChannels
This displays the maximum number of logical channels.
23.2.2 IP Setup
You can view and configure data transmission settings for AV streaming in the IP screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
406
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
2 Click a number and Capabilities.
3 Click FrontEnd > IP to display the screen.
Figure 367 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: IP
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 206 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: IP
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
MaxActiveIPStreams
Maximum number of simultaneous active AV streams supported by the IP
front end.
MaxActiveInboundIPS
treams
Maximum number of simultaneous active inbound AV streams supported by
the IP front end.
MaxActiveOutboundIP Maximum number of simultaneous active outbound AV streams supported by
Streams
the IP front end.
StreamingControlProt
ocols
This displays the streaming control protocols supported.
StreamingTransportPr
otocols
This displays the network protocols supported for AV streaming.
StreamingTransportC
ontrolProtocols
This displays the transport control protocols supported for AV streaming in
combination with RTP.
DownloadTransportPr
otocols
This displays the network protocols supported for AV download.
MultiplexTypes
This displays the AV multiplex types supported by the IP front end.
MaxDejitteringBufferSi This displays the maximum de-jittering buffer size, in bytes,
ze
23.2.3 PVR Setup
You can view and configure PVR (Personal Video Recorder) settings in the PVR screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Capabilities.
3 Click PVR to display the screen.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
407
Chapter 23 STB Service
Figure 368 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: PVR
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 207 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: PVR
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
MaxIOStreams
This displays the maximum number of AV streams that the PVR can record
and play back simultaneously.
MaxRecordingStream
s
This displays the maximum number of AV streams that the PVR can record
simultaneously.
MaxPlaybackStreams
This displays the maximum number of AV streams that the PVR can play back
simultaneously.
MaxTimeDelay
This displays the maximum time delay, in seconds, that the PVR time-shift
mode can support.
23.2.4 Audio Decoder Setup
You can view and configure audio decoder settings in the Audio Decoder screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Capabilities.
3 Click Audio Decoder to display the screen.
Figure 369 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Audio Decoder
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 208 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Audio Decoder
408
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
AudioStandards
This displays the audio standards supported by the STB.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
23.2.5 Video Decoder Setup
You can view and configure video decoder settings in the Video Decoder screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Capabilities.
3 Click Video Decoder to display the screen.
Figure 370 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Video Decoder
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 209 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Video Decoder
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
VideoStandards
This displays the video standards supported by the STB.
23.2.6 MPEG2 Part 2 Setup
You can view and configure MPEG2 Part 2 settings in the MPEG2Part2 screen. This screen
displays supported MPEG2 profiles. It also displays the set of audio standards supported when
MPEG2 Part 2 is used.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Capabilities.
3 Click Video Decoder > MPEG2Part2 to display the screen.
Figure 371 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG2Part2
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 210 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG2Part2
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
AudioStandards
This displays the MPEG2 Part 2 audio standards supported by the STB.
ProfileLevelNumberOf
Entries
This displays the number of profile levels.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
409
Chapter 23 STB Service
23.2.7 MPEG2 Part 2 Profile Levels
You can view and configure MPEG2 Part 2 profile levels in the ProfileLevel screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Capabilities.
3 Click Video Decoder > MPEG2Part2 > ProfileLevel to display the screen.
Figure 372 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG2Part2 ProfileLevel
23.2.8 MPEG2 Part 2 Profile Level Settings
You can view and configure each MPEG2 Part 2 profile and level. Each is a combination of
profile and level.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Capabilities.
3 Click Video Decoder > MPEG2Part2 > ProfileLevel. Click a number to display the
screen.
Figure 373 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG2Part2 ProfileLevel Settings
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 211 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG2Part2 ProfileLevel Settings
410
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Profile
This displays the MPEG2 part 2 profile.
Level
This displays the MPEG2 part 2 level.
MaximumDecodingCa
pability
This displays the maximum decoding capability for this video standard in
kilobits per second.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
23.2.9 MPEG4 Part 2 Setup
You can view and configure MPEG4 Part 2 settings in the MPEG2Part2 screen. This screen
displays the supported MPEG4 profiles. It also displays the set of audio standards supported
when MPEG4 Part 2 is used.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Capabilities.
3 Click Video Decoder > MPEG4Part2 to display the screen.
Figure 374 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG4Part2
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 212 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG4Part2
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
AudioStandards
This displays the MPEG4 Part 2 audio standards supported by the STB.
ProfileLevelNumberOf
Entries
This displays the number of profile levels.
23.2.10 MPEG4 Part 2 Profile Levels
You can view and configure MPEG4 Part 2 Profile Levels in the ProfileLevel screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Capabilities.
3 Click Video Decoder > MPEG4Part2 > ProfileLevel to display the screen.
Figure 375 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG4Part2 ProfileLevel
23.2.11 MPEG4 Part 2 Profile Level Settings
You can view and configure each MPEG4 Part 2 profile and level. Each is a combination of
profile and level.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
411
Chapter 23 STB Service
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Capabilities.
3 Click Video Decoder > MPEG4Part2 > ProfileLevel. Click a number to display the
screen.
Figure 376 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG4Part2 ProfileLevel Settings
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 213 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG4Part2 ProfileLevel Settings
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Profile
This displays the MPEG4 part 2 profile.
Level
This displays the MPEG4 part 2 level.
MaximumDecodingCa
pability
This displays the maximum decoding capability for this video standard in
kilobits per second.
23.2.12 MPEG4 Part 10 Setup
You can view and configure MPEG4 Part 10 settings in the MPEG2Part2 screen. This screen
displays the set of supported MPEG4 profiles. It also displays the set of audio standards
supported when MPEG4 Part 10 is used.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Capabilities.
3 Click Video Decoder > MPEG4Part10 to display the screen.
Figure 377 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG4Part10
412
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 214 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG4Part10
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
AudioStandards
This displays the MPEG4 Part 10 audio standards supported by the STB.
ProfileLevelNumberOf
Entries
This displays the number of profile levels.
23.2.13 MPEG4 Part 10 Profile Levels
You can view and configure MPEG4 Part 10 Profile Levels in the ProfileLevel screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Capabilities.
3 Click Video Decoder > MPEG4Part10 > ProfileLevel to display the screen.
Figure 378 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG4Part10 ProfileLevel
23.2.14 MPEG4 Part 10 Profile Level Settings
You can view and configure each MPEG4 Part 10 profile and level. Each is a combination of
profile and level.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Capabilities.
3 Click Video Decoder > MPEG4Part10 > ProfileLevel. Click a number to display the
screen.
Figure 379 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG4Part10 ProfileLevel Settings
Vantage Access User’s Guide
413
Chapter 23 STB Service
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 215 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: MPEG4Part10 ProfileLevel Settings
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Profile
This displays the MPEG4 part 10 profile.
Level
This displays the MPEG4 part 10 level.
MaximumDecodingCa
pability
This displays the maximum decoding capability for this video standard in
kilobits per second.
23.2.15 SMPTEVC1 Setup
You can view and configure SMPTE (Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers)
VC-1settings in the SMPTEVC1 screen. This screen displays the set of supported SMPTE
VC-1 profiles. It also displays the set of audio standards supported when SMPTE VC-1 is
used.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Capabilities.
3 Click Video Decoder > SMPTEVC1 to display the screen.
Figure 380 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: SMPTE VC-1
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 216 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: SMPTE VC-1
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
AudioStandards
This displays the SMPTE VC-1 audio standards supported by the STB.
ProfileLevelNumberOf
Entries
This displays the number of profile levels.
23.2.16 SMPTE VC-1 Profile Levels
You can view and configure SMPTE VC-1 Profile Levels in the ProfileLevel screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Capabilities.
3 Click Video Decoder > SMPTEVC1 > ProfileLevel to display the screen.
414
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
Figure 381 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: SMPTE VC-1 ProfileLevel
23.2.17 SMPTE VC-1 Profile Level Settings
You can view and configure each SMPTE VC-1 profile and level. Each is a combination of
profile and level.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Capabilities.
3 Click Video Decoder > SMPTE VC-1 > ProfileLevel. Click a number to display the
screen.
Figure 382 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: SMPTE VC-1 ProfileLevel Settings
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 217 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: SMPTE VC-1 ProfileLevel Settings
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Profile
This displays the SMPTE VC-1 profile.
Level
This displays the SMPTE VC-1 level.
MaximumDecodingCa
pability
This displays the maximum decoding capability for this video standard in
kilobits per second.
23.2.18 Audio Output Setup
You can view and configure audio output capabilities in the Audio Output screen. These may
include output formats, output connectors, and copy protection.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Capabilities.
3 Click Audio Output to display the screen.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
415
Chapter 23 STB Service
Figure 383 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Audio Output
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 218 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Audio Output
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
AudioFormats
This displays the audio output formats supported by the STB.
23.2.19 Video Output Setup
You can view and configure video output capabilities in the Video Output screen. These may
include output formats, output connectors, and copy protection.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Capabilities.
3 Click Video Output to display the screen.
Figure 384 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Video Output
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 219 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Video Output
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
CompositeVideoStand This displays analog composite video standards supported for video output.
ards
This applies to CVBS video output only.
416
VideoFormats
This displays the video output formats supported by the STB.
Macrovision
This displays the supported version of the Macrovision digital content
protection standard.
HDCP
This displays the supported version of the HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital
Content Protection) standard.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
23.2.20 CA Setup
You can view and configure conditional access settings in the CA screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Capabilities.
3 Click CA to display the screen.
Figure 385 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Conditional Access
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 220 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Conditional Access
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
CASystems
This displays the names of supported conditional access systems.
23.2.21 DRM Setup
You can view and configure digital rights management settings in the DRM screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Capabilities.
3 Click DRM to display the screen.
Figure 386 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Digital Rights Management
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 221 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Digital Rights Management
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
DRMSystems
This displays the names of supported digital rights management systems.
23.2.22 Service Monitoring Setup
You can view and configure service monitoring settings in the ServiceMonitoring screen.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
417
Chapter 23 STB Service
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Capabilities.
3 Click ServiceMonitoring to display the screen.
Figure 387 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Service Monitoring
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 222 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Service Monitoring
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
ServiceTypes
This displays the supported service types, each of which relates to an AV
stream source.
MaxActiveMainStream This displays the maximum number of AV main streams for which the STB
s
can collect statistics simultaneously.
MinSampleInterval
This displays the minimum sample interval in seconds that the
STB must be able to support.
MaxReportSamples
This displays the maximum number of samples of each statistic that the STB
is able to store and report.
HighLevelMetricName
s
This displays the supported high-level metrics.
23.2.23 Audience Statistics Setup
You can view and configure audience statistics settings in the AudienceStats screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Capabilities.
3 Click AudienceStats to display the screen.
Figure 388 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Audience Statistics
418
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 223 TR-135: STBService: Capabilities: Audience Statistics
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
MaxAudienceStatsCh
annels
This displays the maximum number of audience statistics channels that the
STB must support.
23.3 STB Components
You can view the STB components available on the device in the Components screen.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService. Click a number and Components to display the screen.
Figure 389 TR-135: STBService: Components
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 224 TR-135: VoiceService: Components
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
FrontEndNumberOfEntries
This displays the number of FrontEnd instances.
AudioDecoderNumberOfEntrie
s
This displays the number of AudioDecoder instances.
VideoDecoderNumberOfEntrie
s
This displays the number of VideoDecoder instances.
AudioOutputNumberOfEntries
This displays the number of AudioOutput instances.
VideoOutputNumberOfEntries
This displays the number of VideoOutput instances.
SCARTNumberOfEntries
This displays the number of SCART instances.
CANumberOfEntries
This displays the number of CA instances.
DRMNumberOfEntries
This displays the number of DRM instances.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
419
Chapter 23 STB Service
23.3.1 Front End
You can view and configure front end settings.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click FrontEnd to display the screen.
Figure 390 TR-135: STBService: Components: FrontEnd
23.3.2 Front End Settings
You can view and configure front end settings for a device in the FrontEnd screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click FrontEnd and a number to display the screen.
Figure 391 TR-135: STBService: Components: Device FrontEnd
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 225 TR-135: STBService: Components: Device FrontEnd
420
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This displays whether the front end is active or inactive.
Status
This displays the status of the front end.
Name
This is the name associated with this front end.
Type
This displays the type of the front end.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
23.3.3 DVBT Modulation Settings
You can view and configure DVBT (Digital Video Broadcasting – Terrestrial) modulation
settings for a device in the Modulation screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click FrontEnd.
4 Click DVBT > Modulation to display the screen.
Figure 392 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Modulation
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 226 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Modulation
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Frequency
Indicates the current frequency in kHz.
ChannelBandwidth
Indicates the channel bandwidth in use.
Constellation
Indicates the current constellation in use.
HierarchicalInformatio
n
Hierarchical how noise-immune the High Priority Modulation is.
CodeRateHP
Indicates the current HP code rate in use.
CodeRateLP
Indicates the current LP code rate in use.
GuardInterval
Indicates the current guard interval in use.
TransmissionMode
Indicates the number of carriers in an OFDM (Orthogonal frequency-division
multiplexing) frame.
SNR
This displays the signal-to-noise ratio.
BER
This displays the bit error rate.
CBER
This displays the corrected bit error rate.
Locked
Indicates whether or not the tuner is locked to a specific frequency.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
421
Chapter 23 STB Service
23.3.4 DVBT Installation Settings
You can view and configure DVBT (Digital Video Broadcasting – Terrestrial) installation
settings for a device in the Install screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click FrontEnd.
4 Click DVBT > Install to display the screen.
Figure 393 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Installation
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 227 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Installation
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Start
This displays whether the device is scanning for services.
Status
This displays the status of the scanning process.
Progress
This displays the progress in percent of the scanning process.
StartFrequency
This displays the frequency (in kHz) at which to start the scanning process.
StopFrequency
This displays the frequency (in kHz) at which to stop the scanning process.
23.3.5 DVBT Service List Database Settings
You can view and configure DVBT service list database settings for a device in the
ServiceListDatabase screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click FrontEnd.
4 Click DVBT > ServiceListDatabase to display the screen.
422
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
Figure 394 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Service List Database
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 228 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Service List Database
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Reset
This resets the service list database. When you read the device state, this
status is always false.
TotalServices
This displays the total number of services defined in the service list database.
LogicalChannelNumb
erOfEntries
This displays the number of logical channels in the service list database.
23.3.6 DVBT Service List Database Logical Channels
You can the view DVBT service list database’s logical channels.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click FrontEnd.
4 Click DVBT > ServiceListDatabase > LogicalChannel to display the screen.
Figure 395 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Service List Logical Channels
23.3.7 DVBT Service List Database Logical Channels Settings
You can view DVBT service list database logical channel settings in the LogicalChannel
screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click FrontEnd.
4 Click DVBT > ServiceListDatabase > LogicalChannel and click a number to display
the screen.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
423
Chapter 23 STB Service
Figure 396 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Service List Channels: Entry
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 229 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Service List Channels: Entry
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
LogicalChannelNumb
er
This displays the number of logical channels.
ServiceNumberOfEntr
ies
This displays the number of services associated with this logical channel.
23.3.8 DVBT Service List Database Logical Channel Services
You can view DVBT service list’s logical channel services.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click FrontEnd.
4 Click DVBT > ServiceListDatabase > LogicalChannel and click a number.
5 Click Service to display the screen.
Figure 397 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Service List Channel: Services
23.3.9 DVBT Service List Database Logical Channel Settings Details
You can view DVBT service list database logical channel service settings for a device in the
Services screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click FrontEnd.
4 Click DVBT > ServiceListDatabase > LogicalChannel and click a number.
5 Click Service and click a number to display the screen.
424
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
Figure 398 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Service List Channel Services: Device
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 230 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Service List Channel Services: Device
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
DvbId
This displays an ID that uniquely identifies the service in the service list
database.
Frequency
This displays the transmitter frequency (in kHz) for this service.
BER
This displays the Bit Error Ratio before correction.
Preferred
When this is active, this identifies this service as the preferred service for this
logical channel.
23.3.10 DVBT Logical Channel Connections
You can view and configure DVB-T channel connections in the LogicalChannelConnect
screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click FrontEnd.
4 Click DVBT > LogicalChannelConnect to display the screen.
Figure 399 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Logical Channel Connections
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 231 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Logical Channel Connections
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
LogicalChannelNumb
er
This displays the logical channel number to which the channel’s preferred
service will be connected.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
425
Chapter 23 STB Service
23.3.11 DVBT Service Connections
You can view and configure DVB-T service connections in the ServiceConnect screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click FrontEnd.
4 Click DVBT > ServiceConnect to display the screen.
Figure 400 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Service Connections
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 232 TR-135: STBService: Components: DVBT Service Connections
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
DvbId
This displays the ID of the service to which the channel connects.
23.3.12 Front End IP Setup
You can view and configure front end data transmission settings in the IP screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click FrontEnd.
4 Click IP to display the screen.
Figure 401 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP
426
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 233 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
InboundNumberOfEnt
ries
This displays the number of inbound instances.
OutboundNumberOfE
ntries
This displays the number of outbound instances.
ActiveInbounds
This displays the number of active inbound streams.
ActiveOutbounds
This displays the number of active outbound streams.
23.3.13 Front End RTCP Setup
You can view and configure front end RTCP (RTP Control Protocol) settings in the RTCP
screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click FrontEnd.
4 Click IP > RTCP to display the screen.
Figure 402 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: RTCP
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 234 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: RTCP
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This displays whether RTCP receiver report generation is enabled.
Status
This displays the status of RTCP receiver report generation.
TxRepeatInterval
This displays the transmission repeat interval in milliseconds.
23.3.14 Front End RTP AVPF Setup
You can view and configure front end RTP AVPF settings in the RTPAVPF screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click FrontEnd.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
427
Chapter 23 STB Service
4 Click IP > RTPAVPF to display the screen.
Figure 403 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: RTPAPVF
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 235 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: RTPAPVF
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This displays whether RTP AVPF receiver report generation is enabled.
Status
This displays the status of RTP AVPF receiver report generation.
RetransmitTimeout
This displays the time (in milliseconds) the receiver waits for a retransmitted
packet before considering it lost.
MinLossPackets
This displays the minimum number of packets the receiver waits before
issuing a retransmission request.
MaxReportTime
This displays the maximum time in milliseconds the receiver waits between a
lost packet and the generation of a retransmission request.
MaxLossBurst
This displays the maximum number of consecutive lost packets for which the
receiver attempts recovery.
23.3.15 Front End IGMP Setup
You can view and configure front end IGMP settings in the IGMP screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click FrontEnd.
4 Click IP > IGMP to display the screen.
428
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
Figure 404 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: IGMP
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 236 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: IGMP
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This displays whether IGMP is enabled or disabled.
Status
This displays the status of IGMP support.
MaximumNumberOfC
oncurrentGroups
This displays the maximum number of group memberships allowed
simultaneously.
MaximumNumberOfTr
ackedGroups
This displays the maximum number of groups for which
statistics will be tracked.
LoggingEnable
This displays whether IGMP traffic logging is enabled.
DSCPMark
This displays the DiffServ code point to be used for outgoing IGMP packets.
VLANIDMark
This displays the VLAN ID to be used for outgoing IGMP packets.
EthernetPriorityMark
This displays Ethernet priority code to be used for outgoing IGMP packets.
ClientVersion
This displays the highest IGMP version supported by the IGMP Client.
ClientRobustness
This displays how vulnerable the network is to lost packets.
ClientUnsolicitedRepo
rtInterval
This displays the number of seconds between repetitions of a host’s initial
report of membership in a group.
ClientGroupNumberOf This displays the number of entries in the ClientGroup table.
Entries
ClientGroupStatsNum
berOfEntries
This displays the number of entries in the ClientGroupStats table.
23.3.16 Front End Client Groups
You can view front end client groups in the ClientGroup screen.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
429
Chapter 23 STB Service
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click FrontEnd.
4 Click IP > IGMP > ClientGroup to display the screen.
Figure 405 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Client Groups
23.3.17 Front End Client Groups Settings
You can view a front end client group entry in the detailed ClientGroup screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click FrontEnd.
4 Click IP > IGMP > ClientGroup and click a number to display the screen.
Figure 406 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Client Group Entry
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 237 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Client Group Entry
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
GroupAddress
This displays the IP multicast group address for which this entry contains
information.
UpTime
This displays the elapsed time since the multicast group has been a member
on this interface.
23.3.18 Front End Client Group Statistics
You can view front end client group statistics instances in the ClientGroupStats screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
430
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
3 Click FrontEnd.
4 Click IP > IGMP > ClientGroupStatistics to display the screen.
Figure 407 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Client Group Statistics
23.3.19 Front End Client Groups Statistics Details
You can view a front end client group entry’s statistics in the detailed ClientGroupStats
screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click FrontEnd.
4 Click IP > IGMP > ClientGroupStats and click a number to display the screen.
Figure 408 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Client Group Statistics Entry
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 238 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Client Group Statistics Entry
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
GroupAddress
This displays the IP multicast group address for which this
entry contains information.
TotalStart
This displays the number of seconds elapsed since the beginning of the
period used for collection of “Total” statistics.
CurrentDayStart
This displays the number of seconds since the beginning of the period used
for collection of “CurrentDay” statistics.
QuarterHourStart
This displays the number of seconds since the beginning of the period used
for collection of “QuarterHour” statistics.
23.3.20 Front End Client Groups Total Statistics
You can view a front end client group entry’s joining, leaving and join delay statistics in the
Total client group statistics screen.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
431
Chapter 23 STB Service
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click FrontEnd.
4 Click IP > IGMP > ClientGroupStats, click a number, and click Total to display the
screen.
Figure 409 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Client Group Statistics: Total
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 239 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Client Group Statistics: Total
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
NumberOfJoins
This displays the number of IGMP joins.
NumberOfLeaves
This displays the number of IGMP leaves.
MaxJoinDelay
This displays the delay between the sending of a Join message for this group
to the arrival of the first IP packet.
23.3.21 Front End Client Groups Current Day Statistics
You can view a front end client group statistics for the current day in the CurrentDay client
group statistics screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click FrontEnd.
4 Click IP > IGMP > ClientGroupStats, click a number, and click CurrentDay to
display the screen.
Figure 410 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Client Group Statistics: CurrentDay
432
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 240 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Client Group Statistics: CurrentDay
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
NumberOfJoins
This displays the number of IGMP joins during this period.
NumberOfLeaves
This displays the number of IGMP leaves during this period.
MaxJoinDelay
This displays the delay between the sending of a Join message for this group
to the arrival of the first IP packet, during this period.
23.3.22 Front End Client Groups Quarter Hour Statistics
You can view a front end client group statistics for the current quarter-hour in the
QuarterHour client group statistics screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click FrontEnd.
4 Click IP > IGMP > ClientGroupStats, click a number, and click QuarterHour to
display the screen.
Figure 411 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Client Group Statistics: QuarterHour
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 241 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Client Group Statistics: QuarterHour
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
NumberOfJoins
This displays the number of IGMP joins during this period.
NumberOfLeaves
This displays the number of IGMP leaves during this period.
MaxJoinDelay
This displays the delay between the sending of a Join message for this group
to the arrival of the first IP packet, during this period.
23.3.23 Front End Dejittering
You can view dejittering buffer configuration information in the Dejittering screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click FrontEnd.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
433
Chapter 23 STB Service
4 Click IP > Dejittering.
Figure 412 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Dejittering
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 242 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Dejittering
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
BufferSize
This displays the dejittering buffer size, measured in milliseconds, on the
receiver side of the CPE.
BufferInitialLevel
This displays the number of milliseconds of data that should be in the receiver
side dejittering buffer before play starts.
23.3.24 Front End Inbound Information
You can view the number of inbound instances in the Inbound screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click FrontEnd.
4 Click IP > Inbound to display the screen.
Figure 413 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Inbound
23.3.25 Front End Inbound Information Statistics
You can view information about the IP streams entering the STB through this front end in the
detailed Inbound screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click FrontEnd.
4 Click IP > Inbound and click a number to display the screen.
434
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
Figure 414 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Inbound: Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 243 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Inbound Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Status
This displays the status of this inbound stream.
StreamingControlProt
ocol
This displays the network protocol used for controlling streaming of the source
content.
StreamingTransportPr
otocol
This displays the network protocol currently used for streaming the source
content.
StreamingTransportC
ontrolProtocol
This displays the transport control protocol currently used for streaming the
source content.
MultiplexType
This displays the AV multiplex type currently used for the source content.
DownloadTransportPr
otocol
This displays network protocol currently used for downloading the source
content.
SourceAddress
This displays the IP address of the source of the current stream content.
SourcePort
This displays the TCP or UDP port number of the source of the current stream
content.
DestinationAddress
This displays the IP address of the destination of the current stream content.
DestinationPort
This displays the TCP or UDP port number of the destination of the current
stream content.
URI
This displays the URI that indicates the current source of the stream content.
23.3.26 Front End Outbound Information
You can view the number of outbound instances in the Outbound screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click FrontEnd.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
435
Chapter 23 STB Service
4 Click IP > Outbound to display the screen.
Figure 415 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Outbound
23.3.27 Front End Outbound Information Statistics
You can view information about outbound streams in the detailed Outbound screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click FrontEnd.
4 Click IP > Outbound and click a number to display the screen.
Figure 416 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Outbound: Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 244 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: Outbound Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Status
This displays the status of this outbound stream.
MultiplexType
This displays the AV multiplex type currently used for the source content.
URI
This displays the URI that indicates the current source of the stream content.
23.3.28 Front End Service Connections
You can view information about the parameters used to force connection to a dedicated IP
stream for testing purposes in the ServiceConnect screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click FrontEnd.
4 Click IP > ServiceConnect and click a number to display the screen.
436
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
Figure 417 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: ServiceConnect
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 245 TR-135: STBService: Components: IP: ServiceConnect
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
URI
This displays the service to connect to.
23.3.29 Personal Video Recorder Settings
You can view information about personal video recorder (PVR) settings in the PVR screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click PVR.
Figure 418 TR-135: STBService: Components: PVR
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 246 TR-135: STBService: Components: PVR
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
StorageNumberOfEntr This displays the number of storage entries.
ies
23.3.30 Personal Video Recorder Storage
You can view information about personal video recorder (PVR) storage instances in the
Storage screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click PVR.
4 Click Storage.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
437
Chapter 23 STB Service
Figure 419 TR-135: STBService: Components: PVR Storage
23.3.31 Personal Video Recorder Storage Details
You can view information about each PVR storage instance in the detailed Storage screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click PVR.
4 Click Storage and click a number to display the screen.
Figure 420 TR-135: STBService: Components: PVR Storage Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 247 TR-135: STBService: Components: PVR
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Reference
This displays the corresponding storage service instance, or an object
contained within the storage service instance.
23.3.32 Audio Decoder Status
You can view information about audio decoder instances in the AudioDecoder screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click AudioDecoder.
Figure 421 TR-135: STBService: Components: AudioDecoder
438
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
23.3.33 Audio Decoder Details
You can view information about each audio decoder instance in the detailed AudioDecoder
screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click a number and AudioDecoder.
4 Click a number to display the screen.
Figure 422 TR-135: STBService: Components: AudioDecoder Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 248 TR-135: STBService: Components: AudoDecoder Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This displays whether or not the audio decoder instance is enabled.
Status
This displays the status of this audio decoder.
Name
This displays the name associated with this video decoder.
AudioStandard
This displays the audio standard currently being processed by this audio
decoder.
23.3.34 Video Decoder Status
You can view information about video decoder instances in the VideoDecoder screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click VideoDecoder.
Figure 423 TR-135: STBService: Components: VideoDecoder
Vantage Access User’s Guide
439
Chapter 23 STB Service
23.3.35 Video Decoder Details
You can view information about each video decoder instance in the detailed VideoDecoder
screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click a number and VideoDecoder.
4 Click a number to display the screen.
Figure 424 TR-135: STBService: Components: VideoDecoder Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 249 TR-135: STBService: Components: VideoDecoder Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This displays whether or not the video decoder instance is enabled.
Status
This displays the status of this video decoder.
Name
This displays the name associated with this video decoder.
MPEG2Part2
This displays the path name of the MPEG2 Part 2 profile and level object
instance.
MPEG4Part2
This displays the path name of the MPEG4 Part 2 profile and level object
instance.
MPEG4Part10
This displays the path name of the MPEG4 Part 10 profile and level object
instance.
SMPTEVC1
This displays the path name of the SMPTE VC-1 profile and level object
instance.
ContentAspectRatio
This displays the native aspect ratio of the content for this decoder.
23.3.36 Audio Output Status
You can view information about audio output instances in the AudioOutput screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
440
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click AudioOutput.
Figure 425 TR-135: STBService: Components: AudioOutput
23.3.37 Audio Output Details
You can view information about each audio output instance in the detailed AudioOutput
screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click a number and AudioOutput.
4 Click a number to display the screen.
Figure 426 TR-135: STBService: Components: AudioOutput Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 250 TR-135: STBService: Components: AudioOutput Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This displays whether or not the audio output instance is enabled.
Status
This displays the status of this audio output instance (enabled, disabled or
muted).
Name
This displays the name associated with this audio output instance.
AudioFormat
This displays the currently active audio output format, if there is one.
AudioLevel
This displays the audio output level as a percentage (0 is the quietest, and
100 is the loudest).
CancelMute
This displays whether this audio output’s mute status is cancelled. When read,
this value is always false.
SCARTS
This displays the path names of the SCART object instances associated with
this audio output, if any.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
441
Chapter 23 STB Service
23.3.38 Video Output Status
You can view information about video output instances in the VideoOutput screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click VideoOutput.
Figure 427 TR-135: STBService: Components: VideoOutput
23.3.39 Video Output Details
You can view information about each video output instance in the detailed VideoOutput
screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click a number and VideoOutput.
4 Click a number to display the screen.
Figure 428 TR-135: STBService: Components: VideoOutput Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 251 TR-135: STBService: Components: VideoOutput Details
442
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This displays whether or not the video output instance is enabled.
Status
This displays the status of this video output instance (enabled, disabled or
muted).
Name
This displays the name associated with this video output instance.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
Table 251 TR-135: STBService: Components: VideoOutput Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
CompositeVideoStand This displays the type of analog video standard currently in use, if any.
ard
VideoFormat
This displays the currently active video output format, if any.
AspectRatioBehaviour This displays the aspect ratio behaviour for monitors with an aspect ratio
different from the content.
Macrovision
This displays whether Macrovision protection is being used on the video.
HDCP
This displays whether HDCP protection is being used on the video.
SCARTs
This displays the path names of the SCART object instances associated with
this video output, if any.
23.3.40 SCART Status
You can view information about SCART (Syndicat des Constructeurs d'Appareils
Radiorécepteurs et Téléviseurs) instances in the SCART screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click SCART.
Figure 429 TR-135: STBService: Components: SCART
23.3.41 SCART Details
You can view information about each video decoder instance in the detailed SCART screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click a number and SCART.
4 Click a number to display the screen.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
443
Chapter 23 STB Service
Figure 430 TR-135: STBService: Components: SCART Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 252 TR-135: STBService: Components: SCART Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This displays whether or not the SCART instance is enabled.
Status
This displays the status of this SCART instance.
Name
This displays the name associated with this SCART instance.
Presence
This displays whether or not the presence control signal (pin 8 of the SCART
connector) is enabled.
23.3.42 Conditional Access Status
You can view information about conditional access instances in the CA screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click CA.
Figure 431 TR-135: STBService: Components: CA
23.3.43 Conditional Access Details
You can view information about each conditional access instance in the detailed CA screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click a number and CA.
4 Click a number to display the screen.
444
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
Figure 432 TR-135: STBService: Components: CA Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 253 TR-135: STBService: Components: CA Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This displays whether or not the conditional access instance is enabled.
Status
This displays the status of this conditional access instance.
Name
This displays the name associated with this conditional access instance.
SmartCardReader
This displays the path of the smart card reader instance (if any) containing the
smart card associated with this CA instance.
23.3.44 DRM Status
You can view information about digital rights management (DRM) instances in the DRM
screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click DRM.
Figure 433 TR-135: STBService: Components: DRM
23.3.45 DRM Details
You can view information about each conditional access instance in the detailed CA screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and Components.
3 Click a number and DRM.
4 Click a number to display the screen.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
445
Chapter 23 STB Service
Figure 434 TR-135: STBService: Components: DRM Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 254 TR-135: STBService: Components: DRM Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This displays whether or not the DRM instance is enabled.
Status
This displays the status of this DRM instance.
Name
This displays the name associated with this DRM instance.
SmartCardReader
This displays the path of the smart card reader instance (if any) containing the
smart card associated with this DRM instance.
23.4 AV Streams
You can view information about a device’s AV (audiovisual) stream instances in the
AVStreams screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and AVStreams.
Figure 435 TR-135: STBService: AVStreams
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 255 TR-135: STBService: AVStreams
446
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
ActiveAVStreams
This displays the number of currently-active AV streams.
AVStreamNumberOfE
ntries
This displays the number of AVStream instances.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
23.4.1 AV Stream Setup
You can view information about AV (audiovisual) stream instances in the AVStream screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and AVStreams.
3 Click AVStream.
Figure 436 TR-135: STBService: AVStreams: AVStream
23.4.2 AV Stream Details
You can view information about each AV (audiovisual) stream instance in the detailed
AVStream screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and AVStreams.
3 Click AVStream, then click a number to display the screen.
Figure 437 TR-135: STBService: AVStreams: AVStream Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 256 TR-135: STBService: AVStreams
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Status
This displays the status of this AV stream.
Name
This displays the name associated with this AV stream.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
447
Chapter 23 STB Service
Table 256 TR-135: STBService: AVStreams
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
PVTState
This displays whether this stream is using the PVR (Personal Video Recorder)
and, if so, the PVR state.
FrontEnd
This displays the path name of the input FrontEnd instance associated with
this AV stream.
Inbound
This displays the path of the inbound IP stream instance associated with the
FrontEnd for this AV stream.
Outbound
This displays the path of the outbound IP stream instance associated with the
output FrontEnd for this AV stream (this is always the IP FrontEnd).
AudioDecoder
This displays the path of the Audio Decoder instance associated with this AV
stream.
VideoDecoder
This displays the path of the Video Decoder instance associated with this AV
stream.
CA
This displays the path of the CA instance associated with this AV stream.
DRM
This displays the path of the DRM instance associated with this AV stream.
23.5 AV Players
You can view information about the AV (audiovisual) players on a device in the AVPlayers
screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and AVPlayers.
Figure 438 TR-135: STBService: AVPlayers
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 257 TR-135: STBService: AVPlayers
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
ActiveAVPlayers
This displays the number of currently-active AV players.
AVPlayerNumberOfEn This displays the number of AVPlayer instances.
tries
448
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
Table 257 TR-135: STBService: AVPlayers
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
PreferredAudioLangu
age
This displays the language that should be used by the STB when receiving a
multilingual audio stream.
PreferredSubtitlingLan This displays the language that should be used by the STB when receiving a
guage
multilingual subtitling stream.
23.5.1 AV Player Setup
You can view information about AV player instances in the AVPlayer screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and AVPlayers.
3 Click AVPlayer.
Figure 439 TR-135: STBService: AVPlayers: AVPlayer
23.5.2 AV Player Details
You can view information about each AV (audiovisual) player instance in the detailed
AVStream screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and AVPlayers.
3 Click AVPlayer, then click a number to display the screen.
Figure 440 TR-135: STBService: AVStreams: AVStream Details
Vantage Access User’s Guide
449
Chapter 23 STB Service
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 258 TR-135: STBService: AVStreams
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This displays whether this AV player is currently active or inactive.
Status
This displays the status of this AV player.
Name
This displays the name associated with this AV player.
AudioLanguage
This displays the language that currently being used by the STB for audio
stream processing.
SubtitlingStatus
This displays whether subtitling is enabled or disabled.
SubtitlingLanguage
This displays the language that currently being used by the STB for subtitling.
AudioOutputs
This displays the path names of the audio output instances associated with
this AV player.
VideoOutputs
This displays the path names of the video output instances associated with
this AV player.
MainStream
This displays the path name of the AV stream instance associated with this AV
player that is being sent to the main screen.
PIPStreams
This displays the path name of the AV stream instance associated with this AV
player that is being sent to picture-in-picture (PIP).
23.6 Service Monitoring
You can view information about the QoS (Quality of Service) and QoE (Quality of
Experience) statistics on a device in the ServiceMonitoring screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and ServiceMonitoring.
Figure 441 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring
450
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 259 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
SampleEnable
This displays whether sample statistics collection is enabled or disabled.
SampleState
This displays whether sample statistics are available.
SampleInterval
This displays the sample interval in seconds. Statistics are measured over this
sample interval.
ReportSamples
This displays the number of samples that the STB can store and report for
each statistic.
FetchSamples
This displays whether reporting of samples is enabled.
TimeReference
This displays a time reference in UTC (Coordinated Universal Time), to
determine when sample intervals will complete.
ForceSample
This displays whether sample forcing is enabled. When enabled, this forces
statistics for the current sample to be calculated and updated.
ReportStartTime
This displays the time at which the sample interval for the first stored sample
for each statistic started.
ReportEndTime
This displays the time at which the sample interval for the first stored sample
for each statistic ended.
MainStreamNumberOf This displays the number of MainStream instances.
Entries
23.6.1 Main Stream Setup
You can view information about Main Stream instances in the MainsStream screen. Each
instance is associated with a specified service type.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and ServiceMonitoring.
3 Click MainStream.
Figure 442 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream
23.6.2 Main Stream Details
You can view information about each Main Stream instance in the detailed MainStream
screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and ServiceMonitoring.
3 Click MainStream, then click a number to display the screen.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
451
Chapter 23 STB Service
Figure 443 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream: Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 260 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream: Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This displays whether the collection of Total and Sample statistics for this
instance is enabled.
Status
This displays the status of Total and Sample statistics.
ServiceType
This displays the service type associated with this main stream instance.
AVStream
This displays the path name of the Main AV stream instance currently
associated with this main stream instance.
Gmin
This displays the minimum number of consecutive received packets after the
end of an RTP Loss Event.
SevereLossMinDistan
ce
This displays the minimum time between error events before an RTP Loss
event is considered severe.
SevereLossMinLength This displays the minimum number of error events before an RTP Loss event
is considered severe.
23.6.3 Main Stream Total Statistics
You can view information about each Main Stream instance’s total statistics in the Total
screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and ServiceMonitoring.
3 Click MainStream, then click a number to display the screen.
4 Click Total.
452
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
Figure 444 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Total Statistics
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 261 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Total Statistics
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Reset
This displays whether resetting Total statistics is enabled for this instance.
When this value it is read, it is always false.
ResetTime
This displays the number of seconds since the Total statistics were last
enabled or reset for this main stream instance.
23.6.4 Main Stream Dejittering Statistics
You can view information about each Main Stream instance’s dejittering statistics in the
DejitteringStats screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and ServiceMonitoring.
3 Click MainStream, then click a number to display the screen.
4 Click Total, then click DejitteringStats.
Figure 445 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Dejittering Statistics
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 262 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Dejittering Statistics
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Overruns
This displays the number of times the receive jitter buffer has overrun for this
AV stream.
Underruns
This displays the number of times the receive jitter buffer has underrun for this
AV stream.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
453
Chapter 23 STB Service
23.6.5 Main Stream RTP Statistics
You can view information about each Main Stream instance’s RTP statistics in the RTPStats
screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and ServiceMonitoring.
3 Click MainStream, then click a number to display the screen.
4 Click Total, then click RTPStats.
Figure 446 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream RTP Statistics
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 263 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream RTP Statistics
454
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
PacketsExpected
This displays the total number of RTP packets expected for this AV stream.
PacketsDiscarded
This displays the number of packets discarded at the RTP player for this AV
stream.
PacketsOutOfSequen
ce
This displays the number of packets out of sequence at the RTP level for this
AV stream.
PacketsReceived
This displays the number of RTP packets received for this AV stream after EC
(error correction).
PacketsReceivedBefo
reEC
This displays the number of RTP packets received for this AV stream before
error correction.
PacketsLost
This displays the number of RTP packets lost for this stream.
PacketsLostBeforeEC
This displays the number of RTP packets lost for this stream before error
correction.
LossEvents
This displays the number of Loss Events for this stream.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
Table 263 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream RTP Statistics
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
LossEventsBeforeEC
This displays the number of Loss Events for this stream, before error
correction.
SevereLossIndexCou
nt
This displays the number of Loss Events closer than the
SevereLossMinDistance value.
SevereLossIndexCou
ntBeforeEC
This displays the number of Loss Events closer than the
SevereLossMinDistance value, before error correction.
SevereLossLengthCo
unt
This displays the number of Loss Events longer than the
SevereLossMinLength value.
SevereLossLengthCo
untBeforeEC
This displays the number of Loss Events longer than the
SevereLossMinLength value, before error correction.
RetransmitTimeouts
This displays the number of retransmission timeouts.
23.6.6 Main Stream MPEG2-TS Statistics
You can view information about each Main Stream instance’s MPEG2-TS statistics in the
MPEG2TSStats screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and ServiceMonitoring.
3 Click MainStream, then click a number to display the screen.
4 Click Total, then click MPEG2TSStats.
Figure 447 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream MPEG2TSStats
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 264 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream MPEG2TSStats
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
TSPacketsReceived
This displays the number of MPEG2-TS packets received for this AV stream.
TSSyncByteErrorCou
nt
This displays the number of MPEG2-TS packets with an invalid transport sync
byte received for this AV stream.
TSSyncLossCount
This displays the number of MPEG2-TS loss of synchronization events for this
AV stream.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
455
Chapter 23 STB Service
Table 264 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream MPEG2TSStats
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
PacketDiscontinuityC
ounter
This displays the number of MPEG2-TS discontinuity errors that have been
captured for this AV stream
PacketDiscontinuityC
ounterBeforeCA
This displays the number of MPEG2-TS discontinuity errors that have been
captured for this AV stream, before CA encryption (if applied).
23.6.7 Main Stream Video Decoder Statistics
You can view information about each Main Stream instance’s video decoder statistics in the
VideoDecoderStats screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and ServiceMonitoring.
3 Click MainStream, then click a number to display the screen.
4 Click Total, then click VideoDecoderStats.
Figure 448 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream VideoDecoderStats
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 265 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream VideoDecoderStats
456
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
FrameRate
This displays the frame rate at which the STB plays the video content for this
AV stream.
DecodedFrames
This displays the number of video frames that were decoded completely
(errorless frames) or partially (corrupted frames) for this AV stream.
LostFrames
This displays the number of video frames that could not be reproduced by the
STB for this AV stream.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
Table 265 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream VideoDecoderStats
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
ConcealedFrames
This displays the number of video frames (for this AV stream) reproduced by
the STB for which information was missing and loss concealment was
applied.
IDecodedFrames
This displays the number of I frames that were decoded completely or partially
for this AV stream.
ILostFrames
This displays the number of I frames that could not be reproduced by the STB,
for this AV stream.
IConcealedFrames
This displays the number of I frames (for this AV stream) reproduced by the
STB for which information was missing and loss concealment was applied.
PDecodedFrames
This displays the number of P frames that were decoded completely or
partially for this AV stream.
PLostFrames
This displays the number of P frames that could not be reproduced by the
STB, for this AV stream.
PConcealedFrames
This displays the number of P frames (for this AV stream) reproduced by the
STB for which information was missing and loss concealment was applied.
BDecodedFrames
This displays the number of B frames that were decoded completely or
partially for this AV stream.
BLostFrames
This displays the number of B frames that could not be reproduced by the
STB, for this AV stream.
BConcealedFrames
This displays the number of B frames (for this AV stream) reproduced by the
STB for which information was missing and loss concealment was applied.
AVResynchCounter
This displays the number of AV resynchronizations performed by the STB, for
this AV stream.
23.6.8 Main Stream Audio Decoder Statistics
You can view information about each Main Stream instance’s audio decoder statistics in the
AudioDecoderStats screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and ServiceMonitoring.
3 Click MainStream, then click a number to display the screen.
4 Click Total, then click AudioDecoderStats.
Figure 449 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream AudioDecoderStats
Vantage Access User’s Guide
457
Chapter 23 STB Service
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 266 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream AudioDecoderStats
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
DecodedFrames
This displays the number of audio frames that were decoded completely or
partially for this AV stream.
DecodingErrors
This displays the number of audio decoding errors for this AV stream.
23.6.9 Main Stream Video Response Statistics
You can view information about each Main Stream instance’s video decoder statistics in the
VideoResponseStats screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and ServiceMonitoring.
3 Click MainStream, then click a number to display the screen.
4 Click Total, then click VideoResponseStats.
Figure 450 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream VideoResponseStats
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 267 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream VideoResponseStats
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
MinimumVideoSystem This displays the minimum time period between the transmission of an IGMP
Response
JOIN command (or an RTSP SETUP command) and the display of the first I
frame, for this AV stream.
MaximumVideoSyste
mResponse
This displays the maximum time period between the transmission of an IGMP
JOIN command (or an RTSP SETUP command) and the display of the first I
frame, for this AV stream.
23.6.10 Main Stream Sample Statistics
You can view information about each Main Stream instance’s sample statistics (sample
statistics collected since collection was last enabled or reset) in the Sample screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and ServiceMonitoring.
3 Click MainStream, then click a number to display the screen.
4 Click Sample.
458
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
Figure 451 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Sample Statistics
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 268 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Sample Statistics
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
SampleSeconds
This displays the number of seconds during which data was collected for this
AV stream, during the sample interval.
SignificantChanges
This displays the total number of times that a potentially disruptive event
occurred for this AV stream during the sample interval.
PVRTimeShift
This displays whether PVR was used at any time for this AV stream, during
the sample interval.
HighLevelMetricStats
NumberOfEntries
This displays the number of HighLevelMetricStats instances.
23.6.11 Main Stream Dejittering Sample Statistics
You can view information about each Main Stream instance’s dejittering statistics during the
sample interval in the DejitteringStats screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and ServiceMonitoring.
3 Click MainStream, then click a number to display the screen.
4 Click Sample, then click DejitteringStats.
Figure 452 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Dejittering Sample Stats
Vantage Access User’s Guide
459
Chapter 23 STB Service
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 269 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Dejittering Sample Stats
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
SampleSeconds
This displays the number of seconds during which de-jittering data was
collected for this AV stream, during the sample interval.
Overruns
This displays the number of times the receiving jitter buffer has overrun for this
AV stream, during the sample interval.
Underruns
This displays the number of times the receiving jitter buffer has underrun for
this AV stream, during the sample interval.
EmptyBufferTime
This displays the time period in milliseconds for which the buffer was empty
for this AV stream, during the sample interval.
23.6.12 Main Stream RTP Sample Statistics
You can view information about each Main Stream instance’s RTP statistics during the sample
interval in the RTPStats screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and ServiceMonitoring.
3 Click MainStream, then click a number to display the screen.
4 Click Sample, then click RTPStats.
460
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
Figure 453 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream RTP Sample Statistics
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 270 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream RTP Sample Statistics
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
SampleSeconds
This displays the number of seconds during which RTP data was collected for
this AV stream, during the sample interval.
PacketsExpected
This displays the total number of RTP packets expected for this AV stream,
during the sample interval.
PacketsDiscarded
This displays the number of packets discarded at the RTP player for this AV
stream, during the sample interval.
PacketsOutOfSequen
ce
This displays the number of packets out of sequence at the RTP level for this
AV stream, during the sample interval.
PacketsReceived
This displays the number of RTP packets received for this AV stream, during
the sample interval after EC (error correction).
PacketsReceivedBefo
reEC
This displays the number of RTP packets received for this AV stream, during
the sample interval before error correction.
RetransmitTimeouts
This displays the number of RTP/AVPF retransmission timeouts for this AV
stream, during the sample interval.
PacketsLost
This displays the number of RTP packets lost for this stream.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
461
Chapter 23 STB Service
Table 270 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream RTP Sample Statistics
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
PacketsLostBeforeEC
This displays the number of RTP packets lost for this stream before error
correction.
LossEvents
This displays the number of Loss Events for this stream.
LossEventsBeforeEC
This displays the number of Loss Events for this stream, before error
correction.
SevereLossIndexCou
nt
This displays the number of Loss Events closer than the
SevereLossMinDistance value.
SevereLossIndexCou
ntBeforeEC
This displays the number of Loss Events closer than the
SevereLossMinDistance value, before error correction.
MaximumLossDistanc
e
This displays the maximum number of RTP packets between consecutive loss
events for this AV stream, during the sample interval.
MaximumLossDistanc
eBeforeEC
This displays the maximum number of RTP packets between consecutive loss
events for this AV stream, during the sample interval, before error correction.
AverageLossDistance
This displays the average number of RTP packets between consecutive loss
events for this AV stream, during the sample interval.
AverageLossDistance
BeforeEC
This displays the average number of RTP packets between consecutive loss
events for this AV stream, during the sample interval, before error correction.
MinimumLossDistanc
e
This displays the minimum number of RTP packets between consecutive loss
events for this AV stream, during the sample interval.
MinimumLossDistanc
eBeforeEC
This displays the minimum number of RTP packets between consecutive loss
events for this AV stream, during the sample interval, before error correction.
SevereLossLengthCo
unt
This displays the number of Loss Events longer than the
SevereLossMinLength value.
SevereLossLengthCo
untBeforeEC
This displays the number of Loss Events longer than the
SevereLossMinLength value, before error correction.
MaximumLossPeriod
This displays the length (in RTP packets) of the longest loss event for this AV
stream, during the sample interval.
MaximumLossPeriod
BeforeEC
This displays the length (in RTP packets) of the longest loss event for this AV
stream, during the sample interval, before error correction.
AverageLossPeriod
This displays the average length (in RTP packets) of loss events for this AV
stream, during the sample interval.
AverageLossPeriodBe This displays the average length (in RTP packets) of loss events for this AV
foreEC
stream, during the sample interval, before error correction.
MinimumLossPeriod
This displays the length (in RTP packets) of the shortest loss event for this AV
stream, during the sample interval.
MinimumLossPeriodB
eforeEC
This displays the length (in RTP packets) of the shortest loss event for this AV
stream, during the sample interval, before error correction.
23.6.13 Main Stream MPEG2-TS Sample Statistics
You can view information about each Main Stream instance’s MPEG2-TS statistics during the
sample interval in the MPEG2TSStats screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and ServiceMonitoring.
3 Click MainStream, then click a number to display the screen.
462
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
4 Click Sample, then click MPEG2TSStats.
Figure 454 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Sample MPEG2TSStats
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 271 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Sample MPEG2TSStats
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
SampleSeconds
This displays the number of seconds during which MPEG2-TS data was
collected for this AV stream, during the sample interval.
TSPacketsReceived
This displays the number of MPEG2-TS packets received for this AV stream,
during the sample interval.
TSSyncByteErrorCou
nt
This displays the number of MPEG2-TS packets with an invalid transport
synchronization byte received for this AV stream, during the sample interval.
TSSyncLossCount
This displays the number of MPEG2-TS loss of synchronization events for this
AV stream, during the sample interval.
PacketDiscontinuityC
ounter
This displays the number of MPEG2-TS discontinuity errors that have been
captured for this AV stream, during the sample interval.
PacketDiscontinuityC
ounterBeforeCA
This displays the number of MPEG2-TS discontinuity errors that have been
captured for this AV stream, during the sample interval, before CA encryption
(if applied).
23.6.14 Main Stream Video Decoder Sample Statistics
You can view information about each Main Stream instance’s video decoder statistics during
the sample interval in the VideoDecoderStats screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and ServiceMonitoring.
3 Click MainStream, then click a number to display the screen.
4 Click Sample, then click VideoDecoderStats.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
463
Chapter 23 STB Service
Figure 455 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Sample VideoDecoder
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 272 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Sample VideoDecoder
464
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
SampleSeconds
This displays the number of seconds during which video content data was
collected for this AV stream, during the sample interval.
FrameRate
This displays the frame rate at which the STB plays the video content for this
AV stream, during the sample interval.
DecodedFrames
This displays the number of video frames that were decoded completely
(errorless frames) or partially (corrupted frames) for this AV stream, during the
sample interval.
LostFrames
This displays the number of video frames that could not be reproduced by the
STB for this AV stream, during the sample interval.
ConcealedFrames
This displays the number of video frames (for this AV stream, during the
sample interval) reproduced by the STB for which information was missing
and loss concealment was applied.
IDecodedFrames
This displays the number of I frames that were decoded completely or partially
for this AV stream, during the sample interval.
ILostFrames
This displays the number of I frames that could not be reproduced by the STB,
for this AV stream, during the sample interval.
IConcealedFrames
This displays the number of I frames (for this AV stream, during the sample
interval) reproduced by the STB for which information was missing and loss
concealment was applied.
PDecodedFrames
This displays the number of P frames that were decoded completely or
partially for this AV stream, during the sample interval.
PLostFrames
This displays the number of P frames that could not be reproduced by the
STB, for this AV stream, during the sample interval.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
Table 272 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Sample VideoDecoder
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
PConcealedFrames
This displays the number of P frames (for this AV stream, during the sample
interval) reproduced by the STB for which information was missing and loss
concealment was applied.
BDecodedFrames
This displays the number of B frames that were decoded completely or
partially for this AV stream, during the sample interval.
BLostFrames
This displays the number of B frames that could not be reproduced by the
STB, for this AV stream, during the sample interval.
BConcealedFrames
This displays the number of B frames (for this AV stream, during the sample
interval) reproduced by the STB for which information was missing and loss
concealment was applied.
AVResynchCounter
This displays the number of AV resynchronizations performed by the STB, for
this AV stream, during the sample interval.
23.6.15 Main Stream Audio Decoder Sample Statistics
You can view information about each Main Stream instance’s audio decoder statistics during
the sample interval in the AudioDecoderStats screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and ServiceMonitoring.
3 Click MainStream, then click a number to display the screen.
4 Click Sample, then click AudioDecoderStats.
Figure 456 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Sample AudioDecoder
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 273 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Sample AudioDecoder
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
SampleSeconds
This displays the number of seconds during which audio data was collected
for this AV stream, during the sample interval.
DecodedFrames
This displays the number of audio frames that were decoded completely or
partially for this AV stream, during the sample interval.
DecodingErrors
This displays the number of audio decoding errors for this AV stream, during
the sample interval.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
465
Chapter 23 STB Service
23.6.16 Main Stream Video Response Sample Statistics
You can view information about each Main Stream instance’s video decoder statistics during
the sample interval in the VideoResponseStats screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and ServiceMonitoring.
3 Click MainStream, then click a number to display the screen.
4 Click Sample, then click VideoResponseStats.
Figure 457 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Sample VideoResponse
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 274 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream Sample VideoResponse
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
SampleSeconds
This displays the number of seconds during which Main Stream instance data
was collected for this AV stream, during the sample interval.
MinimumVideoSystem This displays the minimum time period between the transmission of an IGMP
Response
JOIN command (or an RTSP SETUP command) and the display of the first I
frame, for this AV stream, during the sample interval.
MaximumVideoSyste
mResponse
This displays the maximum time period between the transmission of an IGMP
JOIN command (or an RTSP SETUP command) and the display of the first I
frame, for this AV stream, during the sample interval.
23.6.17 Main Stream High Level Metric Sample Statistics
You can view information about each Main Stream instance’s high level metric statistics
during the sample interval in the HighLevelMetricStats screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and ServiceMonitoring.
3 Click MainStream, then click a number to display the screen.
4 Click Sample, then click HighLevelMetricStats.
466
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
Figure 458 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream HighLevelMetricStats
23.6.18 Main Stream High Level Metric Sample Statistics Details
You can view information about each Main Stream instance’s high level metric statistics
during the sample interval in the detailed HighLevelMetricStats screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number and ServiceMonitoring.
3 Click MainStream, then click a number to display the screen.
4 Click Sample, then click HighLevelMetricStats.
5 Click a number to display the screen.
Figure 459 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream HighLevelMetric Details
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 275 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream HighLevelMetric Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
MetricName
This displays the name associated with the high-level metric.
Metric1Threshold
This displays the value controlling the of the Metric1Failures parameter.
Metric2Threshold
This displays the value controlling the of the Metric2Failures parameter.
SampleSeconds
This displays the number of seconds during which this high level metric’s data
was collected, for this AV stream, during the sample interval.
Metric1
This displays a high level metric calculated for this AV stream during the
sample interval. A lower value represents an inferior QoE than a higher value.
Metric2
This displays a second high level metric calculated for this AV stream during
the sample interval. A lower value represents an inferior QoE than a higher
value.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
467
Chapter 23 STB Service
Table 275 TR-135: STBService: ServiceMonitoring: MainStream HighLevelMetric Details
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Metric1Failures
This displays the number of times, since the last time this main stream and
sample statistics collection were enabled, that a new value of Metric1 was
less than or equal to the Metric1Threshold.
Metric2Failures
This displays the number of times, since the last time this main stream and
sample statistics collection were enabled, that a new value of Metric2 was
less than or equal to the Metric2Threshold.
23.7 STB Audience Statistics
You can view the audience statistics settings in the Applications > Audience Statistics
screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number, Applications and then AudienceStats to display the screen.
Figure 460 TR-135: STBService: Applications: Audience Statistics
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 276 TR-135: STBService: Applications: Audience Statistics
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Enable
This displays whether the collection of viewing statistics is enabled.
Reset
This displays whether the viewing statistics table is reset. When this value it is
read, it is always false.
ResetTime
This displays the number of seconds since the audience statistics were last
enabled or reset.
ChannelNumberOfEnt
ries
This displays the number of Channel instances.
23.7.1 Channel Settings
You can view the channel settings in the Channel screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number, Applications, AudienceStats and then Channel to display the screen.
468
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 23 STB Service
Figure 461 TR-135: STBService: Applications: Audience Statistics: Channel Settings
23.7.2 Channel Statistics
You can view the channel settings in the detailed Channel screen.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Data Model > Device >
Services > STBService.
2 Click a number, Applications, AudienceStats and then Channel.
3 Click a number to display the screen.
Figure 462 TR-135: STBService: Applications: Audience Statistics: Channel Statistics
The following table describes the fields in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 277 TR-135: STBService: Applications: Audience Statistics: Channel Statistics
PARAMETER NAME
VALUE
Name
This displays the name of the TV channel being displayed in the main screen.
Duration
This displays the length of time, in seconds, that the TV channel has been
displayed.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
469
Chapter 23 STB Service
470
Vantage Access User’s Guide
P ART VIII
Device 1.0 (TR-106)
This part contains the following chapters.
• General Device Setup (473)
• LAN (481)
471
472
CHAPTER
24
General Device Setup
This chapter describes the general Configuration screens you display to view and set basic
device settings.
24.1 Device
You can view a summary information of the device. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
1 Log into Vantage Access using a manager account and click the Provision Manager
icon in the control panel.
2 Select a device in the Device List window.
3 Click Provision > Data Model > Device.
Figure 463 TR-106: Device
24.2 Device Configuration
Display the DeviceConfig screen to view generation information about the configuration file
on a device.
Click Device > Config.
Figure 464 TR-106: Device: Config
Vantage Access User’s Guide
473
Chapter 24 General Device Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 278 TR-106: Device: Config
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
PersistentData
This field displays the configuration data that must remain intact after a device
system reboot.
ConfigFile
This field displays the name of the vendor specific configuration file used for the
device.
24.3 Gateway Information
Display the GatewayInfo screen to view general information about the gateway device.
Click Device > GatewayInfo.
Figure 465 TR-106: Device: GatewayInfo
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 279 TR-106: Device: GatewayInfo
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
ManufacturerOUI
This field displays the six-hexadecimal-digit OUI (Organization Unit Identifier) of
the company. The OUI is a unique number assigned by the IANA. Devices
produced by the same company have the same hard-wired OUI.
ProductClass
This field identifies the product or class over which the SerialNumber parameter
is unique.
SerialNumber
This field displays the gateway device serial number.
24.4 Device Information
View detailed information about the device in the DeviceInfo screen.
Click InternetGatewayDevice > DeviceInfo to display the general information of the
selected device.
474
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 24 General Device Setup
Figure 466 TR-106: Device: Info
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 280 TR-106: Device: Info
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Manufacturer
This is the name of the company that produced this device.
ManufacturerOUI
This field displays the six-hexadecimal-digit OUI (Organization Unit Identifier) of
the company. The OUI is a unique number assigned by the IANA. Devices
produced by the same company have the same hard-wired OUI.
ModelName
This field displays the device model name.
Description
This field displays additional information about the device.
ProductClass
This field identifies the product or class over which the SerialNumber parameter
is unique.
SerialNumber
This field displays the device serial number.
HardwareVersion
This field displays the hardware model name.
SoftwareVersion
This field displays the firmware version number.
EnabledOptions
This field displays the name of the options enabled on the device.
AdditionalHardwa
reVersion
This field displays the available information about the additional hardware version.
AdditionalSoftwar
eVersion
This field displays the available information about the additional software version.
ProvisioningCode
The provisioning code is used by the service provider to identify specific
parameter settings for the device.
Enter the identifier of the DSL service provider or provisioning information. You
can enter up to 64 characters (use only A-Z, 0-9 and “.” with no spaces allowed).
DeviceStatus
This field displays the current operational status of the device. The device’s status
may be "Up", "Initializing", "Error", or "Disabled".
UpTime
This field displays the time (in seconds) since the device was last restarted.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
475
Chapter 24 General Device Setup
Table 280 TR-106: Device: Info (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
FirstUseDate
This field displays the time and date the device first established a network
connection.
DeviceLog
Enter additional information for this device.
24.5 Management Server
Use the Management Server screen to configure settings on the device to connect to the
Vantage Access server.
Click InternetGatewayDevice > ManagementServer.
Figure 467 TR-106: ManagementServer
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 281 TR-106: ManagementServer
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
URL
This field displays the address of the Vantage Access server to which the device
connects for remote management.
For example, “http://www.zyxel.com/TR069”.
UserName
This field displays the user name the device uses to access Vantage Access.
Password
This field displays the password (up to 256 alphanumeric characters) associated
with the user name above.
Note: You must configure the same access user name and
password on the device and the Vantage Access server.
PeriodicInformEn
able
476
This field displays true to indicate that the device is set to regularly send device
information updates to Vantage Access.
This field displays false to indicate that this feature is disabled. In this case, you
must then manually update device information changes.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 24 General Device Setup
Table 281 TR-106: ManagementServer (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
PeriodicInformInte This field is applicable when the PeriodicInformEnable field is 1.
rval
This field displays the time (in seconds) the device is to wait before sending device
request information updates to Vantage Access.
PeriodicInformTim This field is applicable when in the PeriodicInformEnable field is 1.
e
This field displays the reference time and date the device is to initiate the
information updates. The time in the format yyyy-mm-ddThh:mm:ss.
ParameterKey
This field displays the parameter that is changed from the most recent information
update.
ConnectionReque
stURL
This field displays the URL of the device to which Vantage Access sends a
connection request.
ConnectionReque
stUsername
This field displays the user name Vantage Access uses to access the device.
This is required if you want Vantage Access to initiate a connection and access the
device.
ConnectionReque
stPassword
This field displays the password associated with the user name above.
UpgradesManage
d
This field displays 1 to allow Vantage Access to upgrade firmware on the device.
This field displays 0 to indicate that remote firmware upgrade through Vantage
Access is disabled.
KickURL
This field displays the URL on the LAN from which the device can initiate a Kick
request.
DownloadProgres
sURL
This field displays the URL of a web site on the LAN to which a user’s web
browser is redirected to display the file transfer progress of the device.
24.6 Time
Use the Time screen to configure time settings (such as the network time server and time
zone) on the device.
Click InternetGatewayDevice > Time.
Figure 468 TR-106: Time
Vantage Access User’s Guide
477
Chapter 24 General Device Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 282 TR-106: Time
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
NTPServer1 .. 5
This field displays the IP address or host name of a time server the device is to
use to update the system time. For example, “http://www.zyxel.com”.
CurrentLocalTime
This field displays the current system time on the device.
LocalTimeZone
This field displays the time offset from the UTC (Universal Time Coordinate). For
example, +08:00.
24.7 User Interface
Use the UserInterface screen to configure remote management settings to access the web
configurator on the device.
Click InternetGatewayDevice > UserInterface to display the screen as shown.
Figure 469 TR-106: UserInterface
478
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 24 General Device Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 283 TR-106: UserInterface
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
PasswordRequire
d
This field displays 1 if a password is required to log into the web configurator on
the device.
This field displays 0 if a password is not required.
PasswordUserSel
ectable
This field displays 1 if a user can specify a different the password for Autoconfiguration on the device; otherwise it displays 0.
UpgradeAvailable
This field displays 1 to allow a user to view the upgrade information on the device;
otherwise it displays 0.
WarrantyDate
This field displays the time the warranty on the device expires.
ISPName
This field displays the name of your Internet Service Provider (ISP).
ISPHelpDesk
This field displays the telephone number of your ISP’s help desk.
ISPHomePage
This field displays the web site address of your ISP’s home page.
ISPHelpPage
This field displays the web site address of your ISP’s online support web page.
ISPLogo
This field displays the base64 encoded character for your ISP’s logo graphic. The
graphic can be a GIF or JEPG file smaller than 4095 bytes.
ISPLogoSize
This field displays the size of the logo graphic file.
ISPMailServer
This field displays the address of your ISP’s mail server.
ISPNewsServer
This field displays the address of your ISP’s news server.
TextColor
This field displays the color (in six-character RGB number) of the text in the web
configurator. For example, FFFFFF means white.
BackgroundColor
This field displays the color (in six-character RGB number) of the background in
the web configurator. For example, FFFFFF means white.
ButtonColor
This field displays the color (in six-character RGB number) of the buttons in the
web configurator. For example, FFFFFF means white.
ButtonTextColor
This field displays the color (in six-character RGB number) of the text on the
buttons in the web configurator. For example, FFFFFF means white.
AutoUpdateServe
r
This field is applicable if the UpgradesManaged field in the ManagementServer
screen is 1 (see Section 24.5 on page 476).
This field displays the address of the server the device is to check for new
firmware. If a new firmware is available, the device is to update the firmware
automatically.
UserUpdateServe
r
This field is applicable if the UpgradesManaged field in the ManagementServer
screen is 0 (see Section 24.5 on page 476).
This field displays the address of the server a user can check for new firmware
updates available for the device.
AvailableLanguag
e
This field displays a comma-separated list of languages supported for the user
interface.
CurrentLanguage
This field displays the language the device is using for the user interface.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
479
Chapter 24 General Device Setup
480
Vantage Access User’s Guide
CHAPTER
25
LAN
This chapter describes the LAN screens for the Device root object.
25.1 LAN
Display the LAN screen to view and configure LAN interface settings on the device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Device > LAN to display the
screen.
Figure 470 TR-106: LAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 284 TR-106: LAN
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
AddressingType
This field displays how the device is to obtain an IP address for the LAN interface.
IPAddress
This field displays the IP address on the LAN interface.
SubnetMask
This field displays the subnet mask for the LAN interface.
DefaultGateway
This field displays the IP address of the default gateway device.
DNSServers
This field displays the comma-separated list of IP address(es) of the DNS
server(s).
MACAddress
This field displays the MAC address on the LAN interface.
MACAddressOver This field displays whether the device allows modification of the MAC address on
ride
the LAN interface.
DHCPOptionNum
berOfEntries
Vantage Access User’s Guide
This field displays the number of entries in the DHCP options table.
481
Chapter 25 LAN
25.2 DHCP Options
Display the DHCPOption screen to view the DHCP options table on the device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Device > LAN >
DHCPOptions to display the screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field
descriptions.
Figure 471 TR-106: LAN: DHCPOption
25.2.1 DHCP Options Details
Display the detailed DHCPOption screen to view or configure settings in the DHCP options
table.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Device > LAN >
DHCPOption. Click a number to display the screen.
Figure 472 TR-106: LAN: DHCPOption: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 285 TR-106: LAN: DHCPOption: Details
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Request
This field displays whether this entry is a request to the DHCP server or a value to
be sent by the DHCP client.
Tag
This field displays the name of the DHCP option tag as defined in RFC 2132.
Value
This field displays the value the DHCP client is to send.
25.3 LAN Statistics
Display the Stats screen to view statistics for the default LAN interface on a device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Device > LAN. Click Stats to
display the screen.
482
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 25 LAN
Figure 473 TR-106: LAN: Stats
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 286 TR-106: LAN: Stats
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
ConnectionUpTim
e
This field displays the time the LAN interface has been up.
TotaleBytesSent
This field displays the total number of bytes transmitted on the LAN since the
device was last restarted.
TotalBytesReceiv
ed
This field displays the total number of bytes received on the LAN since the device
was last restarted.
TotalPacketsSent
This field displays the total number of packets transmitted on the LAN since the
device was last restarted.
TotalPacketsRece
ived
This field displays the total number of packets received on the LAN since the
device was last restarted.
CurrentDayInterv
al
This field displays the number of seconds since the beginning of the period used
for collection of CurrentDay statistics.
CurrentDayBytes
Sent
This field displays the number of bytes transmitted on the LAN since the beginning
of the current-day interval as specified by the CurrentDayInterval parameter.
CurrentDayBytes
Received
This field displays the number of bytes received on the LAN since the beginning of
the current-day interval as specified by the CurrentDayInterval parameter.
CurrentDayPacke
tsSent
This field displays the number of packets transmitted on the LAN since the
beginning of the current-day interval as specified by the CurrentDayInterval
parameter.
CurrentDayPacke
tsReceived
This field displays the number of packets received on the LAN since the beginning
of the current-day interval as specified by the CurrentDayInterval parameter.
QuaterHourInterv
al
This field displays the number of seconds since the beginning of the period used
for collection of QuaterHour statistics.
QuaterHourBytes
Sent
This field displays the number of bytes transmitted on the LAN since the beginning
of the quarter-hour interval as specified by the QuaterHourInterval parameter.
QuaterHourBytes
Received
This field displays the number of bytes received on the LAN since the beginning of
the quarter-hour interval as specified by the QuaterHourInterval parameter.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
483
Chapter 25 LAN
Table 286 TR-106: LAN: Stats (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
QuaterHourPacke
tsSent
This field displays the number of packets transmitted on the LAN since the
beginning of the quarter-hour interval as specified by the QuaterHourInterval
parameter.
QuaterHourPacke
tsReceived
This field displays the number of packets received on the LAN since the beginning
of the quarter-hour interval as specified by the QuaterHourInterval parameter.
25.4 IP Ping Diagnostics
Use the IPPingDiagnostics screen to view or configure IP Ping test settings on a device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Device > LAN >
IPPingDiagnostics to display the screen.
Figure 474 TR-106: LAN: DHCPOption: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 287 TR-106: LAN: DHCPOption: Details
484
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
DiagnosticsState
This field displays the availability of the diagnostics result.
Host
This field displays the name or the IP address of the host device to ping.
NumberOfRepetiti
ons
This field displays the number of ping tests to perform before reporting the test
result.
Timeout
This field displays the timeout (in milliseconds) for a ping test.
DataBlockSize
This field displays the size of the data block (in bytes) to send for each traceroute.
DSCP
This field displays the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) value for the ping packets to
send.
SuccessCount
This field displays the number of successful ping tests.
FailureCount
This field displays the number of unsuccessful ping tests.
AverageRespons
eTime
This field displays the average response time (in milliseconds) of all ping tests.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 25 LAN
Table 287 TR-106: LAN: DHCPOption: Details (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
MinimumRespons
eTime
This field displays the minimum response time (in milliseconds) of all ping tests.
MaximumRespon
seTime
This field displays the maximum response time (in milliseconds) of all ping tests.
25.5 Traceroute Diagnostics
Use the TraceRouteDiagnostics screen to view or configure traceroute test settings for a
device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Device > LAN. Click
TraceRouteDiagnostics.
Figure 475 TR-106: LAN: TraceRouteDiagnostics
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 288 TR-106: LAN: TraceRouteDiagnostics
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
DiagnosticsState
This field displays the availability of the diagnostics result.
Host
This field displays the name or the IP address of the host device to which to trace
route.
Timeout
This field displays the timeout (in milliseconds) for a trace route test.
DataBlockSize
This field displays the size of the data block (in bytes) to send for each traceroute.
MaxHopCount
This field displays the maximum number of hops used in outgoing probe packets.
DSCP
This field displays the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) value for the outgoing probe
packets.
ResponseTime
This field displays the response time (in milliseconds) of the most recent
traceroute test.
NumberOfRouteH
ops
This field displays the number of hops for the discovered route.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
485
Chapter 25 LAN
25.5.1 Route Hops
Display the RouteHops screen to view the hops along a discovered route. Refer to Section
11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Device > LAN >
TraceRouteDiagnostics > RouteHops to display the screen.
Figure 476 TR-106: LAN: TraceRouteDiagnostics: RouteHops
25.5.2 Route Hops Details
Display the detailed RouteHops screen to view the name or the IP address of a hop on a
discovered route. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Device > LAN.
2 Click TraceRouteDiagnostics.
3 Click RouteHops and a number to display the screen.
Figure 477 TR-106: LAN: TraceRouteDiagnostics: RouteHops: Details
486
Vantage Access User’s Guide
P ART IX
Device 1.1 (TR-106
Amendment 1)
This part contains the following chapters.
• General Device Setup (489)
• LAN (497)
487
488
CHAPTER
26
General Device Setup
This chapter describes the general Configuration screens you display to view and set basic
device settings.
26.1 Device
You can view a summary information of the device. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
1 Log into Vantage Access using a manager account and click the Provision Manager
icon in the control panel.
2 Select an STB device in the Device List window.
3 Click Provision > Data Model > Device.
Figure 478 TR-106 Amendment 1: Device
26.2 Device Information
View detailed information about the device in the DeviceInfo screen.
Click Device > DeviceInfo to display the general information of the selected device.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
489
Chapter 26 General Device Setup
Figure 479 TR-106 Amendment 1: Device: Info
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 289 TR-106 Amendment 1: Device: Info
490
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Manufacturer
This is the name of the company that produced this device.
ManufacturerOUI
This field displays the six-hexadecimal-digit OUI (Organization Unit Identifier) of
the company. The OUI is a unique number assigned by the IANA. Devices
produced by the same company have the same hard-wired OUI.
ModelName
This field displays the device model name.
Description
This field displays additional information about the device.
ProductClass
This field identifies the product or class over which the SerialNumber parameter
is unique.
SerialNumber
This field displays the device serial number.
HardwareVersion
This field displays the hardware model name.
SoftwareVersion
This field displays the firmware version number.
EnabledOptions
This field displays the name of the options enabled on the device.
AdditionalHardwa
reVersion
This field displays the available information about the additional hardware version.
AdditionalSoftwar
eVersion
This field displays the available information about the additional software version.
ProvisioningCode
The provisioning code is used by the service provider to identify specific
parameter settings for the device.
Enter the identifier of the DSL service provider or provisioning information. You
can enter up to 64 characters (use only A-Z, 0-9 and “.” with no spaces allowed).
DeviceStatus
This field displays the current operational status of the device. The device’s status
may be "Up", "Initializing", "Error", or "Disabled".
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 26 General Device Setup
Table 289 TR-106 Amendment 1: Device: Info (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
UpTime
This field displays the time (in seconds) since the device was last restarted.
FirstUseDate
This field displays the time and date the device first established a network
connection.
DeviceLog
Enter additional information for this device.
26.3 Management Server
Use the Management Server screen to configure settings on the device to connect to the
Vantage Access server.
Click Device > ManagementServer.
Figure 480 TR-106 Amendment 1: ManagementServer
Vantage Access User’s Guide
491
Chapter 26 General Device Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 290 TR-106 Amendment 1: ManagementServer
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
URL
This field displays the address of the Vantage Access server to which the device
connects for remote management.
For example, “http://www.zyxel.com/TR106-a-1”.
UserName
This field displays the user name the device uses to access Vantage Access.
Password
This field displays the password (up to 256 alphanumeric characters) associated
with the user name above.
Note: You must configure the same access user name and
password on the device and the Vantage Access server.
PeriodicInformEn
able
This field displays true to indicate that the device is set to regularly send device
information updates to Vantage Access.
This field displays false to indicate that this feature is disabled. In this case, you
must then manually update device information changes.
PeriodicInformInte This field is applicable when the PeriodicInformEnable field is 1.
rval
This field displays the time (in seconds) the device is to wait before sending device
request information updates to Vantage Access.
PeriodicInformTim This field is applicable when in the PeriodicInformEnable field is 1.
e
This field displays the reference time and date the device is to initiate the
information updates. The time in the format yyyy-mm-ddThh:mm:ss.
492
ParameterKey
This field displays the parameter that is changed from the most recent information
update.
ConnectionReque
stURL
This field displays the URL of the device to which Vantage Access sends a
connection request.
ConnectionReque
stUsername
This field displays the user name Vantage Access uses to access the device.
This is required if you want Vantage Access to initiate a connection and access the
device.
ConnectionReque
stPassword
This field displays the password associated with the user name above.
UpgradesManage
d
This field displays 1 to allow Vantage Access to upgrade firmware on the device.
This field displays 0 to indicate that remote firmware upgrade through Vantage
Access is disabled.
KickURL
This field displays the URL on the LAN from which the device can initiate a Kick
request.
DownloadProgres
sURL
This field displays the URL of a web site on the LAN to which a user’s web
browser is redirected to display the file transfer progress of the device.
UDPConnectionR
equestAddress
This field displays the URL of the device to which Vantage Access sends a UDP
connection request.
UDPConnectionR
equestAddressNo
tificationLimit
This field displays the maximum number of times the UDP connection request is
made.
STUNEnable
This displays whether STUN (Simple Traversal of User Datagram Protocol through
Network Address Translators (NATs)) is enabled or not.
STUNServerAddr
ess
This displays the STUN server’s IP address.
STUNServerPort
This displays the port number of the STUN server.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 26 General Device Setup
Table 290 TR-106 Amendment 1: ManagementServer (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
STUNUsername
This displays the STUN server username.
STUNPassword
This displays the STUN server password associated with the STUNUsername.
STUNMaximumK
eepAlivePeriod
This displays the STUN server maximum keep-alive period.
STUNMinimumKe
epAlivePeriod
This displays the STUN server minimum keep-alive period.
NATDetected
This displays whether NAT (Network Address Translation) is in operation.
26.4 Gateway Information
Display the GatewayInfo screen to view general information about the gateway device.
Click Device > GatewayInfo.
Figure 481 TR-106 Amendment 1: Device: GatewayInfo
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 291 TR-106 Amendment 1: Device: GatewayInfo
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
ManufacturerOUI
This field displays the six-hexadecimal-digit OUI (Organization Unit Identifier) of
the company. The OUI is a unique number assigned by the IANA. Devices
produced by the same company have the same hard-wired OUI.
ProductClass
This field identifies the product or class over which the SerialNumber parameter
is unique.
SerialNumber
This field displays the gateway device serial number.
26.5 Device Configuration
Display the DeviceConfig screen to view generation information about the configuration file
on a device.
Click Device > Config.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
493
Chapter 26 General Device Setup
Figure 482 TR-106 Amendment 1: Device: Config
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 292 TR-106 Amendment 1: Device: Config
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
PersistentData
This field displays the configuration data that must remain intact after a device
system reboot.
ConfigFile
This field displays the name of the vendor specific configuration file used for the
device.
26.6 Time
Use the Time screen to configure time settings (such as the network time server and time
zone) on the device.
Click Device > Time.
Figure 483 TR-106 Amendment 1: Time
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 293 TR-106 Amendment 1: Time
494
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
NTPServer1 .. 5
This field displays the IP address or host name of a time server the device is to
use to update the system time. For example, “http://www.zyxel.com”.
CurrentLocalTime
This field displays the current system time on the device.
LocalTimeZone
This field displays the time offset from the UTC (Universal Time Coordinate). For
example, +08:00.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 26 General Device Setup
26.7 User Interface
Use the UserInterface screen to configure remote management settings to access the web
configurator on the device.
Click Device > UserInterface to display the screen as shown.
Figure 484 TR-106 Amendment 1: UserInterface
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 294 TR-106 Amendment 1: UserInterface
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
PasswordRequire
d
This field displays 1 if a password is required to log into the web configurator on
the device.
This field displays 0 if a password is not required.
PasswordUserSel
ectable
This field displays 1 if a user can specify a different the password for Autoconfiguration on the device; otherwise it displays 0.
UpgradeAvailable
This field displays 1 to allow a user to view the upgrade information on the device;
otherwise it displays 0.
WarrantyDate
This field displays the time the warranty on the device expires.
ISPName
This field displays the name of your Internet Service Provider (ISP).
ISPHelpDesk
This field displays the telephone number of your ISP’s help desk.
ISPHomePage
This field displays the web site address of your ISP’s home page.
ISPHelpPage
This field displays the web site address of your ISP’s online support web page.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
495
Chapter 26 General Device Setup
Table 294 TR-106 Amendment 1: UserInterface (continued)
496
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
ISPLogo
This field displays the base64 encoded character for your ISP’s logo graphic. The
graphic can be a GIF or JEPG file smaller than 4095 bytes.
ISPLogoSize
This field displays the size of the logo graphic file.
ISPMailServer
This field displays the address of your ISP’s mail server.
ISPNewsServer
This field displays the address of your ISP’s news server.
TextColor
This field displays the color (in six-character RGB number) of the text in the web
configurator. For example, FFFFFF means white.
BackgroundColor
This field displays the color (in six-character RGB number) of the background in
the web configurator. For example, FFFFFF means white.
ButtonColor
This field displays the color (in six-character RGB number) of the buttons in the
web configurator. For example, FFFFFF means white.
ButtonTextColor
This field displays the color (in six-character RGB number) of the text on the
buttons in the web configurator. For example, FFFFFF means white.
AutoUpdateServe
r
This field is applicable if the UpgradesManaged field in the ManagementServer
screen is 1 (see Section 26.3 on page 491).
This field displays the address of the server the device is to check for new
firmware. If a new firmware is available, the device is to update the firmware
automatically.
UserUpdateServe
r
This field is applicable if the UpgradesManaged field in the ManagementServer
screen is 0 (see Section 26.3 on page 491).
This field displays the address of the server a user can check for new firmware
updates available for the device.
AvailableLanguag
e
This field displays a comma-separated list of languages supported for the user
interface.
CurrentLanguage
This field displays the language the device is using for the user interface.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
CHAPTER
27
LAN
This chapter describes the LAN screens for the Device root object.
27.1 LAN
Display the LAN screen to view and configure LAN interface settings on the device.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Device > LAN to display the
screen.
Figure 485 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 295 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
AddressingType
This field displays how the device is to obtain an IP address for the LAN interface.
IPAddress
This field displays the IP address on the LAN interface.
SubnetMask
This field displays the subnet mask for the LAN interface.
DefaultGateway
This field displays the IP address of the default gateway device.
DNSServers
This field displays the comma-separated list of IP address(es) of the DNS
server(s).
MACAddress
This field displays the MAC address on the LAN interface.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
497
Chapter 27 LAN
Table 295 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
MACAddressOver This field displays whether the device allows modification of the MAC address on
ride
the LAN interface.
DHCPOptionNum
berOfEntries
This field displays the number of entries in the DHCP options table.
27.2 DHCP Options
Display the DHCPOptions screen to view the DHCP options table on the device. Refer to
Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Device > LAN >
DHCPOptions to display the screen.
Figure 486 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN: DHCPOption
27.2.1 DHCP Options Details
Display the detailed DHCPOption screen to view or configure settings in the DHCP options
table.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Device > LAN >
DHCPOption. Click a number to display the screen.
Figure 487 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN: DHCPOption: Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 296 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN: DHCPOption: Details
498
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Request
This field displays whether this entry is a request to the DHCP server or a value to
be sent by the DHCP client.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 27 LAN
Table 296 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN: DHCPOption: Details (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
Tag
This field displays the name of the DHCP option tag as defined in RFC 2132.
Value
This field displays the value the DHCP client is to send.
27.3 LAN Statistics
Display the Stats screen to view statistics for the default LAN interface.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Device > LAN. Click Stats to
display the screen.
Figure 488 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN: Stats
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 297 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN: Stats
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
ConnectionUpTim
e
This field displays the time the LAN interface has been up.
TotaleBytesSent
This field displays the total number of bytes transmitted on the LAN since the
device was last restarted.
TotalBytesReceiv
ed
This field displays the total number of bytes received on the LAN since the device
was last restarted.
TotalPacketsSent
This field displays the total number of packets transmitted on the LAN since the
device was last restarted.
TotalPacketsRece
ived
This field displays the total number of packets received on the LAN since the
device was last restarted.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
499
Chapter 27 LAN
Table 297 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN: Stats (continued)
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
CurrentDayInterv
al
This field displays the number of seconds since the beginning of the period used
for collection of CurrentDay statistics.
CurrentDayBytes
Sent
This field displays the number of bytes transmitted on the LAN since the beginning
of the current-day interval as specified by the CurrentDayInterval parameter.
CurrentDayBytes
Received
This field displays the number of bytes received on the LAN since the beginning of
the current-day interval as specified by the CurrentDayInterval parameter.
CurrentDayPacke
tsSent
This field displays the number of packets transmitted on the LAN since the
beginning of the current-day interval as specified by the CurrentDayInterval
parameter.
CurrentDayPacke
tsReceived
This field displays the number of packets received on the LAN since the beginning
of the current-day interval as specified by the CurrentDayInterval parameter.
QuarterHourInterv This field displays the number of seconds since the beginning of the period used
al
for collection of QuarterHour statistics.
QuarterHourBytes This field displays the number of bytes transmitted on the LAN since the beginning
Sent
of the quarter-hour interval as specified by the QuarterHourInterval parameter.
QuarterHourBytes This field displays the number of bytes received on the LAN since the beginning of
Received
the quarter-hour interval as specified by the QuarterHourInterval parameter.
QuarterHourPack
etsSent
This field displays the number of packets transmitted on the LAN since the
beginning of the quarter-hour interval as specified by the QuarterHourInterval
parameter.
QuarterHourPack
etsReceived
This field displays the number of packets received on the LAN since the beginning
of the quarter-hour interval as specified by the QuarterHourInterval parameter.
27.4 IP Ping Diagnostics
Use the IPPingDiagnostics screen to view or configure IP Ping test settings.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Device > LAN >
IPPingDiagnostics to display the screen.
Figure 489 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN: IPPingDiagnostics
500
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 27 LAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 298 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN: DHCPOption: Details
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
DiagnosticsState
This field displays the availability of the diagnostics result.
Host
This field displays the name or the IP address of the host device to ping.
NumberOfRepetiti
ons
This field displays the number of ping tests to perform before reporting the test
result.
Timeout
This field displays the timeout (in milliseconds) for a ping test.
DataBlockSize
This field displays the size of the data block (in bytes) to send for each traceroute.
DSCP
This field displays the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) value for the ping packets to
send.
SuccessCount
This field displays the number of successful ping tests.
FailureCount
This field displays the number of unsuccessful ping tests.
AverageRespons
eTime
This field displays the average response time (in milliseconds) of all ping tests.
MinimumRespons
eTime
This field displays the minimum response time (in milliseconds) of all ping tests.
MaximumRespon
seTime
This field displays the maximum response time (in milliseconds) of all ping tests.
27.5 Traceroute Diagnostics
Use the TraceRouteDiagnostics screen to view or configure traceroute test settings.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Device > LAN. Click
TraceRouteDiagnostics.
Figure 490 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN: TraceRouteDiagnostics
Vantage Access User’s Guide
501
Chapter 27 LAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for
other field descriptions.
Table 299 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN: TraceRouteDiagnostics
PARAMETER
NAME
VALUE
DiagnosticsState
This field displays the availability of the diagnostics result.
Host
This field displays the name or the IP address of the host device to which to trace
route.
Timeout
This field displays the timeout (in milliseconds) for a trace route test.
DataBlockSize
This field displays the size of the data block (in bytes) to send for each traceroute.
MaxHopCount
This field displays the maximum number of hops used in outgoing probe packets.
DSCP
This field displays the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) value for the outgoing probe
packets.
ResponseTime
This field displays the response time (in milliseconds) of the most recent
traceroute test.
NumberOfRouteH
ops
This field displays the number of hops for the discovered route.
27.5.1 Route Hops
Display the RouteHops screen to view the hops along a discovered route. Refer to Section
11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Device > LAN >
TraceRouteDiagnostics > RouteHops to display the screen.
Figure 491 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN: TraceRouteDiagnostics: RouteHops
27.5.2 Route Hops Details
Display the detailed RouteHops screen to view the name or the IP address of a hop on a
discovered route. Refer to Section 11.2.4 on page 132 for other field descriptions.
1 Select a registered device in the Device List window and click Device > LAN.
2 Click TraceRouteDiagnostics.
3 Click RouteHops and a number to display the screen.
502
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 27 LAN
Figure 492 TR-106 Amendment 1: LAN: TraceRouteDiagnostics: RouteHops: Details
Vantage Access User’s Guide
503
Chapter 27 LAN
504
Vantage Access User’s Guide
P ART X
File Manager
This part contains the following chapters.
• Device Firmware Maintenance (507)
• Vendor Configuration File (513)
505
506
CHAPTER
28
Device Firmware Maintenance
This chapter describes the Device Firmware screens you use to manage the device firmware
files on the download server and how to perform remote device firmware upgrade through the
Vantage Access server.
28.1 Device Firmware Overview
"
The File Manager screens are available to manager accounts only.
To display the File Manager screens, log into Vantage Access using a manager account and
click the File Manager icon in the control panel.
You can update the firmware to one or more devices (of the same model) through the Vantage
Access server. The firmware upgrade process can be automatic based on a pre-configured
schedule or manually at any time.
To upgrade device firmware remotely via the Vantage Access server, do the following:
1 Use the Management screen to upload a device’s firmware files to the download server.
2 Use the Upgrade screen to update the new device firmware file to the selected device(s).
See Section 28.3 on page 510 for more information.
3 Use the Scheduled Upgrade List screen to view a list of scheduled firmware upgrade
requests. See Section 28.3.2 on page 511 for more information.
28.2 Firmware Management
Use the Firmware Management screen to upload device firmware files to the download
server. You can also use this screen to display the list of firmware files on the download server
or delete a firmware file.
Log into Vantage Access using a manager account and click the File Manager icon in the
control panel. Then click Device Firmware > Management in the navigation panel. You can
sort the entries in the table by clicking the headings.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
507
Chapter 28 Device Firmware Maintenance
Figure 493 File Manager: Device Firmware: Management
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 300 File Manager: Device Firmware: Management
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Entries Per
Page
Select how many entries you want to display in a page.
#
Select this option and click Delete to remove the device firmware file from the
download server.
Click Select All to select all entries in this screen.
File Name
This field displays the descriptive firmware name for identification purposes.
Dev Type
This field displays the model name for which this firmware is intended.
SW Version
This field displays the device firmware version number.
Add
Click Add to save a firmware file.
Delete
Click Delete to remove the selected firmware file(s).
28.2.1 Adding a New Device Firmware
The Add Firmware screen allows you to add a new device firmware to the server (specified in
the Download Server screen).
Figure 494 File Manager: Device Firmware: Management: Add
28.2.1.1 Adding Firmware from a Local Source
Take the following steps to add firmware from a local souce, such as you management
computer.
1 Log into Vantage Access using a manager account and click the File Manager icon in
the control panel.
2 Click Device Firmware > Firmware Management and click Add to display the Add
Firmware screen.
508
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 28 Device Firmware Maintenance
3 Select Add File From Local.
4 Specify the path and name of the device firmware file in the File Path and Name field,
or click Browse to locate it.
5 In the Device Type field, select the device model for the firmware from the drop-down
list, or type the model name in the field (up to 64 characters using “0-9”, “a-z”, “A-Z”,
“_”, “-”, “(”, “)”, “.”, or spaces).
6 In the Firmware Version field, enter a descriptive name for the firmware file. You can
enter up to 250 characters (using “0-9”, “a-z”, “A-Z”, “_”, “-”, “(”, “)”, “.”, or spaces).
7 Click Apply to save the device firmware file to the download server.
28.2.1.2 Adding Firmware From a Remote Source
Take the following steps to add firmware from a URL.
1 Log into Vantage Access using a manager account and click the File Manager icon in
the control panel.
2 Click Device Firmware > Firmware Management and click Add to display the Add
Firmware screen.
3 Select Add File From Remote.
4 Specify the firmware’s URL.
5 Specify a server User Name and Password, if required.
6 Specify a File Size, if necessary.
7 In the Device Type field, select the device model for the firmware from the drop-down
list, or type the model name in the field (up to 64 characters using “0-9”, “a-z”, “A-Z”,
“_”, “-”, “(”, “)”, “.”, or spaces).
8 In the Firmware Version field, enter a descriptive name for the firmware file. You can
enter up to 250 characters (using “0-9”, “a-z”, “A-Z”, “_”, “-”, “(”, “)”, “.”, or spaces).
9 Click Apply to save the device firmware file to the download server.
28.2.2 Deleting a Device Firmware File
"
You cannot delete a firmware file that is currently being used to perform
firmware upgrade on a device.
Follow the steps below to delete a device firmware from the server (specified in the Download
Server screen).
1 Log into Vantage Access using a manager account and click the File Manager icon in
the control panel.
2 Click Device Firmware > Management and select one or more than one firmware files
in the same screen.
3 Click Delete.
4 A pop-up screen displays. Click OK to start the file removal process.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
509
Chapter 28 Device Firmware Maintenance
Figure 495 File Manager: Device Firmware: Firmware Management: Delete
28.3 Firmware Upgrade
You must first upload and store new device firmware files on the download server using the
Firmware Management screen. Refer to Chapter 28 on page 507.
After you have stored device firmware files on the download server, you can perform remote
firmware upgrade on one or a group of managed device (of the same type for a registered
device) in the Firmware Upgrade screen.
You can use this screen to manually update the device firmware or set a schedule for Vantage
Access to automatically update the firmware.
28.3.1 Manual Firmware Upgrade
Follow the steps below to manually upgrade firmware to one or more device(s) through
Vantage Access.
1 Log into Vantage Access using a manager account and click the File Manager icon in
the control panel.
2 Select a device in the Device List window. To upgrade firmware on a group of devices,
select a device group folder in the Topology panel.
3 Click Device Firmware > Upgrade to display the configuration screen.
Figure 496 File Manager: Device Firmware: Firmware Upgrade
4 In the table, select a firmware file that you want to update to the device(s). Refer to Table
300 on page 508 for field descriptions.
5 If you want to request a connection to the device before performing the upgrade, select
Connection Request.
510
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 28 Device Firmware Maintenance
"
This feature is not available when you are upgrading a group’s firmware.
6 If you want to wait a short time before performing the firmware upgrade, enter the
number of seconds to wait in the Delay Seconds field.
7 Click Apply to start the firmware upgrade process. Click Reset to start configuring this
screen again.
If the device(s) is on the network, Vantage Access sends the firmware file to the device(s)
immediately.
If the device(s) is off the network, Vantage Access saves the firmware upgrade request. Once
the device(s) is available, the request is immediately carried out.
You can view a list of manual firmware requests in the Device Firmware > Upgrade List
screen.
28.3.2 Scheduled Firmware Upgrade
Follow the steps below to manually upgrade firmware to one or more devices through Vantage
Access.
1 Log into Vantage Access using a manager account and click the File Manager icon in
the control panel.
2 Select a device in the Device List window. To upgrade firmware on a group of devices,
select a device group folder in the Topology panel.
3 Click Device Firmware > Upgrade to display the configuration screen (see Figure 496
on page 510).
4 In Select Firmware, select a firmware file that you want to update to the device(s).
Refer to Table 300 on page 508 for field descriptions.
5 Select Enable Scheduled to configure a schedule for the firmware upgrade.
6 In the Date field, specify the date on which the upgrade is to take place. Enter the date in
the format yyy-mm-dd. Alternatively, click the calendar icon ( ) to pick a date from
the calendar.
7 In the Time field, specify the time at which the upgrade is to take place. Enter the time in
the format hh:mm:ss.
8 Click Apply to save the settings or click Reset to start configuring this screen again.
You can view a list of scheduled firmware upgrade settings in the Upgrade List screen.
28.4 Firmware Upgrade Request Lists
After you have set the Firmware Upgrade screen, you can view the list of manual or
scheduled firmware upgrade requests in the Upgrade List screen.
28.4.1 Upgrade List
You can see the list of configured firmware upgrades in the Upgrade List screen.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
511
Chapter 28 Device Firmware Maintenance
1 Log into Vantage Access using a manager account and click the File Manager icon in
the control panel.
2 Select a device in the Device List panel. To view pending firmware requests for a group
of devices, select a device group folder in the Topology panel.
3 Click Device Firmware > Upgrade List to display the screen.
Figure 497 Device Firmware: Device Firmware: Scheduled Upgrade List
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 301 File Manager: Device Firmware: Scheduled Upgrade List
512
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Entries Per
Page
Select how many entries you want to display in a page.
#
Select this option and click Delete to remove the entry.
Choose Select All to select all entries.
Dev Name
This field displays the descriptive name of the device.
OUI-SN
This field displays the OUI and serial number of the device.
Dev Type
This field displays the model name for which this firmware is intended.
SW Version
This field displays the version of the firmware.
Scheduled
Time
This field displays the time Vantage Access will perform remote firmware upgrade on
the device. The time in the format yyyy-mm-ddThh:mm:ss. For example, 2006-0920T05:30:00 means 5:30 AM on September 20th in 2006.
Delete
Click Delete to remove the selected firmware upgrade schedule(s) only before the
device starts the firmware upgrade. You can check the status and result in the
History screen.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
CHAPTER
29
Vendor Configuration File
This chapter describes the Vendor Config File screens which you use to manage device
configuration files on the file server or restore device configuration files to managed devices.
29.1 Vendor Configuration File Overview
The configuration file (or romfile) on a device contains the device settings. Changes made
through the device web configurator, SMT or the CLI are saved in the configuration file. You
can back up the configuration file from a device or restore it back to the device.
To display the File Manager screens, log into Vantage Access using a manager account and
click the File Manager icon in the control panel.
You can restore or update the configuration file to one or more devices (of the same model)
through the Vantage Access server.
29.2 Available Device Configuration File
Use the Management screens to view a list of device configuration files on the file server.
When you back up configuration from a managed device, an entry is created in this screen.
You can click a link to download the device configuration file from the file server to your
computer. You can also use this screen to upload a configuration file to be restored to the
devices.
Log into Vantage Access using a manager account and click the File Manager icon in the
control panel. Then click Vendor Config File > Management to display the screen.
Figure 498 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Management
Vantage Access User’s Guide
513
Chapter 29 Vendor Configuration File
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 302 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Management
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Entries Per
Page
Select how many entries you want to display in a page.
#
Select this option and click Delete to remove the device configuration file from the file
server.
Click Select All to select all entries in this screen.
File Name
This field displays the descriptive name of a file.
Click on a name to download the file to your computer.
Dev Type
This field displays the model name for which this file is intended.
File Added
Time
This field displays the time the file was created.
Next
Click Next to go to the next screen.
First
This link is not available in the first screen.
Click First to return to the first screen.
Prev
Click Prev to go to the previous screen.
Last
This link is not available in the last screen.
Click Last to go to the last screen.
Add
Click Add to upload a device configuration file to the file server.
Delete
Click Delete to remove the selected file(s).
29.2.1 Adding a Vendor Configuration File
Use the Add Vendor Configuration File screen to upload a device configuration file to the
file server. You can later configure Vantage Access to restore this configuration file to the
device(s) you specify.
Figure 499 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Management: Add
29.2.1.1 Adding a Vendor Configuration File From a Local Source
Take the following steps to add a vendor config file from a local source, such as your
management computer.
1 Log into Vantage Access using a manager account and click the File Manager icon in
the control panel.
514
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 29 Vendor Configuration File
2
3
4
5
Click Vendor Config File > Management in the navigation panel.
In the Management screen, click Add.
The Add Vendor Config File screen displays. Select Add File From Local.
Specify the location and name of the configuration file in the File Path and Name field
or click Browse to locate it.
6 Specify the device type for the configuration file.
7 Click Apply to start the file transfer process. After the file transfer is complete, a new
entry displays in the Management screen.
29.2.1.2 Adding a Vendor Configuration File From a Remote Source
Take the following steps to add a vendor config file from a URL.
1 Log into Vantage Access using a manager account and click the File Manager icon in
the control panel.
2 Click Vendor Config File > Management in the navigation panel.
3 In the Management screen, click Add.
4 The Add Vendor Config File screen displays. Select Add File From Remote.
5 Specify the file’s URL.
6 Specify a server User Name and Password, if required.
7 Specify a File Size, if necessary.
8 In the Device Type field, select the device model for the file from the drop-down list, or
type the model name in the field (up to 64 characters using “0-9”, “a-z”, “A-Z”, “_”, “-”,
“(”, “)”, “.”, or spaces).
9 Click Apply to save the device firmware file to the download server.
29.2.2 Downloading a Configuration File
Follow the steps below to download a file from the download server to your computer.
1 Log into Vantage Access using a manager account and click the File Manager icon in
the control panel.
2 Click Vendor Config File > Management in the navigation panel.
3 In the Management screen, click on a file you want to download.
4 A screen displays. Click Save.
5 Specify the location and name for the file and click Save again.
6 After the file transfer process is complete, click OK.
29.2.3 Deleting a Configuration File
Follow the steps below to delete a device configuration file from the download server.
1 Log into Vantage Access using a manager account and click the File Manager icon in
the control panel.
2 Click Vendor Config File > Management in the navigation panel.
3 In the Management screen, select the file(s) you want to remove from the download
server and click Delete
4 A screen displays. Click OK to delete the selected file(s). Otherwise click Cancel and
close the screen.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
515
Chapter 29 Vendor Configuration File
29.3 Backing up Device Configuration Files
Use the Backup screen to back up the current configuration of a device to the download
server. After you have backed up a configuration file, an entry is created in the Backup screen.
1 Log into Vantage Access using a manager account and click the File Manager icon in
the control panel.
2 Select a device in the Device List window.
3 Click Vendor Config File > Backup.
4 A screen displays as shown.
Figure 500 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Backup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 303 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Backup
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Upload File To Local
Select this to upload the vendor config file to the download server.
File Name
Enter the name of the file you want to upload.
Upload File To Remote
Select this to upload the vendor config file to a URL.
URL
Enter the URL to which you want to upload the file.
User Name
Enter a server user name, if required by the upload server.
Password
Enter a server password, if required by the upload server.
Connection Request
Select this if you want Vantage Access to send a connection request prior
to uploading the file.
Note: This feature is not available when you are
upgrading a group’s files.
516
Delay Seconds
If you want Vantage Access to wait a short period before uploading the file,
enter the number of seconds to wait here.
Enable Scheduled
Select this to have Vantage Access upload the file at a point in the future, or
at a regular interval.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 29 Vendor Configuration File
Table 303 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Backup
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Once
Select this to upload the file only once.
Date
Enter the date on which you want to upload the file in the formate yyy-mmdd. Alternatively, click the calendar icon to select a day from the calendar.
Time
Enter the time at which you want Vantage Access to upload the file in the
format hh:mm:ss.
Recurrence
Select this to upload the file at a regular interval.
Pattern
Select the frequency (Daily, Weekly or Monthly) with which you want the
file to be uploaded.
Apply
Click this to save your settings and begin the file transfer process (if
configured).
Note: If a file with the same name is already on the
download server, a warning screen displays. Click
OK or Cancel to close the warning screen. Only
one backup configuration file for a device may
exist on the download server.
Reset
Click this to return the fields in this screen to their defaults.
29.4 Backup Configuration File List
The Backup List screen displays a list of backup configuration files which are configured to
back up in the future.
Follow the steps below to display the screen.
1 Log into the Vantage Access server using a manager account and click the File Manager
icon in the control panel.
2 Select a device in the Device List window.
3 Click Vendor Config File > Backup List to display the screen.
Figure 501 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Backup List
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 304 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Backup List
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Entries Per
Page
Select how many entries you want to display in a page.
#
Select this option and click Delete to remove the device configuration file from the
download server.
Click Select All to select all entries in this screen.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
517
Chapter 29 Vendor Configuration File
Table 304 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Backup List (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Dev Name
This field displays the descriptive name of the device.
OUI-SN
This field displays the OUI and serial number of the device.
Device Type
This field displays the model name for which this file is intended.
File Name
This field displays the name of the backup configuration file.
Scheduled
Time
This field displays the time at which the upload will take place.
Next
Click Next to go to the next screen.
First
This link is not available in the first screen.
Click First to return to the first screen.
Prev
Click Prev to go to the previous screen.
Last
This link is not available in the last screen.
Click Last to go to the last screen.
Delete
Click Delete to remove the selected file(s).
29.5 Restoring Device Configuration
"
Restoring configuration replaces current configuration on a device.
You can use the Restore screen to restore configuration for a device or a group of devices. You
must first use the Management screen (see Figure 498 on page 513) to upload a device
configuration file to the download server.
Follow the steps below to restore configuration to device(s).
1 Log into the Vantage Access server using a manager account and click the File Manager
icon in the control panel.
2 Select a device or a device pool in the Device List window.
3 Click Vendor Config File > Restore to display the screen.
518
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 29 Vendor Configuration File
Figure 502 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Restore (for a device)
Figure 503 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Restore (for a device pool)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 305 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Restore
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Restore from each
device specific file
This field is available if you select a device pool.
Select this if you want to restore the corresponding configuration file to
each device in the device pool.
Restore from one file
This field is available if you select a device pool.
Select this if you want to restore a single configuration file to all devices in
the device pool.
Keyword
Enter a search term and click Search to see all matching files.
Entries Per Page
Select how many entries you want to display in a page.
#
Select this option and click Delete to remove the device configuration file
from the download server.
Click Select All to select all entries in this screen.
File Name
This field displays the name of the backup configuration file.
Dev Type
This field displays the model name for which this file is intended.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
519
Chapter 29 Vendor Configuration File
Table 305 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Restore
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
File Added Time
This field displays the time at which the file was created on the download
server.
Connection Request
This field is not selectable if you select a device pool.
Select this if you want Vantage Access to send a connection request prior
to restoring the file.
Note: This feature is not available when you are restoring
a group’s files.
Delay Seconds
If you want Vantage Access to wait a short period before restoring the file,
enter the number of seconds to wait here.
Enable Scheduled
Select this to have Vantage Access restore the file at a point in the future,
or at a regular interval.
Date
Enter the date on which you want to restore the file in the formate yyy-mmdd. Alternatively, click the calendar icon to select a day from the calendar.
Time
Enter the time at which you want Vantage Access to restore the file in the
format hh:mm:ss.
Apply
Click this to save your settings and begin the file transfer process (if
configured).
Reset
Click this to return the fields in this screen to their defaults.
29.5.1 Verifying Configuration Restore
After you have set Vantage Access to restore a configuration file to the selected device, a
configuration restore request is creates in the Restore List screen. Vantage Access will
automatically perform this action during the next device synchronization process.
To check that the configuration restore is successful, see the log entry in the History screen
(click the Provision Manager icon and History).
Figure 504 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Verify Restore Example
29.6 Configuration Restore Request List
After you have selected and applied to restore configuration to a device in the Restore screen,
you can check the request status in the Restore List screen. Once Vantage Access performs
the configuration restore action, the request entry is automatically removed from this screen
and a log entry is created in the History screen.
Follow the steps below to display the Restore List screen.
520
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 29 Vendor Configuration File
1 Log into the Vantage Access server using a manager account and click the File Manager
icon in the control panel.
2 Select a device in the Device List window.
3 Click Vendor Config File > Restore List to display the screen.
Figure 505 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Restore List
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 306 File Manager: Vendor Config File: Restore List
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Entries Per
Page
Select how many entries you want to display in a page.
#
Select this option and click Delete to remove the request entry from the download
server.
Click Select All to select all entries in this screen.
Dev Name
This field displays the descriptive name of a device.
OUI-SN
This field displays the OUI and serial number of the device.
Device Type
This field displays the model name for which this file is intended.
File Name
This field displays the name of the restore configuration file.
Scheduled
Time
This field displays the time at which the file restore is configured to take place.
Next
Click Next to go to the next screen.
First
This link is not available in the first screen.
Click First to return to the first screen.
Prev
Click Prev to go to the previous screen.
Last
This link is not available in the last screen.
Click Last to go to the last screen.
Go
Enter a page number and click Go to display the entries in that screen.
Delete
Click Delete to remove the selected file(s).
Vantage Access User’s Guide
521
Chapter 29 Vendor Configuration File
522
Vantage Access User’s Guide
P ART XI
System Manager
This part contains the following chapters.
•
•
•
•
•
Account Management (525)
Download Server (533)
System Maintenance (535)
License (539)
System Setting (543)
523
524
CHAPTER
30
Account Management
This chapter describes the User Management screens you use to configure Vantage Access
login accounts.
30.1 Types of Accounts
Vantage Access provides three account types with different privilege levels. The web
configurator screens vary depending on which account you use to log in. The following table
describes and shows the default user name and password for the different accounts.
Table 307 Types of Accounts
TYPE
PRIVILEGE
DEFAULT SETTINGS
Root
•
•
•
•
•
User name: root
Password: root
•
Create manager and guest accounts.
Associate/un-associate devices to manager accounts.
Import device information to Vantage Access.
Log file management.
General Vantage Access setup (such as download server
settings).
Log out other users.
manager
•
•
•
•
View and configure associated devices.
Vendor configuration file management.
Device firmware upgrade.
Import device information to Vantage Access.
No default account.
Call Center
•
View information of devices assigned to the manager or
the root/manager who created this account.
Perform simple configuration tasks.
No default account.
•
30.2 User Account Management
You can view a list of accounts in the User Management > User screen.
The root user can view and edit all accounts created on Vantage Access. Manager accounts can
only view and edit their own accounts.
Log into Vantage Access as root or a manager and click the System Manager icon in the
control panel. Then click User Management > User in the navigation panel to display the
screen.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
525
Chapter 30 Account Management
Figure 506 System Manager: User Management
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 308 System Manager: User Management
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
#
Select this box and click Delete to remove the account.
Name
This field displays the name of the user.
Login ID
This field displays the account user name.
Click the link to edit the account information.
Status
This field displays whether the account is currently in use (login) or not (logout).
Level
This field displays the type of the account.
User Group
If the user is a member of a user group, the name of the group displays here.
Made Logout
This field is available only to root. If a user is logged in, click this to forcibly log the
user out.
Description
This field displays additional information about the account.
Next
Click Next to go to the next screen.
First
This link is not available in the first screen.
Click First to return to the first screen.
Prev
Click Prev to go to the previous screen.
Last
This link is not available in the last screen.
Click Last to go to the last screen.
Add
Click Add to create an account (available for root only).
Delete
Click Delete to remove the selected account(s).
Note: You cannot delete an account that is currently in use.
30.3 Adding a User Account
To create an account, click Add in the User Management screen. Fields with asterisks “*” are
required information and cannot be left blank.
526
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 30 Account Management
Figure 507 System Manager: User Management: Add User
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 309 System Manager: User Management: Add User
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
State
Select Enable to activate this account.
Select Disable to deactivate this account. In this case, you cannot log in using this
account.
Level
Specify the account type.
Select manager to create a manager account.
Select call-center to create an account for your call center operation.
Name
Enter the name of the person using this account. You can enter up to 250
characters (0-9, A-Z, a-z, -, _ with no spaces).
Login ID
Specify the user name for this manager account. You can enter up to 32
characters (0-9, A-Z, a-z, -, _ with no spaces).
Password
Specify the password associated to this account. You can enter up to 12
characters (0-9, A-Z, a-z, -, _ with no spaces). The characters are displayed as
asterisks “*” in this field.
Password
Confirm
Specify the login password again for confirmation.
Email Address
Specify the e-mail address (up to 250 characters) of the person using this
manager account. You must enter a valid e-mail address in the format
[email protected]
Description
Enter additional information about this account. You can enter up to 250
characters (0-9, A-Z, a-z, -, _ and spaces are allowed).
IP Span Allowed
If you want to restrict the IP address from which this user may log in, enter the
range of allowed IP addresses in this field. If you do not want to place a limit, leave
this field blank.
Expire Date
Enter the date on which this user account will be disabled in yyyy-mm-dd format.
Alternatively, click the calendar icon to select the date from the calendar.
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen.
Apply
Click Apply to save the settings and return to the main User Management
screen.
Reset
Click Reset to start configuring this screen again.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
527
Chapter 30 Account Management
30.4 Editing Account Information
You can use the Update User screen to change the password or contact information of an
account.
"
You cannot change the account settings when a user is currently logged in
using the account.
1 Log into the web configuration as root and click the System Manager icon in the control
panel.
2 Click User Management > User and click the Login ID link of an account not currently
in use. The Update User screen displays.
3 Change the information in the applicable fields. Refer to Table 309 on page 527 for field
descriptions.
30.5 Deleting an Account
The following lists the rules for deleting accounts from Vantage Access.
• The root account cannot be deleted.
• A root user can delete any account (except root).
• You cannot delete an account that is currently used to log into Vantage Access.
Follow the steps below to remove an account from Vantage Access.
1 Log into the web configurator as root or manager and click the System Manager icon in
the control panel.
2 Click User Management > User in the navigation panel.
3 Select one or more accounts and click Delete.
4 A pop-up screen displays. Click OK to remove the account. Otherwise click Cancel.
Figure 508 Administration: Management: Delete Account Prompt
"
528
Vantage Access automatically removes the firmware file(s) and the vendor
configuration file(s) associated to a deleted user account.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 30 Account Management
30.6 User Groups
This section shows you how to configure user groups. User groups link users and device
groups. If you want to associate a manager account with a device group, you must associate
the user with a user group. Use this screen to set up user groups and assign users to them.
"
To edit an existing user group, click its name in this screen. The screen that
displays is the same as the Add User Group screen.
Click System Manager > User Management > User Group. The following screen displays.
Figure 509 System Manager: User Management: User Group
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 310 System Manager: User Management: User Group
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Entries Per Page
Select how many entries you want to display in a page.
#
Select this option and click Delete to delete the user group.
Click Select All to select all entries in this screen.
User Group Name
This displays the name of the user group.
Note: Click the name to edit the group.
Device Group Name
This displays the name of any decvice group associated with this user
group.
User Group Description
This displays addditional information about the user group.
Next
Click Next to go to the next screen.
First
This link is not available in the first screen.
Click First to return to the first screen.
Prev
Click Prev to go to the previous screen.
Last
This link is not available in the last screen.
Click Last to go to the last screen.
Add
Click Add to configure a new user group.
Delete
Click Delete to remove the selected user group(s).
Vantage Access User’s Guide
529
Chapter 30 Account Management
30.6.1 Add or Edit User Group
Use this screen to configure a new user group, edit an existing group, and associate users and
device groups.
Click System Manager > User Management > User Group > Add. The following screen
displays.
Figure 510 System Manager: User Management: User Group: Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 311 System Manager: User Management: User Group: Add
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Group Name
Enter a name for this user group
Description
Enter additional information about this user group, if required.
Add User to Group
User Pool
This is the list of available users who are not already part of the user group.
User List
This is the list of users who are already part of this user group.
Add
Select a user in the User Pool panel and click this to add the user to the
User List panel.
Remove
Select a user in the User List panel and click this to add the user to the
User Pool panel.
Binding Device Group
530
Device Group Pool
This is the list of available device groups that are not already associated
with this user group.
Binding Device
Group
This is the list of device groups that are already associated with this user
group.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 30 Account Management
Table 311 System Manager: User Management: User Group: Add
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add
Select a device group in the Device Group Pool panel and click this to add
the device group to the Binding Device Group list.
Remove
Select a device group in the Binding Device Group panel and click this to
add it to the Device Group Pool panel.
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen.
Apply
Click this to save your changes in this screen and return to the User Group
screen.
30.7 Common Settings
Use this screen to configure password settings that apply to all Vantage Access users.
Click System Manager > User Management > Common Setting. The following screen
displays.
Figure 511 System Manager: User Management: Common Setting
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 312 System Manager: User Management: Common Setting
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Max wrong password
retries allowed
Enter the number of times a user may enter an incorrect password before
Vantage Access takes the action you configure in the After allowed max
retries reached field.
After allowed max retries
reached
Select the action you want Vantage Access to take if a user exceeds the
number of incorrect password entries you specify in the Max wrong
password retries allowed field.
If you select Disable the user, the user cannot log in until you reactivate
the account.
If you select Allow retry after, enter the number of minutes after which the
user may try to log in again.
Password expires
If you want to require users to change their passwords after a certain length
of time, select Expires after and enter the number of days after which a
user must change the password.
Apply
Click this to save your changes to this screen.
Reset
Click this to return the fields in this screen to their last-saved values.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
531
Chapter 30 Account Management
532
Vantage Access User’s Guide
CHAPTER
31
Download Server
This chapter describes the System Manager > Download Server screen.
31.1 The Download Server Screen
The download server is the location in which all firmware files, vendor configuration files and
maintenance files are stored. You must configure the download server before you can store,
upload or download any such files (unless you do so to a local computer).
Click System Manager > Download Server. The following screen displays.
Figure 512 System Manager: Download Server
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 313 System Manager: Download Server
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IP Address
Enter the download server’s IP address and port number.
User Name
Enter the user name you use to access the server, if required (maximum 31
characters).
Password
Enter the password associated with the above User Name (maximum 31
characters).
Apply
Click this to save the configuration changes you made in this screen.
Test
Click this to test the connection to the download server.
Reset
Click this to return the fields in this screen to their last-saved values.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
533
Chapter 31 Download Server
534
Vantage Access User’s Guide
CHAPTER
32
System Maintenance
This chapter discusses the System Manager > System Maintenance screens. These screens
allow you to manage, backup and restore Vantage Access system configuration files.
32.1 The System Maintenance Management Screen
This screen contains details of the backup system configuration files stored on the download
server and the backup of Vantage Access’s database. You can also delete the files.
Click System Manager > System Maintenance > Management. The following screen
displays.
Figure 513 System Manager: System Maintenance: Management
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 314 System Manager: System Maintenance: Management
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Entries Per Page
Select how many entries you want to display in a page.
#
Select this option and click Delete to remove the system configuration files
from the download server.
Click Select All to select all entries in this screen.
Name
This displays the name of the system configuration file.
Description
This displays addition information about the system configuration file.
Backup Time
This displays the time at which the backup system configuration file was
stored.
Delete
Click this to delete the selected backup system configuration file or files.
32.2 The System Maintenance Backup Screen
Use this screen to save Vantage Access’s current system configuration to your local computer
or the download server as a .zip file.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
535
Chapter 32 System Maintenance
Click System Manager > System Maintenance > Backup. The following screen displays.
Figure 514 System Manager: System Maintenance: Backup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 315 System Manager: System Maintenance: Backup
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Destination
Select To Server to save Vantage Access’s current configuration to the
download server.
Select To Your Computer to save Vantage Access’s current configuration
to your computer or a network drive.
File Name
Enter a filename for this configuration file.
Description
Enter some descriptive information about this configuration file that will
help you identify it in future.
Backup
Click this to save the configuration file.
32.3 The System Maintenance Restore Screen
Use this screen to upload Vantage Access’s system configuration from a previously-saved .zip
file. The .zip file may be located on your computer, a network drive, or the download server.
Click System Manager > System Maintenance > Restore. The following screen displays.
Figure 515 System Manager: System Maintenance: Restore
536
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 32 System Maintenance
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 316 System Manager: System Maintenance: Restore
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Destination
Select From Server to restore Vantage Access’s configuration from a file
saved on the download server. When you use this option, select a File
Name from the drop-down list box and click Restore to begin uploading the
configuration.
Select From Your Computer to restore Vantage Access’s configuration
from a file saved on your computer or a network drive. When you use this
option, enter the configuration file’s File Path and Name, or click
Choose... to locate the file.
Restore
Click this to upload the specified configuration file.
Note: Any configuration changes you made since the
configuration file was saved will be lost.
When the configuration file is successfully restored, Vantage Access
restarts. Log back in to continue configuring Vantage Access.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
537
Chapter 32 System Maintenance
538
Vantage Access User’s Guide
CHAPTER
33
License
This chapter discusses the System Maintenance > License screen.
33.1 License Overview
The license number on the included license card allows you to use Vantage Access to manage
a limited number of devices. To manage more devices using Vantage Access, you need to
purchase a standard license. Once you have upgraded to the standard version, you can enjoy
free product updates and customer support from ZyXEL.
33.2 The License Screen
This screen displays information about your Vantage Access license, and the number of
devices you may manage under the current license.
Click System Manager > System Maintenance > License. The following screen displays.
Figure 516 System Manager: System Maintenance: License (Trial)
Figure 517 System Manager: System Maintenance: License (Standard)
Vantage Access User’s Guide
539
Chapter 33 License
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 317 System Manager: System Maintenance: License
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
License Type
This field displays the type of license (Trial or Standard).
Account
This field displays the myzyxel.com account user name.
Authentication
Code (AC)
This field displays the authentication code.
Number of
devices allowed
with this license
This field displays the number of devices Vantage Access can manage with this
license number.
Current number
of devices being
managed
This field displays the number of devices Vantage Access is currently managing.
Upgrade
Click Upgrade to display the Upgrade License screen you use to upgrade the
Vantage Access license.
Refresh
Click this to update the license status from the www.myzyxel.com website.
33.3 The License Upgrade Screen
Use this screen to upgrade your Vantage Access license. Upgrading allows you to manage
more devices.
Click System Maintenance > License and then click Upgrade to open the screen. The
available fields vary depending on the license type you are currently using.
Figure 518 System Maintenance: License: Upgrade (Trial)
Figure 519 System Maintenance: License: Upgrade (Standard)
540
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 33 License
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 318 System Maintenance: License: Upgrade
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
License Key
Enter the license key you were given by ZyXEL.
New myZyXEL.com
account
Select this if you do not already have a myZyXEL.com username and
password.
Existing myZyXEL.com
account
Select this if you already have a myZyXEL.com username and password.
User Name
If you selected Existing myZyXEL.com account, enter your
myZyXEL.com username.
If you selected New myZyXEL.com account, Enter the username you
want to use on myZyXEL.com. Click the Check Name button to make sure
that your username is unique.
Password
If you selected Existing myZyXEL.com account, enter your
myZyXEL.com password.
If you selected New myZyXEL.com account, Enter the password you
want to use on myZyXEL.com.
Retype Password
Enter your password again.
E-mail Address
If you selected New myZyXEL.com account, enter your E-mail address.
Country
If you selected New myZyXEL.com account, select the country in which
you are located.
Apply
Click this to activate your license upgrade, and apply for your new
myZyXEL.com account, if requested.
Back
Click this to return to the License screen.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
541
Chapter 33 License
542
Vantage Access User’s Guide
CHAPTER
34
System Setting
This chapter discusses the System Manager > System Setting screen.
34.1 The System Setting Screen
This screen allows you to configure time limits for a variety of features that require connection
to an external server or managed devices.
Click System Manager > System Setting. The following screen displays.
Figure 520 System Manager: System Setting
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 319 System Manager: System Setting
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Mail Interval
Enter the maximum length of time Vantage Access waits to access the
mail server.
Connect Download
Server Timeout
Enter the maximum length of time Vantage Access waits to connect to the
download server.
Upload to Download
Server Timeout
Enter the maximum length of time Vantage Access waits to upload to the
download server.
Connect to
www.myzyxel.com
Timeout
Enter the maximum length of time Vantage Access waits to access
myzyxel.com.
Firmware Upgrading
Timeout
Enter the maximum length of time Vantage Access waits to upgrade a
device’s firmware.
Configuration File
Backup Timeout
Enter the maximum length of time Vantage Access waits to back up a
configuration file.
Configuration File
Restore Timeout
Enter the maximum length of time Vantage Access waits to restore a
configuration file.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
543
Chapter 34 System Setting
Table 319 System Manager: System Setting
544
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Apply
Click this to save the changes you made in this screen.
Reset
Click this to return the fields in this screen to their last-saved values.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
P ART XII
Monitor Manager
This part contains the following chapters.
• Log Management (547)
• Alert Setting (555)
545
546
CHAPTER
35
Log Management
This chapter describes the Monitor Manager > Log Management screens. To view these
screens, log into Vantage Access as root.
35.1 The History Screen
Use this screen to view Vantage Access logs of all types, search for sepcific types of log, and
export log files.
Click Monitor Manager > Log Management > History. The following screen displays.
Figure 521 Monitor Manager: Log Management: History
Vantage Access User’s Guide
547
Chapter 35 Log Management
The following table describes the labels in this screen
Table 320 Monitor Manager: Log Management: History
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Select Time Period
Enter the start and end dates for the logs you want to see in the format:
YYYY-MM-DD. Alternatively, click a calendar icon ( ) and select the date.
The first calendar icon sets the start date, and the second calendar icon
sets the end date.
Select category of logs
Select the type of logs to display or select All to display all logs.
Keyword
Enter a search term, if required. Vantage Access searches the Content,
Dev Name, OUI-SN, Dev IP, User Name and User IP fields.
Retrieve
Click Retrieve to display the logs based on your search criteria.
Export
This button is available for the root or a manager account.
Click this to save the results in this screen as a CSV file to your computer.
Change Columns
Click this to specify the columns you want to display in this screen. The
Change Columns screen displays.
Entries Per Page
Select how many entries you want to display in a page.
Time
This field displays the time the log was created.
Content
This field displays the log message.
Dev Name
This field displays the device name.
Dev IP
This field displays the device’s IP address.
OUI-SN
This field displays the device’s Organizationally Unique Identifier (OUI) and
serial number (SN).
User Name
This field displays the name of the user who made the change.
User IP
This field displays the IP address of the user who made the change.
Next
Click Next to go to the next screen.
First
This link is not available in the first screen.
Click First to return to the first screen.
Prev
Click Prev to go to the previous screen.
Last
This link is not available in the last screen.
Click Last to go to the last screen.
Go
Enter a page number (1-9) and click Go to display the entries in that page.
35.2 The Log Archive Screen
Use this screen to download or delete logs saved on the download server. Click Log Manager
> Log Archive. The following screen displays.
548
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 35 Log Management
Figure 522 Log Manager: Log Archive
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 321 Log Manager: Log Archive
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
#
Select this option and click Delete to remove the log file(s) from the
download server.
Click Select All to select all entries in this screen.
File Name
This displays the name of the saved log file. Log files have a .zip extension.
Click the name to download the log file to your computer.
Log Type
This field displays the type of saved log file.
Description
This field contains additional information about the saved log file.
Next
Click Next to go to the next screen.
First
This link is not available in the first screen.
Click First to return to the first screen.
Prev
Click Prev to go to the previous screen.
Last
This link is not available in the last screen.
Click Last to go to the last screen.
Go
Enter a page number (1-9) and click Go to display the entries in that page.
35.3 The Log Settings Screen
Use this screen to configure how long Vantage Access holds log records in memory before
archiving them, and how long it holds archive records before discarding them. You can also set
up how often device debug logs are saved on Vantage Access.
Click Monitor Manager > Log Management > Log Setting. The following screen displays.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
549
Chapter 35 Log Management
Figure 523 Monitor Manager: Log Management: Log Setting
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 322 Monitor Manager: Log Management: Log Setting
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Log Setting
Use this section to configure how long logs and log archives are retained.
Log Reserve Days
Enter the number of days you want logs to remain in Vantage Access’s
database befure they are automatically compressed, archived to the
download server, and removed from Vantage Access.
Log File Reserve
Days
Select the number of months you want archives to remain on the download
server before they are deleted.
Apply
Click this to save tthe settings in the Log Setting section of this screen.
Reset
Click this to return the settings in the Log Setting section of this screen to
their last-saved vallues.
Log Debug On
Use this section to configure which managed devices have their debug
logs saved on Vantage Access’s database.
#
Select this option and click Delete to remove the device entry from this list.
Click Select All to select all entries in this screen.
Entries Per Page
Select how many entries you want to display in a page.
Dev Name
This displays the name of the managed device.
OUI-SN
This displays the OUI and serial number of the managed device.
Add
Click this to add a managed device to the Log Debug On list. The Select
Device screen displays.
Delete
Select a managed device and click this to remove the device from the Log
Debug On list.
35.3.1 The Select Device Screen
Use this screen to add a managed device to the Log Setting screen’s Log Debug On list. All
devices on this list have their debug logs saved on Vantage Access’s database.
Click Monitor Manager > Log Management > Log Setting > Add. The following screen
displays.
550
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 35 Log Management
Figure 524 Monitor Manager: Log Management: Log Setting: Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 323 Monitor Manager: Log Management: Log Setting: Add
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Keyword
Enter a keyword (such as a device name or serial number) and click
Search to display the related entries.
Entries Per Page
Select how many entries you want to display in a page.
#
Select this option and click Apply to add the device (or devices) to the Log
Debug On list.
Click Select All to select all entries in this screen.
Dev Name
This field displays the device name.
OUI-SN
This field displays the Organization Unique Identifier (OUI) and the serial
number of a device.
Dev Type
This field displays the device’s model name.
SW Version
This field displays the firmware version the device is currently running.
Next
Click Next to go to the next screen.
First
This link is not available in the first screen.
Click First to return to the first screen.
Prev
Click Prev to go to the previous screen.
Last
This link is not available in the last screen.
Click Last to go to the last screen.
Go
Enter a page number (1-9) and click Go to display the entries in that page.
Back
Click this to reuturn to the previous page without saving your settings.
Apply
Click this to add the selected device or devices to the Log Debug On list.
Reset
Click this to return the labels in this screen to their default values.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
551
Chapter 35 Log Management
35.4 The TR-069 Log Management Screen
Use this screen to manage TR-069 logs. Click Monitor Manager > tr069 Log Management.
The following screen displays.
Figure 525 Monitor Manager: TR-069 Log Management
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 324 Monitor Manager: TR-069 Log Management
552
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
tr069Log Level
Select the TR-060 log level you want to see. The default value is error.
Level Effective Time
Enter the duration of the debug log in hours. The default is 24 hours.
Purge
Click this to purge the log manually.
Apply
Click this to save the changes in the tr069Log Level and Debug Effective
Time fields.
Reset
Click this to return the tr069Log Level and Debug Effective Time fields to
their last-saved values.
Entries Per Page
Select how many entries you want to display in a page.
#
Select this option and click Delete to remove the log file(s).
Click Select All to select all entries in this screen.
File Name
This displays the TR-069 log file name. Click the name to download the file
to your computer.
Log Type
This displays the type of TR-069 log.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 35 Log Management
Table 324 Monitor Manager: TR-069 Log Management
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Description
This displays a description of the log.
Next
Click Next to go to the next screen.
First
This link is not available in the first screen.
Click First to return to the first screen.
Prev
Click Prev to go to the previous screen.
Last
This link is not available in the last screen.
Click Last to go to the last screen.
Go
Enter a page number (1-9) and click Go to display the entries in that page.
Delete
Select log files and click this to remove the TR-069 log files.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
553
Chapter 35 Log Management
554
Vantage Access User’s Guide
CHAPTER
36
Alert Setting
This chapter describes the Email Server and Email Alert screens you use to specify a mail
server and the type of logs to send.
36.1 Specifying an Email Server
Use the Email Server screen to specify the e-mail account to which Vantage Access sends the
logs and alerts.
Log into Vantage Access as root and click the Monitor Manager icon in the control panel.
Then click Alert Setting > Email Server to display the configuration screen.
Figure 526 Monitor Manager: Alert Setting: Email Server
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 325 Monitor Manager: Alert Setting: Email Server
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Email Server
IP or Domain
Name
Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e-mail addresses
specified below. If this field is left blank, logs and alert messages will not be sent via
e-mail.
Email Sender
Enter the e-mail address that you want to be in the from/sender line of the log e-mail
message that the Vantage Access sends. If you activate SMTP authentication, the
e-mail address must be able to be authenticated by the mail server as well.
User Name
Enter the user name (up to 31 characters) (usually the user name of a mail
account).
Password
Enter the password associated with the user name above.
Apply
Click Apply to save the changes.
Reset
Click Reset to start configuring this screen again.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
555
Chapter 36 Alert Setting
36.2 Configuring Email Alert
You must first use the Email Server screen to configure an email server which Vantage
Access uses to send logs.
Use the Email Alert screen to specify which types of logs the Vantage Access server is to
send. Depending upon the type of log, the Vantage Access server sends the alert email(s)
immediately or every 30 minutes.
Follow the steps below to configure the Email Alert screen.
1 Log into Vantage Access as root and click the Monitor Manager icon in the control
panel.
2 Click Alert Setting > Email Alert to display the configuration screen.
556
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 36 Alert Setting
Figure 527 Monitor Manager: Alert Setting: Email Alert
Vantage Access User’s Guide
557
Chapter 36 Alert Setting
3 Click a category under Log Type and click the corresponding Alert button to select the
log.
4 Specify one or more email addresses to which the Vantage Access sever sends email
alerts. Select the email address(es) from the Email Pool box and click Add ->.
To remove an email address, select the address in the Email List box and click <Remove.
To remove an email address from the Email Pool box, select the address and click
Delete.
To add a new email address, enter the address in the New Email field and click Add
New Email. A new entry displays in the Email Pool box.
5 Click Apply to save the changes.
36.3 The Disk Space Monitor Screen
Use this screen to edit the maximum percentage of disk space that may be used.
Click Monitor Manager > Disk Space Monitor > Monitor Setting. The following screen
displays.
Figure 528 Monitor Manager: Disk Space Monitor: Monitor Setting
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 326 Monitor Manager: Disk Space Monitor: Monitor Setting
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Define the range of the
max allowed disk space
Enter the maximum percentage of the disk that may be used.
Apply
Click this to save your changes to the Define the range of the max
allowed disk space field.
Reset
Click this to return the Define the range of the max allowed disk space
field to its last-saved value.
36.4 The Disk Space View Screen
Use this screen to view statistics about the amount of disk space used by Vantage Access’s
components.
Click Monitor Manager > Disk Space Monitor > Disk Space View. The following screen
displays.
558
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 36 Alert Setting
Figure 529 Monitor Manager: Disk Space Monitor: Disk Space View
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 327 Monitor Manager: Disk Space Monitor: Disk Space View
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Disk Monitor Type
This displays the Vantage Access component name.
Disk Monitor IP
This displays the IP address of the Linux system which your database or
BED is on.
Disk Size
This displays the total disk space.
Disk Used Size
This displays the amount of disk space currently in use.
TR069_DB Size
This displays the size of the TR-069 database.
TR069_BED Size
This displays the size of the TR-069 BED.
TR069_HTTPD Size
This displays the size of the TR-069 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
Daemon.
TMP FILE Size
This displays the size of all files in the temp directory.
Disk Used chart
This displays the percentage of the disk used by the specified component.
36.5 The Statistical Report Screen
Use this screen to configure the frequency and destination e-mail address of the statistical
reports Vantage Access sends. These reports include information on the total number of
devices, the number of registered devices, and the change in the total number of devices (and
registered devices) in a given time period.
Click Monitor Manager > Statistical Report. The following screen displays.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
559
Chapter 36 Alert Setting
Figure 530 Monitor Manager: Statistical Report
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 328 Monitor Manager: Statistical Report
560
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
State
Select Enable to send statistical reports via email.
Select Disable to not send statistical reports via email.
Start Date
Enter the date on which the report should start. Enter the date in yyyy-mmdd format, or click the calendar icon and select the date.
End Date
Enter the date on which the report should end. Enter the date in yyyy-mmdd format, or click the calendar icon and select the date.
Pattern
Select Daily to send reports every day. Select Monthly to send reports
every month, on the day you specify in the Every field.
Every
If you selected Monthly in the Pattern field, enter the day of the month on
which you want reports to be sent.
Email Address
Enter the email address (or addresses) to which the reports should be sent.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
P ART XIII
Diagnostics and
Call Center
This part contains the following chapters.
• Diagnostic Manager (563)
• Call Center (571)
561
562
CHAPTER
37
Diagnostic Manager
This chapter discusses the Diagnostics Manager screens. Use these screens to configure,
schedule and perform a wide range of tasks on managed devices.
37.1 Telnet File Management
Use this screen to manage telnet files used for troubleshooting managed devices. These are
CSV (Comma-Separated Value) files that contain a list of the IP addresses, usernames and
passwords of the devices that recewive telnet commands. Click Diagnostics Manager >
Telnet > File Management. The following screen displays.
Figure 531 Diagnostics Manager: Telnet: File Management
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 329 Diagnostics Manager: Telnet: File Management
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Entries Per Page
Select how many entries you want to display in a page.
#
Select this option and click Delete to remove the telnet file(s).
Click Select All to select all entries in this screen.
Task file name
This is the telnet file name.
Description
This is a short description of the telnet file.
Next
Click Next to go to the next screen.
First
This link is not available in the first screen.
Click First to return to the first screen.
Prev
Click Prev to go to the previous screen.
Last
This link is not available in the last screen.
Click Last to go to the last screen.
Go
Enter a page number and click Go to display the entries in that screen.
Add
Click this to add a telnet file to the list.
Delete
Click Delete to remove the selected file(s).
Vantage Access User’s Guide
563
Chapter 37 Diagnostic Manager
37.1.1 Adding a Telnet File
Use this screen to add a telnet task file to the telnet file list. Click Add in the Diagnostics
Manager > Telnet > File Management screen. The following screen displays.
Figure 532 Diagnostics Manager: Telnet: Add File
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 330 Diagnostics Manager: Telnet: Add File
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Telnet Task File
Enter the file path of the telnet command file to upload, or click Browse... to
select the file to upload.
File Example
Click the link to download an example of the telnet command CSV
(Comma-Separated Value) file.
Description
Enter a description of the file.
Back
Click this to return to the previous page without uploading a file.
Apply
Click this to upload the file and return to the previous page.
Cancel
Click this to clear all fields in this screen.
37.2 Task Management
Use this page to view, edit or delete scheduled, immediate or recurrent telnet tasks. Click
Diagnostics Manager > Telnet > Task Management. The following screen displays.
Figure 533 Diagnostics Manager: Telnet: Task Management
564
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 37 Diagnostic Manager
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 331 Diagnostics Manager: Telnet: Task Management
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Entries Per Page
Select how many entries you want to display in a page.
#
Select this option and click Delete to remove the task(s).
Click Select All to select all entries in this screen.
Task File Name
This displays the name of the telnet task file used for this task.
Task Type
This displays Immedate Task for a task that is currently in progress,
Scheduled Task for a task to be performed once at a specified point in the
future, or Recurrent Task for a regularly-scheduled task.
Schedule Time
This displays the time at which the task is scheduled to take place.
Command
This displays the commands the task uses.
Email
This displays the e-mail address (or addresses) to which a confirmation
notice will be sent once the task is complete.
Next
Click Next to go to the next screen.
First
This link is not available in the first screen.
Click First to return to the first screen.
Prev
Click Prev to go to the previous screen.
Last
This link is not available in the last screen.
Click Last to go to the last screen.
Go
Enter a page number and click Go to display the entries in that screen.
Add
Click this to add a scheduled task to the list.
Delete
Click Delete to remove the selected task(s).
37.2.1 Adding or Editing a Task
Use this screen to add a task to the Task Management list, based on a task file you already
uploaded. Click Diagnostics Manager > Telnet > Task Management, then click Add or
Edit. The following screen displays.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
565
Chapter 37 Diagnostic Manager
Figure 534 Diagnostics Manager: Telnet: Add or Edit Task
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 332 Diagnostics Manager: Telnet: Add or Edit Task
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Entries Per Page
Select how many entries you want to display in a page.
#
Select the task file you want to use.
Task File Name
This displays the name of the telnet task file.
Description
This displays a description of the telnet task file.
Task Command
Enter a new command (maximum 80 characters) and click Add to include it
in the list.
Select a command in the list and click Remove to delete it from the list.
Task Type
•
•
•
Select Immediate Task to perform the task immediately.
Select Scheduled Task to perform the task at a specified point in the
future. The following extra fields display.
Enter the Time at which the task should take place and click Add to
include it in the list. Select a time in the list and click Remove to delete
it. Add more times to the list if required.
Select Recurrent Task to perform the task at specified regular
intervals. The following extra fields display.
Enter the Start Time and enter the number of hours after which the
task should repeat.
566
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 37 Diagnostic Manager
Table 332 Diagnostics Manager: Telnet: Add or Edit Task
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Email
Enter an email address and click Add to include it in the list. Addresses in
the list receive an email when the task is completed.
Select an address in the list and click Remove to delete it from the list.
Back
Click this to return to the previous page without saving any changes.
Apply
Click this to save your changes and return to the previous page.
Cancel
Click this to return in this screen to their last-saved values.
37.3 Diagnostic Tests
Use this screen to view and manage scheduled diagnostic tests. Click Diagnostics Manager >
Diagnostic Test. The following screen displays.
Figure 535 Diagnostics Manager: Diagnostic Tests
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 333 Diagnostics Manager: Diagnostic Tests
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Entries Per Page
Select how many entries you want to display in a page.
#
Select this option and click Delete to remove the test(s).
Click Select All to select all entries in this screen.
Name
This displays the name of the managed device to be tested.
OUI-SN
This displays the OUI and serial number of the managed device to be
tested.
Type
This displays the type of test to be performed.
Status
This displays the current status of the diagnostic test (Initiated, Timeout or
Finished).
Time
This displays the time at which the diagnostic test was added.
Next
Click Next to go to the next screen.
First
This link is not available in the first screen.
Click First to return to the first screen.
Prev
Click Prev to go to the previous screen.
Last
This link is not available in the last screen.
Click Last to go to the last screen.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
567
Chapter 37 Diagnostic Manager
Table 333 Diagnostics Manager: Diagnostic Tests
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Go
Enter a page number and click Go to display the entries in that screen.
Add
Click this to add a diagnostic test to the list.
Delete
Click Delete to remove the selected file(s).
Replace
Click this to replace the selected diagnostic test.
37.3.1 Adding a Diagnostic Test
Use this screen to add a diagnostic test to the list. Click Add in the Diagnostics Manager >
Diagnostic Tests screen. The following screen displays.
Figure 536 Diagnostics Manager: Diagnostic Tests: Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 334 Diagnostics Manager: Diagnostic Tests: Add
568
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Keyword
Enter a search term and click Search to find matching devices.
#
Select the device upon which to perform the selected diagnostic test.
Name
This displays the device name.
OUI-SN
This displays the device’s OUI and serial number.
Type
This displays the device’s model number.
SW Version
This displays information about the firmware the device is using.
Next
Click Next to go to the next screen.
First
This link is not available in the first screen.
Click First to return to the first screen.
Prev
Click Prev to go to the previous screen.
Last
This link is not available in the last screen.
Click Last to go to the last screen.
Go
Enter a page number and click Go to display the entries in that screen.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 37 Diagnostic Manager
Table 334 Diagnostics Manager: Diagnostic Tests: Add
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Diagnostics Type
Select the type of test you want to run on the selected device.
• IP Ping Diagnostics: select this to run a ping test on the device’s WAN.
• WAN DSL Diagnostics: select this to run a test on the device’s DSL
connection.
• WAN ATM F5 Loopback Diagnostics: select this to run a loopback
diagnostic (ping) test result on the ATM later.
• LAN IP Ping Diagnostics: select this to run a ping test on the device’s
LAN.
Test-specific information displays below.
• DiagnosticsState or LoopDiagnosticsState: this field is read-only and
displays Requested.
• Interface: enter the interface to test.
• Host: enter an IP address or hostname to test.
• NumberOfRepetitions: enter the number of times Vantage Access
should repeat the test.
• Timeout: enter the number of seconds Vantage Access waits before
cancelling the test.
• DataBlockSize:
• DSCP: Enter the DiffServ Control Point value (0~64) for this test.
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
569
Chapter 37 Diagnostic Manager
570
Vantage Access User’s Guide
CHAPTER
38
Call Center
This chapter discusses the Call Center screen. This screen is helpful for your call center
operations. For example, checking a device’s information or status, modifying some basic
settings, or checking historical event logs for subscribers.
38.1 The Call Center Screen
Use this screen to search for device(s) and view their information for your call center
operations. You can also use this screen to configure actions applied to the CPE devices (using
CPE methods) and view historic logs. Log into the Web Configuration using a call-center
account. The following screen displays.
Figure 537 The Call Center Interface
Vantage Access User’s Guide
571
Chapter 38 Call Center
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 335 The Call Center Interface
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Keyword
Keyword
Enter a search term, if required. Vantage Access searches the Subscriber Name
and Telephone Number fields. Leave this field blank and click Search to search
all devices (registered and unregistered) in Vantage Access.
Search
Click this to start the search.
Reset
Click this to reset the Keyword field in this section.
Select Device
#
Select this option and click Check Status to check whether the device is on-line or
off-line.
Subscriber
This field displays the descriptive name for the subscriber user.
Telephone
This field displays the phone number used to contact the subscriber.
Name
This field displays the descriptive name of the device.
OUI-SN
This field displays the Organization Unique Identifier (OUI) and the serial number
of the device.
Type
This field displays the model of the device.
Next
Click Next to go to the next screen.
First
This link is not available in the first screen.
Click First to return to the first screen.
Prev
Click Prev to go to the previous screen.
Last
This link is not available in the last screen.
Click Last to go to the last screen.
Go
Enter a page number and click Go to display the entries in that screen.
Check Status
Select a device and click this to check whether the device is on-line or off-line.
Device Information
When you select a device, this section displays the device’s related information.
Manufacture
572
This field displays the name of the company that produced this device.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Chapter 38 Call Center
Table 335 The Call Center Interface
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Firmware
Version
This field displays the device firmware version number.
Device
Summary
This field displays the configuration template this device is currently using.
IP Address
This field displays the IP address of this device.
Configuration
Parameter
Name
Enter a full and valid parameter name. You can refer to the names shown in the
Parameter column when you select the Task Monitor tab below.
CPE Methods
This field is available when you enter a valid parameter name in the Parameter
Name field.
Select one of the following CPE methods, its additional settings appear.
SetParameterValues: select this to change the parameter value on the device.
GetParameterValues: select this to obtain parameter information from the device.
GetParameterNames: select this to obtain the parameter name(s) on the device.
SetParameterAttribute: select this to change the parameter settings on the
device.
GetParameterAttribute: select this to obtain parameter information from the
device.
Type
This field is available when you select SetParameterValues in the CPE Methods
field.
This field displays the type of characters you can enter for the parameter value in
the field below.
Value
This field is available when you select SetParameterValues in the CPE Methods
field.
This field displays the value for the parameter.
Attribute
This field is available when you select SetParameterAttributes in the CPE
Methods field.
Select Active Notification to set the device to send a notification message to the
Vantage Access server immediately when the value(s) of the parameter(s) is
changed.
Select Notification Off to set the device not to return a notification when the
value(s) of the parameter(s) is changed.
Select Passive Notification to set the device to send a notification message to
the Vantage Access server in the next session when the value(s) of the
parameter(s) is changed.
Apply
Click Apply to save the changes.
Reset
Click Reset to start configuring this screen again.
Task Monitor
Use this section to view all avaiable CPE methods on the device.
Method
This field displays the name of a CPE method.
Value
This field displays the value of a parameter.
Parameter
This field displays the name of the parameter.
History
Use this section to view all historical event logs on the device.
Time
This field displays the date and time when an event was recorded.
Content
This field displays the description of the event.
OUI-SN
This field displays the Organization Unique Identifier (OUI) and the serial number
of the device this event is related to.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
573
Chapter 38 Call Center
38.1.1 Default Gateway Setting Example
Follow the steps below to configure a CPE method, Device.LAN.DefaultGateway , using a
call center account.
1 Enter the beginning charactors of a parameter name in the Parameter Name field. For
example, “Device.L”. The matching parameters appear in the list.
You can also enter a full parameter name or copy and paste a parameter name from the
Task Monitor section of this screen. Select the parameter you want to configure.
2 The CPE Method field appears. Select the method you want to configure, such as
SetParameterValues in this example.
3 Additional fields appear. These fields may vary depending on the CPE method you
selected. Configure them. For example, enter 192.168.1.254 to change the LAN default
gateway IP on the CPE device. Click Apply to apply the change.
574
Vantage Access User’s Guide
P ART XIV
Troubleshooting,
Appendices and
Index
This part contains the following chapters.
•
•
•
•
•
Troubleshooting (577)
Product Specifications (579)
Legal Information (581)
Customer Support (609)
Index (615)
575
576
CHAPTER
39
Troubleshooting
This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential
problems are divided into the following categories.
39.1 Vantage Access Startup and Login
V
I cannot start Vantage Access.
1 You must reboot your computer after installing Vantage Access.
2 Make sure Vantage Access DB has started.
3 If the “Error: Remote DB is not alive!” message displays, this means that
you have specified the wrong Vantage Access DB server IP address. Uninstall and install
Vantage Access BED with the correct IP address.
4 Make sure you can connect to Vantage Access DB.
5 You may have specified the wrong Vantage Access DB server IP address during the
Vantage Access BED installation. In this case, uninstall and install Vantage Access BED
and enter the correct IP address during the installation process.
V
I cannot display the Vantage Access login screen.
1 This may happen if you have installed the Apache server with your Linux distribution.
You must uninstall the existing Apache HTTP download server from your Linux
computer.
2 If you installed Vantage Access BED and Vantage Access HTTPD on the same
computer, uninstall and install Vantage Access HTTPD is using a different port number
other than 80.
V
I cannot log into Vantage Access.
1 Make sure the Vantage Access server is turned on.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
577
Chapter 39 Troubleshooting
2 Make sure you have started Vantage Access on the server.
3 Make sure you enter the correct IP address of the Vantage Access server.
4 The default user name is “root” and the default password is “root”. They are casesensitive.
5 If you enter the wrong password three times for a user name, you have to wait for 10
minutes before Vantage Access allows you to log in again with the same user name.
39.2 Web Configurator Display
V
My web browser does not display the screen properly.
1 Display the screens using only the supported web browser (Internet Explorer version
6.0). Refer to Section 3.1 on page 75.
2 Make sure you have Macromedia Flash plug-in installed properly.
3 It is recommended you use a monitor with a screen resolution set to 1024 by 768 pixels.
39.3 Device Registration
V
I cannot see my device in Vantage Access.
1 Make sure you have first imported an XML file containing basic device information to
Vantage Access. See Section 4.2 on page 94.
2 Make sure you have properly set and activated TR-069/TR-104 management on the
device. See Section 4.2.4 on page 96.
3 The initial device discovery process may take up to three minutes depending on your
network condition.
578
Vantage Access User’s Guide
APPENDIX
A
Product Specifications
All values are accurate at the time of writing.
Table 336 License Specifications
FEATURE
SPECIFICATION
License registration
website
http://www.myZyXEL.com
License Type
The number of registered devices you can configure depends on the your
iCard. The license can include 100, 1,000, 5,000, 10,000, 50,000 or
100,000 devices. You can increase the device number by registering
license keys one by one. For example, if you want to manage 6,300
devices, you could purchase one iCard for 5,000 devices, one for 1,000
devices, and three for 100 devices.
Maximum device
management capability
200,000
Vantage Access User’s Guide
579
Appendix A Product Specifications
580
Vantage Access User’s Guide
APPENDIX
B
Legal Information
Copyright
Copyright © 2008 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed,
stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or
otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or
software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the
patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products
described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice.
Trademarks
ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) is a registered trademark of ZyXEL
Communications, Inc. Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for
identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners.
ZyXEL Limited Warranty
ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects
in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase. During
the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure
due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the
defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever
extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating
condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent
product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty
shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act
of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
581
Appendix B Legal Information
Note
Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the
purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any
implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in
no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser.
To obtain the services of this warranty, contact ZyXEL's Service Center for your Return
Material Authorization number (RMA). Products must be returned Postage Prepaid. It is
recommended that the unit be insured when shipped. Any returned products without proof of
purchase or those with an out-dated warranty will be repaired or replaced (at the discretion of
ZyXEL) and the customer will be billed for parts and labor. All repaired or replaced products
will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address, Postage Paid. This warranty
gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from country to
country.
Registration
Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information
at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products.
Open Software Announcements
Notice
Information herein is subject to change without notice. Companies, names, and data used in
examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted. No part may be reproduced or
transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, except the
express written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
This Product includes MySQL and Anomic under GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free
Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but
changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it.
By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share
and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General
Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other
program whose authors commit to using it.(Some other Free Software Foundation software is
covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your
programs, too.
582
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Appendix B Legal Information
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free
software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if
you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that
you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights
or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for
you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must
give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or
can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license
which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands
that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and
passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any
problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the
danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect
making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be
licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0.This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the
copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License.
The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the
program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say,
a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or
translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the
term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License;
they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from
the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program
independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on
what the Program does.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
583
Appendix B Legal Information
1.You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it,
in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an
appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to
this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a
copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option
offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2.You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a
work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the
terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a. You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed
the files and the date of any change.
b. You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains
or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all
third parties under the terms of this License.
c. If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must
cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or
display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is
no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the
program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License.
(Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an
announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that
work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and
separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections
when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part
of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the
terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and
thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written
entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative
or collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program
(or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does
not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object
code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do
one of the following:
584
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Appendix B Legal Information
a.Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must
be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for
software interchange; or,
b.Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third-party, for a
charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of
Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
c. Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute
corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution
and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in
accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications
to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules
it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control
compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source
code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or
binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system
on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a
designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place
counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy
the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly
provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute
the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However,
parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their
licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing
else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These
actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or
distributing t he Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of
this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient
automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the
Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on
the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing
compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any
other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court
order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy
Vantage Access User’s Guide
585
Appendix B Legal Information
simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as
a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license
would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies
directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License
would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular
circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is
intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property
right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of
protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by
public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of
software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it
is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any
other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of
the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by
patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program
under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those
countries, so t hat distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In
such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General
Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present
version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version
number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of
following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by
the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this
License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose
distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software
which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation;
we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of
preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE
LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT
586
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Appendix B Legal Information
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY
AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM
PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY
MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR
INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF
DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU
OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY
OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public,
the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and
change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of
each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should
have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
ONE LINE TO GIVE THE PROGRAM'S NAME AND A BRIEF IDEA OF WHAT IT
DOES.
Copyright (C) YYYY NAME OF AUTHOR
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the
GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this
program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
Vantage Access User’s Guide
587
Appendix B Legal Information
when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19YY NAME OF AUTHOR
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type
`show c' for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the
General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than
`show w' and `show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your
program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to
sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovision'
(which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
SIGNATURE OF TY COON, 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary
programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit
linking proprietary
applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General
Public License instead of this License.
This product includes Hibemate and Ifreechart under GNU LESSER GENERAL
PUBLIC LICENSE
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2.1, February 1999 Copyright (C)
1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 021111307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but
changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU
Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it.
By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to
share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.
588
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Appendix B Legal Information
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software
packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide
to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license
or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based
on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General
Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of
free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get
it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs;
and that you are informed that you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these
rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain
responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give
the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can
get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object
files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the
library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer
you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the
library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free
library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should
know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author's reputation
will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish
to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by
obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license
obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified
in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public
License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated
libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license
for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the
combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original
library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire
combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax
criteria for linking other code with the library.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
589
Appendix B Legal Information
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect the
user's freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software
developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are
the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser
license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible
use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free
programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does
the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the
free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater
number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the
GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU
operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does
ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the
wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close
attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the
library". The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be
combined with the library in order to run.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a
notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed
under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called "this License"). Each
licensee is addressed as "you".
A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be
conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data)
to form executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed
under these terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative
work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either
verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language.
(Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".)
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to
it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains,
plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and
installation of the library.
590
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Appendix B Legal Information
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License;
they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and
output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true
depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as
you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on
each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of
this License along with the Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option
offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a
work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms
of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the
files and the date of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under
the terms of this License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by
an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the
facility
is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an
application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs
whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely
well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any
application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application
does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work
are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate
works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you
distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole
which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this
License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each
and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
591
Appendix B Legal Information
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written
entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative
or collective works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or
with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not
bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this
License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to
this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead
of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public
License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any
other change in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU
General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that
copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program
that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2)
in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you
accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for
software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then
offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the
requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy
the source along with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to
work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the
Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls
outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is
a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work
that uses the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states
terms for distribution of such executables.
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the
Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the
source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked
without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not
precisely defined by law.
592
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Appendix B Legal Information
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors,
and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the
object
file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables
containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for
the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under
Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the
Library" with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute
that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work
for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and
that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this
License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the
copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the
copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for
the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed
under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with
the complete machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object code and/or source
code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable
containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of
definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use
the modified definitions.)
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable
mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user's
computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will
operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the
modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same
user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of
performing this distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place,
offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already
sent this user a copy.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
593
Appendix B Legal Information
For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any
data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special
exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed
(in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of
the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary
libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means
you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a
single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute
such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the
Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do
these two things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library,
uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the
Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based
on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same
work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as
expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link
with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this
License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License
will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing
else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These
actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or
distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of
this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
the Library or works based on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient
automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or
modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for
enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any
other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court
order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy
simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as
594
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Appendix B Legal Information
a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would
not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or
indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be
to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular
circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is
intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right
claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting
the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license
practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software
distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to
the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other
system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the
rest of this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by
patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library
under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those
countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In
such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser
General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the
present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version
number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of
following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by
the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you
may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution
conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software
which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation;
we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of
preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE
LAW.EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND/OROTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
Vantage Access User’s Guide
595
Appendix B Legal Information
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY
AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY
PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY
MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR
INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF
DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU
OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY
OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public,
we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do
so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the
ordinary General Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to
the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file
should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what it does. Copyright (C) year name
of author
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the
GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more
details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this
library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330,
Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
596
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Appendix B Legal Information
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to
sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library `Frob' (a library for
tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon, President of Vice
That's all there is to it!
This Product includes JDK under Binary Code License of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Sun Microsystems, Inc. Binary Code License Agreement
for the JAVA 2 PLATFORM STANDARD EDITION DEVELOPMENT KIT 5.0
SUN MICROSYSTEMS, INC. ("SUN") IS WILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE
IDENTIFIED BELOW TO YOU ONLY UPON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT
ALL OF THE TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS BINARY CODE LICENSE AGREEMENT
AND SUPPLEMENTAL LICENSE TERMS (COLLECTIVELY "AGREEMENT").
PLEASE READ THE AGREEMENT CAREFULLY. BY DOWNLOADING OR
INSTALLING THIS SOFTWARE, YOU ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THE AGREEMENT.
INDICATE ACCEPTANCE BY SELECTING THE "ACCEPT" BUTTON AT THE
BOTTOM OF THE AGREEMENT. IF YOU ARE NOT WILLING TO BE BOUND BY ALL
THE TERMS, SELECT THE "DECLINE" BUTTON AT THE BOTTOM OF THE
AGREEMENT AND THE DOWNLOAD OR INSTALL PROCESS WILL NOT
CONTINUE.
1. DEFINITIONS. "Software" means the identified above in binary form, any other machine
readable materials (including, but not limited to, libraries, source files, header files, and data
files), any updates or error corrections provided by Sun, and any user manuals, programming
guides and other documentation provided to you by Sun under this Agreement. "Programs"
mean Java applets and applications intended to run on the Java 2 Platform Standard Edition
(J2SE platform) platform on Java-enabled general purpose desktop computers and servers.
2. LICENSE TO USE. Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, including, but
not limited to the Java Technology Restrictions of the Supplemental License Terms, Sun
grants you a non-exclusive, non-transferable, limited license without license fees to reproduce
and use internally Software complete and unmodified for the sole purpose of running
Programs. Additional licenses for developers and/or publishers are granted in the
Supplemental License Terms.
3. RESTRICTIONS. Software is confidential and copyrighted. Title to Software and all
associated intellectual property rights is retained by Sun and/or its licensors. Unless
enforcement is prohibited by applicable law, you may not modify, decompile, or reverse
engineer Software. You acknowledge that Licensed Software is not designed or intended for
use in the design, construction, operation or maintenance of any nuclear facility. Sun
Vantage Access User’s Guide
597
Appendix B Legal Information
Microsystems, Inc. disclaims any express or implied warranty of fitness for such uses. No
right, title or interest in or to any trademark, service mark, logo or trade name of Sun or its
licensors is granted under this Agreement. Additional restrictions for developers and/or
publishers licenses are set forth in the Supplemental License Terms.
4. LIMITED WARRANTY. Sun warrants to you that for a period of ninety (90) days from the
date of purchase, as evidenced by a copy of the receipt, the media on which Software is
furnished (if any) will be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use.
Except for the foregoing, Software is provided "AS IS". Your exclusive remedy and Sun's
entire liability under this limited warranty will be at Sun's option to replace Software media or
refund the fee paid for Software. Any implied warranties on the Software are limited to 90
days. Some states do not allow limitations on duration of an implied warranty, so the above
may not apply to you. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have
others, which vary from state to state.
5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY. UNLESS SPECIFIED IN THIS AGREEMENT, ALL
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT ARE DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO
THE EXTENT THAT THESE DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID.
6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO
EVENT WILL SUN OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST REVENUE,
PROFIT OR DATA, OR FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL
OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, HOWEVER CAUSED REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF
LIABILITY, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF SUN HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. In no event will Sun's liability to you, whether in contract, tort (including
negligence), or otherwise, exceed the amount paid by you for Software under this Agreement.
The foregoing limitations will apply even if the above stated warranty fails of its essential
purpose. Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so
some of the terms above may not be applicable to you.
7. TERMINATION. This Agreement is effective until terminated. You may terminate this
Agreement at any time by destroying all copies of Software. This Agreement will terminate
immediately without notice from Sun if you fail to comply with any provision of this
Agreement. Either party may terminate this Agreement immediately should any Software
become, or in either party's opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement
of any intellectual property right. Upon Termination, you must destroy all copies of Software.
8. EXPORT REGULATIONS. All Software and technical data delivered under this
Agreement are subject to US export control laws and may be subject to export or import
regulations in other countries. You agree to comply strictly with all such laws and regulations
and acknowledge that you have the responsibility to obtain such licenses to export, re-export,
or import as may be required after delivery to you.
598
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Appendix B Legal Information
9. TRADEMARKS AND LOGOS. You acknowledge and agree as between you and Sun that
Sun owns the SUN, SOLARIS, JAVA, JINI, FORTE, and iPLANET trademarks and all SUN,
SOLARIS, JAVA, JINI, FORTE, and iPLANET-related trademarks, service marks, logos and
other brand designations ("Sun Marks"), and you agree to comply with the Sun Trademark and
Logo Usage Requirements currently located at http://www.sun.com/policies/trademarks. Any
use you make of the Sun Marks inures to Sun's benefit.
10. U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. If Software is being acquired by or on
behalf of the U.S. Government or by a U.S. Government prime contractor or subcontractor (at
any tier), then the Government's rights in Software and accompanying documentation will be
only as set forth in this Agreement; this is in accordance with 48 CFR 227.7201 through
227.7202-4 (for Department of Defense (DOD) acquisitions) and with 48 CFR 2.101 and
12.212 (for non-DOD acquisitions).
11. GOVERNING LAW. Any action related to this Agreement will be governed by California
law and controlling U.S. federal law. No choice of law rules of any jurisdiction will apply.
12. SEVERABILITY. If any provision of this Agreement is held to be unenforceable, this
Agreement will remain in effect with the provision omitted, unless omission would frustrate
the intent of the parties, in which case this Agreement will immediately terminate.
13. INTEGRATION. This Agreement is the entire agreement between you and Sun relating to
its subject matter. It supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral or written communications,
proposals, representations and warranties and prevails over any conflicting or additional terms
of any quote, order, acknowledgment, or other communication between the parties relating to
its subject matter during the term of this Agreement. No modification of this Agreement will
be binding, unless in writing and signed by an authorized representative of each party.
SUPPLEMENTAL LICENSE TERMS
These Supplemental License Terms add to or modify the terms of the Binary Code License
Agreement. Capitalized terms not defined in these Supplemental Terms shall have the same
meanings ascribed to them in the Binary Code License Agreement. These Supplemental Terms
shall supersede any inconsistent or conflicting terms in the Binary Code License Agreement,
or in any license contained within the Software.
A. Software Internal Use and Development License Grant. Subject to the terms and conditions
of this Agreement and restrictions and exceptions set forth in the Software "README" file,
including, but not limited to the Java Technology Restrictions of these Supplemental Terms,
Sun grants you a non-exclusive, non-transferable, limited license without fees to reproduce
internally and use internally the Software complete and unmodified for the purpose of
designing, developing, and testing your Programs.
B. License to Distribute Software. Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement and
restrictions and exceptions set forth in the Software README file, including, but not limited
to the Java Technology Restrictions of these Supplemental Terms, Sun grants you a nonexclusive, non-transferable, limited license without fees to reproduce and distribute the
Software, provided that (i) you distribute the Software complete and unmodified and only
bundled as part of, and for the sole purpose of running, your Programs, (ii) the Programs add
significant and primary functionality to the Software, (iii) you do not distribute additional
Vantage Access User’s Guide
599
Appendix B Legal Information
software intended to replace any component(s) of the Software, (iv) you do not remove or alter
any proprietary legends or notices contained in the Software, (v) you only distribute the
Software subject to a license agreement that protects Sun's interests consistent with the terms
contained in this Agreement, and (vi) you agree to defend and indemnify Sun and its licensors
from and against any damages, costs, liabilities, settlement amounts and/or expenses
(including attorneys' fees) incurred in connection with any claim, lawsuit or action by any
third party that arises or results from the use or distribution of any and all Programs and/or
Software.
C. License to Distribute Redistributables. Subject to the terms and conditions of this
Agreement and restrictions and exceptions set forth in the Software README file, including
but not limited to the Java Technology Restrictions of these Supplemental Terms, Sun grants
you a non-exclusive, non-transferable, limited license without fees to reproduce and distribute
those files specifically identified as redistributable in the Software "README" file
("Redistributables") provided that: (i) you distribute the Redistributables complete and
unmodified, and only bundled as part of Programs, (ii) the Programs add significant and
primary functionality to the Redistributables, (iii) you do not distribute additional software
intended to supersede any component(s) of the Redistributables (unless otherwise specified in
the applicable README file), (iv) you do not remove or alter any proprietary legends or
notices contained in or on the Redistributables, (v) you only distribute the Redistributables
pursuant to a license agreement that protects Sun's interests consistent with the terms
contained in the Agreement, (vi) you agree to defend and indemnify Sun and its licensors from
and against any damages, costs, liabilities, settlement amounts and/or expenses (including
attorneys' fees) incurred in connection with any claim, lawsuit or action by any third party that
arises or results from the use or distribution of any and all Programs and/or Software.
D. Java Technology Restrictions. You may not create, modify, or change the behavior of, or
authorize your licensees to create, modify, or change the behavior of, classes, interfaces, or
subpackages that are in any way identified as "java", "javax", "sun" or similar convention as
specified by Sun in any naming convention designation.
E. Distribution by Publishers. This section pertains to your distribution of the Software with
your printed book or magazine (as those terms are commonly used in the industry) relating to
Java technology ("Publication"). Subject to and conditioned upon your compliance with the
restrictions and obligations contained in the Agreement, in addition to the license granted in
Paragraph 1 above, Sun hereby grants to you a non-exclusive, nontransferable limited right to
reproduce complete and unmodified copies of the Software on electronic media (the "Media")
for the sole purpose of inclusion and distribution with your Publication(s), subject to the
following terms: (i) You may not distribute the Software on a stand-alone basis; it must be
distributed with your Publication(s); (ii) You are responsible for downloading the Software
from the applicable Sun web site; (iii) You must refer to the Software as JavaTM 2 Platform
Standard Edition Development Kit 5.0; (iv) The Software must be reproduced in its entirety
and without any modification whatsoever (including, without limitation, the Binary Code
License and Supplemental License Terms accompanying the Software and proprietary rights
notices contained in the Software); (v) The Media label shall include the following
information: Copyright 2004, Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved. Use is subject to
license terms. Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo, Solaris, Java, the Java Coffee Cup logo,
J2SE, and all trademarks and logos based on Java are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. This information must be placed on
the Media label in such a manner as to only apply to the Sun Software; (vi) You must clearly
600
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Appendix B Legal Information
identify the Software as Sun's product on the Media holder or Media label, and you may not
state or imply that Sun is responsible for any third-party software contained on the Media; (vii)
You may not include any third party software on the Media which is intended to be a
replacement or substitute for the Software; (viii) You shall indemnify Sun for all damages
arising from your failure to comply with the requirements of this Agreement. In addition, you
shall defend, at your expense, any and all claims brought against Sun by third parties, and shall
pay all damages awarded by a court of competent jurisdiction, or such settlement amount
negotiated by you, arising out of or in connection with your use, reproduction or distribution
of the Software and/or the Publication. Your obligation to provide indemnification under this
section shall arise provided that Sun: (i) provides you prompt notice of the claim; (ii) gives
you sole control of the defense and settlement of the claim; (iii) provides you, at your expense,
with all available information, assistance and authority to defend; and (iv) has not
compromised or settled such claim without your prior written consent; and (ix) You shall
provide Sun with a written notice for each Publication; such notice shall include the following
information: (1) title of Publication, (2) author(s), (3) date of Publication, and (4) ISBN or
ISSN numbers. Such notice shall be sent to Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, M/
S USCA12-110, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A., Attention: Contracts Administration.
F. Source Code. Software may contain source code that, unless expressly licensed for other
purposes, is provided solely for reference purposes pursuant to the terms of this Agreement.
Source code may not be redistributed unless expressly provided for in this Agreement.
G. Third Party Code. Additional copyright notices and license terms applicable to portions of
the Software are set forth in the THIRDPARTYLICENSEREADME.txt file. In addition to any
terms and conditions of any third party opensource/freeware license identified in the
THIRDPARTYLICENSEREADME.txt file, the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of
liability provisions in paragraphs 5 and 6 of the Binary Code License Agreement shall apply to
all Software in this distribution.
For inquiries please contact: Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa
Clara, California 95054, U.S.A. (LFI#141623/Form ID#011801)
This Product includes Quartz
All source code, binaries, documentation and other files distributed with Quartz Enterprise
Job Scheduler are subject to the following license terms, and are held under the following
copyright, unless otherwise noted within the individual files.
Copyright James House (c) 2001-2004
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
601
Appendix B Legal Information
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS''
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR
ONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
This product uses and includes within its distribution, software developed by the Apache
Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/)
This Product includes Stuts and Tomcat under Apache License
Apache License Version 2.0, January 2004 http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as
defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that
is granting the License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control,
are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this
definition, "control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or
management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent
(50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted
by this License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not
limited to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files.
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation
of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation,
and conversions to other media types.
602
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Appendix B Legal Information
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made
available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to
the work (an example is provided in the Appendix below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based
on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations,
or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes
of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or
merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the
Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is
intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an
individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the
purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic, verbal, or written
communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to
communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking
systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and
improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise
designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a
Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each
Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royaltyfree, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display,
publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or
Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each
Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royaltyfree, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer
to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only to those
patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their
Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such
Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a
cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated
within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses
granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is
filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works
thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided
that You meet the following conditions:
(a) You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this
License; and
Vantage Access User’s Guide
603
Appendix B Legal Information
(b) You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed
the files; and
(c) You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all
copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work,
excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and
(d) If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any
Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices
contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of
the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file
distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if
provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative
Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE
file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your
own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an
addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution
notices cannot be construed as modifying the License. You may add Your own copyright
statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and
conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such
Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work
otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution
intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the
terms and conditions of this License, without any additional terms or conditions.
Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any
separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such
Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks,
service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and
customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the
NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing,
Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS"
BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or
implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NONINFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the
Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including
negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and
grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for
damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any
604
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Appendix B Legal Information
character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work
(including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or
malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has
been advised of the possibility of such damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative
Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty,
indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in
accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole
responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify,
defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted
against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.
NOTE: Some components of Vantage Access incorporate source code covered under the GPL,
LGPL, Sun Microsystems, Inc. Binary Code License, Quarz License and Apache License. To
obtain the source code covered under those Licenses, please contact ZyXEL Communications
Corporation at: ZyXEL Technical Support.
This source code is free to download at http://www.zyxel.com
End-User License Agreement for “Vantage VRPT 2.3”
WARNING: ZyXEL Communications Corp. IS WILLING TO LICENSE THE ENCLOSED
SOFTWARE TO YOU ONLY UPON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF
THE TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. PLEASE READ THE
TERMS CAREFULLY BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION PROCESS AS
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE WILL INDICATE YOUR ASSENT TO THEM. IF YOU
DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS, THEN ZyXEL, INC. IS UNWILLING TO LICENSE
THE SOFTWARE TO YOU, IN WHICH EVENT YOU SHOULD RETURN THE
UNINSTALLED SOFTWARE AND PACKAGING TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH IT
WAS ACQUIRED, AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED.
1.Grant of License for Personal Use
ZyXEL Communications Corp. ("ZyXEL") grants you a non-exclusive, non-sublicense, nontransferable license to use the program with which this license is distributed (the "Software"),
including any documentation files accompanying the Software ("Documentation"), for
internal business use only, for up to the number of users specified in sales order and invoice.
You have the right to make one backup copy of the Software and Documentation solely for
archival, back-up or disaster recovery purposes. You shall not exceed the scope of the license
granted hereunder. Any rights not expressly granted by ZyXEL to you are reserved by ZyXEL,
and all implied licenses are disclaimed.
2.Ownership
You have no ownership rights in the Software. Rather, you have a license to use the Software
as long as this License Agreement remains in full force and effect. Ownership of the Software,
Documentation and all intellectual property rights therein shall remain at all times with
ZyXEL. Any other use of the Software by any other entity is strictly forbidden and is a
violation of this License Agreement.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
605
Appendix B Legal Information
3.Copyright
The Software and Documentation contain material that is protected by United States
Copyright Law and trade secret law, and by international treaty provisions. All rights not
granted to you herein are expressly reserved by ZyXEL. You may not remove any proprietary
notice of ZyXEL or any of its licensors from any copy of the Software or Documentation.
4.Restrictions
You may not publish, display, disclose, sell, rent, lease, modify, store, loan, distribute, or
create derivative works of the Software, or any part thereof. You may not assign, sublicense,
convey or otherwise transfer, pledge as security or otherwise encumber the rights and licenses
granted hereunder with respect to the Software. You may not copy, reverse engineer,
decompile, reverse compile, translate, adapt, or disassemble the Software, or any part thereof,
nor shall you attempt to create the source code from the object code for the Software. You may
not market, co-brand, private label or otherwise permit third parties to link to the Software, or
any part thereof. You may not use the Software, or any part thereof, in the operation of a
service bureau or for the benefit of any other person or entity. You may not cause, assist or
permit any third party to do any of the foregoing.
5.Confidentiality
You acknowledge that the Software contains proprietary trade secrets of ZyXEL and you
hereby agree to maintain the confidentiality of the Software using at least as great a degree of
care as you use to maintain the confidentiality of your own most confidential information. You
agree to reasonably communicate the terms and conditions of this License Agreement to those
persons employed by you who come into contact with the Software, and to use reasonable best
efforts to ensure their compliance with such terms and conditions, including, without
limitation, not knowingly permitting such persons to use any portion of the Software for the
purpose of deriving the source code of the Software.
6.No Warranty
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS." TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
BY LAW, ZyXEL DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. ZyXEL DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN
THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET ANY REQUIREMENTS OR NEEDS YOU MAY HAVE,
OR THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE ERROR FREE, OR IN AN
UNINTERUPTED FASHION, OR THAT ANY DEFECTS OR ERRORS IN THE
SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED, OR THAT THE SOFTWARE IS COMPATIBLE
WITH ANY PARTICULAR PLATFORM. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
WAIVER OR EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THEY MAY NOT APPLY
TO YOU. IF THIS EXCLUSION IS HELD TO BE UNENFORCEABLE BY A COURT OF
COMPETENT JURISDICTION, THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES
SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A PERIOD OF THIRTY (30) DAYS FROM THE
DATE OF PURCHASE OF THE SOFTWARE, AND NO WARRANTIES SHALL APPLY
AFTER THAT PERIOD.
606
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Appendix B Legal Information
7.Limitation of Liability
IN NO EVENT WILL ZyXEL BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES FOR
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF
BUSINESS INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THE PROGRAM, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY, EVEN IF ZyXEL HAS
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. ZyXEL'S AGGREGATE
LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT OR
OTHERWISE WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION OR
OTHERWISE SHALL BE EQUAL TO THE PURCHASE PRICE, BUT SHALL IN NO
EVENT EXCEED $1,000. BECAUSE SOME STATES/COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW
THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
8.Export Restrictions
THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY MADE SUBJECT TO ANY APPLICABLE
LAWS, REGULATIONS, ORDERS, OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS ON THE EXPORT OF
THE SOFTWARE OR INFORMATION ABOUT SUCH SOFTWARE WHICH MAY BE
IMPOSED FROM TIME TO TIME. YOU SHALL NOT EXPORT THE SOFTWARE,
DOCUMENTATION OR INFORMATION ABOUT THE SOFTWARE AND
DOCUMENTATION WITHOUT COMPLYING WITH SUCH LAWS, REGULATIONS,
ORDERS, OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS. YOU AGREE TO INDEMNIFY ZyXEL
AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, LOSSES, DAMAGES, LIABILITIES, COSTS AND EXPENSES,
INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEYS' FEES, TO THE EXTENT SUCH CLAIMS
ARISE OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS SECTION 8.
9.Audit Rights
ZyXEL SHALL HAVE THE RIGHT, AT ITS OWN EXPENSE, UPON REASONABLE
PRIOR NOTICE, TO PERIODICALLY INSPECT AND AUDIT YOUR RECORDS TO
ENSURE YOUR COMPLIANCE WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS
LICENSE AGREEMENT.
10.Termination
This License Agreement is effective until it is terminated. You may terminate this License
Agreement at any time by destroying or returning to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and
Documentation in your possession or under your control. ZyXEL may terminate this License
Agreement for any reason, including, but not limited to, if ZyXEL finds that you have violated
any of the terms of this License Agreement. Upon notification of termination, you agree to
destroy or return to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation and to certify in
writing that all known copies, including backup copies, have been destroyed. All provisions
relating to confidentiality, proprietary rights, and non-disclosure shall survive the termination
of this Software License Agreement.
12.General
Vantage Access User’s Guide
607
Appendix B Legal Information
This License Agreement shall be construed, interpreted and governed by the laws of Republic
of China without regard to conflicts of laws provisions thereof. The exclusive forum for any
disputes arising out of or relating to this License Agreement shall be an appropriate court or
Commercial Arbitration Association sitting in ROC, Taiwan. This License Agreement shall
constitute the entire Agreement between the parties hereto. This License Agreement, the rights
granted hereunder, the Software and Documentation shall not be assigned by you without the
prior written consent of ZyXEL. Any waiver or modification of this License Agreement shall
only be effective if it is in writing and signed by both parties hereto. If any part of this License
Agreement is found invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the
remainder of this License Agreement shall be interpreted so as to reasonably effect the
intention of the parties.
608
Vantage Access User’s Guide
APPENDIX
C
Customer Support
In the event of problems that cannot be solved by using this manual, you should contact your
vendor. If you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in
which you bought the device. Regional offices are listed below (see also http://
www.zyxel.com/web/contact_us.php). Please have the following information ready when you
contact an office.
Required Information
•
•
•
•
Product model and serial number.
Warranty Information.
Date that you received your device.
Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it.
“+” is the (prefix) number you dial to make an international telephone call.
Corporate Headquarters (Worldwide)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Support E-mail: [email protected]
Sales E-mail: [email protected]
Telephone: +886-3-578-3942
Fax: +886-3-578-2439
Web: www.zyxel.com
Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications Corp., 6 Innovation Road II, Science Park,
Hsinchu 300, Taiwan
China - ZyXEL Communications (Beijing) Corp.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Support E-mail: [email protected]
Sales E-mail: [email protected]
Telephone: +86-010-82800646
Fax: +86-010-82800587
Address: 902, Unit B, Horizon Building, No.6, Zhichun Str, Haidian District, Beijing
Web: http://www.zyxel.cn
China - ZyXEL Communications (Shanghai) Corp.
•
•
•
•
Support E-mail: [email protected]
Sales E-mail: [email protected]
Telephone: +86-021-61199055
Fax: +86-021-52069033
Vantage Access User’s Guide
609
Appendix C Customer Support
• Address: 1005F, ShengGao International Tower, No.137 XianXia Rd., Shanghai
• Web: http://www.zyxel.cn
Costa Rica
•
•
•
•
•
•
Support E-mail: [email protected]
Sales E-mail: [email protected]
Telephone: +506-2017878
Fax: +506-2015098
Web: www.zyxel.co.cr
Regular Mail: ZyXEL Costa Rica, Plaza Roble Escazú, Etapa El Patio, Tercer Piso, San
José, Costa Rica
Czech Republic
•
•
•
•
•
E-mail: [email protected]
Telephone: +420-241-091-350
Fax: +420-241-091-359
Web: www.zyxel.cz
Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications, Czech s.r.o., Modranská 621, 143 01 Praha 4 Modrany, Ceská Republika
Denmark
•
•
•
•
•
•
Support E-mail: [email protected]
Sales E-mail: [email protected]
Telephone: +45-39-55-07-00
Fax: +45-39-55-07-07
Web: www.zyxel.dk
Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications A/S, Columbusvej, 2860 Soeborg, Denmark
Finland
•
•
•
•
•
•
Support E-mail: [email protected]
Sales E-mail: [email protected]
Telephone: +358-9-4780-8411
Fax: +358-9-4780-8448
Web: www.zyxel.fi
Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications Oy, Malminkaari 10, 00700 Helsinki, Finland
France
•
•
•
•
•
610
E-mail: [email protected]
Telephone: +33-4-72-52-97-97
Fax: +33-4-72-52-19-20
Web: www.zyxel.fr
Regular Mail: ZyXEL France, 1 rue des Vergers, Bat. 1 / C, 69760 Limonest, France
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Appendix C Customer Support
Germany
•
•
•
•
•
•
Support E-mail: [email protected]
Sales E-mail: [email protected]
Telephone: +49-2405-6909-69
Fax: +49-2405-6909-99
Web: www.zyxel.de
Regular Mail: ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH., Adenauerstr. 20/A2 D-52146, Wuerselen,
Germany
Hungary
•
•
•
•
•
•
Support E-mail: [email protected]
Sales E-mail: [email protected]
Telephone: +36-1-3361649
Fax: +36-1-3259100
Web: www.zyxel.hu
Regular Mail: ZyXEL Hungary, 48, Zoldlomb Str., H-1025, Budapest, Hungary
India
•
•
•
•
•
•
Support E-mail: [email protected]
Sales E-mail: [email protected]
Telephone: +91-11-30888144 to +91-11-30888153
Fax: +91-11-30888149, +91-11-26810715
Web: http://www.zyxel.in
Regular Mail: India - ZyXEL Technology India Pvt Ltd., II-Floor, F2/9 Okhla Phase -1,
New Delhi 110020, India
Japan
•
•
•
•
•
•
Support E-mail: [email protected]
Sales E-mail: [email protected]
Telephone: +81-3-6847-3700
Fax: +81-3-6847-3705
Web: www.zyxel.co.jp
Regular Mail: ZyXEL Japan, 3F, Office T&U, 1-10-10 Higashi-Gotanda, Shinagawa-ku,
Tokyo 141-0022, Japan
Kazakhstan
•
•
•
•
•
•
Support: http://zyxel.kz/support
Sales E-mail: [email protected]
Telephone: +7-3272-590-698
Fax: +7-3272-590-689
Web: www.zyxel.kz
Regular Mail: ZyXEL Kazakhstan, 43 Dostyk Ave., Office 414, Dostyk Business Centre,
050010 Almaty, Republic of Kazakhstan
Vantage Access User’s Guide
611
Appendix C Customer Support
Malaysia
•
•
•
•
•
•
Support E-mail: [email protected]
Sales E-mail: [email protected]
Telephone: +603-8076-9933
Fax: +603-8076-9833
Web: http://www.zyxel.com.my
Regular Mail: ZyXEL Malaysia Sdn Bhd., 1-02 & 1-03, Jalan Kenari 17F, Bandar
Puchong Jaya, 47100 Puchong, Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia
North America
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Support E-mail: [email protected]
Support Telephone: +1-800-978-7222
Sales E-mail: [email protected]
Sales Telephone: +1-714-632-0882
Fax: +1-714-632-0858
Web: www.zyxel.com
Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications Inc., 1130 N. Miller St., Anaheim, CA 928062001, U.S.A.
Norway
•
•
•
•
•
•
Support E-mail: [email protected]
Sales E-mail: [email protected]
Telephone: +47-22-80-61-80
Fax: +47-22-80-61-81
Web: www.zyxel.no
Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications A/S, Nils Hansens vei 13, 0667 Oslo, Norway
Poland
•
•
•
•
•
E-mail: [email protected]
Telephone: +48-22-333 8250
Fax: +48-22-333 8251
Web: www.pl.zyxel.com
Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications, ul. Okrzei 1A, 03-715 Warszawa, Poland
Russia
•
•
•
•
•
•
612
Support: http://zyxel.ru/support
Sales E-mail: [email protected]
Telephone: +7-095-542-89-29
Fax: +7-095-542-89-25
Web: www.zyxel.ru
Regular Mail: ZyXEL Russia, Ostrovityanova 37a Str., Moscow 117279, Russia
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Appendix C Customer Support
Singapore
•
•
•
•
•
•
Support E-mail: [email protected]
Sales E-mail: [email protected]
Telephone: +65-6899-6678
Fax: +65-6899-8887
Web: http://www.zyxel.com.sg
Regular Mail: ZyXEL Singapore Pte Ltd., No. 2 International Business Park, The Strategy
#03-28, Singapore 609930
Spain
•
•
•
•
•
•
Support E-mail: [email protected]
Sales E-mail: [email protected]
Telephone: +34-902-195-420
Fax: +34-913-005-345
Web: www.zyxel.es
Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications, Arte, 21 5ª planta, 28033 Madrid, Spain
Sweden
•
•
•
•
•
•
Support E-mail: [email protected]
Sales E-mail: [email protected]
Telephone: +46-31-744-7700
Fax: +46-31-744-7701
Web: www.zyxel.se
Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications A/S, Sjöporten 4, 41764 Göteborg, Sweden
Taiwan
•
•
•
•
•
•
Support E-mail: [email protected]
Sales E-mail: [email protected]
Telephone: +886-2-27399889
Fax: +886-2-27353220
Web: http://www.zyxel.com.tw
Address: Room B, 21F., No.333, Sec. 2, Dunhua S. Rd., Da-an District, Taipei
Thailand
•
•
•
•
•
•
Support E-mail: [email protected]
Sales E-mail: [email protected]
Telephone: +662-831-5315
Fax: +662-831-5395
Web: http://www.zyxel.co.th
Regular Mail: ZyXEL Thailand Co., Ltd., 1/1 Moo 2, Ratchaphruk Road, Bangrak-Noi,
Muang, Nonthaburi 11000, Thailand.
Vantage Access User’s Guide
613
Appendix C Customer Support
Turkey
•
•
•
•
•
Support E-mail: [email protected]
Telephone: +90 212 222 55 22
Fax: +90-212-220-2526
Web: http:www.zyxel.com.tr
Address: Kaptanpasa Mahallesi Piyalepasa Bulvari Ortadogu Plaza N:14/13 K:6
Okmeydani/Sisli Istanbul/Turkey
Ukraine
•
•
•
•
•
•
Support E-mail: [email protected]
Sales E-mail: [email protected]
Telephone: +380-44-247-69-78
Fax: +380-44-494-49-32
Web: www.ua.zyxel.com
Regular Mail: ZyXEL Ukraine, 13, Pimonenko Str., Kiev 04050, Ukraine
United Kingdom
•
•
•
•
•
•
614
Support E-mail: [email protected]
Sales E-mail: [email protected]
Telephone: +44-1344-303044, 0845 122 0301 (UK only)
Fax: +44-1344-303034
Web: www.zyxel.co.uk
Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd., 11 The Courtyard, Eastern Road,
Bracknell, Berkshire RG12 2XB, United Kingdom (UK)
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Index
Index
A
access the web configurator 75
account management 525
change account information 528
create an account 526
delete an account 528
add a device to a group 87
administration 52
alert setting 556
applications 51
B
back up configuration file 516
backup logs 109
basic device configuration 141, 199, 277, 473, 489
C
certifications 581
change account information 528
configuration
audio output 440
device configuration 143, 201, 280, 473, 474, 493
device information 141
internet gateway device 141, 199, 277, 473, 489
IP ping diagnostics 151, 226, 306
LAN configuration security 151, 225, 305
LAN device 153, 229, 309
LAN Ethernet interface configuration 157, 233, 313
LAN Ethernet interface statistics 158, 234, 314
LAN host configuration management 154, 230, 310
LAN host information 168, 169, 244, 245, 324, 325
LAN hosts 168, 244, 324
LAN IP interface 156, 157, 232, 233, 312, 313
LAN USB interface configuration 159, 235, 315
LAN USB interface statistics 160, 236, 316
layer3 forwarding 149, 206, 286
layer3 forwarding setup 149, 207, 283, 287
management server 144, 202, 280, 476, 491
STB audience statistics 418, 468
STB audio decoder details 439
STB audio decoder setup 408
Vantage Access User’s Guide
STB audio decoder status 438
STB audio output details 441
STB audio output setup 415
STB AV player details 449
STB AV player setup 449
STB AV players 448
STB AV stream details 447
STB AV stream setup 447
STB AV streams 446
STB capabilities 405
STB channel settings 468
STB channel statistics 469
STB components 419
STB conditional access instance details 444
STB conditional access settings 417
STB conditional access status 444
STB digital rights management 417
STB digital rights management details 445
STB digital rights management status 445
STB DVBT 406
STB DVBT installation settings 422
STB DVBT logical channel connections 425
STB DVBT modulation settings 421
STB DVBT service connections 426
STB DVBT service list database logical channels
423
STB DVBT service list database settings 422
STB front end client group settings 430
STB front end client group statistics 430
STB front end client groups 429
STB front end client groups current day statistics
432
STB front end client groups quarter-hour statistics
433
STB front end client groups total statistics 431
STB front end dejittering 433
STB front end IGMP setup 428
STB front end inbound information 434
STB front end IP setup 426
STB front end outbound information 435
STB front end outbound statistics 436
STB front end RTCP setup 427
STB front end RTP AVPF setup 427
STB front end service connections 436
STB front end settings 420
STB front-end settings 420
STB gront end client group statistics 431
STB IP setup 406
STB main stream audio decoder statistics 457
STB main stream dejittering statistics 453
STB main stream details 451
STB main stream MPEG2-TS statistics 455
615
Index
STB main stream RTP statistics 454
STB main stream sample audio decoder statistics
465
STB main stream sample dejittering statistics 459
STB main stream sample high-level metric details
467
STB main stream sample high-level metric statistics
466
STB main stream sample MPEG2-TS statistics 462
STB main stream sample RTP statistics 460
STB main stream sample staistics 458
STB main stream sample video decoder statistics
463
STB main stream sample video response statistics
466
STB main stream setup 451
STB main stream total statistics 452
STB main stream video decoder statistics 456
STB main stream video response statistics 458
STB MPEG 4 part 10 profile level settings 413
STB MPEG 4 part 10 profile levels 413
STB MPEG 4 part 10 setup 412
STB MPEG2 part 2 profile 410
STB MPEG2 part 2 profile level settings 410
STB MPEG2 part2 409
STB MPEG4 part 2 profile level settings 411
STB MPEG4 part 2 profile levels 411
STB MPEG4 part 2 setup 411
STB PVR settings 437
STB PVR setup 407
STB PVR storage 437, 438
STB SCART details 443
STB SCART status 443
STB service details 405
STB service list database logical channel services
424
STB service list database logical channel settings
424
STB service list database logical channels 423
STB service monitoring 417, 450
STB services 405
STB SMPTE VC-1 profile level settings 415
STB SMPTE VC-1 profile levels 414
STB SMPTE VC-1 setup 414
STB video decoder details 440
STB video decoder setup 409
STB video decoders 439
STB video output details 442
STB video output setup 416
time 146, 204, 283, 477, 494
user interface 147, 205, 284, 478, 495
vendor configuration file 143, 149, 201, 207, 279,
286
video output 442
voice capabilities 358
voice codec information 362
voice MGCP setup 361
voice profile 363
voice profile codec list information 394
616
voice profile line codec information 393
voice profile line session information 395
voice profile line setup 383, 384
voice profile line statistics 396
voice profile RTP setup 372, 373, 374
voice SIP setup 360, 361
WAN ATM F5 loopback diagnostics 184, 260, 340
WAN common interface 172, 248, 328
WAN connection 173, 175, 249, 251, 329, 331
WAN connection device 181, 257, 337
WAN DSL connection management 178, 254, 334
WAN DSL connection service info 179, 255, 335
WAN DSL diagnostics 180, 256, 336
WAN DSL interface configuration 173, 249, 330
WAN DSL line statistics 176, 252, 332
WAN DSL link configuration 182, 258, 338
WAN Ethernet interface configuration 177, 253, 333
WAN Ethernet link configuration 185, 261, 341
WAN Ethernet statistics 178, 253, 334
WAN IP connection 186, 187, 262, 263, 343
WAN IP connection statistics 190, 195, 266, 271,
347, 352
WAN port IP mapping table 188, 189, 194, 265,
270, 345, 346, 351
WAN POTS link configuration 185, 261, 341
WAN PPP connection 191, 267, 348
WLAN associated device 165, 241, 321
WLAN configuration 161, 165, 237, 241, 317, 321
WLAN pre-shared key setup 167, 243, 323
WLAN WEP key setup 166, 242, 322
configuration change status 107
configuration changes, list of 107
configuration file backup 516
configuration file backup list 517
configuration file download 515
configuration file management 513
configuration file restore 518
configuration file restore list 520
configuration file upload 514
configuration status 107
configuration window 81
configure a device template 120, 121
configure a download server 93
contact information 609
control panel 81
copyright 581
CPE log, See logs 110
CPE methods 132
create a device template
procedure 123
select parameters 123
create a group folder 83
create a login account 526
create a new batch 123
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Index
CSV file 110
customer support 609
disclaimer 581
download configuration file 515
download server 93
D
E
Dashboard 79
data maintenance 52
default login accounts 75, 525
delete a device firmware file 509
delete a device group 83
delete a login account 528
delete configuration file 515
detailed device status 101
device configuration
create new batch 123
single device 129
update 135
device configuration file
backup 516
backup list 517
delete 515
download 515
management 513
restore list 520
single-device restore 518
upload 514
verify restore 520
device configuration template 119
device firmware management 507, 513
add a firmware 508
delete firmware 509
device firmware upgrade 52
device firmware upgrade, See firmware upgrade 510
device list 86, 87
device logs 110
device monitor 52
device registration 94, 113
multiple devices 114
single device 113
verify 115
ZyXEL device setting 96, 115
device search 85
device setup 141, 199, 277, 473, 489
device status 101
device window 81, 82
add a device to a group 87
device list 87
right-click menu 89
search 85
topology 82
device XML file 113
Vantage Access User’s Guide
email alert 556
email notification 555
Email server 555
enable TR-0xx protocol on a device 96, 115
export logs 110
F
features 52
file management 52
firmware upgrade 510
manual 510
request 511
scheduled 511
scheduled upgrade list 511
function window 90
menu summary 90
G
general device setup 141, 199, 277, 473, 489
guest account 525
H
HTTP serve port number 93
HTTPD 57, 65
HTTPD port number 59, 68
I
idle timeout 81
Installation
preparation 54
installation 53
command line 59, 71
617
Index
methods 53
overview 53
software components 53
Vantage Access BED 56, 62
Vantage Access DB 54, 59
Vantage Access HTTPD 57, 65
wizard 54
installation method
command line 53
wizard 53
L
launch Vantage Access 69
license 539
license management 539
license upgrade 540
load a device template 125
login 76
login account type 75
login account types 525
guest 525
manager 525
root 525
Login screen 76
logs 109
automatic backup 109
device logs 109
purge 109
system logs 109
M
main screen 81
manage device firmware files 507, 513
manager account 525
manual firmware upgrade 510
menu summary 90
monitor configuration changes 107
myzyxel.com account 539
N
navigation panel 81, 90
Network example 51
618
O
overview 51
P
password
default value 76
product registration 539, 582
purge logs 109, 110, 548
Q
Quick Start Guide 51
R
register a device, See device registration 94, 113
register multiple devices 114
register one device 113
registration
product 582
registration with XML file 114
related documentation 3
remote device management 52
remove a group folder 84
rename a group folder 85
renew product license 540
reports 52
restore configuration file on a device 518
right-click menu
device window 89
root account 525
S
scheduled firmware upgrade 511
scheduled upgrade list 511
search a device 85
security timeout 81
single device provision
CPE methods 132
pop-up screen 132
Vantage Access User’s Guide
Index
start Vantage Access 69
statistics 52
stop Vantage Access 70
synchronize device status 102
syntax conventions 4
system log 52
system requirements 53
Vantage Access client 53
Vantage Access server 53
T
template
common 119
device-specific 119
template management 119
add 122
change parameter values 123
create 123
edit 120, 121
load 125
summary 119
title bar 81
topology 82
create a group folder 83
delete a groupl 83
remove a group folder 84
rename a group folder 85
trademarks 581
troubleshooting 577
cannot display login screen 577
cannot display screens properly 578
cannot log in 577
cannot see my ZyXEL device in device window 578
cannot start Vantage Access 577
U
update device status 102
upgrade device firmware, See firmware upgrade 510
upgrade product license 540
upload a device firmware 508
upload configuration file 514
user name
default value 76
using device XML file 114
Vantage Access User’s Guide
V
Vantage Access
about 91
start 69
stop 70
version 91
Vantage Access BED
installation 56, 62
Vantage Access DB
installation 54, 59
Vantage Access HTTPD
installation 57, 65
Vantage Access server 51
vendor configuration file 513
version 91
view device logs 110
W
warranty 581
note 582
web configurator 75
about 91
access 75
default password 76
default user name 76
device list 86
device window 82
function window 90
icons 81
idle timeout 77
in typical application 51
lock-out 77
loginl 76
main screen 80
minimum requirements 75
starting 75
timeout 81
title bar 81
URL 76
Z
ZyXEL device setting 96, 115
619
Index
620
Vantage Access User’s Guide